Reducing emissions from Scotland’s tourism sector is a crucial part of reaching the Scottish Government’s target of net zero greenhouse gas (GHG) emissions by 2045.
Emissions from tourism cut across passenger transport, accommodation, food and drink, culture, retail and outdoor recreation, so reliable data is required. Current data, however, only reports over broad categories such as ‘transport’ or ‘buildings’ and does not isolate the contribution from visitor activity.
In this report, researchers explore how they can measure GHG emissions from Scotland’s tourism sector in a way that is credible, repeatable, and trackable over time. The primary aims of this research were:
- To identify a practical methodology for a reliable, national-level estimate of tourism-related GHG emissions.
- To examine the potential for separating results by factors such as geography, visitor or accommodation type to support place-based policy
- To ensure the chosen approach aligns with established GHG measurement practices and can be maintained through routine updates while balancing coverage, granularity, cost, and capacity.
Findings
- Scotland’s tourism sector has distinctive characteristics, including geography, rural tourism, transport emissions, seasonal workforce, and post-COVID behavioural changes.
- There is broad consensus on definitions of “tourism” across the literature, with studies organising indicators according to the United Nations World Tourism Organisation’s (UNWTO) Measuring the Sustainability of Tourism (MST) framework.
- Tourism Satellite Accounts (TSAs) – data sets providing economic analysis of a country’s tourism industry – are critical for defining the economic boundary of tourism, separating visitor-driven activity from resident activity, and enabling reporting.
- Four major methodology types for assessing GHG emissions in tourism are identified:
- Environmentally‑Extended Input-Output (EEIO) analysis is suitable for establishing a robust, repeatable national baseline.
- Life Cycle Assessments (LCA) provide detailed insights for operational decision-making.
- Hybrid models can combine the strengths of both approaches.
- Survey-based methods are useful for capturing regional behaviour and supplementing other models.
Recommendations
The report’s headline recommendation is to take a proportionate, staged pathway that matches effort to ambition. It suggests:
- Conducting a comprehensive audit of Scotland’s available data, including Input-Output tables, environmental accounts, and surveys such as the International Passenger Survey (IPS) and the Great Britain Tourism Survey (GBTS).
- Establishing an EEIO baseline as the analytical backbone, updated regularly using repeated survey data.
- Developing a Scotland-specific Tourism Satellite Account to enable greater precision, sector splits, and geographical disaggregation.
- Running LCA pilots for selected assets or services to provide operational insight and validate baseline assumptions.
Over time, these elements could be integrated into a hybrid framework under formal governance and quality assurance, reporting both production- and consumption-based perspectives. A staged, proportionate approach provides a clear, low-risk path to a credible baseline and repeatable evidence base, supporting policy and industry efforts to track and reduce tourism-related emissions.
Further recommendations
The report also outlines steps that should be taken in development of the methodlogy, regardless of the final methodology chosen:
- Adopt the IRTS definition of tourism and structure the GHG account within the UNWTO MST framework.
- Main active links with those that are further advanced, such as Denmark, to learn best practice.
- Build the methodology around a mix of data sources and keep data management central to project governance.
- The approach should be designed for regular repetition, and to secure the resources needed for scheduled updates.
For further information, please read the report.
If you require the report in an alternative format, such as a Word document, please contact info@climatexchange.org.uk or 0131 651 4783.
Community benefits are additional benefits offered by renewable energy developers to support communities. Examples include community benefit funds and in-kind benefits provided by developers such as investment in local infrastructure improvements or funding for education programmes. Community benefits currently operate on a voluntary basis in Scotland.
The Scottish Government has published Good Practice Principles for onshore and offshore energy in Scotland, which are currently under review. Within the context of that overarching review, the primary aims of this research were:
- To help identify any necessary adjustments to Scotland’s current voluntary community benefits approach for onshore and offshore to better support communities and industry as part of a just transition.
- To understand how different renewable energy technologies affect the provision of community benefits.
- To understand how mandating community benefits could work in practice for onshore renewable energy technologies.
The research incorporated an evidence review, qualitative interviews and the design and testing of a socio-economic analysis framework.
Findings
- No obvious adjustments need to be made to Scotland’s current community benefit approach.
- Financial aspects of a renewable energy project (costs, revenue and financial viability) are key factors impacting community benefit levels. Projects with higher amounts of revenue, and more robust and predictable financial returns are better positioned to offer significant community benefits.
- It is easier to offer community benefits for projects involving more established technologies like onshore wind, compared to newer technologies like hydrogen.
- The literature reviewed did not allow for a satisfactory comparative analysis of the in-practice impacts of mandatory versus voluntary approaches.
- Further development and more complete data is required to make a functional framework that could inform policy decisions on the appropriate levels of community benefit for different renewable energy technologies.
For further information, please read the report.
If you require the report in an alternative format, such as a Word document, please contact info@climatexchange.org.uk or 0131 651 4783.
Research completed: July 2025
DOI: http://dx.doi.org/10.7488/era/6396
Executive summary
Research background and aims
Community benefits are additional benefits offered by renewable energy developers to support communities. Examples include community benefit funds and in-kind benefits provided by developers such as investment in local infrastructure improvements or funding for education programmes. Community benefits currently operate on a voluntary basis in Scotland. The Scottish Government has published Good Practice Principles for onshore and offshore energy in Scotland, which are currently under review.
Within the context of that overarching review, the primary aims of this research were:
- To understand how different renewable energy technologies affect the provision of community benefits. This included developing and testing a socio-economic analysis framework to understand the factors that influence the nature and level of community benefits associated with different renewable energy technologies.
- To understand how mandating community benefits could work in practice for onshore renewable energy technologies.
- To help identify any necessary adjustments to Scotland’s current voluntary community benefits approach for onshore and offshore to better support communities and industry as part of a just transition.
The study methodology incorporated an evidence review, qualitative interviews, and the design and testing of a socio-economic analysis framework. This research focused on the factors influencing how different renewable energy technologies affect developers’ provision of community benefits, rather than on the experiences and perspectives of recipient communities. Interviews were therefore conducted with renewable energy developers.
The Scottish Government is gathering other non-industry perspectives on community benefits, including the views of community members, through a public consultation on the Good Practice Principles.
Understanding the ability of different technologies to offer community benefits
One of the ways this research explored how renewable energy technologies affected developers’ ability to offer community benefits was to develop and test a socio-economic analysis framework. This framework set out the parameters assumed to influence the level and nature of community benefits. An initial set of seven draft parameters were developed by the Scottish Government and the research team. Following an assessment of the feasibility of measurement and feedback from renewable energy developers, four parameters were recommended for further consideration (and which are subsequently referred to as “the framework”). These were:
- Technology maturity (i.e. more mature technologies, with well-established supply chains and business models, may better allow developers to build community benefit provision into their project plans compared to newer technologies).
- Market maturity (i.e. maturity may influence investor confidence, competition between developers, and certainty in supply chains which may in turn determine predictability of financial plans and therefore ability to deliver community benefits).
- Deployment and operating costs (i.e. the costs associated with developing and operating different renewable energy technologies may impact the financial capacity to provide community benefits).
- Revenue and profit (i.e. a project’s revenue and profit will impact on its overall financial viability which may impact on its ability to delivery community benefits).
This study identified significant challenges in developing a single framework to assess how different technologies affect developers’ provision of community benefit. For such a framework to work as a practical, decision-making tool, quantitative data on the economics of different renewable energy technology projects would be required. However, existing public data is sparse and of inadequate quality and many developers were unable or unwilling to share commercially sensitive data about their projects. A further limitation was that existing data (e.g. on the value of community benefits from individual renewable energy projects) is based on actual provision rather than an assessment of potential. Additionally, data available is largely historical and therefore challenging to use when anticipating new technologies and emerging economic and regulatory models.
However, it was clear from interviews with developers that the financial aspects of a renewable energy project (costs, revenue and financial viability) were key factors impacting community benefit levels. They noted that projects with higher amounts of revenue, and more robust and predictable financial returns are better positioned to offer significant community benefits. Conversely, if the financial viability of a development is low, then it is unlikely it can offer monetary community benefits without the project becoming non-viable. Developers noted that both technology maturity and market maturity can have an impact on a project’s financial viability and are therefore, indirectly, also linked to a project’s ability to deliver community benefits. However, this was based on qualitative interviews and was not possible to measure using quantitative data.
Developers also reported that it is easier to offer community benefits for projects involving more established technologies like onshore wind, compared to newer technologies, due to the latter’s comparatively lower profit margins. Less mature technologies (e.g., floating offshore wind, hydrogen) can have higher risks, higher delivery costs, less predictability in cost and performance, and lower investor confidence which can impact on their ability to offer benefits.
Although not necessarily directly impacting the level of benefit offered, developers identified community engagement as key factor for effective delivery. Developers emphasised the importance of levels of community engagement and capacity to effectively manage and deliver benefit funds. Interviewees highlighted the importance of community engagement, consultation and feedback in moulding community benefit initiatives, ensuring more meaningful and tailored contributions. This is difficult to quantify and would therefore be challenging to include in a socio-economic analysis framework.
How mandating community benefits could work in practice (for onshore renewable technologies)
The available literature does not enable a comparison of the real-world impacts of mandatory, as opposed to voluntary, provision of community benefits. Mandatory community benefits as part of renewable energy infrastructure development exist in Denmark and Ireland, specifically for wind projects. However, the literature reviewed does not allow for a satisfactory comparative analysis of the in-practice impacts of mandatory versus voluntary approaches.
Existing onshore developers felt that the following factors should be considered:
- clear guidance on what the financial expectation attached to mandating is to avoid any potential for confusion;
- allowing for the differences between individual onshore technologies to be taken into account;
- retaining a degree of flexibility, particularly in terms of allowing for community benefits to be designed around the needs of communities;
- avoiding overly burdensome processes. For example, in relation to restrictions on how communities should spend the money.
The power to mandate community benefits is reserved to the UK Government. In May 2025, the UK Government published a working paper seeking views on a mandatory community benefits scheme for low carbon energy and mechanisms for shared ownership of onshore renewables[1]. This includes the option to utilise existing powers to mandate offering shared ownership.
Any necessary adjustments to Scotland’s current voluntary community benefits approach for onshore and offshore
This research has not identified any obvious adjustments that need to be made to Scotland’s current community benefit approach.
The literature highlights that the Scottish Government is leading the way across the UK in highlighting the role of communities in the development of renewable projects. While there are examples in the literature of other approaches to community benefit provision outside of Scotland (e.g. in Ireland and Denmark), there is limited evidence directly comparing how different approaches have impacted the level of community benefits delivered. Therefore, there are no clear lessons from these international approaches suggesting a need to change the current approach in Scotland.
Guidance from the Scottish Government, in the form of Good Practice Principles and a recommended community benefit contribution of £5,000 per installed MW per year for onshore projects, was highlighted in interviews with developers as being a strength of the current process. They felt it provided a degree of predictability while also allowing for flexibility in application. However, for projects of emerging and/or non-generative technologies, developers noted that more targeted guidelines would be beneficial, noting that there is no established industry standard approach.
Conclusion and recommendations
The intention was that the framework examined in this study could inform policy decisions on the appropriate levels of community benefit for different renewable energy technologies. However, further development and more complete data is needed to be functional for this purpose. Collating the required data would need considerable resources and rely on information that developers perceive to be commercially sensitive. Considering data gaps, collection challenges, the difficulty in sourcing data specifically focused on future ability to offer benefits (rather than actual performance), further research and/or alternative approaches would be required. For these reasons, the approach explored here does not provide a robust enough evidence base to underpin a framework for use as a decision-making tool.
The report highlights existing measurement tools and guidance that can be used to understand where a project sits in relation to certain parameters, such as technology and market maturity. Further data collection work would be needed to make the most of these tools for robust socio-economic analysis. This would involve collecting relevant data for a large number of projects across metrics with established measurement tools. This would require a significant time and resource commitment and may not be a practical option.
To better understand how different renewable energy technologies affect developers’ provision of community benefits further research, beyond the financial indicators highlighted, would be needed. Considering the challenge of sourcing quantitative data on project economics, further qualitative research may be the most feasible option. Ideally this would be with a larger selection of developers across the full technology spectrum (including those that had not been able to deliver community benefits), direct engagement with communities, and wider stakeholder engagement (e.g. project investors, funders and other partners that have assisted in project development). This type of engagement would add to and build on the insights from developers gathered in this study.
Introduction
This report presents findings from research exploring opportunities for providing community benefits from renewable energy projects using different technologies in way that is fair and consistent. The research was carried out by Ipsos on behalf of ClimateXChange and the Scottish Government.
Background to the project
The Scottish Government has set ambitious targets for achieving net zero emissions by 2045, emphasising the importance of renewable energy technologies in this transition. The Climate Change Plan update (2020)[2] sets out Scotland’s ambition of a transformed energy system, which supports sustainable economic growth across all regions of Scotland.
Communities are at the heart of the energy transition in Scotland. Community benefits are additional benefits offered by renewable energy developers to support communities, offering them an opportunity to work with renewable energy businesses to secure long-term benefits. They provide an opportunity to share in the benefits of the energy resource and can have lasting social and economic impacts[3].
The Scottish Government published Good Practice Principles for the onshore[4] and offshore[5] energy sectors to outline how they can achieve a positive legacy for local communities. The approach and nature of community benefits operates on a voluntary basis in Scotland, with the guidelines allowing for flexibility in benefits arrangements offered by industry. Decisions on mandating community benefits are reserved to the UK Government. In May 2025, the UK Government published a Working Paper on community benefits and shared ownership for low carbon energy infrastructure, seeking views on whether mandating is the right approach and if so, to inform the design of future policy proposals.
Good Practice Principles have been widely adopted, but the approach to community benefits has not been wholly consistent across developments. In recognition of this, and of the rapidly changing sectoral and policy landscape, the Scottish Government is undertaking a review of the Good Practice Principles to ensure that guidance continues to help communities and developers get the best from community benefits.
This research sits within that overarching review. It was designed to help the Scottish Government understand more about different approaches to providing community benefits and to explore the opportunities for providing community benefits in future in a way that is fair and consistent for industry and communities. The findings from this research will help to inform a refresh of the Good Practice Principles.
Aims and objectives
The primary aims of this research were:
- To understand how different renewable energy technologies affect developers’ provision of community benefits. This included developing and testing a socio-economic analysis framework to understand the factors that influence the nature and level of community benefits associated with different renewable energy technologies.
- To understand how mandating community benefits could work in practice for onshore renewable energy technologies.
- To help identify any necessary adjustments to the Scottish Government’s current voluntary community benefits approach for onshore and offshore to better support communities and industry as part of a just transition.
The findings aimed to support policy development and further refinement of guidelines and frameworks to help ensure that community benefits are effectively and fairly integrated into Scotland’s net zero energy system and strategy.
Methodology
The research involved a mix of desk research, qualitative interviews with developers and data analysis, as outlined below (detailed methodology is in Appendix A):
- A desk-based evidence review that explored examples of community benefits from onshore and offshore renewable energy technologies in the UK and other countries. Literature sources reviewed included 12 peer reviewed academic papers, 20 reports, 2 guidance documents from grey literature (e.g., renewable energy developers, private consultancies) and 1 policy document. These were all published between 2011 and 2024, with 22 documents from the last 5 years.
- Initial scoping interviews with four industry representative bodies to understand their views on current community benefit approaches and to explore options for sourcing data that could support socio-economic analysis on community benefits.
- Design of a socio-economic analysis framework to help understand the factors which are likely to affect the level and nature of community benefits.
- In-depth interviews with 21 industry developers from a range of renewable energy technologies (see Appendix A). As the focus was on how different renewable energy technologies affect provision of community benefits, qualitative research with developers was carried out to help understand the views of those with direct experience of working with projects and benefits. Interviews helped to understand industry perceptions towards community benefits arrangements, collect feedback on the proposed analytical framework, and to understand availability of relevant data for socio-economic analysis.
- Assessment of the suitability of a framework to act as a tool for the Scottish Government to understand what type and level of community benefit may be suitable for different renewable energy technologies, based on data availability and feedback from interviews.
Definitions
Community benefits are defined in this research in line with the Scottish Government’s Good Practice Principles:
Community benefits are additional benefits, that are currently voluntary, which developers provide to the community. The Scottish Government does not currently have the power to legislate for community benefits, which lies with the UK Government. A community benefit fund is considered to be a fundamental component of a community benefit package, though other measures may be considered such as in-kind works, direct funding of projects, or any other voluntary site-specific benefits. Community benefits are not compensation for impacts on communities or other interests, including commercial interests, arising from renewable installations and they are not taken into account in a decision over whether a consent for a development is granted.
Community benefit in Scotland is distinct from shared ownership. Shared ownership provides community groups or members of a community the opportunity to make an investment in a commercially owned renewable energy project. This includes any structure which involves a community group as a financial partner benefitting over the lifetime of a renewable energy project. As shared ownership is not considered a form of community benefit in Scotland, it has not been included within this research.
In this report renewable energy technologies have been interpreted as the range of technologies outlined in the Scottish Government’s draft Energy Strategy and Just Transition Plan[6]. This includes onshore wind, offshore wind (both floating and fixed), solar, hydro, pumped hydro storage, battery energy storage system (BESS), hydrogen, and carbon capture, utilisation and storage (CCUS).
Limitations
This study was limited by data availability. Existing public data (for example on community benefit values, project costs and revenue) is sparse and of inadequate quality to effectively measure the parameters within a socio-economic analysis framework. Many developers were unable or unwilling to share commercially sensitive data about their projects. A further limitation was that existing data (e.g. on the value of community benefits from individual renewable energy projects) is based on actual provision rather than an assessment of project’s potential capability. Additionally, existing data are largely historical and therefore challenging to use when anticipating new technologies and emerging economic and regulatory models. Consequently, data gaps mean it was not possible to develop a fully functioning socio-economic analysis framework as part of this study.
A further limitation is that this research draws on the views of a relatively small sample of developers. These represent one group of perspectives on community benefits, albeit from different organisations, working with different technologies. Non-industry perspectives, including those of community members themselves, were not included in the remit of this study and would not be expected to fill the data gaps highlighted above.
Current community benefit arrangements
This chapter details the current arrangements for delivering community benefits, based on findings from the literature and from the qualitative interviews with renewable energy technology developers. At various points, examples of community benefit projects identified in the literature are shown to help illustrate the findings.
Key findings
- The literature highlights that the Scottish Government is leading the way across the UK in highlighting the role of communities in the development of renewable projects and in providing good practice guidelines.
- Community benefits from renewable energy projects in the UK mainly involve community benefit funds[7], but there are also examples of in-kind benefits such as investment in education and infrastructure programmes. Community benefit funds are not as extensively adopted outside of the UK.
- Onshore wind has more established community benefit practices than other onshore and offshore technologies. However, a key similarity is that all projects, regardless of technology, tended to adopt both community benefits funds and in-kind contributions.
- There is limited evidence directly comparing how different approaches in the UK and in other countries have impacted the level of community benefits delivered.
Guidelines for community benefits
According to the reviewed literature, the Scottish Government is leading the way across the UK in highlighting the role of communities in the development of renewable projects. The Good Practice Principles for Community Benefits from Onshore Renewable Energy Developments (updated in 2019) and the draft Good Practice Principles for Community Benefits from Offshore Renewable Energy Developments (2018) outline how the energy sector can achieve a positive, lasting legacy for local communities, and a range of successful community benefit projects have been implemented to date.[8] These guidelines have been widely adopted across the renewables industry, providing best practice for the sector.[9]
The voluntary guidelines suggest practices like conducting impact studies to identify affected communities, engaging in consultations, and tailoring benefits to local context and needs. These principles aim to ensure benefits are well-targeted and meet community expectations, which could be seen as markers of a well-designed scheme.[10]
Example 1.
Beatrice Offshore Windfarm’s Community Benefits Fund used the Scottish Government’s Good Practice Principles to guide the development of the fund. The Beatrice Community Benefits Fund also undertook innovative analysis of the potential wider impacts of the community benefits funding, using a Social Return on Investment methodology.[11] This illustrates the ability of the Good Practice Principles to be applied alongside other models and approaches.
In Scotland, the Scottish Government also established the Community Benefits Register,[12] managed by Local Energy Scotland. It can be viewed online and offers a form of third-party reporting and public recognition.[13] Best practice guidance also exists in England, Ireland, the Netherlands and Germany (see Table 2 in Appendix B).
Approaches used in the UK and elsewhere
The literature provided examples of different approaches to designing and implementing community benefits schemes. However, most examples are from onshore wind farms, with some examples given from offshore wind technologies. There is very little to no reference to other renewable technologies such as hydrogen, hydro, solar, wave, thermal, or BESS.
Community benefit mechanisms referred to in the literature included[14]:
- Financial contributions to a community benefit fund, to be used as directed by the community to invest in local initiatives[15];
- In-kind contributions to local infrastructure, facilities, or services[16];
- Grants, scholarships, or donations to support community initiatives[17];
- Electricity discounts or subsidies for local residents[18];
- Provision of environmental or recreational amenities.[19]
While these approaches share many similarities, there are some notable differences and ambiguities. These include varying interpretations of what constitutes the “local community” (especially for offshore projects)[20] and differing emphasis on the rationale for providing benefits (e.g., impact mitigation).
This section describes the different approaches to community benefits in more detail. Differences between the UK and other countries are noted, where available.
Community benefit funds
Community benefits from renewable energy projects in the UK are primarily delivered through community benefit funds. The UK onshore wind industry, in particular, has well established approaches for this.[21] Through this mechanism, developers voluntarily contribute a certain amount of funding to local communities. In some cases, the level of funding is linked to the amount of installed capacity of the project or the amount of energy produced. For example, in Scotland, it is the industry norm for onshore wind projects to typically deliver £5,000 per megawatt (MW) of installed capacity per year in alignment with the Good Practice Principles for Onshore Renewable Energy Developments.[22] However, the per MW model is not the only approach used and the total amount provided is based on the agreement between the developers and the community.
Example 2.
Crossdykes Wind Farm near Lockerbie, Scotland (developed by Muirhall Energy) offered an industry-leading £7,000 per MW per year for a community benefit fund, well above the industry standard of £5,000 per MW per year. The project provided an Initial Investment Fund of £100,000 to support community projects during the wind farm’s construction phase, showing a proactive effort to deliver early benefits.
Example 3.
Brechfa Forest West Wind Farm in Wales (owned by RWE Renewables), is an example of a community-administered community benefit fund which is expected to provide £11 million in community benefit funding, administered by the local enterprise agency and a volunteer panel of residents.[23]
Regarding offshore wind, the concept of community benefits in the UK is relatively newer and more flexible than for onshore, reflecting the evolving nature of the industry.[24] Some, predominantly near-shore English and Welsh wind farms (e.g. North Hoyle and Rhyll Flats off the North Wales coast) have followed the pattern of the onshore wind farms, with benefits pro rata to MW size, although at a much lower rate.[25] However, in many cases, and for some of the large North Sea distant offshore wind farms, the benefits packages have been more ad hoc and much smaller (pro rata) than for onshore projects.[26] Several challenges have been identified with providing community benefits funds for offshore wind projects, including defining the relevant community to be targeted.[27]
Example 4.
The Hornsea/Race Bank East Coast Community Fund, off the Norfolk coast, is managed independently by a specialist grant-making charity, GrantScape, on behalf of the developer Orsted. This enables an arms-length, transparent allocation process.[28]
According to a number of the literature sources, allocation and spending of community benefit funds are usually determined by developers, in collaboration with the local communities, often through local trusts or organisations. Developers often strive to tailor the benefits based on local priorities identified through community engagement.[29] Community benefit funds can take different forms, ranging from local funds – investments in communities nearest to developments to enhance services, assets and activities of residents – to regional funds – investment in transformational projects to provide socio-economic growth for wider communities.[30]
The evidence reviewed suggests that community benefit funds are not as extensively adopted outside of the UK. There are some instances of community benefit funds in Europe. Notably, in Denmark, from 2008-2018, the state-run “Green Scheme” mandated payments per kilowatt per hour of production to host communities. As of 2020, Danish developers must pay fixed amounts per MW installed into green funds for affected municipalities under the “Green Pool” scheme and make annual payments to neighbouring residents under the “VE-Bonus” scheme, with amounts determined by the Danish Energy Agency.[31] In Ireland, renewable energy auctions require developers to contribute €2 per MW hour to a community benefit fund, with defined spending allocations.[32]
Among the developers interviewed for this research, flexible community benefit funds were the most common approach being taken to community benefits in Scotland. The exact sum delivered through these funds varies project-by-project. Onshore wind developers said that they follow, and often exceed, the Good Practice Principles guidelines of £5,000 per MW per year. For other technologies, which developers said often have greater financial uncertainty and/or smaller margins than onshore wind, the levels of community benefit are less predictable. Developers said that the level of benefit is often closely linked to the project’s costs and financial returns, which varies.
“We typically work backwards from what we think the returns in the scheme are going to look like. And that’s very site specific, dependent on abnormal costs, grid costs, land rights costs…Depending on what that looks like, we’ll then generate a number to determine what we can reasonably offer local communities.” – BESS developer
In a number of cases, these funds are administered by Foundation Scotland, a charitable organisation that helps to support communities to set up, manage and distribute their funding. This has particularly been the case where local communities may lack the capacity to manage significant financial resources independently. Some projects also have established their own governance arrangements, involving boards constituted of local community members to determine the allocation of these funds.
Other community benefit mechanisms
Other examples of community benefits mechanisms that appeared in the literature include tax revenues or fiscal contributions from wind farm developers, which go directly into funding local infrastructure and community services. From the documents reviewed, this is common practice in Germany, Poland, Croatia, France and Italy. [33]
Example 5.
The Block Island offshore wind farm development in Rhode Island, USA, is an example of fiscal contributions being made to support local infrastructure. In this case, a formal Community Benefit Agreement was developed in which the wind farm company pays for improvements to town infrastructure where the cable comes ashore. This project was also highlighted in the literature as an example of community engagement resulting in locally appropriate community benefits and high levels of support for the development from the local community. As part of the public consultation on the project proposals, the developer, Deepwater Wind, collaborated with the town council to invite stakeholders and hired consultants from the local community to represent local interests. This helped establish trust and perceptions of fairness in the process.[34]
The literature also identified Australian examples of neighbourhood benefit programmes.[35] These programmes aim to address concerns around fairness that can arise when local residents receive no direct benefits from a renewable energy project which affects their experience of their place and community.[36] Examples of the types of benefits provided via these neighbourhood benefit programmes include support towards home energy efficiency measures, the installation of residential solar PV, and contributions to electricity bills for neighbours or neighbourhood community facilities (e.g. local hall, local fire-fighting facilities).
The reviewed literature suggests that the involvement of local authorities in the delivery of community benefits varies by country. In some European countries (including Denmark, Germany, France, Italy and Spain), the local municipality plays a significant role and often decides funding priorities of community benefits. In the UK and Ireland, local authorities generally decline involvement to avoid conflicts of interest in the planning process. However, Highland Council recently set out plans for a different approach to community benefit decision making and fund distribution and Shetland Council approved a new set of principles around community benefit.
Developers interviewed also described the types of in-kind benefits they offer communities. Examples included:
- Employment and education programmes. This includes providing funding towards training in green technologies, especially in areas that are reliant on traditional energy industries rather than renewable energy.
- Electricity discount schemes, with money coming off local residents’ bills.
- Investment in environmental and net zero initiatives, including activities designed to reduce carbon footprint and support biodiversity in communities, along with awareness-raising around these issues.
- Infrastructure improvements such as broadband access, roads and pathways, and community recreational facilities.
Impact of different approaches on the level of community benefits delivered
Based on the literature reviewed, there is limited evidence directly comparing how the different approaches in the UK and in other countries have impacted the level of community benefits delivered.
Among the documents reviewed, the only source that explicitly offers comparative analysis between approaches in the UK and European countries was the Department of Trade and Industry report conducted by the Centre for Sustainable Energy, which involved detailed case studies of major wind farms in the UK, Germany, Denmark, Ireland and Spain. The following points are drawn exclusively from this report:
- The overall levels of benefits accruing to communities from wind projects in Denmark, Spain and Germany tend to be higher than in the UK. However, it is important to note that in such countries, community benefits are mostly associated with shared ownership practices, and therefore economic and financial benefits are linked to those practices. Shared ownership is not included in the Scottish Government definition of community benefits and it is also worth noting that developments outside of the UK will have different policy contexts and market conditions to those in the UK, making it difficult to directly compare.
- While the authors do not find robust evidence that higher benefits directly lead to higher levels of support for developments, they suggest that they are likely an important factor in sustaining long-term acceptance of projects.
Lessons from community benefits projects
Common themes emerged from the literature and interviews around what constitutes good practice in community benefit:
- Early community engagement. Establishing trust, building relationships with local residents and identifying concerns and priorities early on can lead to smoother running of the project and help dispel fears of community members early on. [37]
- Ensuring community representation in the co-design and administration of community benefits[38] as this can help establish trust and lead to higher levels of sustained support for the project.[39]
- Providing broad and flexible community benefit. Literature and interviews highlighted the value of funds being used to support a wide range of community priorities like infrastructure, schools, housing, elderly care, environment, etc. that improve quality of life for residents. [40]
- Community capacity was noted by developers as a factor that can impact on their ability to deliver community benefits. Not all communities were seen to have the resources or expertise needed to administer funds efficiently. They noted that the existence of strong community councils or Community Development Officers to help generate ideas have helped contribute to successful community benefit funds.
- Ensuring transparency of communication and providing full information to communities through trusted messengers is seen in the literature as a crucial step in securing support from communities.[41]
- The reviewed literature also suggests that formalising benefit commitments and monitoring progress can promote accountability and sustainability over the long-term. It helps ensure developers deliver on promises made to communities.[42]
- There is also evidence that partnering and aligning with local government, NGOs and other companies allows projects to leverage additional resources and maximise the scale and impact of their community investments.[43]
Understanding how different renewable energy technologies affect the ability to offer community benefits
One of the ways this research explored how renewable energy technologies affect the level of community benefits offered by developers was to develop and test a socio-economic analysis framework. This framework set out the parameters assumed to influence the level and nature of community benefits provided. This chapter outlines the steps taken to develop and test a framework and the extent to which this tool could help to understand how different renewable energy technologies affect the level community benefits provided by developers.
Key findings
- Within the scope of this study, the available evidence did not support a single framework to robustly determine how different technologies affect the provision of community benefits. For such a framework to work as a practical, decision-making tool, quantitative data on the economics of different renewable energy technology projects would be required. However, existing public data is insufficient to effectively measure the parameters in the framework, and it was not possible within this study to gather the level of quantitative data that would be needed for robust socio-economic analysis.
- However, it was clear from the interviews with developers that the financial aspects of a renewable energy project (costs, revenue and financial viability) were key factors impacting community benefit levels.
- Developers’ feedback also highlighted that it is easier to offer community benefits for projects involving more established technologies like onshore wind, compared to other technologies (e.g. offshore wind, solar and battery storage) due to the latter’s comparatively low profit margins.
Original framework parameters
The initial parameters identified at the scoping phase of the project are outlined in Table 1. The following section sets out the feedback received from developers in response to this framework, and the extent to which these parameters are measurable within a framework.
Table 1 Initial list of identified parameters affecting provision of community benefits
|
Parameter |
Justification for inclusion |
|
Technology maturity |
More mature technologies like onshore wind and solar PV have well-established supply chains and business models, allowing for community benefit provision to be built in to project plans. The more mature technologies are also more reliable in terms of return on investment (ROI), than less mature technologies. Emerging technologies have less predictability in costs and revenues, affecting community benefit schemes and their provision. |
|
Market maturity |
The level of market maturity can determine the provision of community benefits by influencing investor confidence, increased competition between developers, robust supply chains and solidified regulatory frameworks. These all determine predictable project economics and financial plans, increasing the likelihood and scale of community benefits being provided. |
|
Project size/energy yield |
The energy yield of a project is a critical factor that can influence the revenue and, consequently, the level of community benefits provided. Smaller projects may have small absolute margins and so may be less able to provide the same level of community benefits as larger projects. |
|
Deployment and operating costs |
The costs associated with developing and operating different renewable energy technologies can impact the financial capacity to provide community benefits. If one technology has higher upfront costs or operating expenses, this might reduce the scope of benefits a developer can offer, as well as the timing of delivering these benefits. |
|
Revenue and profit |
The amount of revenue generated by a project, or the profits it generates, could also have an impact on a project’s ability to deliver community benefit and on the level and nature of community benefits that can be delivered. |
|
Land use, visual, environmental and social impacts |
Wind farms, especially onshore ones, can have a significant visual impact and may occupy large areas of land which can influence the local community’s perception, and the level of benefits expected. This may differ for offshore wind. It may also influence the type of community benefit provided (environmental, social, economic). In contrast, solar PV installations typically are less sensitive to visual impacts than wind turbines but could be associated with higher land use impacts. |
|
Wider economic impact of the project and its distribution |
The economic returns from projects may also influence the level of benefits provided through community benefit schemes. Projects which require a large workforce for ongoing maintenance and operation will provide economic benefits to the local area through jobs and investment which is multiplied through other sectors and amenities required by residents. It can be theorised that a developer’s contribution to the wider economy may reduce their overall willingness to community benefit commitments, though it is unlikely that this contribution would affect their ability to provide monetary commitments. |
Community benefit value
There is a lack of data on the level of community benefits offered by renewable energy projects. The Local Energy Scotland Community Benefits Register is currently the most comprehensive data source for capturing the community benefits monetary measures. However, this is not exhaustive and does not cover the full range of renewable energy technologies.
Further steps were therefore taken to identify additional and more up-to-date data for this research. Firstly, data was requested from developers taking part in interviews, but not all were willing or able to share this (either because they could not access the data, or due to commercial sensitivities). Secondly, online searching for publicly available information on monetary values of community benefits was carried out. While data for some projects is available publicly, this requires a significant time commitment to source since it is not held in a central source nor in a consistent format. Therefore, data gaps remained after taking these steps. For the framework to be robust, a more complete set of data on community benefit value is required.
Technology maturity
Technological maturity is a widely used metric for gauging a technology’s development and readiness for deployment.
Developers generally felt that this could have an impact on the viability of a project, and as a result affect the level of community benefits. Some agreed that, compared to mature technologies (e.g., onshore wind), technologies such as floating offshore wind, BESS and hydrogen can have higher risks, higher delivery costs, less predictability in cost and performance and lower investor confidence. However, some onshore wind developers argued that more mature technologies do not always have more secure financial models because recent cost increases in their supply chains have made viability harder to predict.
Technology maturity is suitable for quantitative measurement using the NASA Technology Readiness Level (TRL) scale (see Appendix E for details). To accurately assess a technology’s TRL, it is recommended that individual projects are approached directly for scoring, as they may employ different versions of the technology. If direct assessment is not possible, it would be possible to utilise the International Energy Agency’s ETP Clean Energy Technology Guide, which evaluates and provides comprehensive information on each technology’s current development stage across the energy system.
This parameter could be included in a socio-economic analysis framework, provided there was sufficient data available or one of the existing guides outlined above could be used.
Market maturity
Factors influencing market maturity include established supply chains, business models and supporting physical and regulatory infrastructure (ports for deployment of offshore wind, standards for solar farms, etc.).
Developers felt that emerging technologies and immature markets face difficulties determining an appropriate level of community benefits because of uncertainty around securing investment and finances. However, some onshore wind developers also noted that their more mature market can still experience challenges with supply chains, especially in relation to costs of deployment (e.g. turbine costs have increased).
Market maturity could be measured using existing tools. The Adoption Readiness Level (ARL) framework, developed by the U.S. Department of Energy, is a tool for assessing the commercialisation risks of new technologies. It helps identify potential roadblocks to market adoption, such as cost-competitiveness, regulatory landscape, public perception and infrastructure availability. It also helps evaluate market demand by identifying the target market, understanding customer needs, and assessing the competitive landscape.
The ideal approach to understanding this parameter would involve project-level assessments via direct engagement with project owners, using the scoring framework available online[44]. However, given the large number of projects, this endeavour would be challenging. The decision to pursue this should weigh the uncertainties about the parameter’s significance in determining community benefits, with the time commitment needed to collect this information.
This parameter would be suitable to include in a socio-economic analysis framework, but the ability to source the level of data required is challenging.
Project size or energy yield
This measure is quantifiable, based on the level of energy capacity installed for each project expressed in MW. This data is available on the Local Energy Scotland’s Community Benefit Register and the Renewable Energy Planning Database (REPD). To enable a comparison between different technologies, it is important to convert installed capacity to expected energy yield as each technology has different levels of efficiency.
Capacity and energy yield are both inputs in the estimation of gross revenue. Therefore, inclusion of these metrics as stand-alone parameters in the framework would be duplicative and would correlate very highly with any revenue estimations. For this reason, these metrics would not need to act as stand-alone parameters in an analysis framework but could be used as inputs to the revenue estimation.
Deployment and operating costs
The total costs of developing and operating a renewable energy project captures an important financial aspect assumed to influence the level of community benefit commitment.
Developers noted that the developmental and operating costs impact the financial capacity for a project to provide community benefit. As with revenue, obtaining precise cost figures would involve direct input from project owners. Again, due to commercial sensitivities and challenges in accessing this data, estimating total cost of production might need to rely on publicly available sources. This can be done for a selection of technologies using the Department for Energy Security and Net Zero’s Levelised Cost of Electricity (LCOE) estimates.[45] It is worth noting that not all REPD project technologies are included in this resource, and hence, some projects will require mapping to the closest matching technology category. Despite this challenge, a basic methodology for estimating LCOE from generation technologies is outlined in Appendix D.
When looking at non-generation projects, i.e. storage projects, it is important to reflect the differences to generation projects in the calculation of costs. An analogous version of the LCOE is the Levelised Cost of Storage (LCOS), which uses charging cost as fuel cost and uses the discharged electricity instead of generated electricity. Given the lack of access to the necessary data it is not possible to accurately estimate LCOS for storage projects.
Given that project costs provide a direct link to the financial aspects that are assumed to influence community benefits, it is recommended to include this parameter in a socio-economic analysis framework.
Revenue and profit
Developers agreed that the amount of revenue generated by a project has an impact on their ability to deliver community benefits and the level of community benefits that can be offered.
Ideally, obtaining precise revenue figures would involve direct input from project owners. However, due to commercial sensitivities and challenges in accessing data, estimating revenue might need to rely on publicly available sources. It is important to note that this approach is based on significant assumptions that might not hold true over time. Estimating future revenues is particularly challenging because it depends on projected electricity prices, which are notoriously difficult to predict with accuracy or extend into the future. Despite these challenges, a basic methodology for estimating revenues from generation technologies is outlined in Appendix D.
When it comes to non-generation projects, revenue estimation becomes even more complex and uncertain. These types of projects may involve diverse sources of income and variables, requiring a more nuanced approach to estimation. Battery storage projects generate revenue through a variety of mechanisms, often stacked together to maximise returns. Key revenue streams include arbitrage (buying electricity when prices are low and selling it back to the grid when prices are high), grid services (e.g. frequency regulation, voltage support), capacity market participation and ancillary services (e.g. black start capability). The lack of publicly available data for each of these revenue streams make it challenging to estimate revenue for non-generation projects.
Given that revenue estimation provides a direct link to the financial aspects that are assumed to influence community benefits, it is recommended that consideration is given to including this parameter in a socio-economic analysis framework.
Land use, visual and environmental impacts
There are several challenges associated with quantitatively measuring land use, visual, environmental and social impacts:
- Quantifying land use involves assessing the physical footprint of a project, which can vary significantly based on the type and scale of the renewable technology employed. Further challenges arise in comparing land use impacts across different technologies, such as wind farms versus solar arrays, as each may occupy land differently (e.g., spacing between wind turbines versus solar panel coverage). These differences between technologies were also noted by developers.
- Visual impact assessments are inherently subjective and can vary depending on individual perspectives and local landscape characteristics. Moreover, accurately quantifying visual impacts requires sophisticated modelling tools and surveys that consider factors like visibility range, landscape context, and viewer sensitivity.
- Comprehensive environmental impacts involve a multitude of factors, including potential effects on local wildlife, ecosystems, water resources, and biodiversity. Data collection for environmental impacts may be inconsistent and require long-term monitoring to capture seasonal or cumulative effects accurately.
- Social impacts can include effects on local communities, employment opportunities, and cultural shifts, which are difficult to measure quantitatively and may require qualitative research approaches. In addition, assessing social impacts often involves engaging with communities and stakeholders, which can introduce variability and complexity in data collection and interpretation.
- Each of these aspects often interacts with others, making it challenging to isolate and assess impacts individually without considering cumulative or synergistic effects. Variability in methodologies and data availability can also lead to inconsistent measurements and comparisons.
For these reasons, this parameter is not suitable for a socio-economic analysis framework.
Wider economic impact of the project and its distribution
Renewable energy projects, especially large-scale ones, often generate significant economic benefits. For example, they may create high-value jobs through operation and maintenance, enhance the local supply chain and attract inward investments. These contributions can lead to substantial regional development and improved economic resilience.
However, there are notable challenges in confining these benefits strictly to the local communities most directly impacted by the projects. Economic effects often extend beyond the immediate vicinity. Moreover, quantifying these impacts presents difficulties, often necessitating self-reported data from projects. Such data can be subject to bias and may not fully capture the comprehensive economic changes occurring in the region. These challenges were reflected in interviews with developers. They noted that projects can add a lot of value to an area through high-value jobs, contribution to the supply chain and driving inward investment. However, they noted that it would be difficult to define this parameter, since the economic impacts may not be contained to the specific community in question. Projects can also incur wider costs, such as seabed option fees and rental fees for offshore wind renewable energy developments and these funds can have a wider economic impact.
Additionally, this metric’s applicability varies with different project types. For instance, projects involving CCUS often repurpose existing infrastructure, without necessitating a new workforce. As a result, the direct local economic impacts of such projects might be limited, underscoring the need for careful consideration when using this metric to assess community benefit commitments.
Wider economic impact provides a valuable lens for understanding potential benefits. However, the challenges and variability associated with measuring and applying this parameter across project types should be carefully evaluated to ensure fair, accurate and consistent community benefit determinations. For these reasons, this parameter is not suitable for a socio-economic analysis framework.
Community involvement and capacity
During interviews, developers suggested that community involvement and capacity influence the ability to provide community benefits and should be considered as part of a framework. This parameter focuses on the role of communities in both shaping and managing the benefits derived from renewable energy projects. Interviewees highlighted that placing community needs at the core is essential for ensuring that the type and level of benefits align with local priorities. They emphasised the importance of community engagement, consultation, and feedback in moulding these initiatives, arguing that this involvement leads to more meaningful and tailored contributions.
Additionally, while not directly impacting a developer’s ability to offer community benefit, the capacity of communities to effectively manage and deliver agreed benefits was seen as important. Interviewees pointed out that variations in the size and organisation of community councils or other community groups can significantly impact their ability to administer benefits. Hence, recognising these differences allows developers to support and enhance the local capacity, fostering increased participation and benefit realisation from the projects.
However, there are several challenges to quantitatively measuring these aspects. Quantifying community engagement and feedback is subjective, as perceptions of effective engagement vary among stakeholders. Communities often have diverse and evolving needs, making standardisation difficult. Additionally, while the number of consultations can be counted, assessing their quality requires qualitative data, which is harder to quantify. Asking the community to accurately capture and record this data would put significant burden on individuals who quite often are volunteers in the community. Moreover, community needs can change over time, necessitating ongoing updates and flexible metrics.
Due to these challenges, it is not recommended to include this parameter as a stand-alone element in a socio-economic analysis framework.
Conclusion
Following the assessment outlined above, four parameters were deemed suitable to be considered in a socio-economic analysis framework. These were:
- Technology maturity
- Market maturity
- Deployment and operating costs
- Revenue and profit.
To demonstrate how a framework could be used in future, socio-economic analysis has been carried out based on a sample of data on renewable energy projects (see Appendix C). The parameters in scope of this analysis are restricted to those which have been deemed feasible to measure and for which a suitable method to measure them has been identified. This analysis is based on data available from the Community Benefits Register Database, supplemented with additional data sourced through desk research. Due to the data sources available, it only includes onshore wind, offshore wind and hydro technologies.
Key findings from that analysis are:
- Industry alignment and policy influence: While many onshore wind and hydro projects in Scotland are clustering around the recommended annual £5,000 per MW capacity for community benefits for onshore technologies, more than half of the onshore wind and hydro projects analysed in the available data set commit less than the recommended amount.
- Revenue-benefit correlation: A positive correlation exists between gross project revenue and total community benefit commitments, with larger projects providing bigger packages. However, this relationship weakens for high-revenue projects, suggesting a potential plateau effect.
- Costs and benefit packages: There is a positive correlation between total cost of production and total community benefit packages across all project sizes, suggesting that as total costs increase, so does the size of the overall commitment to community benefits. While this may appear contrary to the views of developers shown earlier (i.e. those who said that high costs can impact on financial viability and therefore their ability to offer community benefits) it should be noted that this data analysis is based only on projects already providing monetary benefits. It excludes those that had not yet provided any community benefits. It can therefore be assumed that the dataset excludes those projects that were deemed not financially viable enough to enable community benefit provision.
In interpreting these findings and considering next steps it is important to acknowledge the distinction between the willingness of projects (measured by actual provision) to provide community benefits and their ability to provide community benefits. The analysis above is based on actual provision of community benefits. It could be assumed that these commitments are indicative of both willingness and some inferred level of ability, but the data does not allow for an assessment of the capability of projects (and different technologies) to offer these benefits. The UK Government’s Contracts for Difference (CfD) scheme is the main support mechanism for renewable energy projects. It is important to acknowledge that although community benefit funds are not recognised costs in the CfD framework, they are often treated as part of a project’s overall cost base and priced in to CfD bids.
Robust analysis of the capability to provide community benefits would require detailed project-level data. To collate the data needed will require considerable resources and will also require renewable energy technology developers to share data they perceive as commercially sensitive, which may be unrealistic. This work has highlighted considerable data gaps, challenges collecting data in the future and difficulty in sourcing data specifically focused on future ability to offer community benefits rather than actual performance. Therefore, the approach explored here does not provide a robust enough evidence base to underpin a framework for use as a decision-making tool.
To better understand the capacity for projects to provide community benefits, it is suggested that further research and / or alternative approaches may be needed. This could take the form of qualitative research with a larger selection of projects across the full technology spectrum, to understand perceived barriers or enablers of moving from willingness to ability. This should offer insights into the practical challenges faced by projects. Longitudinal case studies may prove beneficial to understand how changes in policy, economic conditions or market incentives could have influenced both the willingness and perceived capacity to make these commitments.
Exploring mandatory community benefit arrangements
This chapter looks at current approaches to mandating found in the evidence review and the views of the industry on how mandating community benefits for onshore technologies could work in practice, based on qualitative research with developers.
Key findings
- Mandatory community benefits approaches exist in Denmark and Ireland, as part of renewable energy infrastructure development for wind projects. However, the literature reviewed does not allow for a satisfactory comparative analysis of the in-practice impacts of mandatory versus voluntary approaches.
- Existing onshore developers felt that the following factors would need to be considered for mandating to work in practice:
- clear guidance on the financial expectation attached to mandating
- accounting for differences between individual onshore technologies
- retaining a degree of flexibility, particularly in terms of the ability for community benefits to be designed around the needs of communities
- avoiding overly burdensome processes.
Current approaches to mandating community benefits
Mandatory community benefits as part of net zero energy infrastructure development exist in Denmark and Ireland, specifically for onshore and offshore wind projects. Other countries have mandated approaches for shared ownership, special taxes, energy subsidies, or monetary compensations, but not community benefits as defined here. This includes Germany, France, Taiwan, and the Philippines [46].
Denmark has a history of various mandates relating to community benefits. For example, until 2018, the “Green Scheme” required the Danish state to pay hosting communities a fixed amount per kWh of production from new turbines. This applied to offshore wind farms built outside the tender process and within 8km of shore.[47] More recently, as of June 2020, regulations require offshore wind developers to pay fixed amounts per MW installed into green funds for affected municipalities. The payment is DKK 115,000 per MW (around €15,500).[48] Additionally, in Ireland, renewable energy auctions mandate that developers contribute €2/MWh to a community benefit fund, with defined criteria for how the funds must be spent.[49]
Other mandated approaches similar to community benefits include special taxes imposed on developers, that are distributed to local authorities, and electricity subsidies for “host communities”. The former approach has been implemented in France and Germany. The French Maritime Wind Turbine Tax is imposed on offshore wind farms, and is allocated to local authorities to finance local projects, per a defined formula. Germany requires that tax revenue generated from offshore wind farms in the Exclusive Economic Zone is distributed to coastal states. Energy subsidies for host communities have been implemented in the Philippines and Taiwan. Since 2008, the Philippines has required that 80% of money generated from royalties, or government shares in renewable projects, must be used to subsidise the electricity costs of communities affected by these projects.[50] In Taiwan, the Electricity Assistance Fund (EAF) is distributed to communities affected by power plant projects (including, but not limited to renewable energy) according to a pre-defined formula. For example, in the case of offshore wind, 30% of EAF funds are provided to “local project fund pools” for the benefit of residents, community groups, and civil society organisations, and 70% is provided for councils and fishery associations.[51]
Although shared ownership is seen distinct from community benefits in Scotland, some other countries have mandated shared ownership or compensation payments. For example, in Denmark, the 2008 Renewable Energy Act mandated developers to offer at least 20% of shares in wind projects for sale to local households within 4.5km of a turbine.[52] Similarly, in Germany, several states have required that between 10% and 25% of wind farm shares be offered to local residents and municipalities. Mandated compensation payments to nearby residents and community funds have been implemented in Denmark and Ireland. Since 2020, Irish legislation obliges wind farm developments to provide an annual contribution to nearby households and communities.
While some of the literature reviewed implies that mandated approaches are more robust,[53] no clear evidence is provided of their outcomes and impact compared to voluntary approaches. The literature does not allow for a satisfactory comparative analysis of the in-practice impacts of mandatory versus voluntary approaches.
Developers’ perspectives on how mandating community benefits could work in practice
Industry stakeholders shared their views on the potential for mandating community benefits for onshore technologies. Mandating was explored in both the scoping interviews with representative bodies and in the main interviews with developers. Developers highlighted some key considerations that they felt should be borne in mind for how mandating could work in practice.
For mandatory community benefits to work in practice, developers felt that there would need to be clear guidelines on what the financial expectation is to avoid any potential for confusion. It was suggested that the community benefit value attached to any mandated approach should be realistic and determined in collaboration with industry to help clarify what the expectations are for developers and for communities.
To work in practice, it was felt that mandatory community benefits would need to take into account the differences between different technologies. For example, by having different levels of benefits that technologies are expected to contribute. Specifically, some interviewees highlighted the different operating contexts and economies (e.g. different capital costs) between some technologies. Further, it was suggested that hydrogen and CCUS should be treated differently because they are designed to complement renewable technologies by operating only when needed. Therefore, it was argued that it is difficult to tie community benefits to specific metrics for these.
“[If] it would be used to set an X amount per megawatt, [then] that would need to be split into different technologies because it’s not a clear cut case for all technologies. It has to show this is what it is for BESS, what is for wind, what is for solar. Because if you get that number wrong, you can make the scheme unviable or unattractive and therefore it will not come forward.” – BESS stakeholder
It was also felt that for mandating to be practical, the approach to community benefits should retain some degree of flexibility and the ability to be designed around the needs of individual communities. For example, one onshore and offshore wind developer said if mandating were to happen it should be around the amount of funding that should be provided and not how communities spend the money. This view echoes findings of a report by BiGGAR Economics (2023) that states that the current voluntary system has allowed communities and developers to be flexible in their arrangements, and has enabled the “formation of mature, collaborative relationships” between parties. [54]
Related to the point above, some developers felt that, in practice, mandates could mean a more bureaucratic process which could slow things down, in turn impacting developers’ ability to deliver benefits. Stakeholders made contrasts with the current system, which was perceived as “fairly simple” and “flexible”. Therefore, it was suggested that approaches to mandates should avoid overly burdensome processes and bureaucracy. For example, it was suggested that it should avoid having too many restrictions around timescales or conditions on how communities should spend the funding.
Another view from developers was mandating might impact on the existing relationships between developers and communities, as it could move away from a collaborative process to one where there is a firmer expectation around what developers are required to give. Therefore, the approach would need to consider the relationships between developers and communities. Developers particularly felt it important to avoid community benefits appearing like compensation. For example, it was felt that creating a mandated system through which a certain amount is paid made directly to homeowners could lead to the system feeling like a form of compensation.
“If it’s mandated, it absolutely can’t be attributed as compensation to the community. If money had to be paid to compensate people for the effects of a wind farm, then the wind farm shouldn’t be being built.” – Multi-technology stakeholder
Aside from practicalities, a key concern raised was that mandating community benefit provision could risk investor confidence. Some developers felt that mandatory community benefits would have an impact on financial viability of projects, which could make investors less confident to invest. It was suggested that they may choose to invest in projects in other countries that do not have a community benefit mandate or in which they feel the approach is more straightforward.
“The danger with [mandating] is that it creates investor concerns. There’s a lot of competing geographies around the world that want money for renewable energy projects…If one country becomes difficult or the risks are harder to understand, they’ll move that investment to another country where they understand it. And the UK, and especially Scotland, runs a real risk of upsetting investor confidence, which is already very delicate because of the situations with the grid at the moment.” – Solar PV stakeholder
As the scope of this research was focused on understanding how different renewable technologies influence the level of community benefits offered by developers, interviews were conducted with a sample of renewable energy developers. A wide range of other stakeholders will have views.
Adjustments needed to Scotland’s current voluntary community benefits approach
This chapter sets out the extent to which any adjustments are required to the current voluntary community benefits approach based on findings from the literature review, interviews with developers and the design and testing of a socio-economic analysis framework.
Key findings
- This research has not identified any obvious adjustments that need to be made to Scotland’s current community benefit approach. Developers felt that the current system could better acknowledge the different realities of different technologies, but they were not specific about what the best future approach should be.
- Developers felt that guidance from the Scottish Government, in the form of Good Practice Principles and a recommended level of community benefit for onshore projects was a strength of the current process. However, for projects of emerging and/or non-generative technologies, developers noted that more targeted guidelines would be beneficial, noting that there is no established industry standard approach.
- The intention was that the framework in this study could be used by Scottish Government to determine an appropriate expectation of the level and types of community benefit required for different renewable energy technologies. This work identified significant data gaps, challenges collecting data in the future, and the difficulty in sourcing data specifically focused on future ability to offer community benefits rather than actual performance. For these reasons, the framework explored here is not robust enough to use as a decision-making tool.
Lessons from literature and developers’ views
Based on the literature reviewed, there is limited evidence directly comparing how the different community benefit approaches in the UK and in other countries have impacted the level of community benefits delivered. Similarly, there is limited evidence to compare the impacts of mandated and voluntary approaches. International examples do not therefore provide any obvious lessons for the current approach in Scotland.
Onshore wind developers interviewed as part of this study were largely satisfied with the current arrangements. They felt that having a recommended standard (of £5,000 per MW per year for onshore) works well, helping them to predict what the cost associated with each project will be. Since it is a recommended, rather than compulsory standard, they also felt that it also allows for a degree of flexibility, meaning that the community benefit contribution can be responsive to both project and local community needs.
“That financial outlay [£5,000 per MW per year] is much more predictable in our models that we bake in during development…we actually really try to make sure that we can deliver it and protect it.” – Multi-technology developer
Developers of some less well-established technologies (e.g. hydrogen and pumped hydro storage) expressed a desire for clearer guidance from government on the appropriate levels of community benefit for these technologies. They suggested that new guidelines around levels of community benefit should take into consideration the differences in scale and impact between projects like pumped storage and hydrogen generation, which can be more expensive and less visible than wind projects. Those from non-generative technologies (e.g. BESS) felt that it is more difficult to determine the amount of community benefits (funds) that can be delivered from these projects because they have lower level of return (they do not yield energy) and serve a different function in the energy market than generation projects.
Developers also suggested that further structure and support for communities could help them to manage funds more effectively. They felt that community-led decision-making was vital for ensuring the funds meet local needs, but that this should be balanced with adequate administrative support to prevent the misuse or underutilisation of funds.
“There is also a misconception that communities are underspending this funding. Our analysis shows that if we invest and empower communities, then they are very capable of delivering impactful projects.” – Multi-technology developer
Lessons from testing a framework approach
As noted earlier, to effectively measure parameters identified in the proposed framework, project-level data would be required on costs, revenue, technology readiness levels and market maturity. Data on these metrics is not currently available and collecting this data would be a significant task.
Developers felt that certain parameters (see chapter 4) were considered suitable for a socio-economic analysis framework. However, their limited testing means that the framework would need more comprehensive data to fully model these parameters’ effects on community benefits. This is especially true for community benefit commitment data (£/MW/yr) which currently is only reported in the Community Benefits Register Database for onshore wind and hydro projects.
When discussing the idea of such a framework, developers noted that community benefits should not have a one-size-fits-all approach and should be reflective of specific circumstances of each technology and each project. Concerns were raised by some interviewees that a framework might lead to overly prescriptive approaches which could risk stifling development and deterring investment.
“Each [parameter] is relevant and I can see why they have been captured as things that would influence the value and viability of community benefits […] It all depends on an individual project basis, depends on what else is happening in terms of landscape and development.” – Multi-technology developer
Interviewees also questioned whether sufficient data would be available to support the framework and there was some concern about using historic data to understand future community benefit levels. A few interviewees also highlighted concerns about data sensitivity and need for any information to be carefully handled.
Considering the data gaps, challenges collecting data in the future, and the difficulty in sourcing data specifically focused on future ability to offer community benefits rather than actual performance, a single framework may not be the most appropriate approach.
Conclusions
This research looked at current and future approaches to community benefits to help inform decisions around future provision of community benefits in a way that is fair and consistent. This chapter draws conclusions around the three broad research aims:
- To understand how different renewable energy technologies affect the capacity of developers to provide community benefits, including developing and testing a socio-economic analysis framework.
- To understand how mandating community benefits could work in practice for onshore renewable energy technologies.
- To help identify any necessary adjustments to the Scottish Government’s current voluntary community benefits approach for onshore and offshore to better support communities and industry as part of a just transition.
Understanding how different renewable energy technologies affect community benefits
Within the scope of this study, the available evidence did not support a single framework to robustly determine how different technologies affect community benefits. For such a framework to work as a practical, decision-making tool, quantitative data on the economics of different renewable energy technology projects would be required. However, existing public data is sparse and of inadequate quality to effectively measure the parameters within a framework and many developers were unable or unwilling to share commercially sensitive data about their projects. A further limitation was that existing data (e.g. on the value of community benefits from individual renewable energy projects) is based on actual provision rather than an assessment of project’s potential ability. Additionally, data available is largely historical and challenging to use when anticipating new technologies and emerging economic and regulatory models.
However, from data that was available, it was clear that the financial aspects of a renewable energy project (costs, revenue and financial viability) were key factors impacting the developers’ offer of community benefits. Projects with higher amounts of revenue and more robust and predictable financial returns are better positioned to offer significant community benefits. Conversely, if the financial viability of a development is low, then it is unlikely developers can offer community benefits without the project becoming non-viable. Developers noted that both technology maturity and market maturity can have an impact on a project’s financial viability and are therefore, indirectly, also linked to a project’s suitability to deliver community benefits. As discussed above, while there are existing tools for measuring technology and market maturity, data gathering is challenging.
Developers’ feedback also highlighted that it is easier to offer community benefits for more established technologies like onshore wind, compared to other technologies (e.g. solar and battery storage) due to the latter’s comparatively low profit margins. Less mature technologies (e.g., floating offshore wind, hydrogen) can have higher risks, higher delivery costs, less predictability in cost and performance, and lower investor confidence which can impact on their ability to offer benefits.
While not directly impacting on the level of community benefits offered, developers noted the importance of community engagement and capacity to effectively manage and deliver benefit funds. Interviewees highlighted the importance of community engagement, consultation and feedback in moulding community benefit initiatives, ensuring more meaningful and tailored contributions. However, this is difficult to quantify and would therefore be challenging to include in a socio-economic analysis framework.
How mandating community benefits could work in practice (for onshore renewable technologies)
The literature reviewed does not allow for a satisfactory comparative analysis of the in-practice impacts of mandatory versus voluntary approaches. Mandatory community benefits approaches exist in Denmark and Ireland, as part of net zero energy infrastructure development for wind projects. While the literature provides examples of where this was happening outside of the UK, it was less clear on the extent to which mandating had an impact on the level and nature of community benefits when compared with voluntary approaches.
Developers felt that for mandating to work in practice, a number of factors would need to be taken into consideration. It was felt that any future mandating approach should allow for the differences between technologies to be accounted for by setting, for example, different recommended levels of community benefit fund value. For mandating to work in practice, it was also felt that flexibility was key, particularly in terms of how communities could make use of the funding provided. Practicalities aside, there was some concern that mandating could potentially pose a risk to projects, by placing a financial burden on some projects (particularly those with smaller financial returns such as solar and BESS technologies) which could pose a risk to investors.
Any necessary adjustments to Scotland’s current voluntary community benefits framework for onshore and offshore
This research has not identified any obvious adjustments that need to be made to Scotland’s current community benefit approach.
Guidance from the Scottish Government, in the form of best practice principles and a recommended level of community benefit for onshore projects was highlighted in interviews with developers as being a strength of the current process. However, developers’ feedback suggests the current system needs to better acknowledge the different realities of different technologies. Developers of emerging and non-generative technologies suggested that more targeted guidelines for these newer technologies would be beneficial, noting that there is no established industry standard approach. However, while they suggested some areas for consideration, they were not specific about what the best future approach should be.
The intention was that the framework in this study could be used by the Scottish Government to determine an appropriate expectation of the level and types of community benefit required for different renewable energy technologies. The parameters that were considered suitable for the framework could provide a useful understanding of the factors that influence ability to offer community benefits. However, this would be dependent on data gaps being addressed. Ideally, it would have up-to-date data on community benefit value covering the full range of renewable energy technologies, with at least 50 projects for each technology.
This study has identified data gaps, challenges collecting data in the future and the difficulty in sourcing data specifically focused on future ability to offer community benefits rather than actual performance. The approach explored here does not provide a robust enough evidence base to underpin a framework for use as a decision-making tool.
Recommendations and next steps
The report highlights existing measurement tools and guidance that can be used to understand where a project sits in relation to certain parameters, such as technology and market maturity. To make the most of these tools, further data collection work would be needed before they could be used for robust socio-economic analysis. This would involve collecting relevant data for a representative sample of projects across the metrics that have already established measurement tools. This would require a significant time and resource commitment and may not, therefore, be a practical option.
To better understand the factors influencing the level of community benefit, beyond the financial indicators highlighted in this study, further research would be needed. Considering the challenge of sourcing quantitative data on project economics, further qualitative research may be the most feasible option. Ideally this would be with a larger selection of developers across the full technology spectrum (including those that had not been able to deliver community benefits), direct engagement with communities, and wider stakeholder engagement (e.g. project investors, funders and other partners that have assisted in project development). This type of engagement would add to and build on the insights gathered from developers in this study.
Glossary / abbreviations table
|
Acronym/Abbreviation |
Definition |
|
ARL |
Adoption Readiness Level |
|
BESS |
Battery energy storage system |
|
BWE |
German Wind Energy Association |
|
CCUS |
Carbon capture utilisation and storage |
|
EAF |
Electricity Assistance Fund |
|
ESG |
Environmental, Social, and Governance |
|
GW |
Gigawatt |
|
IEA ETP guide |
International Energy Agency’s Energy Technology Perspectives guide |
|
LCLO |
Local Community Liaison Officer |
|
LCOE |
Levelised Cost of Electricity |
|
LCOS |
Levelised Cost of Storage |
|
MW |
Megawatt |
|
NASA |
National Aeronautics and Space Administration of the United States |
|
REPD |
Renewable Energy Project Database |
|
SROI |
Social Return on Investment |
|
TRL |
Technology Readiness Level |
References
Anchustegui, I. H. (2021). Distributive justice, community benefits and renewable energy: The case of offshore wind projects.
Arsenova, M., & Wlokas, H. L. (2019). Local Benefit Sharing in Large-Scale Wind and Solar Projects. IFC.
Arsenova, M., Skyt, P., & Qadeer, A. (2024). The Strategic Value of Community Benefits in Offshore Wind Development. IFC.
BiGGAR Economics. (2023). Baseline report on Community benefit and shared revenue from onshore wind projects to communities in the south of Scotland.
BiGGAR Economics. (2024). Developing a new model to maximise local economic benefits from development in Moray and Highland. Report to Moray Council and Highland Council.
BiGGAR Economics. (2024). Impact Assessment of the Rosehall and Achany Wind Farm Community Benefit Funds.
Centre for Sustainable Energy (CSE), & Garrad Hassan. (2005). Community Benefits from Wind Power: A Study of UK Practice and Comparison with Leading European Countries.
Chen, H., Esram, N. W., Johnson, A., Harmon, D., Phelan, P., & Fraser, A. (2024). Aligning Community Benefits with Decarbonization Goals: Lessons Learned from Development of Community Benefit Plans for IRA Funds. American Council for an Energy-Efficient Economy.
Cowell, R., Bristow G., Munday, M. (2011) Acceptance, acceptability and environmental justice: the role of community benefits in wind energy development, Journal of Environmental Planning and Management.
Department for Energy Security and Net Zero (2023) Electricity Generation Costs (2023)
Additional LCOE estimates for generation technologies & Key data and assumptions for generation technologies. Available online: https://assets.publishing.service.gov.uk/media/6555cb6d046ed4000d8b99bb/annex-a-additional-estimates-and-key-assumptions.xlsx
Devine-Wright, P., Devine-Wright, H., & Cowell, R. (2015). What do we know about overcoming barriers to siting energy infrastructure in local areas?
Ejdemo, T., Söderholm, P. (2015). Wind power, regional development and benefit-sharing: The case of Northern Sweden., Renewable and Sustainable Energy Reviews.
Égré, D., Roquet, V., & Durocher, C. (2007). Monetary benefit sharing from dams: A few examples of financial partnerships with Indigenous communities in Québec (Canada).
Energy UK. 2024). Energy in Action: Community benefits from local infrastructure.
Glasson, J. (2020). Community Benefits and UK Offshore Wind Farms: Evolving Convergence in a Divergent Practice.
Klain, S.C., Satterfield, T., MacDonald, S., Battista, N., Chan, K.M.A. (2017). Will communities “open-up” to offshore wind? Lessons learned from New England islands in the United States.
Kerr, S. (2018). Community benefits schemes – Fair shares or token gestures?
Kerr, S., Johnson, K., & Weir, S. (2017). Understanding community benefit payments from renewable energy development. International Centre for Island Technology, Heriot Watt University.
Lane, T., & Hicks, J. (2019). A Guide to benefit sharing options for renewable energy projects. Akin Consulting; Community Power Agency.
le Maitre, J. (2024). Price or public participation? Community benefits for onshore wind in Ireland, Denmark, Germany and the United Kingdom.
Local Energy Scotland (n.d.). Annual community benefits from Scotland’s renewables reach £30 million. Local Energy Scotland website. Link: https://localenergy.scot/annual-community-benefits-from-scotlands-renewables-reach-30-million/
Manitius. (2023). Community Benefits Programs & Clean Energy.
Munday, M., Bristow, G., & Cowell, R. (2011). Wind farms in rural areas: How far do community benefits from wind farms represent a local economic development opportunity?
NESCAN Hub. (2025). NESCAN Hub Website, accessed 25 March 2025, Link: https://www.nescan.org/resources/benefitting-communities-can-new-renewable-energy-projects-help-communities
San Martin, O., Morales, E., Antas, J., Seumas, S., & Wallace, J. (2022). The winds of change: The role of community engagement and benefit-sharing in wind farm developments. Statkraft.
Scottish Government (2018). Scottish Government Good Practice Principles for Community Benefits from Offshore Renewable Energy Developments.
Scottish Government. (2019). Scottish Government Good Practice Principles for Community Benefits from Onshore Renewable Energy Developments (updated).
Scottish Government (2020). Securing a green recovery on a path to net zero: climate change plan 2018–2032 – update. Published online: https://www.gov.scot/publications/securing-green-recovery-path-net-zero-update-climate-change-plan-20182032/
Scottish Government. (2022). Onshore wind: Scottish government policy statement.
Scottish Government. (2023). Draft Energy Strategy and Just Transition Plan – delivering a fair and secure zero carbon energy system for Scotland.
Scottish Government (2024) Community benefits from net zero energy developments: consultation. December 2024. https://www.gov.scot/publications/community-benefits-net-zero-energy-developments-consultation/pages/2/
Shetland Islands Council (2025) Community Benefit in Shetland. Committee Document. Available online: https://coins.shetland.gov.uk/viewDoc.asp?c=e%97%9Dg%8Fj%80%89
Skills Development Scotland (2023). CESAP Pathfinder – Work Package 1: An Evidence Based Approach to Supporting the Transition to Net Zero. November 2023. Available online: https://www.skillsdevelopmentscotland.co.uk/media/5hcorb5t/cesap-pathfinder-wp1-report.pdf
Solar Energy UK. (2024). Community Engagement Good Practice Guidance: Solar Energy UK.
SSE. (2024). Community Investment Review 2023/24.
Sumaria, P., & Maltby, P. (2022). Delivering local benefit from offshore renewables. Regen.
The Highland Council (2024). Social Value Charter set to unlock renewables investment. The Highland Council website. Available online: https://www.highland.gov.uk/news/article/16125/social_value_charter_set_to_unlock_renewables_investment
Toledano, P., Albin-Lackey, C., Andres, M. D., & Brauch, M. D. (2023). Community Benefit Sharing and Renewable Energy and Green Hydrogen Projects: Policy Guidance for Governments. Columbia Center on Sustainable Investment.
US Department of Energy (2024) Adoption Readiness Assessment. Available online: https://www.energy.gov/sites/default/files/2025-01/ARL%20Assessment%201-11-25.pdf
Van den Berg, K., & Tempels, B. (2022). The role of community benefits in community acceptance of multifunctional solar farms in the Netherlands.
Van der Waal, E. C. (2020). Local impact of community renewable energy: A case study of an Orcadian community-led wind scheme.
Walker, C. (2013). Towards Greater Acceptance of Wind Energy: A Review of Community Benefits Models.
Welsh Government (2022) Guidance for developers, local communities & decision-makers: Local and shared ownership of energy projects in Wales.
Wind Europe. (n.d.). Compendium of wind success.
Appendices
Appendix A – Methodology
Evidence review
Aims and objectives
The aims of the evidence review were to:
- Explore best practice on community benefits in the UK and internationally in relation to renewable energy technologies.
- Explore how community benefit schemes operate and examine their funding arrangements in the UK and internationally.
- Provide examples of where community benefits have been mandated and what impact this has had on industry, communities and the delivery of renewable energy technologies.
- Inform the socio-economic analysis in terms of identifying key parameters and contexts that impact the propensity to supply community benefits at varying scales.
- Identify data sources for the socio-economic analysis.
Defining the research questions
To ensure the evidence review is useful in summarising best practises and informing the socio-economic analysis the following research questions were defined:
- Research Question 1 – What is the best practice on community benefits from onshore and offshore renewable energy technologies internationally?
- Research Question 2 – How does the UK differ from international counterparts on the processes on the provision of community benefits? How does this impact the level of community benefits?
- Research Question 3 – Which (if any) countries mandate community benefits as part of net zero energy infrastructure construction? What impact has this had on the provision of community benefits? What impact has this had on communities and the delivery of net zero energy policies?
- Additional Scoping – What data is available on the levels of community benefits, and their corresponding technologies/market maturities/technology maturity and other hypothesised parameters which influence the provision of community benefits?
Scope of the literature search
The literature search included the identification of relevant sources from:
- Existing research into/evaluations of community benefit schemes
- Academic literature
- Grey literature
- Policy documents
- Media publications
The search for literature was primarily done through using Google and Google Scholar but also used sources such as JSTOR, Scopus, and organisational websites where necessary. Whilst we did not take a strict view on the geographical scope of our search, we favoured countries which are contextually similar to the UK (European countries, US, Australia) as it is likely these findings will be more relevant to the UK.
We explored literature relevant to onshore and offshore renewable energy technologies. This included, but was not limited to, wind, solar, hydro, wave, thermal, pumped hydro storage, bioenergy, battery storage, hydrogen, Negative Emission Technologies (NETs) and transmission infrastructure. The ability to look at these internationally was dependent on the context and energy mix of the countries in question. It was decided that it would also be useful to assess levels of community benefits for technologies which may be emerging in the UK but are more established elsewhere, bringing in the Three Horizons approach featured in the proposal.
Search Terms
Some initial search terms for covering the aforementioned specifications and research questions were developed and are presented in the table below:
|
Search Term (Google/Google Scholar) |
Relevance/comments |
|
“[insert technology] community benefits best practice [international/UK/insert country]” |
All technologies and internationally. This will support answering RQ1 and part of RQ2 by allowing for a comparison between countries. |
|
“[insert technology] community benefits monitoring [international/UK/insert country]” |
All technologies and internationally. This will support answering RQ1 and part of RQ2 by allowing for a comparison between countries. |
|
“[insert technology] community benefits evaluation [international/UK/insert country]” |
All technologies and internationally. This will support answering RQ1 and part of RQ2 by allowing for a comparison between countries. |
|
“[insert technology] community benefits lessons [international/UK/insert country]” |
All technologies and internationally. This will support answering RQ1 and part of RQ2 by allowing for a comparison between countries. |
|
“[insert technology] community benefits impacts [international/UK/insert country]” |
All technologies and internationally. This will support answering RQ1 and part of RQ2 by allowing for a comparison between countries. |
|
“[insert technology] community benefits funding arrangements [international/UK/insert country]” |
All technologies and internationally. This will allow us to understand the structure of community benefit funds, supporting RQ1 and RQ2 |
|
“[insert technology] community benefits management arrangements [international/UK/insert country]” |
All technologies and internationally. This will allow us to understand the structure of community benefit funds, supporting RQ1 and RQ2 |
|
“[insert technology] mandate/mandated/mandating community benefits [international/UK/insert country]”” |
All technologies and internationally. This will provide an answer to RQ3, where we can begin to assess the impact of mandating community benefits and what this looks like in practise |
|
“[insert technology] community benefits press release” |
This search supports the scoping of what is feasible for the socio-economic analysis. At this stage, a high-level search will be conducted, with more in depth web scraping for data (if possible) to be completed as part of the socio-economic analysis. |
Prioritisation approach
A long list of 86 sources were initially identified which were then prioritised using the prioritisation criteria set out below:
- Based on existing evidence: Does the document focus on existing practice/examples of renewable projects/developments?
- Focus on community benefits: Is the main focus of the document around the provision of community benefits (as opposed to for e.g. broader discussions of social acceptability of renewable energy developments OR community engagement)?
- Policy guidance: Does the document include policy recommendations/best practice guidance/reflections on lessons learned?
- Geographical scope: Does the geographical scope of the document include Europe, the UK or US?
- Peer reviewed / grey literature: Peer reviewed sources were prioritised over grey literature sources.
Additional considerations:
- Ensuring the inclusion of evidence on a wide spread of renewable technologies.
- Ensuring the inclusion of evidence from both voluntary and mandatory community benefits schemes.
- Ensuring the inclusion of evidence from a wide spread of types of community benefits.
Additional sources were added to the short-list of literature as suggested by Scottish Government and stakeholders in the scoping interviews. A total of 35 sources were reviewed in-depth. The final list of literature sources reviewed included 12 peer reviewed academic papers, 20 reports, 2 guidance documents from grey literature (e.g., renewable energy developers, private consultancies) and 1 policy document. The publication years of the reviewed documents ranges from 2011 to 2024, with 22 documents from the last 5 years.
Evidence extraction
The prioritised literature sources were then reviewed and findings relevant to the research questions were extracted into an excel sheet. Ipsos Facto, a Large Language Model, was used to assist with identifying and summarising relevant data.
Scoping interviews
In parallel to the evidence, we conducted four in-depth scoping interviews with industry bodies, trade associations, and members of developer groups to enhance the findings from the evidence review.
The aim of these interviews was twofold:
- to understand their views on different types of community benefits and their perceptions of current / best practice arrangements related to community benefits;
- to explore options for sourcing data from the industry, including the types of information they think businesses will / will not be prepared to share with us.
Learnings from the scoping interviews were used specifically to inform the design of the subsequent stakeholder engagement and framework development.
Developer interviews
In-depth interviews were conducted with 21 industry developers. Interviewees covered a range of technologies including onshore wind (7), offshore wind (7), solar PV (5), battery storage (6), grid stability (1), hydro (3), pumped hydro storage (3), hydrogen (6 including 2 green hydrogen) and carbon capture, utilisation and storage (2). Among interviewees, 11 were mostly multi-technologies developers and 10 were single-technology developers.
The objectives of the interviews were threefold:
- To gather qualitative data on the types of community benefits they have delivered/plan to deliver, views on current arrangement for community benefits and potential different approaches (including mandating for onshore), and what factors have contributed to the provision/ success of their community benefits (i.e. to help inform what parameters are most important in informing potential future community benefits). This will help contextualise the socio-economic analysis and the findings in the report.
- To gather quantitative data that we will then use in our analysis, using the parameters set out in the framework (these will be developed further based on CXC/SG feedback). This will include information such as the cost of developing the project(s), value of community benefits, proportion of those values in comparison with turnover/profit, employment impacts etc.
- To help reframe/revise the socio-economic analysis framework as required, based on their views on what parameters/variables are important
- Ahead of the interview, stakeholders were also requested to complete a ‘Data request sheet’ that aimed to gather data for the socio-economic analysis (see below).
Framework development
The development of the framework to assess the influence of various parameters on community benefits involved a systematic approach following stakeholder interviews. Each initial parameter underwent a comprehensive evaluation to determine the feasibility of its measurement and potential impact on community benefit commitments.
- Assessment of measurement challenges. Initially, each parameter was scrutinised to identify any inherent challenges or limitations in its measurement. This involved examining the complexity, availability of data, and any factors that could hinder accurate quantification.
- Identification of pre-existing measures. For parameters where it was determined that measurement challenges were minimal or non-existent, existing methodologies and measures were sought. This step involved a thorough review of established metrics and tools already in use.
- Development of proxy measures. In cases where no established measures were applicable, proxy measures were devised. This involved identifying the closest available data that could serve as a stand-in to approximate the parameter’s influence on community benefits. These proxies were selected based on their relevance and potential to offer meaningful insights.
Throughout this process, each parameter’s potential to influence community benefits was evaluated. This iterative methodology ensured a robust and nuanced framework, capable of effectively guiding future assessments and decisions concerning community benefit commitments.
Socio-economic analysis
To illustrate the application of the framework, a socio-economic analysis was conducted using a sample dataset of renewable energy projects. This analysis examined the relationship between the parameters detailed in Section 5 and the levels of community benefits, employing the methodologies outlined in the framework.
The analysis focuses on parameters deemed feasible to measure with available methods, specifically revenue and costs, along with technology type. Technology type was used as a proxy for technology maturity, given the current uniformity of maturity levels within each technology. The analysis relied on data from the Community Benefits Register Database, supplemented by additional information obtained through desk research.
For this analysis, the scope included onshore wind, offshore wind, and hydro technologies. These were chosen based on their data availability and relevance to the parameters evaluated.
Appendix B Examples of community benefit-sharing initiatives
Table 2 Examples of community benefit-sharing initiatives and related guidance for renewable technologies in selected European countries (from O San Martin et al. (2022)
|
Country |
Guidance document |
Scope of initiative |
|
Scotland |
Scottish Government: Onshore Wind Policy Statement (2017); Scottish Government: Good Practice Principles for Community Benefits from Onshore Renewable Energy Developments (2019 Update); and Good Practice Principles for Community Benefits from Offshore Renewable Energy Developments (2018) |
Wind farm operators currently utilise both community funding options and shared ownership, both are seen as good practices and responsive to the local community’s specific wishes. |
|
England |
Community Benefits from Onshore Wind Developments: Best Practice Guidance for England (2021) |
Both a community benefit fund and community shared ownership are recommended. Noted that many developers are providing funds significantly below the recommended amount. |
|
Ireland |
Code of Practice for Wind Energy Development in Ireland Guidelines for Community Engagement; and Best Practice Guidelines for the Irish Wind Energy Industry (2012) ORESS 1 Community Benefit Fund – Rulebook for Generators and Fund Administrators (2023) |
Irish wind farm operators currently offer both community funding options and shared ownership; both are seen as good practices. |
|
Netherlands |
Dutch Wind Energy Association (NWEA): Code of Conduct for Acceptance & Participation of Onshore Wind Energy (2016) |
Both a community benefit fund and community shared ownership are acceptable, but shared ownership is generally preferred and expected by local communities. |
|
Germany |
German Wind Energy Association (BWE): “Collectively Winning – Local Wind Energy”: Framework Paper for the topics added value, public participation, and acceptance (2018); “Citizen-owned Wind Energy” – Energy from the region for the region (2013) |
Best practice in Germany heavily tends towards community stakes/shared ownership in wind farms as the main model of how communities benefit. In contrast, the community funding model is less well-received in Germany. |
Appendix C Socio-economic analysis results
To demonstrate how the framework could be used in future, socio-economic analysis was carried out based on a sample of data from net zero energy projects. This analysis explores the relationship between the parameters outlined in chapter 4 and the levels of community benefits, using the methods outlined in the framework.
The parameters in scope of this analysis are restricted to those which have been deemed feasible to measure and for which a suitable method to measure them has been identified These include revenue and costs, as well as technology type (which serves as a proxy for technology maturity, as maturity levels do not vary within technologies currently). It should be noted that this analysis is based on data available from the Community Benefits Register Database, supplemented with additional data sourced through desk research. Due to the data sources available, it only includes onshore wind, offshore wind and hydro technologies.
The subsequent analysis in this chapter presents the relationships between the measurable parameters for which data is available and the level of community benefits.
Key findings
- Industry alignment and policy influence. Many onshore wind and hydro projects in Scotland are clustering around the recommended annual £5,000 per MW capacity for community benefits for onshore technologies. However, a significant number of onshore wind and hydro projects (more than half of those analysed in the available dataset) commit less than the recommended amount.
- Revenue-benefit correlation. A positive correlation exists between gross project revenue and total community benefit commitments, with larger projects providing bigger packages. However, this relationship weakens for high-revenue projects, suggesting a potential plateau effect.
- Costs and benefit packages. There is a positive correlation between total costs and total community benefit packages. For projects costing less than £25 million, when comparing onshore wind and hydropower projects of the same energy capacity and with equivalent community benefit budgets (£5,000 per MW annually), onshore wind offers greater community benefits per pound spent on energy production.
Analysis of community benefit commitments
Many onshore wind and hydro projects in Scotland are aligning with the recommended community benefits package of £5,000 per MW capacity. The clustering of commitments around the recommended amount suggests that policy guidelines are influencing industry behaviour, but full compliance among onshore projects has not yet been achieved. This is observed in Figure 1 by the number of projects committing less than the recommended amount. Of the 282 onshore wind and hydro projects analysed, 177 were committing less than the recommend amount.
There exists a small but notable group of projects that have committed to providing community benefits from onshore renewable energy developments above the recommended £5,000 per MW capacity. These projects may be setting new benchmarks for corporate social responsibility. The strong concentration around the £5,000 figure could indicate an opportunity for standardising community benefit packages across the industry, potentially simplifying expectations for both developers and communities.
Figure 1 Distribution of Annual Community Benefit Commitments per MW – Onshore Projects

Source: Community Benefits Register Database
Figure 2 below illustrates where most of the data points are concentrated and the variation in the data. There are distinct patterns in community benefit commitments across the two different onshore renewable technologies shown. Figure 2 shows that hydro projects commitments range between £456 and £5,000 per MW per year, while onshore wind commitments range between £60-£20,000 (the upper end of this range is not visible in Figure 2 below as this distorted the shape and scales of the figure).
There is a concentration of commitments around the £5,000 figure for both hydro and onshore wind which aligns with the recommended amount (as demonstrated by the width of the violin plot), indicating a level of industry-wide acceptance of this guideline for land-based projects.
Figure 2 Distribution of Annual Community Benefit Commitments per MW by Onshore Technology

Source: Community Benefits Register Database
Figure 3 below shows the distribution of community benefit commitments among offshore projects. It should be noted that there was very low coverage of offshore wind projects captured in the register, and hence efforts were made to manually collect benefits data through desk-based research. This may have resulted in some discrepancies in actual provision versus what projects would have reported through the register. Figure 3 shows offshore wind projects notably committing lower amounts compared to onshore wind and hydro projects, with a range between c.£20-£2,000 per MW per year. It is acknowledged here that this analysis is based on 21 projects out of a possible 47 operational offshore wind projects in the UK[55] and therefore figures should be treated with caution.
Figure 3 Distribution of Annual Community Benefit Commitments per MW – Offshore Projects

Source: desk research
There are several reasons why offshore wind projects might be committing lower amounts than their onshore counterparts. Most importantly, onshore renewable energy projects in Scotland are encouraged to offer community benefits, typically around £5,000 per megawatt of installed capacity annually. This is a voluntary guideline, not a requirement, specifically for onshore projects, and does not apply to offshore projects. Beyond this, offshore wind farms, being located further from communities, might be perceived as having less direct impact on local populations, potentially justifying lower community benefit packages. The offshore wind sector in Scotland is also at an earlier stage of development compared to onshore technologies, with community benefit standards still being defined. This technological and market immaturity means standards for community benefits are still evolving within this sector. In contrast, onshore wind technologies are more established and benefit from years of development and market experience. The advanced state of onshore wind technology may allow for greater efficiency and cost reduction, enabling more substantial community support relative to their offshore counterparts. Moreover, the scale of offshore wind projects may mean that while there are lower per-MW commitments, the overall total community benefits package may still be substantial.
Analysis of community benefit parameters and their impact
Revenue and profit
Figure 4 below illustrates the relationship between estimated gross revenue and total community benefit commitments over the project lifetime. The relationship is split and visualised by revenue levels due to the variation in the strength of the relationship as revenue changes. Blue dots represent projects that have committed £5,000 per MW per year, while red dots represent any figure other than the recommended £5,000 per MW. There is a clear positive correlation between gross project revenue and total community benefit commitments across all renewable energy projects in Scotland. This suggests that as projects become more financially substantial, they tend to provide larger community benefit packages. As project size increases in revenue terms, there is a widening range of community benefit amounts. This indicates that larger projects have more diverse approaches to community support. The relationship between gross revenue and community benefits appears to weaken for larger revenue projects. This suggests a potential plateau effect where community benefit increases do not keep pace proportionally with revenue growth beyond a certain point.
Small (under £35m gross revenue) and medium-sized (£25-250m gross revenue) projects frequently demonstrate commitment to the recommended £5,000 per MW amount, suggesting strong guideline adherence among projects of these scales. Across these sized projects, there are few instances of commitments exceeding the recommended amount relative to their revenue, suggesting a general reluctance to exceed standard guidelines.
Figure 4 Community Benefits Package by Gross Revenue Bucket (Under £25M, £25M-£250M and £250M+ Gross Revenue)

Source: See appendix F (Recommended data sources)
Deployment and Operating Costs
Figure 5 below shows the relationship between estimated total cost of production, expressed as the average cost of producing one unit of energy (LCOE – £/MWh) multiplied by total expected production over the project lifetime, and total community benefit commitments over the project lifetime. As above, the relationship is split and visualised by total cost of production levels due to the variation in the strength of the relationship as total cost changes. There is a positive correlation between total cost of production and total community benefit packages across all project sizes, suggesting that as total costs increase, as does the size of the overall commitment to community benefits. The correlation between total cost and total community benefit are relatively strong (Pearson correlation coefficient[56] = 0.56) at lower total cost levels (under £25M total cost). This increases to 0.62 for mid-sized projects (£25-250M total cost). However above £250M total costs, there is no correlation (Pearson correlation coefficient=-0.002), indicating that total cost plays less of a role in determining community benefits at large cost levels.
While this may appear contrary to the views of developers shown earlier (i.e. those who said that high costs can impact on financial viability and therefore their ability to offer community benefits) it should be noted that this data analysis is based only on projects that were already providing monetary community benefits. It excludes those that had not provided any benefits. It can therefore be assumed that the dataset excludes those projects that were deemed not financially viable enough to enable community benefit provision.
This analysis goes further to explore whether there are any differences by technology class within onshore projects only (offshore projects have been removed at this stage as the recommended £5,000/MW applies only to onshore technologies). In order to do so, it is important to control for project size (as measured by MW capacity), so as not to produce spurious results. Figure 6 illustrates how many pounds (£) are allocated to community benefits for every pound (£) spent producing energy, categorised by the project’s size in capacity (MW). Blue dots represent projects that have committed less than the recommended £5,000 per MW per year, while green dots represent projects that have committed more than the recommended amount and red dots represent project that have committed the recommended £5,000 per MW. For projects with total production costs under £25 million, when comparing hydro and onshore wind projects of the same capacity that both allocate £5,000 per MW annually to community benefits, onshore wind projects are actually providing more community benefits per pound (£) spent on energy production than hydro projects.
Figure 5 Community Benefits Package by Total Cost of Production Bucket (Under £25M, £25M-£250M and £250M+ Total Cost)

Source: See appendix F (Recommended data sources)
Figure 6 Community Benefits Package by Total Cost of Production Bucket (Under £25M, £25M-£250M and £250M+ Total Cost)

Source: See appendix F (Recommended data sources)
Appendix D Methodologies for estimating revenue and costs
Project Revenue
Simplified Annual Revenue Estimation – Generation Projects
The fundamental formula for estimating annual revenue is as follows:
Estimated Revenue = Expected Generation (MWh) * Electricity Price (£/MWh), where
Expected Generation (MWh) = Capacity (MW) * Capacity Factor* Hours in a year
Breaking down these components:
- Installed Capacity (MW): This represents the maximum power output of the project under ideal conditions. This data is readily available from the Renewable Energy Planning Database (REPD).
- Capacity Factor: This represents the actual output of a project as a percentage of its maximum potential output over a specific period. Historical capacity factors for certain technologies (onshore wind, offshore wind, hydro, landfill gas, and sewage sludge digestion) in Scotland can be found in the Energy Trends: UK Renewables publications[57].
- Addressing Missing Capacity Factors: For technologies where Scotland-specific capacity factors are unavailable (e.g., solar PV, tidal, wave, biomass), several approaches can be used:
- UK-wide Proxies: Use UK average capacity factors as a starting point, acknowledging this as a limitation and potential source of error.
- Technology-Specific Adjustments: Adjust UK proxies based on technology and location characteristics. For example, solar PV capacity factors are influenced by latitude and solar irradiance. Tools like PVGIS can provide location-specific solar irradiance data to refine estimates (this approach is out of scope for the analysis in this study).
- Addressing Missing Capacity Factors: For technologies where Scotland-specific capacity factors are unavailable (e.g., solar PV, tidal, wave, biomass), several approaches can be used:
- Average Annual Electricity Price (£/MWh): This represents the average price received for each MWh of electricity generated over a year. Given the difficulty of obtaining project-specific PPA data, the wholesale market price serves as a practical proxy.
- Wholesale Price Data Sources: While real-time wholesale price data requires plugging into Elexon’s BMRS API, a simplified approach for this framework should entail using Ofgem’s published weekly wholesale day-ahead price data[58] to calculate annual averages. These are GB-wide averages, and hence regional variations should be recognised as a limitation.
- Simplified CfD Approach (for CfD-supported projects): For projects under a Contract for Difference (CfD) the strike price is a guaranteed price. This figure is a conservative estimate of returns, as actual revenue could be higher if market prices exceed the strike price. CfD data is available from the Low Carbon Contracts Company (LCCC).
Estimating Future Revenue (also applicable for projects not yet operational) – Generation Projects
For revenue in future years, or for projects under development or construction, estimating future revenue requires additional considerations:
- Project Lifetime Assumption: Specify a reasonable assumed operational lifetime for the technology (e.g., 25 years for offshore wind, 20-25 years for solar PV). This assumption directly impacts total revenue calculations.
- Future Capacity Factor Estimation: Project future capacity factors based on recent trends and technological advancements. If historical capacity factor data for the specific technology in Scotland (or a similar region) is available, this trend should be analysed over the past years.[59] This trend should be extrapolated outward to estimate future capacity factors. For less established technologies with limited historical data, the technology’s maturity should be considered. Rapidly evolving technologies may see more significant performance improvements expected while more mature technologies might expect to see more stable future performance anticipated. For example, floating offshore wind might be expected to see larger capacity factor gains in the coming years compared to a more established technology like onshore wind.
- Future Electricity Price Estimation: Given the volatility of electricity markets, projecting future prices is challenging. For projects supported by a Contract for Difference (CfD), the strike price offers a guaranteed future revenue stream and can be used as a conservative estimate. For non-CfD projects, where future revenue is directly exposed to market price fluctuations, a simplified approach involves using the average annual CfD strike price for the corresponding technology in each future year. However, it’s essential to acknowledge that:
- CfD strike prices are influenced by auction dynamics and may not perfectly represent the market value of electricity from non-CfD projects.
- Not all technologies are represented in CfD auctions.
- Using CfD strike prices as proxies across all non-CfD projects might result in a somewhat conservative revenue estimate, as market prices could exceed the strike price in some years.
Prices beyond the latest future year reported in the CfD auction reports are set at the price in the latest year for the respective technology. For example, if CfD auction strike prices are set for the year 2027, the strike price in all future years will be set at the prices in 2027 for that technology. It is acknowledged these prices are unrealistic, however, they serve as the most appropriate benchmark against which to extrapolate.
- Discounting Future Cash Flows: To compare projects and scenarios, discount future revenue streams to their present value using an appropriate discount rate that reflects project risk. We propose using the technology-specific discount rate of 10% used by DESNZ in their Levelised Cost of Electricity (LCOE) methodology documents.
Total Cost of Production Calculation
Total Cost of Production Calculation – Generation Projects
Estimating the total lifetime cost of production across the range of projects in scope requires a consistent and transparent method to apply cost assumptions across different generation technologies. To support this, we use benchmark Levelised Cost of Electricity (LCOE) estimates published by DESNZ.
DESNZ’s LCOE values represent the average lifetime cost (£/MWh) of generating electricity for each technology type. These figures include all relevant capital, operational, fuel, and decommissioning costs, spread over the expected lifetime electricity output of a project. As such, LCOE is a useful and well-recognised benchmark for comparing the cost-effectiveness of electricity generation technologies in the UK.
Importantly, we are not re-estimating or recalculating LCOE. Instead, we are using DESNZ’s published LCOE values as input parameters in our framework to estimate total cost of production across different project configurations. Specifically, we apply the LCOE estimates to the expected energy output of each project to calculate a total cost figure. This calculation can be expressed as:
Total Cost of Production (£) = LCOE (£/MWh) x (Installed Capacity (MW) x Load Factor x Annual Operating Hours x Project Lifetime (years))
This approach allows us to derive a consistent estimate of total production cost, using technology-specific LCOE values as cost rates, scaled by the expected energy output of each project over its lifetime.
The process for estimating total cost of production is as follows:
- Technology categorisation: Categorise REPD projects to align with the technology categories used in the UK Government’s LCOE estimates file. This may involve mapping project types to the closest matching category in the government data.
- Energy Output Calculation: Estimate the annual energy output (MWh) for each project based on its capacity and typical capacity factors for the relevant technology.
- Total calculation: Using the scaled cost components and estimated energy output, we will calculate the total cost for each project using the formula. It’s important to note that the UK Government’s LCOE estimates are provided for projects with commissioning dates in 2025, 2030, 2035, and 2040. Therefore, our total cost calculations will need to be based on the estimate that most closely matches each project’s expected commissioning date. We will assign each project to the nearest available estimate year based on its planned commissioning date.
- Inflation-adjustment: Furthermore, all costs in the UK Government’s estimates are reported in 2021 prices. To ensure consistency and accurate comparisons across projects with varying commissioning dates, we adjust these figures to a common base year using HM Treasury GDP deflators. These temporal adjustments will help ensure that our total cost calculations accurately reflect the economic conditions and technological advancements expected at the time of each project’s commissioning, within the constraints of the available data.
Appendix E Socio-economic scoring mechanisms
Table 3 NASA Technology Readiness Levels
|
TRL |
TRL Summary |
|
1 |
Basic principles have been observed and/or formulated: Lowest level of technology readiness. Scientific research begins to be translated into applied research and development (R&D). Examples might include paper studies of a technology’s basic properties. |
|
2 |
Developing hypothesis and experimental designs: Invention begins. Once basic principles are observed, practical applications can be invented. Applications are speculative, and there may be no proof or detailed analysis to support the assumptions. Examples are limited to analytic studies. |
|
3 |
Specifying and developing an experimental Proof of Concept (PoC): Active R&D is initiated. This includes analytical studies and laboratory studies to physically validate the analytical predictions of separate elements of the technology. Examples include components that are not yet integrated or representative. |
|
4 |
PoC demonstrated in test site/initial evaluation of costs and efficiency produced: Basic technological components are integrated to establish that they will work together. This is relatively “low fidelity” compared with the eventual system. Examples include integration of “ad hoc” hardware in the laboratory. |
|
5 |
Technology/process validated in relevant environment: Fidelity of breadboard technology increases significantly. The basic technological components are integrated with reasonably realistic supporting elements so they can be tested in a simulated environment. Examples include “high-fidelity” laboratory integration of components. |
|
6 |
Technology/process validated in operational environment: Representative model or prototype system, which is well beyond that of TRL 5, is tested in a relevant environment. Represents a major step up in a technology’s demonstrated readiness. Examples include testing a prototype in a high-fidelity laboratory environment or in a simulated operational environment. |
|
7 |
System complete and qualified: Prototype near or at planned operational system. Represents a major step up from TRL 6 by requiring demonstration of an actual system prototype in an operational environment (e.g., in an aircraft, in a vehicle, or in space). |
|
8 |
Product/technology in manufacture/process being implemented: Technology has been proven to work in its final form and under expected conditions. In almost all cases, this TRL represents the end of true system development. Examples include developmental test and evaluation (DT&E) of the system in its intended weapon system to determine if it meets design specifications. |
|
9 |
Product/service on commercial release/process deployed: Actual application of the technology in its final form and under mission conditions, such as those encountered in operational test and evaluation (OT&E). Examples include using the system under operational mission conditions. |
|
10 |
Dead end and reached. |
Table 4 IEA Technology Guide Technology Maturity Scale
|
Technology Readiness Level |
Description |
|
11 |
Proof of stability reached |
|
10 |
Integration needed at scale |
|
9 |
Commercial operation in relevant environment |
|
8 |
First of a kind commercial |
|
7 |
Pre-commercial demonstration |
|
6 |
Full prototype at scale |
|
5 |
Large prototype |
|
4 |
Early prototype |
|
3 |
Concept needs validation |
|
2 |
Application formulated |
|
1 |
Initial idea |
Table 5 Market Maturity Scale
|
Score |
Reasoning |
|
5 |
Fully Mature Market: A fully mature market is characterized by high levels of competition, well-established regulatory and policy frameworks, and a global supply chain. The technology is fully integrated into the energy system, and investment is based on market forces rather than policy incentives. The market operates efficiently with clear pricing signals. Hydropower, especially conventional dam-based installations, has a fully mature market with a global presence and long history of integration into energy systems. |
|
4 |
Established Market: Established markets have a stable and supportive regulatory environment, a robust and competitive supply chain, and a broad base of stakeholders. Investment is seen as lower risk, and financing models are well understood. There is strong competition, and the technology is a significant part of the energy mix. Onshore wind and solar PV have both reached this level of market maturity, with widespread adoption and a solid market presence. |
|
3 |
Growing Market: At this stage, markets are experiencing noticeable growth in demand and investment. The regulatory environment is becoming more supportive, with clearer policies and standards. The supply chain is expanding, and costs start to decrease as economies of scale are realized. There is a healthy level of competition with several established players. Fixed-bottom offshore wind is at this stage, with a growing number of projects and increasing investor confidence. |
|
2 |
Emerging Market: Markets at this stage have begun to establish some regulatory frameworks and attract early adopters. The supply chain is forming but may not be fully reliable or cost-effective. There is a growing interest from investors, but financing often depends on policy incentives. Competition is limited, but there are signs of market growth. Floating offshore wind, which is beginning to see commercial interest and investment, but lacks the extensive market presence of fixed-bottom offshore wind, would fall into this category. |
|
1 |
Nascent Market: The market at this stage is in its infancy. There are few, if any, regulatory standards or guidelines, and the supply chain is undeveloped. Investment is highly speculative, and there are very few players in the market. The technology may still be reliant on grants or government support with no established commercial financing models. |
Appendix F Recommended data sources
The following below provides a summary of the key data sources currently available to measure framework parameters. However, these are not complete and additional work is required to fill gaps.
|
Parameter |
Measurement item |
Recommended data source |
|
Community Benefit |
Community benefits monetary value (£) |
Community Benefit Register Database. Since the database does not cover all technologies, this would need to be supplement with data from individual developers, either through requesting this directly or sourcing it from company reports (where available). |
|
Technical maturity |
Technology maturity scoring |
NASA TRL Scale IEA ETP Clean Energy Technology Guide. While the database is comprehensive in its technology classification, there is likely to be some mis-classification of REPD projects to specific IEA ETP technologies. Ideally, project TRLs should be sourced directly from project owners. |
|
Project revenue |
Installed capacity |
Community Benefit Register Database and REPD |
|
Capacity factor |
Energy Trends: UK Renewables publications. Historical capacity factors are only available for certain technologies. Newer technologies are therefore not captured and will need to be sourced directly from projects. | |
|
Electricity price |
Elexon Ofgem wholesale day-ahead price | |
|
CfD strike price |
Low Carbon Contracts Company | |
|
Capital and operating costs |
Technology categorisation |
UK Government’s LCOE estimates. This data source captures LCOE for a selection of common technologies. More niche/newer technologies are not captured within this data source and therefore should be collected directly through projects. |
|
Energy output |
REPD Energy Trends: UK Renewables publications |
How to cite this publication:
Mulholland, C., Jones, R., Tapie, N. and Stow, C. ‘Renewable energy technologies and community benefits’, ClimateXChange. http://dx.doi.org/10.7488/era/6396
© The University of Edinburgh, 2025
Prepared by Ipsos on behalf of ClimateXChange, The University of Edinburgh. All rights reserved.
While every effort is made to ensure the information in this report is accurate as at the date of the report, no legal responsibility is accepted for any errors, omissions or misleading statements. The views expressed represent those of the author(s), and do not necessarily represent those of the host institutions or funders.
This work was supported by the Rural and Environment Science and Analytical Services Division of the Scottish Government (CoE – CXC).
ClimateXChange
Edinburgh Climate Change Institute
High School Yards
Edinburgh EH1 1LZ
+44 (0) 131 651 4783
If you require the report in an alternative format such as a Word document, please contact info@climatexchange.org.uk or 0131 651 4783.
See Community benefits and shared ownership for low carbon energy infrastructure: working paper (accessible webpage) – GOV.UK ↑
Scottish Government (2020) ↑
Scottish Government (2024) ↑
Scottish Government (2019) ↑
Scottish Government (2023) ↑
Community benefit funds typically mean that developers will voluntarily contribute a certain amount of funding to local communities. In some cases, the level of funding is linked to the amount of installed capacity of the project or the amount of energy produced. ↑
Kerr et al (2017), Anchustegui (2021), Kerr & Weir (2018), O San Martin et al (2022), Scottish Government (2022), Scottish Government (2019), Scottish Government (2018) ↑
O San Martin et al (2022) ↑
Anchustegui (2021) ↑
Glasson (2020) ↑
https://localenergy.scot/community-benefits-register/ ↑
Kerr et al (2017) ↑
In the reviewed literature, shared ownership was a common practice in countries outside the UK, notably in Germany and Denmark. However, this is not outlined here as shared ownership is not part of the Scottish Government’s definition of community benefits. ↑
le Maitre, 2024; Toledano, et al., 2023; O San Martin, et al., 2022; ↑
Anchustegui, 2021 ↑
Lansbury Hall, 2020; Regen, 2022; Lane, et al., 2019; ↑
Energy UK, 2024 ↑
Centre for Sustainable Energy (CSE), 2005; Walker, 2023; Glasson, 2020; Chen, 2024 ↑
Regen, 2022 ↑
van den Berg & Tempels (2022); Glasson (2020) ↑
Kerr & Weir (2018), Scottish Government (2022) ↑
le Maitre (2024) ↑
Glasson (2020) ↑
Rudolph et al. (2014) ↑
Rudolph et al. (2014) ↑
Glasson (2020) ↑
Glasson (2020) ↑
Glasson (2020) ↑
SSE Renewables (2024) ↑
Regen (2022) ↑
Le Maitre et al. (2024) ↑
Wind Europe (n.d.); San Martin (2022); Arsenova et al. (2024); Anchustegui (2021) ↑
Klain et al. (2017) ↑
Lane & Hicks (2019) ↑
Lane & Hicks (2019) ↑
Chen et al. (2024); Klain et al. (2017); Rudolph et al. (2014) ↑
Glasson (2020), Manitius (2023), Arsenova & Wlokas (2019), BiGGAR Economics (2024a), BiGGAR Economics (2024b), Toledano et al. (2023) ↑
Klain et al. (2017) ↑
Wind Europe (n.d.) ↑
Chen et al. (2024), Klain et al. (2017) ↑
Arsenova & Wlokas (2019) ↑
Arsenova & Wlokas (2019) ↑
US Department of Energy (2024) ↑
Department for Energy Security and Net Zero (2023) ↑
Anchustegui, 2021; Kerr, 2017; le Maitre, 2024; Rudolph, et al., 2014; Toledano, et al., 2023; Arsenova,et al., 2019 ↑
Herrera (2021) ↑
Herrera (2021) ↑
le Maitre (2024) ↑
Toledano, et al. ↑
Arsenova, et al., 2024 ↑
Kerr et al (2017); le Maitre (2024) ↑
le Maitre (2024) ↑
BiGGAR Economics (2023) ↑
Four operational offshore wind projects were in Scotland, two in Wales and fifteen in England. ↑
The Pearson correlation coefficient measures how strongly two variables are linearly related, ranging from -1 (perfect negative correlation) to 1 (perfect positive correlation), with 0 indicating no linear relationship. ↑
https://www.gov.uk/government/statistics/energy-trends-section-6-renewables ↑
https://www.ofgem.gov.uk/energy-data-and-research/data-portal/wholesale-market-indicators Wholesale market indicators | Ofgem ↑
It is recommended to aim for a minimum of 5 years of historical data. This provides a reasonable basis for identifying trends and patterns, while also smoothing out short-term fluctuations or anomalies. ↑
As part of its commitment to achieving net zero by 2045, the Scottish Government has ambitions for Scotland to become a major exporter of low-carbon hydrogen and hydrogen derivatives and products (HDPs).
Hydrogen can be produced using electrolysis, a process which involves splitting water into hydrogen and oxygen. When this process is performed using only renewable sources of electricity, the hydrogen produced is known as green hydrogen.
This study explores Scotland’s capabilities of producing green hydrogen and developing the HDP sector, identifying opportunities and barriers it may face in scaling it up. It also aims to understand the role different regions of Scotland can play in enabling the growth of these sectors.
Findings
Scotland’s abundant access to renewable energy, geographic proximity to the EU, skilled workforce and a favourable external policy landscape are major strengths that can enable growth in the hydrogen and HDP sectors. However, there are potential weaknesses and barriers too. Producing renewable electricity, a major cost source for producing green hydrogen, is currently relatively expensive in Scotland, with prices around 70% higher than the average of EU and G7 countries.
Supply chain capabilities and addressable market demand
Following a systematic comparison of the supply chain capabilities of 14 potential hydrogen hubs identified by the Scottish Government, Aberdeen ranked the highest in many metrics, followed by Cromarty and Ayrshire.
The report also assessed the addressable market demand for HDPs. Roughly 97% of all HDP demand comes from the aviation and maritime sectors and Grangemouth was estimated to have the biggest market demand for both.
Co-locating demand and supply will enable the early scaling of Scotland’s hydrogen and HDP sectors as national network infrastructure is developed. Analysis of both supply and demand found that with the presence of a large chemicals industry and a major airport, Grangemouth outperforms all other hubs. Despite relative strengths in supply chain capability, Aberdeen is not the optimal region for co-locating supply with demand opportunities.
Policy gaps
Analysis of the policy landscape in the UK, the EU and Scotland suggests a number of potential approaches to help develop the hydrogen and HDP sectors. Scotland’s abundant access to renewable energy, strong workforce capabilities and demand potential can facilitate vibrant hydrogen and HDP sectors. However, Scotland will need to address issues such as:
- the high cost of electricity generation;
- a more sophisticated planning regime that considers both site demand and supply in order to optimise co-location strategies.
Working with the UK and foreign governments to capitalise on export opportunities will allow Scotland to expand its potential market size.
Cross-hub development
Although Aberdeen and Grangemouth stand out as having relative strengths in relation to supply chain capabilities and market demand, there are strengths and capabilities across the other potential hubs. Cromarty and Ayrshire offer strong supply chain capabilities. Glasgow and Fife present significant demand opportunities. The Western Isles and Argyll and Islands may require targeted support to enhance their supply chain capabilities, while the Scottish Borders may need support in developing greater regulatory experience.
This diversity points to the importance of a cross-hub approach, in addition to co-locating demand with supply. By balancing cross-hub collaboration with localised development, Scotland can maximise the potential of its hydrogen economy, driving the sector’s long-term growth and resilience.
For further information, please read the report.
If you require the report in an alternative format, such as a Word document, please contact info@climatexchange.org.uk or 0131 651 4783.
Research completed: April 2025
DOI: http://dx.doi.org/10.7488/era/6397
Executive summary
Aims
The Scottish Government is committed to achieving net zero emissions by 2045, five years ahead of the UK’s target. Scotland also aims to become a major exporter of low carbon hydrogen derivatives and products (HDPs) and has access to the abundant renewable energy necessary for their production. Hydrogen derivatives are chemicals produced from hydrogen that can more easily be stored and transported and then converted back to hydrogen for later use. Examples include ammonia and methanol. Hydrogen products, such as sustainable aviation fuels (SAFs), do not need a further conversion process and are used for a range of applications.
Hydrogen can be produced using electrolysis, a process which involves splitting water into hydrogen and oxygen. When this process is performed using only renewable sources of electricity, the hydrogen produced can be deemed as green hydrogen.
As green hydrogen supply is crucial for the development of HDP production, this study explores Scotland’s strengths and weaknesses in developing both the green hydrogen and HDP sectors. Throughout this study, the term “hydrogen and HDP sector” is used to include green hydrogen and HDPs produced using that green hydrogen.
This study analyses Scotland’s supply chain capabilities in producing HDPs and identifies opportunities and barriers it may face in scaling up the hydrogen and HDP sectors. It also aims to understand the role different regions of Scotland can play in enabling the growth of these sectors.
Findings
Scotland’s abundant access to renewable energy, geographic proximity to the EU, skilled workforce and a favourable external policy landscape are major strengths that can enable growth in the hydrogen and HDP sectors. However, there are potential weaknesses and barriers too. Producing renewable electricity, a major cost source for producing green hydrogen, is currently relatively expensive in Scotland, with prices around 70% higher than the average of EU and G7 countries.
Supply chain capabilities
The Scottish Government’s Hydrogen Action Plan identified 14 hydrogen hubs. This report systematically compared the supply chain capabilities of each for producing HDPs. Hubs were assessed on:
- Availability of feedstock (i.e., production source material)
- Economic factors from co-located industries
- Workforce and skills
- Infrastructure,
- Local policy and planning support, and
- Co-location with innovation institutions
For comparison, the Duisburg region of Germany was assessed against the same metrics, as a potential competitor to Scottish hubs.
Aberdeen ranked the highest in many metrics, followed by Cromarty and Ayrshire. The Duisburg hub also scored highly on several metrics. The aim was not to find a single best hub. Aberdeen’s high score suggests that it is currently relatively well-developed against the supply chain metrics, it does not suggest that this is the sole hub suitable for developing Scotland’s hydrogen and HDP sectors.
Addressable market demand
The report estimated the addressable market demand for HDPs in each hub. The HDPs considered were ammonia and e-methanol for the maritime sector, ammonia-based fertiliser for the agriculture sector, e-methanol feedstock for the chemical sector, and SAF for aviation.
The addressable demand for all HDPs in all the sectors is around 35 TWh. Roughly 97% of this comes from just the aviation and maritime sectors. Grangemouth is estimated to have the biggest market for HDPs in both sectors.
Co-locating demand and supply
Co-locating demand and supply will enable the early scaling of Scotland’s hydrogen and HDP sectors as national network infrastructure is developed. Aberdeen and Grangemouth both stand out as key hubs for the development of Scotland’s HDP economy. Analysis of supply and demand found that with the presence of a large chemicals industry and a major airport, Grangemouth outperforms all other hubs.
Despite relative strengths in supply chain capability, Aberdeen is not the optimal region for co-locating supply with demand opportunities because the maximum demand potential is higher in Grangemouth.
There are significant hazards associated with HDPs bringing associated regulatory requirements. Analysis of current Control of Major Accidents and Hazards (COMAH) site locations provides insight into the infrastructure and the expertise needed to handle HDPs safely. Fife, Glasgow, Moray and Grangemouth hubs have the most COMAH sites, bringing relatively strong experience in this regulatory environment.
Policy gaps
Analysis of the policy landscape in the UK, the EU and Scotland suggests a number of potential approaches to help develop the hydrogen and HDP sectors. Scotland’s abundant access to renewable energy, strong workforce capabilities and demand potential can facilitate a vibrant hydrogen and HDP sectors. However, Scotland will need to address issues such as:
- the high cost of electricity generation;
- a more sophisticated planning regime that considers both site demand and supply in order to optimise co-location strategies.
Working with the UK and foreign governments to capitalise on export opportunities will allow Scotland to expand its potential market size.
Conclusions
Hub development requires both a cross-hub approach and strategic co-location of regional supply and demand. Individual hubs should not be considered in isolation. Particular hubs score relatively highly but this does not preclude a very significant role for other hubs within the overall hydrogen and HDP sectors.
Aberdeen and Grangemouth stand out as having relative strengths in relation to co-location of supply chain capabilities with demand. Cromarty and Ayrshire offer strong supply chain capabilities. Glasgow and Fife present significant demand opportunities. The Western Isles and Argyll and Islands may require targeted support to enhance their supply chain capabilities. The Scottish Borders may need support in developing greater regulatory experience.
By balancing cross-hub collaboration with localised development, Scotland can maximise the potential of its hydrogen economy, driving the sector’s long-term growth and resilience.
Glossary / Abbreviations
Abbreviations
|
COMAH |
Control of Major Accident Hazards |
|
FEED |
Front-End Engineering Design |
|
FTE |
Full-Time Equivalent |
|
GHS |
Globally Harmonized System of Classification and Labelling of Chemicals |
|
GSMR |
Gas Safety (Management) Regulations 1996 |
|
GVA |
Gross Value Added |
|
HPBM |
Hydrogen Production Business Model |
|
HSBM |
Hydrogen Storage Business Model |
|
HSE |
Health and Safety Executive |
|
HTBM |
Hydrogen Transport Business Model |
|
IMO |
International Maritime Organization |
|
IPCEI |
Important Projects of Common European Interest |
|
IRENA |
International Renewable Energy Agency |
|
LOHC |
Liquid Organic Hydrogen Carrier |
|
MCH |
Methylcyclohexane |
|
MoU |
Memorandum of Understanding |
|
NSIP |
Nationally Significant Infrastructure Project |
|
NSTA |
North Sea Transition Authority |
|
NZHF |
Net Zero Hydrogen Fund |
|
REPD |
Renewable Energy Planning Database |
|
RFNBO |
Renewable fuels of non-biological origin |
|
SAF |
Sustainable Aviation Fuel |
|
SEPA |
Scottish Environment Protection Agency |
|
SIC |
Standard Industrial Classification |
Glossary of units
|
gCO₂e/MJ |
Grams of CO₂ equivalent per megajoule |
|
J |
Joule |
|
kg CO₂-eq/kg |
Kilograms of CO₂ equivalent per kilogram |
|
Wh |
Watt-hour |
|
m |
Metre |
|
% |
Percentage |
|
t |
Tonne |
|
W |
Watt |
Introduction
Scotland has set an ambitious target to reach net zero by 2045. To be able to achieve its targets, Scotland will have to rapidly decarbonise its economy. The Scottish Government is exploring options to use hydrogen to decarbonise certain sectors and to develop current HDP capabilities in support of climate goals. Scotland ultimately aims to produce 5 GW of low-carbon hydrogen by 2030 and 25 GW by 2045. In addition to reaching its net zero goals, the Scottish Government also aims to utilise these resources to capitalise on export and other economic opportunities. Green hydrogen is expected to be the dominant low carbon production method in Scotland. This study focuses solely on HDPs produced from green hydrogen, which are referred to as “HDPs” throughout this report.
In this study we aim to explore Scotland’s supply chain capabilities. To situate the need for this research, we conducted a review of existing literature (see Appendix A: Current state of play). Our review of the literature analyses the strengths that Scotland possesses to scale up its hydrogen and HDP sectors. It also details some of the biggest barriers that Scotland is likely to face. The review then focusses briefly on specific HDPs and their potential role in enabling Scotland’s transition to net zero.
We also analyse Scotland’s strengths and weaknesses in developing its capabilities. We focus on assessing the opportunities and challenges associated with exporting HDPs to the rest of the UK and the EU. Moreover, we aim to understand the role that different regions of Scotland can play in enabling the development of HDP production. We have identified 14 regional hydrogen hubs in Scotland from the Scottish Government’s Hydrogen Action Plan (2022), shown in Table 1. In addition to the Scottish hubs, the study also considers the Ruhr region of Germany as an alternative hub. Scotland is expected to export a significant amount of its green hydrogen produce to the EU. Therefore, the Ruhr region of Germany was considered as a potential alternative source of green hydrogen for the EU.
For each metric, we rank the hubs to analyse their relative strengths, before combining these rankings into a final capability score for each hub in Section 3.8. In this manner, we provide a balanced and quantitative assessment of the relative supply chain capabilities of Scotland’s hydrogen hubs. It is important to note that the purpose of this analysis is not to find the absolute “best” hydrogen hub in Scotland. By ranking the hubs in each metric, we have assessed their relative strengths and weaknesses.
In an international market, Scotland’s hubs will be competing with various other green hydrogen and HDP production areas. As Scotland aims to export to Europe, in particular Germany, it will have to compete with local European production (Scottish Government, 2024). Germany’s Ruhr region aspires to be the first model hydrogen region to accelerate the hydrogen sector in Europe (Hydrogen Metropole Ruhr, 2023). Hydrogen is already playing a role in developing HDP production in the region (Metropole Ruhr Business, 2025). One example is the Greenlyte’s project in Marl which is producing e-methanol from CO2 and green hydrogen. In August 2025, this project secured a 7-figure e-methanol offtake agreement with Germany-based MB Energy, indicating substantial market interest for HDPs produced in the Ruhr region (Greenlyte, 2025). Given Ruhr’s strong ambitions, to evaluate Scotland’s competitiveness at the international level, we will compare the Scottish hubs with the hydrogen hub of Duisburg, situated in the Ruhr region.
In subsequent chapters, we analyse the supply chain capabilities of each hub in Scotland, addressable demand for various HDPs in different sectors, and the regulatory environment related to safety. The final chapter focusses on the wider policy landscape, analysing gaps and providing recommendations to policymakers.
Table 1: List of Scottish hubs and their corresponding local authorities.
|
Hub |
Corresponding local authorities |
|
Aberdeen |
Aberdeenshire and Aberdeen City |
|
Argyll and Islands |
Argyll and Bute |
|
Ayrshire |
East Ayrshire, North Ayrshire, and South Ayrshire |
|
Cromarty |
Highlands |
|
Moray |
Moray |
|
Dumfries and Galloway |
Dumfries and Galloway |
|
Dundee |
Dundee and Angus |
|
Fife |
Fife |
|
Glasgow |
East Dunbartonshire, East Renfrewshire, Glasgow City, North Lanarkshire, Renfrewshire, South Lanarkshire and West Dunbartonshire |
|
Grangemouth |
Clackmannanshire, Falkirk and Stirling |
|
Orkney |
Orkney Islands |
|
Scottish Borders |
Scottish Borders |
|
Shetland |
Shetland Islands |
|
Western Isles |
Western Isles |
Supply chain capabilities of Scotland’s hydrogen hubs
In this chapter, we investigate the relative supply chain capabilities of Scotland’s hydrogen hubs to produce HDPs. We have selected six capability groups for evaluation (shown in Table 2). These groups are broadly based on the six key advantages for hydrogen production identified in the Scottish Government’s Hydrogen Action Plan (2024). Certain capability groups, such as pipeline infrastructure, are highly dependent on future developments at a national and international level. The results from analysing all these capability groups will allow us to assess each hub’s intrinsic and long-term supply chain strengths that will enable the fast growth of the hydrogen and HDP sectors.
We have then broken down these groups further into assessment metrics in order to accurately evaluate the capability groups against available data. This analysis produces detailed hub differentiation to support actionable conclusions for policymakers. Table 2 shows each capability group and their associated metrics. Further information on metric methodology, sources and data is found in Appendix B.
Table 2: Capability groups and assessment metrics for evaluating the supply chain capabilities.
|
Capability group |
Assessment metric |
|
Feedstock and inputs |
Maximum potential renewable power generation |
|
Water availability | |
|
Economic output from relevant co-located industries |
Gross Value Added of the energy sector |
|
Workforce and skills |
Full time equivalent workers in energy and engineering |
|
Future workforce requirements | |
|
Infrastructure |
Large-scale storage capacity |
|
Pipeline network infrastructure | |
|
Ports | |
|
Local policy and planning support |
Processing time for industrial planning applications |
|
Success rate of industrial planning applications | |
|
Co-location with innovation institutions |
Innovation institutions with facilities for pilot-scale testing |
Feedstock and inputs
Renewable electricity and water are the two fundamental feedstocks for green hydrogen production. The availability of both can be seen to vary, by region. This is in contrast to the supply of nitrogen for e-ammonia or carbon dioxide for e-methanol, where both feedstocks are derived from air, via direct air capture and can therefore be assumed to be equally available to all hubs.
Maximum potential renewable power generation
Scotland’s abundant renewable energy resources are key to its net zero transition. In particular, the Scottish Government has identified Scotland’s extensive offshore wind resource as a considerable opportunity for green hydrogen production (Scottish Government, 2020). Under a business-as-usual scenario, installed offshore wind capacity is expected to rise from 3.4 GW in 2025 to 27 GW in 2045 (Scottish Government, 2020). Green Hydrogen production can support this growth by helping to overcome Scotland’s grid constraints.
The co-location of renewable energy generation and HDP production takes advantage of existing infrastructure, reduced electricity transmission costs and improved project economics. An example of co-location is Scottish Power’s planned 20 MW Whitelee Green Hydrogen Project near Glasgow (Scottish Power, 2024). The facility will be co-located with a 70 MW combined Solar and Battery Energy Storage Scheme. Adjacent is the 539 MW Whitelee Windfarm and substation.
We have analysed the maximum potential renewable power generation for each hub, based on the total current, planned and announced installed capacity of solar and wind power projects (DESNEZ, 2024; Offshore Wind Scotland, 2024). We scaled the resulting capacities by the appropriate load factor to determine the maximum potential renewable power generation (see Appendix B for load factors). For offshore wind, we assigned each project to the hub associated with its current or forecasted onshore landing point.
Figure 1: Maximum potential renewable power generation split by current and future (planned and announced) projects.
The order of hubs by maximum potential renewable power generation is shown in Figure 1. As shown from left to right, Aberdeen is ranked first and Duisburg, Germany is ranked last.
We can take several key insights from Figure 1:
- Access to future wind projects, particularly offshore wind, broadly determines which hubs have the most renewable power capability. Aberdeen, ranked first, accounts for around 50% of planned and announced offshore wind capacity among the Scottish hubs.
- Hubs with large future offshore wind projects – such as the announced ScotWind projects – lead the rankings (Offshore Wind Scotland, 2024). These hubs include Aberdeen, Cromarty and Moray.
- Grangemouth, with no current or future offshore wind capacity, ranks lowest among the Scottish hubs.
- As a densely populated hub, with no offshore wind, Duisburg ranks lowest overall.
Water availability
Sustainable water management is vital to balancing our water demand with environmental and ecological needs. Therefore, it is important to identify the water supply for hydrogen production early in the development process to ensure sufficient availability.
The electrolysis process requires large volumes of treated water, which is split to form hydrogen and oxygen. Reviewing the commercial electrolyser technologies, an estimated 10 litres of water is required per kilogram of green hydrogen produced (Ramboll, 2022). Water for green hydrogen production can be obtained from several sources, shown in Table 3:
Table 3: Sources of water for green hydrogen production (Ramboll, 2022).
|
Type of water |
Definition for the purpose of this study |
|
Effluent |
Treated effluent from Scottish Water’s Wastewater Treatment Works |
|
Surface water |
Freshwater abstracted from rivers, lochs and reservoirs |
|
Groundwater |
Freshwater abstracted from bedrock |
|
Potable water |
Drinking water |
|
Sea water |
Saltwater which is abstracted and desalinated |
Where possible a local water supply should be used for green hydrogen production, due to the cost of transporting water over long distances (Ramboll, 2022). Ramboll proposes that effluent should be the first water source considered as it does not compete with other sectors such as agriculture. Surface water, groundwater and potable water may be sourced from the mains water supply dependant on capacity and infrastructure availability. However, the use of potable water should be avoided where possible (Ramboll, 2022). While desalination has not been established for water supply in Scotland, the use of seawater may be an interesting option for the future hub development, particularly for island hubs which have less connectivity to mains infrastructure. However, for this analysis, we have focused on Scotland’s current water infrastructure capabilities from mains water supply and regional Scottish Water Wastewater Treatment Works.
In 2022, Ramboll, on behalf of SGN, investigated the water availability for green hydrogen production across Scotland (Ramboll, 2022). Drawing on Ramboll’s work, Table 4 shows the maximum green hydrogen production potential, based on water availability and the forecasted installed green hydrogen production capacity in 2045. We used these figures to assess water availability for the forecasted installed capacity in 2045. For Duisburg, we applied the same assumptions used for the Scottish hubs (Ramboll, 2022, pp. 26-27).
Table 4: Water availability ranking by hub
|
Hub |
Forecasted installed green hydrogen capacity in 2045 (GW) |
Maximum potential installed green hydrogen production based on water availability (GW) |
Water availability ranking |
|---|---|---|---|
|
Glasgow |
2.50 |
239.2 |
1 |
|
Grangemouth |
2.00 |
145.9 |
2 |
|
Dundee |
0.25 |
73.0 |
3 |
|
Fife |
0.25 |
67.8 |
4 |
|
Cromarty |
5.00 |
61.2 |
5 |
|
Ayrshire |
0.50 |
47.5 |
6 |
|
Aberdeen |
0.50 |
44.5 |
7 |
|
Dumfries and Galloway |
0.50 |
26.7 |
8 |
|
Moray |
2.00 |
26.6 |
9 |
|
Scottish Borders |
0.00 |
22.9 |
10 |
|
Duisburg |
1.00 |
14.0 |
11 |
|
Argyll and Islands |
0.13 |
11.4 |
12 |
|
Western Isles |
0.12 |
9.1 |
13 |
|
Orkney |
0.05 |
1.5 |
14 |
|
Shetland |
6.30 |
2.0 |
15 |
The relative water availability for hubs is shown in Table 4, from which we can take several key insights:
- Overall, water availability is unlikely to limit the deployment of forecasted green hydrogen installed capacity. However, future water abstraction may be limited by regulatory changes, land use restrictions, and competing demand.
- Shetland is ranked in last place as it is the only hub where forecasted green hydrogen production requires more water than is currently deliverable. This issue could be mitigated if desalination infrastructure is made available.
- Populous areas are more favourable for expanding green hydrogen production capacity based on water availability. These areas have greater effluent wastewater availability, which does not compete directly with other use cases. For example, Glasgow could potentially produce up to 203 GW of green hydrogen from effluent water. Orkney, in comparison, could only produce up to 0.03 GW.
- The island hubs (Western Isles, Orkney and Shetland) rank lowest. This is due to their limited freshwater supply and small population.
Economic output from relevant co-located industries
Gross Value Added of the energy sector
To evaluate the economic output from relevant co-located industries, we have compared the gross value added (GVA) of the energy sector in each hub. A high GVA signals that a region has a strong existing industrial base, infrastructure and workforce for the energy sector. This makes GVA a useful indicator of the investment attractiveness of establishing local hydrogen and HDP sectors.
Using the Scottish Government’s Industry Statistics, we have calculated the approximate gross value added of the energy industry for each hub in 2022 (Scottish Government, 2024). The definition of energy sector is based on Standard Industrial Classification (SIC) Codes 2007 and is outlined further in Appendix B. Generally, these SIC codes cover the following industries:
- Fossil fuel extraction and mining
- Manufacturing of petroleum products and other organic chemicals
- Energy supply e.g. electricity
- Water processing and supply
- Waste treatment and disposal
- Engineering and environmental consultancy
Figure 2: Estimated balanced GVA of the energy sector (2022).
The order of hubs by energy sector GVA is shown in Figure 2 from left to right. Aberdeen’s energy sector has the highest GVA at £25.9 billion in 2022; the Western Isles has the lowest, with a GVA of £16.8 million. Aberdeen, as the primary base of operations for the UK’s offshore oil and gas industry, is by far the major contributor to Scotland’s energy sector GVA (Port of Aberdeen, 2025).
For Duisburg, we conducted a separate analysis to allow comparison on a like-for-like basis using available data. Considering the Production Sector, as defined by SIC Codes 2007, Duisburg is ranked second after Aberdeen with a GVA of £4.15 billion (Länder, 2024; Office for National Statistics, 2024).
Workforce and skills
For this capability group, we have assessed the current workforce and the future workforce metrics for each hub. The expanding hydrogen and HDP sectors will demand a skilled and educated workforce. Scotland’s existing energy and engineering professionals are best positioned to make this transition, although not all will do so. To account for this unknown, we have evaluated future workforce requirements as well as the current transferable workforce.
Full time equivalent workers in energy and engineering
We have analysed the number of full-time equivalent (FTE) workers in these sectors (Skills Development Scotland, 2024). This will provide us with an indication of the relative workforce availability between the hubs.
Figure 3: Number of FTE workers in the energy and engineering sectors by hub
Figure 3 shows that Aberdeen has the most workers in energy and engineering with 71,100 FTEs; the Western Isles ranks lowest with only 400 FTEs. We can take several key insights from Figure 3:
- Aberdeen and Glasgow are the hubs with the largest transferable workforce. Among all the hubs, Aberdeen and Glasgow contain 70% of all FTE workers in energy and engineering.
- Skilled workforce availability may be a challenge for island hubs. There are only 1600 FTEs in energy and engineering across Shetland, Orkney and the Western Isles combined.
Future workforce requirements
We evaluated the hubs in terms of their future workforce requirements, analysing estimated demand for Scottish workers in the energy and engineering sectors. Labour forecasts can be divided into two categories: replacement demand and expansion demand. For this study, we have only considered expansion demand[1].
Positive expansion demand represents increasing labour demand due to sector growth. Negative expansion demand suggests shrinking sectors, demanding less labour. The time period considered for this analysis was 2027-2034.
Hubs with higher expansion demand will see more competitive labour market conditions. Growing hydrogen and HDP sectors in such hubs can be expected to increase labour competition further. Hubs with negative expansion demand are expected to have less competitive labour market conditions in the future. Growing the HDP sector in such hubs will not exacerbate competition for skilled workers, as the number of jobs is likely to exceed the number of available workers.
Figure 4: Estimated expansion labour demand in energy and engineering sectors.
Figure 4 shows Aberdeen with the lowest expansion demand of -4,600 people. This means the engineering and energy sectors in Aberdeen will require 4,600 fewer workers in the period 2027-2034 compared to today. Glasgow, Fife, Ayrshire and Grangemouth follow with expansion demands between around -1,500 (Glasgow) and -700 (Grangemouth). These hubs are likely to have the least competitive labour market conditions in the future, implying less competition for workers in the growing hydrogen and HDP sectors. As Figure 4 shows, none of the hubs is forecast to have positive expansion demand: more additional workers are not expected to be needed in any hub. The labour market environment for engineering and energy jobs, within each of the hubs, appears to be favourable for growing Scotland’s hydrogen and HDP sectors.
It is worth reiterating that replacement demand has not been considered in this analysis. Therefore, it is important to understand that this analysis does not provide a full image of the future labour market for the hubs in these two sectors.
Infrastructure
Regional infrastructure is key for facilitating the storage, distribution and trade of green hydrogen to supply HDP production. In A Trading Nation – Realising Scotland’s Hydrogen Potential – A Plan for Exports, the Scottish Government identified ports, pipelines and large-scale storage as the three connectivity pillars required to enable the hydrogen and HDP sector’s growth (2024). Here, we investigate each hub’s relative strengths.
Large-scale storage capacity
Large-scale storage will be required to scale up hydrogen production and balance supply and demand. This scale of storage will likely be provided by underground geological storage, rather than aboveground storage which is constrained by land availability. There are several types of geological storage, which are described in Table 5.
Table 5: Types of geological storage for hydrogen and their technology readiness levels (ClimateXChange, 2023).
|
Geological storage technology |
Description |
Technology readiness level (1 = lowest, 9 = highest) |
|---|---|---|
|
Salt caverns |
Most mature hydrogen storage technology, formed of an underground cavity in a rock salt layer. |
9 |
|
Saline aquifers |
Deep, porous rock formations filled with salty water. Previously used for commercial town gas (50% hydrogen) storage. |
2-3 |
|
Depleted oil and gas fields |
Former fields can be repurposed for storage. This technology already provides the majority of global gas storage capacity. |
3-4 |
There are currently no projects to develop commercial geological hydrogen storage in Scotland. Moreover, apart from salt caverns, these technologies are still immature. So, we have assessed the technical geological storage capacity for each hub. For this, we have used available estimates from scientific literature. We assigned storage capacities to each hub based on their location or, if offshore, their likely terminal. The locations and total technical capacity for each storage technology is shown in Table 6.
Table 6: Technical capacity and locations for geological storage types in Scotland.
|
Type of storage |
Locations in Scotland |
Technical capacity in Scotland (TWh) |
|---|---|---|
|
Onshore salt caverns |
|
0 TWh (ClimateXChange, 2023) |
|
Offshore salt caverns |
|
Unknown |
|
Saline aquifers |
|
2048 TWh of offshore storage capacity (Safidi, et al., 2021). |
|
Depleted oil and gas fields |
|
1115 TWh maximum potential capacity including producing fields (Peecock, et al., 2022) |
We scored the hubs based on their total geological storage capacity for hydrogen. We then adjusted these scores to account for the possibility of developing offshore salt caverns and planned pipeline connections to English salt caverns.
Figure 5: Large-scale storage capacity by hub.
Figure 5 shows the relative strength of hubs in terms of geological storage capacity. As shown from left to right, Aberdeen is ranked highest, and the Western Isles is ranked lowest. We can take several key insights from our analysis and the rankings in Figure 5:
- The most attractive hubs – Aberdeen, Moray, Shetland – are those with terminals for potential offshore geological storage infrastructure.
- There is a vast opportunity, particularly in Aberdeen, for repurposing depleted oil and gas fields as production tails off. This would extend the fields’ economic value and build on Scotland’s oil and gas expertise.
- With the construction of a national hydrogen pipeline infrastructure, connected hubs with a lack of geological storage may be able to pipe hydrogen to other storage facilities.
- Duisburg is advantaged by the fact that nearby hydrogen storage projects are under development (e.g. the RWE Gas Storage West project in Epe) (Hornby, 2023). These projects will be connected to Duisburg by the approved German core hydrogen network.
Pipeline network infrastructure
Scotland is actively pursuing several large-scale hydrogen pipeline projects to maximise the potential of our hydrogen and HDP sector (Scottish Government, 2024). Several key projects include the National Gas Project Union and an offshore pipeline from Scotland to Germany:
- National Gas Project Union will repurpose sections of the UK National Transmission System to carry 100% hydrogen (National Gas, 2025). These transmission pipelines will stretch from St Fergus in Aberdeenshire, down Scotland’s east coast and throughout the UK.
- The H2 Caledonia project plans to construct new hydrogen transmission pipeline to support the creation of Scotland’s hydrogen ecosystem (SGN, 2023). This project combines pre-FEED projects in Scotland’s Central Belt, Fife’s East coast and the Aberdeen Vision study.
- The Scottish Government is in Phase 2 of a project which is considering the development of an offshore pipeline from northeast Scotland to Germany. This would connect Scotland to the European Hydrogen Backbone pipelines (2024).
To score each hub’s potential pipeline infrastructure, we used the following scale from 1-6:
- There is no pipeline infrastructure suitable for hydrogen and no proposed or planned new hydrogen pipelines.
- There are existing gas pipelines which can be repurposed. There are no planned new hydrogen pipelines but there may be some projects proposed.
- There is a small-scale (e.g. distribution/spur pipelines) hydrogen pipeline project at any phase of development.
- There is a large-scale (e.g. trunkline pipelines) hydrogen pipeline project at any phase of development.
- The hub is a potential international export or import site for hydrogen and HDPs. However, the planned pipeline infrastructure is insufficient and/or the site is not well-established for international trade.
- The hub is a potential international export or import site for hydrogen and HDPs. There is sufficient planned pipeline infrastructure, and the site is well-established for international trade.
Figure 6: Hydrogen pipeline network infrastructure by hub.
Figure 6 shows the final hub scores for hydrogen pipeline infrastructure. As shown from left to right, Aberdeen is ranked highest, and the Argyll and Islands is ranked lowest.
We can take several key insights from our analysis and the hub rankings in Figure 6:
- In Scotland, Aberdeen, Cromarty, Orkney and Shetland are all hubs which could support export activity. They are all being considered as export locations for the Scotland to Germany pipeline project (Net Zero Technology Centre, 2023).
- Aberdeen and Duisburg rank highest with a score of 6/6.
- In the Aberdeen hub, St Fergus Gas Terminal is recognised as a well-established export route. St Fergus will be connected to the rest of the UK by the Project Union Hydrogen backbone pipeline project.
- With the largest inland container port in the world, Duisburg is planning to be a major import hub for hydrogen and HDPs (Gasunie, 2023). The approved 9,040 km German hydrogen core network should connect Duisburg sufficiently (Bundesnetzagentur, 2024).
- Hubs on the east coast of Scotland will benefit most from national and international trading opportunities. This is due to their relative proximity to mainland Europe and their planned connection to the Project Union and H2 Caledonia pipelines.
Ports
Access to ports is crucial for hydrogen hubs for several reasons:
- To engage in the trading and export of hydrogen (as a liquid, gas or LOHC) and HDPs by ship.
- To capitalise on the growing demand for HDPs to be used as shipping fuels, such as ammonia and e-methanol.
We have investigated which hubs are most suitable for meeting maritime shipping fuel demand and for trading hydrogen and HDPs by ship. To evaluate the scale of each hub’s maritime industry, we first scored the hubs based on the total freight traffic through their ports. This analysis was based on the Department for Transport’s Port Freight Statistics Publication (Maritime Statistics, 2024). We adjusted these initial scores based on several criteria, including:
- Does the hub have a port with existing or planned infrastructure for the storage, production or maritime fuelling of hydrogen/HDPs?
- Does the hub have a port with dimensions suitable for a typical small carrier vessel for transporting gas or ammonia? The Scottish Government defines these dimensions as a 100m length, 25m beam and a 12m draft (2020, p. 63).
- Does the hub have a port which is suitable for hydrogen/HDP exports to mainland Europe, as considered by the Scottish Government? Or, for Duisburg, is the hub a key port for hydrogen imports into Europe?
Figure 7: Port suitability for the hydrogen sector (higher score = more suitable).
Figure 7 shows the final hub scores and ranking for ports. As shown from left to right, Duisburg is ranked highest, and the Scottish Borders is ranked lowest. Several key insights can be made based on our analysis:
- Duisburg ranks highest with regards to port suitability for the hydrogen and HDP sector. As the largest inland container port in the world, Duisburg has by far the largest potential maritime fuel demand (Duisburger Hafen HG, 2025).
- Considering all of Scotland’s ports, Forth Ports in Grangemouth and Fife have the most freight traffic at around 19 million tonnes in 2023. Although, this figure only represents around half of Duisburg’s total freight traffic.
- The Scottish Government considers that the Aberdeen, Fife, Grangemouth, Shetland, Cromarty and Orkney hubs are most attractive for exports to Europe (2020). These hubs also have existing or planned port infrastructure for hydrogen.
- Without port redevelopment, most hubs do not have ports with suitable dimensions for the trade of ammonia by a typical carrier vessel. Those that do include Cromarty, Shetland, Aberdeen and Orkney.
- The Scottish Borders ranks lowest as it has no major or minor freight traffic in the region, and it scored negatively for all additional criteria.
Local policy and planning support
In Scotland, most industrial planning applications must be approved at the local council level. Local policy and planning support are crucial in sanctioning the construction of hydrogen hubs in Scotland. Streamlined planning processes and supportive local policy will help expedite the development of a robust infrastructure network. To investigate this capability group, we evaluated the industrial planning process duration and success rate for each hub. Hubs with shorter processing times and higher success rates for planning applications indicate that they are more supportive of industry and can support new infrastructure more efficiently.
Processing time for industrial planning applications
To assess hub processing time for industrial planning applications, we have taken an average of the relevant council areas. For Duisburg, the average processing time for construction permits in Germany is used (World Bank, 2024).
Figure 8: Average industrial planning process duration
Figure 8 shows the average number of weeks taken to process an industrial planning application in each hub. Ayrshire and Aberdeen are ranked highest with an average of 6.7 weeks of processing time, while Duisburg has an average 18-week processing time. Several insights can be taken from this analysis:
- Among the Scottish hubs, the range in average processing time is 10.9 weeks. The range of number of weeks taken is from 6.7 weeks to 18 weeks. This indicates disparity in local planning efficiency.
- On average, Scottish hubs process planning applications seven weeks faster than German industrial planning applications.
Success rate of industrial planning applications
To calculate the hub success rate for industrial planning applications, we have taken an average of the relevant council areas (Planning Application Statistics, 2024). No data was found for Duisburg, Argyll and Islands, Dumfries and Galloway, Moray, Orkney, Shetland or the Western Isles.
Figure 9: Hubs by average success rate of industrial planning applications.
Figure 9 shows the average success rate of industrial planning applications in each hub. The Scottish Borders is ranked highest with an average of 88%, while Ayrshire ranks lowest with an average of 50%.
When considering the average success rate and processing times for industrial planning applications together, Aberdeen is the most favourable hub for local planning and policy support. However, these two metrics do not always go hand-in-hand. While Ayrshire has the shortest processing duration for planning applications, these applications are also the least successful on average.
Co-location with innovation institutions
Innovation institutions with facilities for pilot-scale testing
Formed by Scottish Enterprise, the Scottish Hydrogen Innovation Network (SHINe) aims to support Scotland’s hydrogen and HDP sectors and accelerate innovation. SHINe innovation institutes can streamline access to the necessary infrastructure and expertise required to develop a successful hydrogen and HDP sectors. To assess this metric, we ranked the hubs by the number of SHINe institutions present. Innovation institutions include a range of projects like pilot-scale manufacturing capabilities of hydrogen related components, green hydrogen production, research centres, etc (Table 7). For Duisburg, we have assessed the number of comparable innovation institutions in the area (Scottish Enterprise, 2025).
Table 7: Innovation institutions and their capability for pilot-scale manufacturing by hub. Hub ranking is shown descending from the top (highest) to bottom (lowest) of the table.
|
Rank |
Hub |
Innovation institutions |
Pilot-scale manufacturing |
|
1 |
Duisburg |
NH3toH2 |
Yes |
|
H2BF |
Yes | ||
|
ELECKTRA II |
Yes | ||
|
1 |
Aberdeen |
Energy Transition Zero |
Yes |
|
HyOne |
Yes | ||
|
Net Zero Technology Centre |
Yes | ||
|
2 |
Glasgow |
Glasgow Hydrogen Innovation Centre |
Yes |
|
Energy Technology Partnership |
Yes | ||
|
Power Networks Demonstration Centre |
No | ||
|
3 |
Dundee |
Michelin Scotland Innovation Parc |
Yes |
|
3 |
Orkney |
European Marine Energy Centre |
Yes |
|
4 |
Cromarty |
Powerhouse |
No |
|
5 |
All other hubs |
There are no SHINe innovation institutions. |
No |
From Table 7, we can take away several key insights:
- Aberdeen and Duisburg have the highest number of innovation institutions with pilot-scale manufacturing capabilities.
- SHINe innovation institutions are mostly concentrated in Scotland’s major cities – Aberdeen, Glasgow, Dundee and Edinburgh. One exception, with pilot-scale manufacturing capabilities, is the European Marine Energy Centre in Orkney.
- The majority of hubs have no local SHINe innovation institutions.
Financial aspects
While not included in the scope of this project, we recognise that financial aspects can impact hydrogen hub supply chain development. According to the UK Government, the UK’s industrial electricity prices were 25.85 pence per kWh in 2023 including taxes (Energy Prices Statistics Team, 2024). This price is 70% higher than the average of the EU and G7 countries. As electricity costs account for some 70% of the total cost of green hydrogen, these high prices could hamper grid-connected project economics (Renewable UK & Hydrogen UK, 2025). Regional hubs with higher electricity prices could be impacted more. Notably, North Scotland has some of the highest electricity distribution costs in the UK (Gallizzi, 2025). Additionally, rural hubs may experience greater transportation costs to procure goods, services, and labour. For island-based hubs, reliance on a rotational workforce from the mainland could further impact their competitiveness by driving up labour costs.
Overall supply chain capabilities
To assess overall supply chain capabilities, we have calculated a total score for each hub from the metrics discussed above. Each metric has been assigned a specific weight, based on their importance to producing HDPs and the confidence in the quality of available data. Table 8 shows the final weightings we applied to each metric. For each hub, we scaled each metric by the relevant weighting. We then summed the resulting metric scores to give a final score out of 100. The overall hub ranking for supply chain capability is shown in Figure 10.
It is important to note that the purpose of this analysis is not to find the absolute “best” hydrogen hub in Scotland. By ranking the hubs in each metric, we have assessed their relative strengths and weaknesses. This detailed analysis provides the nuance required to understand each hub’s overall supply chain capabilities. The metric weightings selected provide an expert-based view on the supply chain capabilities of each hub. However, as shown by sensitivity analysis (detailed in Appendix B), hub rankings can vary when metric weightings are altered. The conclusions drawn from the final hub scores detailed below should be viewed in this context.
Table 8: Metric weightings for final hub scoring.
|
Priority ranking |
Group weighting |
Capability group |
Metric |
Metric weighting |
|---|---|---|---|---|
|
1 |
25% |
Feedstock and inputs |
Maximum potential renewable power generation |
15% |
|
Water scarcity |
10% | |||
|
2 |
23% |
Workforce and skills |
Full time equivalent workers in energy and engineering |
13% |
|
Future workforce requirements |
10% | |||
|
3 |
22% |
Infrastructure |
Large-scale storage capacity |
3% |
|
Pipeline network infrastructure |
7% | |||
|
Ports |
12% | |||
|
4 |
15% |
Local policy and planning support |
Processing time for industrial planning applications |
12% |
|
Success rate of industrial planning applications |
3% | |||
|
5 |
10% |
Economic productivity of the energy sector |
Gross Value Added of the energy sector |
10% |
|
6 |
5% |
Co-location with innovation |
Innovation institutions with facilities for pilot-scale testing |
5% |
Figure 10: Final scores for hub supply chain capability.
From Figure 10, our analysis suggests that the Aberdeen hub has the greatest relative supply chain capability (90/100), while Argyll and Islands has the lowest (27/100). There are several conclusions that we can take from these final scores:
- Aberdeen stands out as being particularly capable to support the hydrogen and HDP sector. The hub ranked highest for 7 metrics out of 11, including:
- Maximum renewable power generation
- GVA of the energy industry
- Full-time equivalent workers in energy and engineering
- Large-scale storage capacity
- Pipeline network infrastructure
- Processing time for industrial planning applications
- Innovation institutions with facilities for pilot-scale testing
- Cromarty and Glasgow are also identified as attractive hubs.
- The Cromarty hub benefits from excellent access to offshore wind developments, a strong current workforce and major port infrastructure at Cromarty Firth with identified export opportunities.
- The Glasgow hub benefits from a particularly strong workforce capability and plentiful access to effluent water as well as support from innovation institutions and major port infrastructure from the Clydeport network.
- While specific strengths vary between hubs, the majority of Scotland’s hydrogen hubs can be broadly grouped by overall supply chain capability.
- Cromarty, Glasgow, Fife, Grangemouth and Ayrshire fall into an “upper category” with scores ranging only three points (58-61).
- Dundee, Moray, Dumfries and Galloway, Shetland Orkney and the Scottish Borders broadly fall into the “lower category” with scores ranging from 40-47.
- The Aberdeen hydrogen hub offers a promising opportunity to compete with local Duisburg supply in the Ruhr region. However, considering their similarly high scores, any of the Scottish hubs in the “upper category” may also be considered to be well placed. As the Ruhr area aims to be a model hydrogen region, this result indicates Scotland’s potential competitiveness in the European market.
- On the other hand, Western Isles and Argyll & Islands have promising renewable power generation potential. Development of green hydrogen production may therefore help address grid curtailment issues and address local, isolated demand. However, their supply chain capabilities are hindered by a lower workforce capability and fewer connections to suitable ports, large-scale storage and pipelines.
Overall, Scotland’s hydrogen hubs are relatively well balanced in their supply chain capabilities and have the potential to contribute significantly to both the national and international hydrogen market. The Aberdeen and Cromarty hubs particularly excel, while the Western Isles and Argyll and Islands may face resource limitations. By enhancing the strengths of higher-scoring hubs while addressing others’ limitations, Scotland will ultimately improve its competitive position in the global market.
HDP demand in Scotland’s hydrogen hubs
The Scottish Government’s Hydrogen Action Plan identifies that low-cost green hydrogen production is key to the net-zero transition (2022). To minimise the additional cost of transportation and other supporting infrastructure, the Scottish Government plans to encourage the “aggregation of cross-sectoral demand and co-location of the whole hydrogen value chain”. Thus, the efficiency of co-locating supply with high local demand will support the rapid scaling of Scotland’s hydrogen and HDP sectors. This rationale underpins the hydrogen hub model.
In this chapter, we analyse and estimate the addressable market or demand for each HDP in each hub. This analysis will initially provide a view on which hubs are most suited to supporting the development of local HDP demand in Scotland (Section 4.1.5). In Chapter 5, we bring together our supply chain capability and demand analysis to identify co-location opportunities for HDPs.
We assess the hubs based on current demand opportunities, which will initially support rapid market scaling. Therefore, we define HDP demand as the addressable market that HDPs could supply in a complete fuel-switching scenario. This enables us to differentiate hubs and provide a relative view on HDP demand opportunities. We assess four key sectors which could support the aggregation of cross-sectoral HDP demand within Scotland’s hydrogen hubs:
- Ammonia and e-methanol fuel for the maritime sector.
- Ammonia-based fertilisers for the agriculture sector.
- E-methanol feedstock for the chemical sector.
- SAF for the aviation sector.
To differentiate HDP demand by end use, our analysis considers HDPs used for direct consumption, excluding HDPs used as a hydrogen carrier (e.g. LOHCs).
Please refer to Appendix C for further information on this section’s methodology, sources and raw data.
HDP fuel for maritime shipping
In 2021, UK shipping used over seven million tonnes of fossil marine fuel oils, accounting for 18% of UK transport emissions (Transport & Environment, 2023). As the global regulatory body for shipping, the International Maritime Organisation (IMO) has set a 2050 net zero target for international shipping (IMO, 2023). In conjunction with Scotland’s net zero target, this means that the Scottish maritime industry will seek to replace fossil-based shipping fuels. The UK shipping industry can be decarbonised with HDPs, such as ammonia and e-methanol.
To evaluate the addressable market for these HDPs, we have analysed the current shipping fuel demand for each hub. There are uncertainties on which HDP shipping fuel – ammonia or e-methanol – will predominately address the market. Therefore, we have based our calculation on total energy demand in TWh.
Based on the UK’s 2021 marine fuel consumption, we calculated the annual energy demand for shipping. We then assigned this demand proportionally to each hub according to its total shipping traffic (Maritime Statistics, 2024).
Figure 11: Ranking of hubs by HDP shipping fuel demand.
Figure 11 shows the addressable market for HDP shipping fuel in each hub. Fife and Grangemouth rank highest with 3.5 TWh of demand, while the Scottish Borders ranks lowest with no current demand. From Figure 11 and our analysis, there are several key insights to address:
- Forth ports in Fife and Grangemouth is likely to be the largest addressable market for HDP maritime fuels, followed by the Clydeport network in Glasgow and Ayrshire.
- Forth ports and the Inverness and Cromarty Firth port network are Green Freeports (Inverness & Cromarty Firth Green Freeport, 2025; Forth Ports, 2025). These ports have varied tax and custom rules which could incentivise the development of HDPs for maritime fuel.
- While we have covered shipping demand, there may be other smaller sources of maritime demand for HDP fuels that were out of scope for this project. These sources include fishing vessels, ferries, service vessels and tugs.
Ammonia-based fertilisers for agriculture
The International Energy Agency estimates that around 70% of ammonia produced is used to make nitrogen-based fertilisers (2021). Ammonia production, by the Haber-Bosch process, is fossil-fuel based and highly energy intensive. The process accounts for 2% of the world’s total final energy consumption and 1.3% of carbon dioxide emissions from the energy system (International Energy Agency, 2021). As a sustainable alternative, green ammonia is gaining attention to decarbonise fertiliser production.
We have estimated green ammonia’s addressable market for fertilisers in each hub. First, we estimated total nitrogen-based fertiliser demand in Scotland for cropland and grassland. For this, we used average fertiliser application rates from UK Government data (UK Government, 2023). We also assumed that the nitrogen-based fertilisers were urea and ammonium nitrate, applied in equal proportions. From this assumption, we estimated the ammonia required to produce these fertilisers. Finally, we allocated this ammonia demand across the hubs based on their share of agricultural GVA in Scotland.
It is important to note here that we have only considered nitrogen-based fertiliser in our analysis, and not any other type of fertilisers. Therefore, our demand analysis only represents a subset of demand for fertilisers and not the total demand for fertilisers in Scotland.
Figure 12: Ranking of hubs by demand for green ammonia fertilisers. The ranking is shown from left (highest rank) to right (lowest rank).
Figure 12 shows green ammonia’s addressable market for fertilisers in each hub. Aberdeen ranks highest with 0.14 TWh of demand – around 31% of Scotland’s total demand. Moray and the island hubs rank lowest. Green ammonia’s addressable market will likely be greater on Scotland’s east coast where there is more agriculture.
E-methanol feedstock for chemical production
The International Renewable Energy Agency (IRENA) estimates that around 98 million tonnes of methanol is produced globally each year (IRENA and Methanol Institute, 2021). It is mostly used as a feedstock – a starting material – to produce formaldehyde, acetic acid and plastics. Currently, we produce most methanol from fossil fuels – such as synthetic gas (syngas). Methanol emissions represent around 10% of the chemical sector’s carbon dioxide emissions, and addressing these will be key for decarbonising the sector. E-methanol, produced with green hydrogen and captured carbon dioxide, could address methanol’s current market.
In Scotland, we assume that Grangemouth Chemical Science Park is the only large-scale user of methanol as a chemical feedstock. It is one of only four major chemical parks in the UK, and the only one in Scotland (Scottish Development International, 2023). With the closure of the refinery, Grangemouth’s industrial future is uncertain. However, INEOS’s Olefins and Polymers business will continue running as usual (INEOS, 2024). Their two onsite ethane cracker plants have the capacity to produce 1 million tonnes of ethylene per year (Endeavor Business Media, 2016). Fossil-based hydrogen and methane are produced as a by-product from an ethane cracker and can be used as syngas (Brooks, 2013).
To evaluate the maximum potential addressable market, we assume that this syngas is used to produce methanol. From this, we estimate that e-methanol could address a maximum demand of 100,000 tonnes per year (0.56 TWh).
SAF for aviation
The UK SAF mandate determines the share of SAF in total UK jet fuel demand (UK Government, 2024). It sets key SAF targets of 2% by 2025, 10% by 2030 and 22% by 2040. In securing demand, this mandate incentivises SAF production and supply across the UK.
To evaluate the addressable market for SAF, we analysed the current aviation fuel demand for each hub. To achieve this, we assigned the UK’s aviation fuel consumption in 2022 proportionally to each hub according to its total aircraft movement. To capture Edinburgh airport’s fuel demand, we have assigned it to the nearby Grangemouth hub.
Figure 13: Ranking of hubs by aviation fuel demand.
Figure 13 shows the addressable market for SAF in each hub. The airports in each island hub are shown combined: Shetland includes Lerwick (Tingwall), Scatsta and Sumburgh; Orkney includes Kirkwall and Wick John O’Groats; Western Isles includes Barra, Benbecula and Stornoway; Argyll and Bute includes Cambeltown, Islay and Tiree.
Grangemouth ranks highest with 5 TWh of demand, while hubs with no airports rank lowest. Regionally, about a third of SAF demand would arise from Edinburgh Airport and around a quarter from Glasgow Airport and Glasgow Prestwick. From Figure 13, we can see that locating SAF production around Scotland’s major airports would maximise co-location synergies. Progress has already begun in this area:
- In 2021, Edinburgh Airport signed a Memorandum of Understanding with Ørsted (Edinburgh Airport, 2021). The partnership recognises the importance of HDPs to accelerate the shift to sustainable air travel.
- In 2022, AGS Airports which own and operate Aberdeen and Glasgow airports, signed an agreement with ZeroAvia (Glasgow Airport, 2022). This partnership is exploring the development of hydrogen fuel infrastructure for zero-emission flights.
- In 2024, the Glasgow Airport Hydrogen Innovation Hub consortium delivered a feasibility study for a hydrogen hub at the airport (Glasgow Airport, 2024).
Overall HDP demand opportunities
The maritime and aviation sectors will be the main sources of HDP demand as Scotland scales its hydrogen and HDP sectors. These sectors account for 97% of the roughly 35 TWh addressable market analysed in this report. Due to this scale, our analysis suggests that hubs with major ports and airports would be best suited to develop HDP demand opportunities. In this regard, the hubs that stand out are Grangemouth (with 9.1 TWh of demand opportunity), Glasgow (with 6.1 TWh) and Aberdeen (with 4.4 TWh). Grangemouth’s advantage arises from several factors:
- An established and experienced chemical industry.
- Developed port infrastructure within the major Forth Ports network.
- Proximity to major airports, like Edinburgh Airport.
The Scottish Borders notably have the lowest demand opportunity overall. It is disadvantaged by the lack of shipping, aircraft traffic and chemical industry as well as a relatively small agricultural sector.
The potential demand opportunity for HDPs is greatest for SAF with a total addressable market of approximately 18 TWh. In comparison, e-methanol and green ammonia have a combined total of around 17 TWh.
Overall, our demand analysis has identified that focus should be placed on developing major offtake opportunities from the maritime and aviation sectors. This focus would best facilitate the large-scale and rapid scaling of the Scotland’s domestic HDP market. As the Scottish Government identified in the Hydrogen Action Plan, aggregating multiple end-use applications for production streams would improve the economic benefit of Scotland’s hydrogen hubs. Therefore, while SAF does have the greatest demand opportunity, it is worth noting that green ammonia and e-methanol have more diverse end uses and so would be better suited for demand aggregation. As such, each HDP has a distinct potential role in accelerating Scotland’s hydrogen and HDP sectors.
Co-location of HDP supply chain capabilities and demand opportunities
The Scottish Government recognises that co-location of supply and demand will help develop a sustainable domestic hydrogen and HDP sectors (2022). This development is required to establish Scotland in the wider global market (2022). In this chapter, we bring together our insights from the supply chain capabilities in Chapter 0 and the demand analysis in Chapter 4. This enables us to identify co-location opportunities for HDPs within Scotland’s hydrogen hubs.
Figure 14 summarises the co-location opportunity in each hub. The x-axis shows the overall supply chain capability score; the y-axis and bubble size show the aggregated demand opportunity. The top right quadrant broadly indicates which hubs may be best suited for co-location.
Figure 14: Overall co-location analysis showing the relative supply chain capability on the x-axis and the demand opportunity on the y-axis and as the relative bubble size.
From Figure 14, it is interesting to note that the top hydrogen hub for supply chain capability is not the one with the greatest demand opportunity. Aberdeen has the greatest supply chain capability score (93/100) while, with Edinburgh Airport and Forth Ports, Grangemouth has the greatest HDP demand opportunity (9.1 TWh). This supports the idea that these analyses should not be looked at in isolation. Rather, differing hub strengths can favour the development of different sections of the HDP economy.
Looking at the top right quadrant, we note that Aberdeen, Glasgow and Grangemouth are most aligned to facilitate the development of a regional, co-located HDP economy. In general, the hubs identified as strongest in supply chain capability – including Grangemouth, Aberdeen, Glasgow, Fife and Cromarty – are also those with greater demand opportunity.
We identify the Western Isles and Argyll and Islands as hubs which may need further support to develop their supply chain capabilities. On the other hand, the Scottish Borders and Moray may need to identify other, smaller offtake sectors to capitalise on co-location efficiencies.
The balancing of supply and demand opportunities will require careful consideration, particularly in the early stages of Scotland’s hydrogen and HDP sector development. Favouring supply opportunities could increase the cost and logistical complexity of transportation and storage to address more distant demand. Conversely, locating supply based on demand opportunities could limit the capacity and the economics of supply.
Overall, the diversity of Scotland’s hydrogen hub strengths points to the importance of a cross-hub approach, in addition to co-locating demand with supply. Hubs with greater connectivity to pipeline and port infrastructure, such as Aberdeen, will be more able to take advantage of this approach. As suitable pipeline and port infrastructure develops, supply and demand opportunities will be unlocked that are not possible by co-location. For example, piped green hydrogen from Fife could support HDP production in the adjacent Grangemouth hubs. For hubs with lower connectivity, such as the Western Isles, further development of suitable infrastructure is required to access cross-hub opportunities. Overall, the growth of HDP production will require both cross-hub and co-located approaches. Balancing these will help maximise each hub’s potential and, ultimately, that of the hydrogen sector itself.
Regulatory considerations for the HDP sector
Each HDP has different health, safety and planning requirements due to differing chemical properties. These requirements are stipulated by UK regulations. Higher hazard HDPs may face more severe limitations in how, where, and in what quantities they can be handled, for example for production or storage. This section explores the UK regulatory environment and its potential impact on the development of the HDP economy in Scotland.
Hazards associated with HDPs
Table 9 shows the physical, health and environmental hazards of hydrogen and HDPs. These hazards were identified from the standardised safety data sheet for each substance. The LOHC that we analysed was methylcyclohexane (MCH), the most common LOHC. The rating from 1-4 indicates the highest hazard severity category for each hazard type. According to the Globally Harmonised System classifications, a Category 1 hazard is the most severe while a Category 4 hazard is the least severe (United Nations, 2019).
Table 9: Hazards of hydrogen and HDPs from 1 (most severe) to 4 (least severe).
|
Substance |
Physical hazard |
Health hazard |
Environmental hazard |
|---|---|---|---|
|
Hydrogen |
1 |
4 |
4 |
|
Ammonia |
2 |
1 |
1 |
|
E-methanol |
2 |
1 |
4 |
|
LOHC (MCH) |
2 |
1 |
2 |
|
SAF |
3 |
1 |
2 |
From Table 9, we can see that ammonia is the most hazardous substance overall. Handlers must monitor it closely to mitigate its Category 1 health hazard and environmental hazards. LOHCs, E-methanol and SAF are less hazardous overall, although all also have Category 1 health hazards. This means that handling these HDPs is generally less inhibitive than for ammonia. As a feedstock, hydrogen’s severe flammability and explosion hazards should also be considered carefully for any HDP production development.
Review of key UK regulations affecting HDP handling
Due to these physical, health and environmental hazards, HDP production is strictly controlled by UK regulations and regulatory authorities. With the exception of LOHCs, HDPs like ammonia, methanol and aviation fuel are already produced and handled on a large-scale globally. Therefore, there are relatively few new regulatory issues concerning these HDPs. We have reviewed several key regulations that site handling HDPs must adhere to. These are detailed in Table 10.
Table 10: Key regulations and regulatory bodies and their implications for HDP production.
|
Regulation/Regulatory Body |
Implications for a HDP production site |
|---|---|
|
The Control of Major Accident Hazards (COMAH) Regulations |
|
|
UK registration, evaluation, authorisation and restriction (UK REACH) of chemicals |
|
|
Town and Country Planning (Environmental Impact Assessment) (Scotland) Regulations 2017 |
|
|
Health and Safety Executive (HSE) and Scottish Environment Protection Agency (SEPA) |
|
It is important to note that, under COMAH, each HDP is subject to different regulatory requirements based on their hazards, classified by the Globally Harmonized System (GHS). Based on the COMAH Lower Tier threshold quantity for each HDP, we have broadly ranked the HDPs by the regulatory stringency required to manage its hazards.
Table 11: Rank of HDPs by their COMAH Lower Tier threshold. The associated energy content of LOHC assumes the theoretical hydrogen storage content of MCH (6.22 wt%). Energy content of the HDPs was sourced from (Ozkan, et al., 2024).
|
HDP |
Lower Tier threshold (tonnes) |
Energy content (MJ/kg) |
Associated energy content (TJ) |
Rank (1 = most stringent, 4 = least stringent) |
|---|---|---|---|---|
|
LOHC (MCH) |
50 |
120 (for H2) |
0.4 |
1 |
|
Ammonia |
50 |
18.8 |
0.9 |
2 |
|
E-Methanol |
500 |
19.9 |
10.0 |
3 |
|
SAF |
2500 |
45.7 |
114.3 |
4 |
From Table 11, we can see that LOHC and ammonia are the most stringently regulated by COMAH with the same Lower Tier threshold of 50 tonnes. However, as an energy carrier of hydrogen, LOHC handling is more limited by the threshold. The associated energy content of LOHC is 0.5×1012 J lower than that of ammonia. In comparison, e-methanol and SAF are less stringently regulated by COMAH. By energy content, a Lower Tier COMAH site would be able to handle 25x more e-methanol or over 250x more SAF than LOHC. Therefore, based on the stringency of COMAH regulations, the simplest HDP to handle is SAF, followed by e-methanol, ammonia and LOHC.
Hub-level regulatory capabilities
Considering the hazards associated with hydrogen and HDPs, hubs with more regulatory experience are likely to be better suited to handling these substances safely. For HDP production, existing COMAH sites may be expanded or new COMAH sites developed. As a broad measure of current and relative regulatory experience at a hub level, we will evaluate the number and tier level of COMAH sites present in each hub. The presence of COMAH sites, with their existing infrastructure and workforce, indicates that a hub may be more capable at handling hazardous HDPs safely according to regulation. Identifying these sites can also provide insights into potential offtakers as well as production, storage and distribution sites for HDPs.
Figure 15: Number of Upper Tier COMAH sites present in each hub.
We have assessed the number of registered COMAH sites in each hub as of June 2023 (Health and Safety Executive, 2023). There are two tiers of COMAH site: a Lower Tier and an Upper Tier. Upper Tier sites are more stringently regulated since they handle greater quantities of hazardous substances. Figure 15 shows the number of Upper Tier COMAH sites in each hub. Grangemouth has the most (16), including the Grangemouth Terminal and INEOS chemical sites. This indicates that the Grangemouth hub, and its associated workforce, may have the most regulatory experience for the large-scale handling of hazardous chemicals. The terminal, for instance, already facilitates the supply of Scotland’s aviation fuel (Forth Ports , 2025).
Key COMAH Upper Tier sites include:
- The St. Fergus Gas Terminal in the Aberdeen hub. This site receives, processes and compresses North Sea gas for the National Transmission System as well as stores and distributes other chemicals and fuels (North Sea Midstream Partners, 2025).
- The Clydebank Terminal operated by Exolum in the Glasgow hub. This site has a storage capacity of 56,257 m3 and a jetty to receive and storage liquid products, including fuels (Exolum, 2025).
- Moray’s sites are predominately distilleries which are engaged offtakers for the hydrogen sector. In March 2025, Storegga submitted a planning application to Moray Council to construct a 25 tonne per day green hydrogen facility to decarbonise local distilleries (Storegga, 2025). The UK Government has also found LOHCs to be a viable option for supplying hydrogen to distilleries, and could be explored further for the decarbonisation of Scotland’s distilleries (BEIS, 2021).
These hubs are likely to have a lower safety risk for handling HDPs. This is due to their existing regulatory experience and infrastructure. These insights are supported by the fact that the number of COMAH sites in each hub generally aligns with its overall supply chain capability score: the “upper” and “lower” hub groupings are broadly preserved. In comparison, the Scottish Borders has only one Lower Tier COMAH site, a fuel storage and distribution site operated by Flogas Britain. This relatively limited experience could indicate that there is greater need for local workforce training, community engagement and risk communication and investment into infrastructure to support the safe development of a local HDP sector.
Overall, this broad hub-level analysis has provided an indication of hubs’ regulatory capabilities. While out of scope for this project, individual assessment of existing and potential COMAH sites would add value to the analysis. This would provide greater detail into the specific capabilities of each hub to handle, produce and distribute HDPs safely, in accordance with regulations.
Policy gap analysis
In the previous chapters, we identified the strengths and barriers for Scotland to scale up its HDP market. To maximise opportunities a favourable and clear policy landscape is needed. This landscape must consider policy at a devolved, national and regional level. This will ensure that Scotland’s HDP related policies work with UK and EU specific policies in a harmonious manner.
To that end, we analysed relevant policies in the UK, Scotland or the EU. We considered policies in the following categories:
- Subsidies and obligations
- Supply chain/infrastructure development
- Technical and safety regulations
- Licensing
- Planning and consenting
Scottish policy gaps
Here we describe the main policy gaps, and the resultant risks, faced by the Scottish HDP industry. The Scottish Government has already taken some positive steps. However, plugging some gaps will significantly improve the standing of the industry.
Supply chain incentives/development for HDPs
The Scottish Government recently published plans to realise export opportunities for green hydrogen (International Trade and Investment Directorate, 2024). Although this a very important step in furthering the interest of Scottish exports to nearby regions, there are still some gaps remaining. The government’s plan identifies the various investment opportunities and barriers. However, there is a need for more clarity on how the Scottish Government will collaborate with the UK Government or build relationships with international export partners. Timely publication of such plans will provide investors with more certainty.
Clarity in planning and consenting
The Scottish Government has made substantial progress in improving the planning regime for hydrogen projects. The government is committed to preparing and training its planning authorities to expedite hydrogen planning applications. Additionally, it also aims to provide planning authorities with access to specialist expertise and staff upskilling. The government aims to do this this by introducing the planning hub. As a first step towards achieving their goal of improving the planning regime, the Scottish government conducted stakeholder engagement (Improvement Service, 2025), which attempted to understand concerns of both the planning authorities and industry.
The Improvement Services report focussed on five areas: understanding of hydrogen within planning applications, regulatory regime, more clarity on planning process, impact and risk of hydrogen manufacturing, and spatial factors. Some of the key concerns raised by the planning authorities were about lack of clarity on roles when multiple bodies are involved in a planning/consenting process. Additionally, resource constraints faced by the authorities and lack of awareness about hydrogen applications are some of the other concerns raised. For industry, some of the major points raised concerned uncertainty regarding water availability and Hydrogen Allocation Round (HAR) timelines. Industry also proposed conducting wider public engagement to spread awareness about how hydrogen can safely play a role in Scotland’s net zero transition.
All this effort has been crucial in shining some light on the challenges faced by industries and policymakers. To fully capitalise on this initiative, the government should now focus on implementing the findings and recommendations from their engagement.
UK policy gaps
The UK government has implemented many policies that have boosted green hydrogen development in the national economy. Our analysis concludes that the success of such policies should be replicated to similarly develop the HDP space.
Lack of HDP considering in subsidies and obligations
The Hydrogen Storage Business Model (HSBM) does not currently include HDPs in its scope.
There are a number of benefits to including HDPs in HSBM. It would increase the avenues available for storing hydrogen. It would also allow for small scale storage of hydrogen in the form of hydrogen derivatives (HSBM currently focusses on large-scale hydrogen storage). Additionally, inclusion of HDPs in scope may mitigate some of the challenges associated with storing hydrogen, such as safety concerns. For example, as ammonia contains hydrogen, including it in HSBM could act as an alternative way of storing hydrogen.
Supply chain incentives for industry and innovation
We identified a policy gap in relation to encouraging links between industrial clusters, which are well suited to producing HDPs. Chapter 4 showed how there are multiple hubs which are optimal for producing HDPs. Collaboration between the different clusters in these hubs would allow for sharing knowledge and potentially products as well.
There also needs to be a focus on conducting trial and demonstration projects. Many hydrogen projects will use innovative technology which will need to be proven and demonstrated in real-life settings. Trials will go a long way in assessing whether investing in such technologies is worthwhile.
Updating technical and safety regulations
Regulations regarding hydrogen need to be updated in the UK. Onshore hydrogen projects are regulated under the Gas Act 1986 and Planning Act 2008, and hydrogen is generally referred to as a ‘gas’. The Gas Safety Management Regulation (GSMR) prohibits injecting more than 0.1% of hydrogen into gas networks. Although there are discussions ongoing to exempt hydrogen from this rule, there needs to be more clarity here (Pinsent Masons, 2023). Repurposing the gas network to enable hydrogen transport is essential to grow the HDP sector. Green hydrogen is an important input for HDPs. Hence, a developed transport system will remove supply bottlenecks for HDP producers.
Clarity in offshore licensing
The industry seeks more clarity on the timeline and details of future offshore hydrogen regime. These projects will be critical in developing HDP production.
Delays in planning and consenting
Green hydrogen and HDP projects require various regulatory approvals, environmental permits, etc. Many investments are subject to approval of such plans. Delays associated with the planning and consenting regime may extend the lead time of green hydrogen projects. Streamlining the regime will mitigate some of these issues.
International policy gaps
Lack of clarity on emissions factors
There is an urgent need to standardise the emission factors for many fuels, such as ammonia or methanol. Sectors that use such fuels will need a standard emission factor as it eases carbon accounting and adhering to different regulations.
Lack of a standard framework for low-carbon hydrogen
There is a misalignment between low-carbon hydrogen standards in different countries. To foster international trade, a uniform definition of low-carbon hydrogen is needed.
Recommendations
Chapter 7 outlines relevant current policies that can enable development of the hydrogen and HDP sectors in Scotland. While introducing such policies is a significant step towards building the hydrogen space in the UK, some gaps remain. In addition, there is policy action required at an international level. Addressing these issues will significantly improve the prospects of Scotland’s hydrogen and HDP sectors.
A summary of our recommendations is as follows:
- The Hydrogen Sector Export Plan showcases the Scottish Government’s commitment to building hydrogen export capabilities. However, there is a need for more information on how the Scottish and the UK governments will work together with potential trade partners.
- Scottish Government should continue the progress on building a hydrogen planning regime. This will build on the introduction of the planning hub and the subsequent stakeholder engagement. This momentum should be continued by addressing the main findings of the Improvement Services report.
- The UK Government should include HDPs in the scope of subsidies like HSBM. HDP projects face similar risks as hydrogen projects. Therefore, providing similar subsidies to HDPs projects will mitigate risks and provide more certainty.
- Due to many hydrogen projects using innovative technology, there is a need for increasing the number of trials and demonstration projects.
- Another important issue is the potential misalignment of many standards and definitions. For instance, different governments should collaborate and decide on a common definition for low-carbon hydrogen. These misalignments will hinder growth opportunities as they increase the risk for potential traders.
There needs to be a more detailed plan for prioritising hub development. Our analysis highlighted the strengths and weaknesses of each hub. These results should be used to organise collaboration between production and demand hubs. Additionally, as shown in the co-location analysis, the ideal production hubs aren’t necessarily the same as the key demand hubs. Sorting this misalignment might require government intervention and support.
Conclusions
In our examination of Scotland’s industrial capabilities to produce hydrogen derivatives and products, we looked at supply chain capabilities, demand opportunities, regulatory and policy analysis.
Our assessment of co-location of supply chain capabilities with demand suggests Aberdeen and Grangemouth stand out as key hubs for the development of HDP production. Additionally, Cromarty and Ayrshire offer strong supply chain capabilities and Glasgow and Fife present significant demand opportunities. Meanwhile, the Western Isles and Argyll and Islands may require targeted support to enhance their supply chain capabilities. The Scottish Borders may need support in developing greater regulatory experience to facilitate HDP development.
Many of the Scottish hubs scored highly on the metric of renewable power generation capacity. This is evidence of Scotland’s biggest strength: access to renewable energy. Regions like Aberdeen, Cromarty, Moray, Shetland and Western Isles were the highest scores. Regarding local policy and planning support, Aberdeen, Ayrshire and Scottish Borders were among the top performers.
Given the nascency of HDP production, a favourable policy environment is needed to ensure rapid adoption of these fuels. In Scotland a more nuanced planning regime would help to support the growth of HDP adoption. Scotland would benefit from a planning regime that accounts for its specific geographic factors.
At the UK level, HDPs should be included in the scope of policies like HSBM. Health and safety regulations should be updated to account for the increasing role of hydrogen and HDPs in the economy of the future.
Our analysis shows that for Scotland to meet its aims of becoming a major exporter of HDPs, it will need a holistic approach to evaluating the strengths of Scotland’s potential hydrogen hubs.
Overall, by balancing cross-hub collaboration with localised development, Scotland can maximise the potential of HDP production from green hydrogen, driving the sector’s long-term growth and resilience.
References
Statistische Ämter des Bundes und der Länder, 2025. Wassereinsatz und ungenutztes Wasser – Jahressumme – regionale Tiefe: Kreise und krfr. Städte, Wiesbaden: Statistische Ämter des Bundes und der Länder.
Aberdeen City Council, n.d. Skills and qualifications gap analysis, s.l.: s.n.
BEIS, 2021. BEIS Green Distilleries Competition, London: BEIS.
Brooks, R., 2013. Modeling the North American market for natural gas liquids. Ancorage, International Association for Energy Economics.
Bundesnetzagentur, 2024. Hydrogen core network. [Online]
Available at: https://www.bundesnetzagentur.de/EN/Areas/Energy/HydrogenCoreNetwork/start.html
[Accessed 25 February 2025].
Cerniauskas, S. et al., 2021. Wissenschaftliche Begleitstudie der Wasserstoff Roadmap Nordrhein-Westfalen, Jülich: Forschungszentrums Jülich.
ClimateXChange, 2023. Cost reduction pathways of green hydrogen production in Scotland – total costs and international comparisons, s.l.: ClimateXChange.
ClimateXChange, 2023. Hydrogen as a storage medium in Scotland, Edinburgh: ClimateXChange.
ClimateXChange, 2024. Economic Opportunities in Scotland’s Net Zero and Climate Adaptation Economy, s.l.: s.n.
Department for Energy Security & Net Zero, 2024. THE CONTRACTS FOR DIFFERENCE (STANDARD TERMS) REGULATIONS 2014 CFD STANDARD TERMS NOTICE FOR THE SIXTH ALLOCATION ROUND, London: Department for Energy Security & Net Zero.
Department for Energy Security and Net Zero, 2024. THE CONTRACTS FOR DIFFERENCE (STANDARD TERMS) REGULATIONS 2014 CFD STANDARD TERMS NOTICE FOR THE SIXTH ALLOCATION ROUND, London: Department for Energy Security and Net Zero.
DESNEZ, 2024. Regional Renewable Statistics, London: DESNEZ.
DESNEZ, 2024. Renewable Energy Planning Database (REPD): October 2024 (quarter 3), London: DESNEZ.
Duisburger Hafen HG, 2025. duisport: Facts and figures. [Online]
Available at: https://www.duisport.de/hafeninformation/?lang=en
[Accessed 26 February 2025].
Duisport, 2022. Energy transition in the Port of Duisburg – Duisburg Gateway Terminal (DGT): Official starting signal for the enerPort II project. [Online]
Available at: https://www.duisport.de/energy-transition-in-the-port-of-duisburg-duisburg-gateway-terminal-dgt-official-starting-signal-for-the-enerport-ii-project/?lang=en
[Accessed 3 March 2025].
Edinburgh Airport, 2021. Airport partners with Ørsted to bring sustainable air travel to the UK. [Online]
Available at: https://corporate.edinburghairport.com/media-centre/news-releases/airport-partners-with-orsted-to-bring-sustainable-air-travel-to-the-uk
[Accessed 26 February 2025].
Edlmann, K. et al., 2024. UK Hydrogen Storage Database. [Online]
Available at: https://geosciences.ed.ac.uk/research/institutes-centres/institutes/earth-planetary-science/edinburgh-earth-resources/research-activities/geoenergy/uk-hydrogen-storage-database
[Accessed 24 February 2025].
Endeavor Business Media, 2016. Ineos plans restart of mothballed ethylene unit at Grangemouth. [Online]
Available at: https://www.ogj.com/refining-processing/article/17249237/ineos-plans-restart-of-mothballed-ethylene-unit-at-grangemouth
[Accessed 6 March 2025].
Energy Prices Statistics Team, 2024. Energy Prices International Comparisons, London: Energy Prices Statistics Team.
Exolum, 2025. Where we operate. [Online]
Available at: https://exolum.com/en/where-we-operate/
[Accessed 27 March 2025].
Forth Ports , 2025. Forth Ports Grangemouth. [Online]
Available at: https://www.forthports.co.uk/our-ports/grangemouth/
[Accessed 5 March 2025].
Forth Ports, 2025. Forth Green Freeport. [Online]
Available at: https://forthgreenfreeport.com/
[Accessed 26 February 2025].
Gallizzi, B., 2025. Comparing energy prices by region. [Online]
Available at: https://www.uswitch.com/gas-electricity/guides/regional-energy-prices/
[Accessed 5 March 2025].
Gasunie, 2023. Energiebedrijven en netbeheerders willen versnelling waterstofcorridor tussen Nederland en Duitsland. [Online]
Available at: https://www.gasunie.nl/nieuws/energiebedrijven-en-netbeheerders-willen-versnelling-waterstofcorridor-tussen-nederland-en-duitsland
[Accessed 24 February 2025].
German Environment Agency, 2016. Power-to-Liquids Potentials and Perspectives for the Future Supply of Renewable Aviation Fuel, s.l.: s.n.
Glasgow Airport, 2022. ZeroAvia & AGS Airports Team Up to Bring Zero-Emission Flights to Scotland. [Online]
Available at: https://www.glasgowairport.com/media-centre/2022/zeroavia-ags-airports-team-up-to-bring-zero-emission-flights-to-scotland/
[Accessed 26 February 2025].
Glasgow Airport, 2024. Glasgow Airport hydrogen hub to support zero-emission flight by 2027. [Online]
Available at: https://www.glasgowairport.com/media-centre/2024/glasgow-airport-hydrogen-hub-to-support-zero-emission-flight-by-2027/
[Accessed 26 February 2025].
Global Energy Monitor, 2025. Global Energy Monitor. [Online]
Available at: https://globalenergymonitor.org/projects/global-wind-power-tracker/tracker-map/
[Accessed 22 February 2025].
Greenlyte, 2025. Greenlyte and MB Energy forge strategic landmark agreement for synthetic methanol. [Online]
Available at: https://www.greenlyte.tech/milestones/greenlyte-and-mb-energy-forge-strategic-landmark-agreement-for-synthetic-methanol-2
[Accessed 20 August 2025].
Health and Safety Executive, 2023. COMAH UPPER and LOWER Tier Establishment List June 2023, Merseyside: Health and Safety Executive.
HMRC, 2022. December 2022 average exchange rates, London: HMRC.
Hornby, G., 2023. RWE submits planning approval for hydrogen storage facility in northeast Germany. [Online]
Available at: https://www.icis.com/explore/resources/news/2023/02/22/10857606/rwe-submits-planning-approval-for-hydrogen-storage-facility-in-northeast-germany/
[Accessed 24 February 2025].
Hydrogen Metropole Ruhr, 2023. Germany’s Hydrogen Model Region, Essen: Regionalverband Ruhr.
IMO, 2023. 2023 IMO STRATEGY ON REDUCTION OF GHG EMISSIONS FROM SHIPS, London: IMO.
Improvement Service, 2025. Insights Report: Planning for Hydrogen, s.l.: s.n.
INEOS Group, 2025. Sites. [Online]
Available at: https://www.ineos.com/businesses/ineos-olefins-polymers-europe/sites/
[Accessed 26 February 2025].
INEOS, 2024. “Business as usual” for INEOS businesses at Grangemouth. [Online]
Available at: https://www.ineos.com/news/ineos-group/business-as-usual-for-ineos-businesses-at-grangemouth/
[Accessed 4 March 2025].
Information und Technik Nordrhein-Westfalen, 2024. Güterumschlag von Binnengüterschiffen in ausgewählten Häfen Nordrhein-Westfalens, Düsseldorf: Information und Technik Nordrhein-Westfalen.
International Energy Agency, 2021. Ammonia Technology Roadmap, Paris: International Energy Agency.
International Trade and Investment Directorate, 2024. A Trading Nation – Realising Scotland’s Hydrogen Potential: plan for exports, s.l.: s.n.
Inverness & Cromarty Firth Green Freeport, 2025. Inverness & Cromarty Firth Green Freeport. [Online]
Available at: https://greenfreeport.scot/
[Accessed 26 February 2025].
IRENA and Methanol Institute, 2021. Innovation Outlook : Renewable Methanol, Abu Dhabi: International Renewable Energy Agency.
Länder, V. G. d., 2024. Bruttoinlandsprodukt, Bruttowertschöpfung in den kreisfreien Städten und Landkreisen der Bundesrepublik Deutschland 1992 und 1994 bis 2022, Stuttgart: Volkswirtschaftliche Gesamtrechnungen der Länder.
Maritime Statistics, 2024. All UK major and minor port freight tonnage traffic, by port and year (filter by direction), from 1965, London: Department for Transport.
Metropole Ruhr Business, 2025. Hydrogen. [Online]
Available at: https://www.business.ruhr/en/focus/hydrogen.html
[Accessed 20 August 2025].
Morton, H., Mitchell, J., Wilson, J. & Csernik-Tihn, S., 2025. Review of Demand for Hydrogen Derivatives and Products in Scotland and Internationally, s.l.: s.n.
National Gas, 2025. Project Union. [Online]
Available at: https://www.nationalgas.com/future-energy/hydrogen/project-union
[Accessed 25 February 2025].
Net Zero Technology Centre, 2023. Hydrogen Backbone Link: Connecting Scotland to Europe, Aberdeen: Net Zero Technology Centre.
North Sea Midstream Partners, 2025. St Fergus Gas Terminal. [Online]
Available at: https://www.nsmp-limited.com/our-assets/st-fergus-gas-terminal/
[Accessed 27 March 2025].
Office for National Statistics, 2024. Regional gross value added (balanced) by industry: local authorities by International Territorial Level (ITL) 1 region: TLM Scotland, Newport: Office for National Statistics.
Offshore Wind Scotland, 2024. ScotWind leasing round. [Online]
Available at: https://www.offshorewindscotland.org.uk/the-offshore-wind-market-in-scotland/scotwind-leasing-round/
[Accessed 21 February 2024].
OneOcean Group Ltd, 2023. World Port Information Online. [Online]
Available at: https://www.findaport.com/
[Accessed 3 March 2025].
Optimat and Scottish Enterprise, 2023. Decarbonisation of Scottish Maritime Transport, s.l.: s.n.
Ozkan, M. et al., 2024. Forging a sustainable sky: Unveiling the pillars of aviation e-fuel production for carbon emission circularity. iSience, 27(3), pp. 2589-0042.
Peecock, A. et al., 2022. Mapping hydrogen storage capacities of UK offshore hydrocarbon fields and exploring potential synergies with offshore wind. Geological Society, 528(1), pp. 171-187.
Pinsent Masons, 2023. UK hydrogen safety law: the developing framework, s.l.: s.n.
Planning Application Statistics, 2024. Planning Application Statistics, s.l.: s.n.
Port of Aberdeen, 2025. Oil and Gas. [Online]
Available at: https://www.portofaberdeen.co.uk/sectors-served/oil-gas#your-preferred-oil-gas-port
[Accessed 4 March 2025].
Port of Aberdeen, 2025. Why choose Port of Aberdeen?. [Online]
Available at: https://www.portofaberdeen.co.uk/about-us/why-choose-port-of-aberdeen
[Accessed 3 March 2025].
Ramboll, 2022. FEASIBILITY STUDY INTO WATER REQUIREMENT FOR HYDROGEN PRODUCTION, Crawley: SGN.
Renewable UK & Hydrogen UK, 2025. Splitting the difference, London: Renewable UK & Hydrogen UK.
Safidi, J. et al., 2021. A quantitative assessment of the hydrogen storage capacity of the UK continental shelf. International journal of hydrogen energy, 46(12), pp. 8629-8639.
Schunck, S., 2021. New initiative for Ruhr area as a pioneer region of the hydrogen economy. [Online]
Available at: https://www.rwe.com/en/press/rwe-ag/2021-09-02-new-initiative-for-ruhr-area-as-a-pioneer-region-of-the-hydrogen-economy/
[Accessed 25 February 2025].
Scottish Development International, 2023. Grangemouth Chemical Science Park. [Online]
Available at: https://www.sdi.co.uk/business-in-scotland/locations-for-your-business/commercial-properties-and-land/grangemouth-chemical-science-park#:~:text=Grangemouth%20is%20located%20in%20Scotland%E2%80%99s%20central%20belt%2C%20just,industrial%20heritage%20and%20h
[Accessed 26 February 2025].
Scottish Enterprise and Optimat, 2023. Synthetic/Sustainable Aviation Fuel Mapping, s.l.: Scottish Enterprise.
Scottish Enterprise, 2024. Economic Impact Scenarios for Scotland’s Energy Transition, s.l.: Scottish Enterprise.
Scottish Enterprise, 2025. SHINe Capability Directory. [Online]
Available at: https://www.scottish-enterprise.com/shine/shine-resources/shine-capability-directory
Scottish Enterprise, n.d. Appendix A Site Factsheets, Glasgow: Scottish Enterprise.
Scottish Government, 2020. Scottish hydrogen: assessment report, Edinburgh: Scottish Government.
Scottish Government, 2020. Scottish Offshore Wind to Green Hydrogen Opportunity Assessment, Edinburgh: Scottish Government.
Scottish Government, 2022. Hydrogen Action Plan, Edinburgh: Scottish Government.
Scottish Government, 2024. A Trading Nation: Realising Scotland’s Hydrogen Potential – A Plan for Exports, Edinburgh: Scottish Government.
Scottish Government, 2024. Business and Innovation Statistics, Edinburgh: Scottish Government.
Scottish Government, 2024. Local authority area statistics database, Edinburgh: Scottish Government.
Scottish Power, 2022. Scot2Ger: Development of a Green Hydrogen Supply Chain from Scotland to Germany, s.l.: s.n.
Scottish Power, 2024. Whitelee Solar / Hydrogen / BESS. [Online]
Available at: https://www.scottishpowerrenewables.com/pages/whitelee_solar_hydrogen_bess_.aspx
[Accessed 24 February 2025].
SGN, 2021. Sharing our pathway to 100% hydrogen with SHFCA. [Online]
Available at: https://www.sgn.co.uk/news/sharing-our-pathway-100-hydrogen-shfca
[Accessed 28 February 2025].
SGN, 2023. Project to repurpose natural gas pipelines to hydrogen gets green light from Ofgem. [Online]
Available at: https://www.sgn.co.uk/news/project-repurpose-natural-gas-pipelines-hydrogen-gets-green-light-ofgem
[Accessed 28 February 2025].
SGN, 2023. SGN and NGT accelerate hydrogen plans for Scotland and southern England. [Online]
Available at: https://sgn.co.uk/news/sgn-and-ngt-accelerate-hydrogen-plans-scotland-and-southern-england
[Accessed 27 March 2025].
SHIPNEXT BV, 2025. SHIPNEXT. [Online]
Available at: https://shipnext.com/
[Accessed 28 February 2025].
Skills Development Scotland, 2024. Data Matrix. [Online]
Available at: https://www.skillsdevelopmentscotland.co.uk/what-we-do/skills-planning/data-matrix?_gl=1*1gxt0uc*_up*MQ..*_ga*OTA2MTc5NTQ3LjE3Mzc1NDYxMzI.*_ga_2CRJE0HKFQ*MTczNzU0NjEyOS4xLjEuMTczNzU0NjE2NS4wLjAuMA..
Storegga, 2025. https://storegga.earth/speyside-hydrogen-news/storegga-submits-planning-application-for-green-hydrogen-site-to-decarbonise-moray-distilleries. [Online]
Available at: https://storegga.earth/speyside-hydrogen-news/storegga-submits-planning-application-for-green-hydrogen-site-to-decarbonise-moray-distilleries
[Accessed 27 March 2025].
Timsina, R., Thapa, R. K., Moldestad, B. M. & Eikeland, M. S., 2021. Methanol synthesis from syngas: a process simulation. s.l., SIMS EUROSIM 2021.
Tix, M., 2024. Port of Duisburg wants green hydrogen from Brazil. [Online]
Available at: https://www.energate-messenger.com/news/249932/port-of-duisburg-wants-green-hydrogen-from-brazil
[Accessed 3 March 2025].
Transport & Environment, 2023. Implications of an e-fuel mandate for UK shipping, London: Transport & Environment.
U.S. Department of Energy, 2025. DOE Technical Targets for Onboard Hydrogen Storage for Light-Duty Vehicles. [Online]
Available at: https://www.energy.gov/eere/fuelcells/doe-technical-targets-onboard-hydrogen-storage-light-duty-vehicles
[Accessed 24 February 2025].
UK Government, 2015. The Control of Major Accident Hazards Regulations 2015. [Online]
Available at: https://www.legislation.gov.uk/uksi/2015/483/contents
[Accessed 4 March 2025].
UK Government, 2023. British survey of fertiliser practice dataset, s.l.: s.n.
UK Government, 2024. Renewable Transport Fuel Obligations (Sustainable Aviation Fuel) Order 2024, London: UK Government.
UKPORTS, 2025. A-Z Port Listings. [Online]
Available at: https://uk-ports.org/ukports-a-to-z-listing/
[Accessed 3 March 2025].
United Nations, 2019. Globally Harmonised System of Classification and Labelling of Chemicals (GHS), New York and Geneva: United Nations.
Volkswirtschaftliche Gesamtrechnungen der Länder, 2024. Bruttoinlandsprodukt, Bruttowertschöpfung in den kreisfreien Städten und Landkreisen der Bundesrepublik Deutschland 1992 und 1994 bis 2022. Stuttgart: Volkswirtschaftliche Gesamtrechnungen der Länder.
Wirtschaftsbetriebe Duisburg, 2025. Kanalisation und Kläranlagen. [Online]
Available at: https://www.wb-duisburg.de/Privat/Privat_Stadtentwaesserung/Kanalisation-und-Klaeranlagen.php
[Accessed 1 March 2025].
Wirtschaftsbetriebe Duisburg, n.d. Kalanisation und Kläranlagen. [Online]
Available at: https://www.wb-duisburg.de/Privat/Privat_Stadtentwaesserung/Kanalisation-und-Klaeranlagen.php
[Accessed 24 February 2025].
World Bank, 2024. Ease of Doing Business Index, s.l.: s.n.
Appendices
To understand the role that Scotland can play in the hydrogen and HDP sectors of the future, a thorough review of literature was undertaken. The current state of the hydrogen and HDP sectors in Scotland will very much dictate its future prospects. For the purposes of this study, the literature review focussed on many factors associated with the production and export of hydrogen by Scotland. The review allowed us to identify certain common themes related to Scotland’s ambition for net zero and revealed hydrogen’s role in achieving those goals.
We explored the potential key drivers and enablers of the hydrogen and HDP sectors. Then, we analysed barriers Scotland is likely to face in growing its hydrogen supply chain capabilities. Apart from studying strengths and weaknesses specific to Scotland, we also analysed factors specifically relevant to the HDPs in scope of our study.
Scotland specific factors
Most of the literature reviewed concludes that Scotland is very well-placed to be able to produce green hydrogen in the future. There are many factors that work in Scotland’s favour. First and foremost, Scotland’s access to abundant levels of renewable energy, especially offshore wind, is a major strength (ClimateXChange, 2023). Production of green hydrogen will require renewable electricity as the major component. Scotland’s wind resources make it very suitable for producing green hydrogen.
Another major key driver for Scotland’s hydrogen and HDP sectors is the ambitious policies in the EU. These policies are likely to spur hydrogen demand in the next few decades. According to the RePowerEU Strategy, the EU aims to import 10 million tonnes of hydrogen by the year 2030. This provides Scotland with a significant opportunity to be a major exporter of low-carbon hydrogen to the EU (Scottish Government, 2022). Since the Russia-Ukraine conflict, the EU also aims to stop importing natural gas and rely on its domestic capabilities (Scottish Power, 2022). This will also likely further the usage and demand for hydrogen in the continent.
Scotland is also likely to benefit significantly from its geographical proximity to the EU. Hence, Scotland may transport hydrogen and HDPs to the EU at costs lower than faraway regions like North America, the Middle East or Asia (ClimateXChange, 2023).
In addition, there are other factors working in Scotland’s favour. For example, Scotland has a vast oil and gas industry with a highly skilled workforce. These skills can be transferred to the hydrogen and HDP sectors (Scottish Enterprise, 2024).
On the other hand, the literature reviewed also highlighted areas which need further development and focus to enable green hydrogen production. One of the biggest weaknesses identified in the literature is the high costs associated with electricity generation. Electricity cost is one of the biggest components of green hydrogen production. Currently, cost of electricity generation is much higher in Scotland compared to other competitor regions like the USA or the Middle East (ClimateXChange, 2023). This makes green hydrogen production in Scotland more expensive than regions like the US or the Middle East. This could reduce Scotland’s competitive edge to export to the EU.
Past studies also point out the lack of electrolyser manufacturing capabilities in Scotland as a potential bottleneck (ClimateXChange, 2024). Another major challenge faced by Scotland is regarding transporting and storing hydrogen or HDPs (Optimat and Scottish Enterprise, 2023). Scotland lacks a dedicated pipeline infrastructure that could be used to transport hydrogen to the EU. However, many studies point out the possibility to repurpose existing gas pipelines and use them for hydrogen transport. Scotland also lacks onshore deposits for salt caverns. However, this can be mitigated by the existence of depleted gas fields and lined rock caverns (ClimateXChange, 2024).
Some of the studies also mention the lack of projected demand for hydrogen in Scotland as a potential issue. Scotland is not expected to demand very high levels of hydrogen, meaning hydrogen supply capabilities will be built to service external demand. Increasing demand will be contingent on the policies that will be enacted in the future.
Similarly, studies have pointed out the need for more clarity from the government on possible policy actions (Scottish Enterprise and Optimat, 2023). The sector will also benefit from a coordinated response to tackle supply chain issues and more visibility into existing opportunities. Databases similar to the Offshore Energy UK’s Supply Chain Visibility Tool and the North Sea Transition Authority’s (NSTA) Energy Pathfinder will increase awareness and information regarding opportunities and enable potential investors to make informed decisions (Aberdeen City Council, n.d.).
The lack of clarity and uncertainty regarding future policy making explain why hydrogen demand projections by different studies vary significantly. Latest demand projections for Scotland for hydrogen expect demand to be in the range of 0.6-2.7 TWh for 2030 and 2.7-24.7 TWh for 2050 (Morton, et al., 2025). Some studies project the economic impact of exporting hydrogen products to the EU. According to the ambitious scenario of the Hydrogen Action Plan, 2022 report, exporting hydrogen to the EU could create roughly a total of 300,000 jobs in Scotland by 2045. It could also add roughly £25 billion every year to the Scottish economy by 2045 (Scottish Government, 2022).
The findings from these studies show that Scotland has inherent strengths that can be harnessed to build and grow strong hydrogen and HDP sectors. Scotland’s access to renewable energy and the skills possessed by existing workforce puts it in a very robust position. However, building supply chain capabilities in Scotland will also come with its own challenges. The biggest challenge faced by Scotland is the high cost of generating renewable electricity. Lack of storage and transport infrastructure is also a big issue. Many studies have pointed out the need for government support to mitigate such challenges.
HDPs specific literature review
The literature review conducted also focussed specifically on the current state of HDPs production in Scotland and the UK. In some cases, it makes more economic sense to use a hydrogen product than hydrogen itself to achieve decarbonisation. This is specifically true for two hard-to-abate sectors: aviation and shipping. Two of the most mentioned hydrogen products in our literature review were sustainable aviation fuels (SAFs) and ammonia.
SAFs are expected to play a major role in decarbonising aviation. Currently, very little SAF is supplied to Scottish airports. Nevertheless, in the long-term, SAFs will be key to replacing high-carbon jet fuels. According to the SAF Mandate, roughly 2% of the UK’s jet fuel demand in 2025 will be from SAFs. The share of SAFs in final jet fuel demand will increase to 10% by 2030 and to 22% by 2040. The global SAF demand is expected to reach 22.7-32.8 million tonnes by 2030 (Scottish Enterprise and Optimat, 2023).
In addition to SAFs, using hydrogen directly as a fuel is also a solution that can be deployed to decarbonise aviation. Direct use of hydrogen in aviation is not expected to be used as much as SAFs (Scottish Enterprise and Optimat, 2023). This is partly because of hydrogen not being a drop-in fuel, whereas SAFs are. Drop-in fuels are fuels that can be used in an airplane without making any modifications to the engine. This increases cost for air carriers to use it as an alternative to high-carbon fuels currently used. Another major concern is the safety issues that using hydrogen will pose. In addition, due to hydrogen being a lighter fuel, its volumetric density is lower. This means that a lot more hydrogen will be required to operate an airplane, increasing storage requirements and also increasing the weight of the plane. However, even if hydrogen is not used as a fuel itself, it will still play a big role in decarbonising aviation as it is an important input in the production of many SAFs. One such example is Power-to-Liquid (PtL) fuel. PtL fuels are formed by combining carbon and hydrogen together. Renewable electricity is used to remove carbon from CO2 and H from water, making the whole process zero-carbon. The PtL technology is also at a mature technological readiness level (German Environment Agency, 2016).
Similar to SAFs in aviation, low-carbon fuels will play an important role in decarbonising shipping. The hydrogen products mentioned in literature as potentials fuels to decarbonize marine transport are ammonia and methanol. The biggest concern regarding these products is the relatively weak supply chain capabilities in Scotland when compared to the EU. An example of this is the weak shipbuilding supply chain and fewer active commercial shipbuilders of scale. Scotland is unlikely to be able to meet the demand for these fuels for even a small number of cargo vessels (Optimat and Scottish Enterprise, 2023). Security factors could be another possible concern with ammonia. Ammonia is a very toxic fuel, which should only be handled by qualified personnel. Despite their importance in decarbonising certain sectors, the current production of these products is limited. Therefore, more focus needs to be placed on increasing their supply.
Need for further research
Many studies have focussed extensively on analysing both demand- and supply-side factors of Scotland’s hydrogen and HDP sectors. However, our research found that there is not enough information about different geographical hubs in Scotland and the role they can play. The lack of individual focus on different hubs has motivated this study.
Maximum potential renewable power generation
The maximum potential renewable power generation is defined as the total current, planned and announced installed capacity of solar PV and wind power projects in each hub region. Data was provided by council authority, so data was aggregated according to the defined council authority groupings for each hub. 2023 installed capacities were obtained from the DESNEZ Regional Renewable Statistics (2024). To obtain current capacity, this data was supplemented by projects that came online in 2024, as reported by the DESNEZ Renewable Energy Planning Database (REPD) and desk-based research (2024). Offshore wind projects were assigned to hubs based on their onshore landing points. The resulting current capacities were scaled by the 2023 average load factor for Scotland, appropriate to each technology (DESNEZ, 2024).
The REPD was also used to calculate planned installed capacity. From this database, development statuses encompassed under “planned” included:
- “Under Construction”.
- “Awaiting Construction”.
- “No Application Required”.
- “Application Submitted”.
- “Revised”.
For announced installed capacity, we included the 27.6 GW of ScotWind leasing round projects (Offshore Wind Scotland, 2024). The likely onshore landing point (and so corresponding hub) was identified from individual project websites. If this information was not available, the closest hub was allocated the offshore capacity. We included additional announced wind and solar projects from the Global Energy Monitor tracker (2025). To scale the resulting planned and announced capacities, we used load factors reported by DESNZ for UK new build projects (for delivery years 2026-2029) (2024).
To obtain the maximum potential renewable energy power generation for each hub, we then summed the current, planned and announced solar PV and wind power generation. We ranked the hubs from 1 (least generation) to 15 (highest), as shown in Table 13.
Table 12: Summary of data used for the calculation of maximum potential renewable power generation.
|
Data category |
Unit |
Value/Data used |
Source |
Confidence rating |
|---|---|---|---|---|
|
Installed capacity – 2024 |
MW |
Installed capacity of solar PV and wind projects by council authority |
(DESNEZ, 2024) (DESNEZ, 2024) |
3 |
|
Installed capacity – planned |
MW |
Planned installed capacity of solar PV and wind projects. |
(DESNEZ, 2024) |
3 |
|
Installed capacity – announced |
MW |
Capacity of announced solar PV and wind projects |
(Offshore Wind Scotland, 2024) (Global Energy Monitor, 2025) |
2 |
|
Current load factors for Scotland |
% |
PV: 9.5% Onshore wind: 23.6% Offshore wind: 29.5% |
(DESNEZ, 2024) |
3 |
|
Load factors for UK new build projects |
% |
PV: 10.8% Onshore wind: 44.8% Offshore wind: 62.3% |
(Department for Energy Security & Net Zero, 2024) |
2 |
Table 13: maximum potential renewable power generation by hub.
|
Hub |
Current maximum potential renewable power generation (GW) |
Planned/announced maximum potential renewable power generation (GW) |
Rank (1 = lowest to 15 = highest) |
|---|---|---|---|
|
Aberdeen |
0.18 |
10.87 |
15 |
|
Argyll and Islands |
0.10 |
1.50 |
8 |
|
Ayrshire |
0.34 |
0.75 |
7 |
|
Cromarty |
0.49 |
2.83 |
14 |
|
Duisburg |
0.01 |
0.00 |
1 |
|
Dumfries and Galloway |
0.27 |
1.41 |
9 |
|
Dundee |
0.01 |
0.40 |
4 |
|
Fife |
0.03 |
0.34 |
3 |
|
Glasgow |
0.44 |
0.41 |
5 |
|
Grangemouth |
0.06 |
0.05 |
2 |
|
Moray |
0.57 |
2.08 |
13 |
|
Orkney |
0.01 |
1.95 |
10 |
|
Scottish Borders |
0.15 |
0.78 |
6 |
|
Shetland |
0.11 |
2.07 |
12 |
|
Western Isles |
0.01 |
2.05 |
11 |
Water availability
In 2022, Ramboll, on behalf of SGN, investigated water availability for green hydrogen production across Scotland (Ramboll, 2022). This estimated hubs’ maximum green hydrogen production potential based on current water availability and forecasted hydrogen production capacity for 2045.
Water availability was defined as the total volume of effluent water and fresh water, including groundwater, surface water and potable water. Sea water was excluded from the analysis as its availability is effectively unlimited and it is accessible to all Scottish hubs. To evaluate potential water availability, we took the difference between Ramboll’s forecasted green hydrogen production capacity and the maximum production potential for each hub.
To ensure a fair comparison, we used the same methodology and assumptions for Duisburg as for the Scottish hubs. Ramboll outlines this approach on pages 26–27 of their report
(2022). According to the Jülich research centre, Duisburg could have a maximum installed hydrogen capacity of 1 GW by 2050 (Cerniauskas, et al., 2021, p. 79). Since no specific data was available for 2045, we assumed that the installed capacity would be the same as in 2050.
The total water availability for hydrogen production in Duisburg is approximately 18,697,000 cubic metres. This includes:
- 2,697,000 cubic metres of non-used fresh water ( Statistische Ämter des Bundes und der Länder, 2025).
- 16,000,000 cubic metres of effluent water from central waste treatment plants (Wirtschaftsbetriebe Duisburg, 2025).
Based on Ramboll’s assumptions, green hydrogen production requires 10 kg water per kg hydrogen. Additionally, we should account for a 20% water loss. Using 2,697,000 cubic metres of fresh water, the maximum hydrogen production potential is approximately 1.5 million tonnes. This result was converted to kilowatt-hours (kWh) using the lower heating value for hydrogen (33.3 kWh). We estimated that Duisburg’s maximum hydrogen production potential is 14 GW using the following equation:
The assumptions for this calculation are detailed in Table 14. Finally, we calculated Duisburg’s water availability by taking the difference between its forecasted hydrogen production capacity and its maximum production potential.
The final rankings from 1 to 15 (with 1 representing the hub with the least water availability) are shown in Table 15.
Table 14: Summary of data used for the calculation of water scarcity.
|
Data category |
Unit |
Value/Data used |
Source |
Confidence rating |
|---|---|---|---|---|
|
Forecasted green hydrogen capacity in Scotland |
GW |
|
(Ramboll, 2022, p. 3) |
2 |
|
Surface water availability in Scotland |
GW |
|
(Ramboll, 2022, pp. 3, 34) |
2 |
|
Groundwater availability in Scotland |
GW |
|
(Ramboll, 2022, pp. 3, 35) |
2 |
|
Effluent water availability in Scotland |
GW |
|
(Ramboll, 2022, pp. 3, 37) |
2 |
|
Forecasted green hydrogen capacity in Duisburg |
GW |
Estimated installed green hydrogen capacity in 2050. Based on Figure 73 of the source report. |
(Cerniauskas, et al., 2021, p. 79) |
2 |
|
Electricity to hydrogen conversion efficiency |
% |
69% |
(Ramboll, 2022, p. 20) |
2 |
|
Annual operating hours |
hrs |
7350 |
(Ramboll, 2022, p. 20) |
2 |
|
Average operating load |
% |
70% |
(Ramboll, 2022, p. 20) |
2 |
|
Lower heating value of hydrogen |
kWh |
33.3 |
(U.S. Department of Energy, 2025) |
3 |
|
Water loss allowance |
% |
20 |
(Ramboll, 2022, p. 27) |
2 |
|
Freshwater availability in Duisburg |
Cubic metres |
Non-public fresh water discharged unused/water given to third parties in 2019. |
( Statistische Ämter des Bundes und der Länder, 2025) |
3 |
|
Effluent water availability in Duisburg |
Cubic metres |
Total annual wastewater treated in the three municipal wastewater treatment plants. |
(Wirtschaftsbetriebe Duisburg, n.d.) |
3 |
Table 15: Raw data and rank for water availability by hub.
|
Hub |
Forecasted green hydrogen capacity in 2045 (GW) |
Maximum green hydrogen potential based on total water availability (GW) |
Rank (15 = most available to 1 = least available) |
|---|---|---|---|
|
Aberdeen |
0.50 |
44.5 |
9 |
|
Argyll and Islands |
0.13 |
11.4 |
4 |
|
Ayrshire |
0.50 |
47.5 |
10 |
|
Cromarty |
5.00 |
61.2 |
11 |
|
Duisburg |
1.00 |
14.0 |
5 |
|
Dumfries and Galloway |
0.50 |
26.7 |
8 |
|
Dundee |
0.25 |
73.0 |
13 |
|
Fife |
0.25 |
67.8 |
12 |
|
Glasgow |
2.50 |
239.2 |
15 |
|
Grangemouth |
2.00 |
145.9 |
14 |
|
Moray |
2.00 |
26.6 |
7 |
|
Orkney |
0.05 |
1.5 |
2 |
|
Scottish Borders |
0.00 |
22.9 |
6 |
|
Shetland |
6.30 |
2.0 |
1 |
|
Western Isles |
0.12 |
9.1 |
3 |
Gross Value Added of the energy sector
The Office of National Statistics (ONS) supplied data on the gross value added of the energy and the production sectors (2024). The ONS defined the production sector as SIC07 A-E. For the energy sector (including renewables), the ONS included the following SIC codes:
- SIC 05: Mining of coal and lignite
- SIC 06: Extraction of crude petroleum and natural gas
- SIC 09: Mining support service activities
- SIC 19: Manufacture of coke and refined petroleum products
- SIC 20.14: Manufacture of other organic based chemicals
- SIC 35: Electricity, gas, steam and air conditioning supply
- SIC 36: Water collection, treatment and supply
- SIC 38.22: Treatment and disposal of hazardous waste
- SIC 71.12/2 Engineering related scientific and technical consulting activities
- SIC 74.90/1 Environmental consulting activities
The GVA data by council area was aggregated to provide a hub-level view. Table 16 provides the data for GVA for each hub in the energy and the production sectors.
Table 16: Raw data and rank for GVA of the energy sector by hub.
|
Hub |
Energy sector GVA (2022; £millions) |
Production sector GVA (2022, £millions) |
Rank (15 = highest to 1 = lowest) |
|---|---|---|---|
|
Aberdeen |
25878.9 |
4480 |
15 |
|
Argyll and Islands |
162.1 |
422 |
7 |
|
Ayrshire |
185.3 |
1762 |
9 |
|
Cromarty |
342.8 |
1426 |
10 |
|
Duisburg |
— |
4147 |
13 |
|
Dumfries and Galloway |
167.8 |
980 |
8 |
|
Dundee |
146.9 |
1322 |
6 |
|
Fife |
351.4 |
2232 |
11 |
|
Glasgow |
2910.0 |
7447 |
14 |
|
Grangemouth |
512.1 |
1522 |
12 |
|
Moray |
78.7 |
875 |
4 |
|
Orkney |
69.4 |
130 |
3 |
|
Scottish Borders |
43.7 |
547 |
2 |
|
Shetland |
119.4 |
184 |
5 |
|
Western Isles |
16.8 |
83 |
1 |
Table 17: Summary of data used for the calculation of GVA of the energy sector.
|
Data category |
Unit |
Value/Data used |
Source |
Confidence rating |
|---|---|---|---|---|
|
Energy sector GVA in Scotland |
£million |
|
(Scottish Government, 2024) |
3 |
|
Production sector GVA in Scotland |
£million |
Regional GVA (balanced) by local authority for the Production Sector in 2022. |
(Office for National Statistics, 2024) |
3 |
|
Production sector GVA in Duisburg |
€million |
Duisburg GVA at basic prices for the Production Sector in 2022. |
(Volkswirtschaftliche Gesamtrechnungen der Länder, 2024) |
3 |
|
Euro to pound conversion rate |
£ |
12-month average for 2022: £0.8489 |
(HMRC, 2022) |
3 |
Full time equivalent workers
The data for the current size of workforce in different hubs was taken from Skills Development Scotland. The data was broken down into 32 local authorities. We took the current workforce figures for the Energy and Engineering sectors. The numbers from relevant local authorities were then added to derive the final number for each of our hubs. Table 18 shows the current workforce stats for each hub.
Table 18: Size of workforce in the engineering and energy sectors of Scotland.
|
Hub |
Energy |
Engineering |
Total |
|---|---|---|---|
|
Aberdeen |
42900 |
28200 |
71100 |
|
Argyll and Islands |
800 |
800 |
1600 |
|
Ayrshire |
2400 |
8200 |
10600 |
|
Cromarty |
4900 |
3000 |
7900 |
|
Dumfries and Galloway |
1000 |
1600 |
2600 |
|
Dundee |
1300 |
5100 |
6400 |
|
Fife |
1400 |
10300 |
11700 |
|
Glasgow |
16400 |
39300 |
55700 |
|
Grangemouth |
2500 |
4400 |
6900 |
|
Moray |
600 |
1500 |
2100 |
|
Orkney |
300 |
200 |
500 |
|
Scottish Borders |
400 |
2000 |
2400 |
|
Shetland |
300 |
400 |
700 |
|
Western Isles |
200 |
200 |
400 |
Future workforce requirement
The data for the future workforce requirement was taken from Skills Development Scotland’s database. This data was also disaggregated into 32 local authorities. The figures for all relevant local authorities were added to calculate final figures for our hubs. Table 19 shows the final estimates for future expansion demand.
Table 19: Estimated future expansion demand for each hub in Scotland.
|
Hub |
Total Expansion Demand |
|---|---|
|
Aberdeen |
-4600 |
|
Argyll and Islands |
0 |
|
Ayrshire |
-900 |
|
Cromarty |
-100 |
|
Dumfries and Galloway |
-200 |
|
Dundee |
-500 |
|
Fife |
-1300 |
|
Glasgow |
-1500 |
|
Grangemouth |
-700 |
|
Moray |
-100 |
|
Orkney |
0 |
|
Scottish Borders |
-200 |
|
Shetland |
0 |
|
Western Isles |
0 |
Large-scale storage capacity
Currently, there are no commercial geological hydrogen storage projects in Scotland. So, we have assessed the technical geological storage capacity for each hub. For this, we have used estimates from scientific literature. The sources for each storage technology are detailed in Table 21. We assigned the storage capacities to each hub based on the site’s location or, if offshore, their likely terminal.
We normalised the total large-scale storage capacity for each hub to provide a score from 1-10 (highest capacity). We adjusted the scores of the following hubs by +0.25. This adjustment accounted for the possibility of developing offshore salt caverns and the planned Project Union pipeline that could connect hubs to English salt caverns.
- Aberdeen
- Dumfries and Galloway
- Dundee
- Fife
- Glasgow
- Grangemouth
- Moray
- Orkney
- Scottish Borders
The adjustment helped differentiate low-scoring hubs while maintaining the ranking integrity of those with confirmed storage capacity. Finally, we ranked the hubs from 1-15, where 15 represents the hub with the highest capacity (Table 20).
For Duisburg, we were unable to assess its specific technical storage capacity from scientific literature. However, compared to Scotland, Germany has hydrogen storage projects in the planning phase (Hornby, 2023). Due to the approved German core pipeline network, Duisburg will be connected to these projects. Therefore, due to higher confidence in hydrogen storage availability, we qualitatively assigned Duisburg a score of 3/10. This places Duisburg second to Aberdeen in the final ranking.
Table 20: Large-scale storage capacity by hub.
|
Hub |
Hydrogen storage capacity (TWh) by technology |
Rank (1-15) | |||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|
Onshore salt caverns |
Saline aquifers |
Offshore oil/gas |
Total | ||
|
Aberdeen |
0 |
1849 |
1082 |
2931 |
15 |
|
Argyll and Islands |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
1 |
|
Ayrshire |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
1 |
|
Cromarty |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
1 |
|
Duisburg |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
14 |
|
Dumfries and Galloway |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
5 |
|
Dundee |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
5 |
|
Fife |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
5 |
|
Glasgow |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
5 |
|
Grangemouth |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
5 |
|
Moray |
0 |
118 |
0 |
118 |
13 |
|
Orkney |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
5 |
|
Scottish Borders |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
5 |
|
Shetland |
0 |
82 |
32 |
114 |
12 |
|
Western Isles |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
1 |
Table 21: Summary of data used for the calculation of large-scale storage capacity.
|
Data category |
Unit |
Value/Data used |
Source |
Confidence rating |
|
Hydrogen storage capacity – onshore salt caverns |
TWh |
0 TWh |
(ClimateXChange, 2023) |
3 |
|
Hydrogen storage capacity – saline aquifers |
TWh |
Location and technical working hydrogen gas capacity by site |
(Safidi, et al., 2021) |
2 |
|
Hydrogen storage capacity – offshore oil/gas fields |
TWh |
Location and technical working hydrogen gas capacity by field |
(Peecock, et al., 2022) |
2 |
|
Offshore salt cavern locations |
N/A |
– |
(Edlmann, et al., 2024) |
3 |
|
Potential hydrogen pipeline locations |
N/A |
– |
(Edlmann, et al., 2024) |
3 |
|
Planned hydrogen storage in Ruhr area |
N/A |
– |
(Hornby, 2023) |
3 |
Pipeline network infrastructure
To score each hub’s potential pipeline infrastructure, we used the following scale from 1-6:
- There is no pipeline infrastructure suitable for hydrogen and no proposed or planned new hydrogen pipelines.
- There are existing gas pipelines which can be repurposed. There are no planned new hydrogen pipelines but there may be some proposed.
- There is a small-scale (e.g. distribution/spur pipelines) hydrogen pipeline project at any phase of development.
- There is a large-scale (e.g. trunkline pipelines) hydrogen pipeline project at any phase of development.
- The hub is a potential international export or import site for hydrogen and HDPs. However, planned pipeline infrastructure is insufficient and/or the site is not well-established for international trade.
- The hub is a potential international export or import site for hydrogen and HDPs. There is sufficient planned pipeline infrastructure, and the site is well-established for international trade.
We have detailed the justification and sources for each hub’s rating in Table 22. Using these ratings, the hubs were ranked from 1 to 15 (Table 23). 15 represents the hub with the most suitable pipeline network infrastructure.
Table 22: Scoring method for pipeline network infrastructure.
|
Hub |
Rating (1-6) |
Justification |
Source |
|---|---|---|---|
|
Aberdeen |
6 |
|
(Net Zero Technology Centre, 2023) |
|
Argyll and Islands |
2 |
|
(Net Zero Technology Centre, 2023) |
|
Ayrshire |
3 |
|
(Scottish Enterprise, n.d.; SGN, 2021), |
|
Cromarty |
5 |
|
(Net Zero Technology Centre, 2023; Scottish Enterprise, n.d.) |
|
Duisburg |
6 |
|
(Bundesnetzagentur, 2024; Gasunie, 2023) |
|
Dumfries and Galloway |
4 |
|
(Net Zero Technology Centre, 2023; Scottish Enterprise, n.d.) |
|
Dundee |
4 |
|
(SGN, 2021) |
|
Fife |
4 |
|
(SGN, 2021) |
|
Glasgow |
3 |
|
(SGN, 2021; Scottish Enterprise, n.d.) |
|
Grangemouth |
4 |
|
(SGN, 2021; SGN, 2023) |
|
Moray |
3 |
|
(SGN, 2021; Scottish Government, 2020) |
|
Orkney |
5 |
|
(SGN, 2021; Net Zero Technology Centre, 2023) |
Table 23: Hub ranking for pipeline network infrastructure.
|
Hub |
Rank (1 = least suitable to 15 = most suitable) |
|---|---|
|
Aberdeen |
14 |
|
Argyll and Islands |
1 |
|
Ayrshire |
2 |
|
Cromarty |
11 |
|
Duisburg |
14 |
|
Dumfries and Galloway |
6 |
|
Dundee |
6 |
|
Fife |
6 |
|
Glasgow |
2 |
|
Grangemouth |
6 |
|
Moray |
2 |
|
Orkney |
11 |
|
Scottish Borders |
6 |
|
Shetland |
11 |
|
Western Isles |
2 |
Ports
We have investigated which hubs are most suitable for meeting maritime shipping fuel demand and for trading hydrogen and HDPs by ship. To evaluate the scale of each hub’s maritime industry, we ranked the hubs based on their total port freight traffic in 2023. This analysis was based on the Department for Transport’s Port Freight Statistics Publication (Maritime Statistics, 2024). The Port0101 dataset breaks down freight traffic by port and council authority. Traffic included domestic and international freight traffic in both directions and we included all ports – major and minor. For Duisburg, we used State Office for Information and Technology NWR data for freight traffic in both directions for 2023 (2024).
We adjusted these initial ranked scores based on several criteria, shown in Table 24. For the port dimensions criterion, if online information was conflicting, we selected the greatest dimension for further scoring. This multi-factor scoring method reflects the diverse functions that ports serve. Based on these final scores, we ranked the hubs from 1 to 15 (Table 25). 15 represents the hub with the most suitable port infrastructure.
Table 24: Score adjustment criteria for scoring port metric.
|
# |
Criteria |
Score adjustment | |
|---|---|---|---|
|
If YES |
If NO | ||
|
1 |
Does the hub have a port with existing or planned infrastructure for the storage, production or maritime fuelling of hydrogen/HDPs? |
+2 |
–2 |
|
2 |
Does the hub have a port with dimensions suitable for a typical small carrier vessel for transporting gas or ammonia? The Scottish Government defines these dimensions as a 100m length, 25m beam and a 12m draft (2020, p. 63). |
+2 |
–2 |
|
3 |
Does the hub have a port which is considered suitable for hydrogen exports or imports by the government? |
+3 |
–2 |
Table 25: Summary of data used for scoring the port metric.
|
Data category |
Unit |
Value/Data used |
Source |
Confidence rating |
|---|---|---|---|---|
|
Port freight traffic – Scotland |
Thousand tonnes |
2023 freight traffic, both directions |
(Maritime Statistics, 2024) |
3 |
|
Port freight traffic – Duisburg |
Thousand tonnes |
2023 freight traffic, both directions |
(Information und Technik Nordrhein-Westfalen, 2024) |
3 |
|
Port dimensions |
metres |
Where available – the port’s maximum length, beam and draft |
(SHIPNEXT BV, 2025; OneOcean Group Ltd, 2023; Port of Aberdeen, 2025; UKPORTS, 2025) |
3 |
|
Hydrogen/HDP infrastructure – Duisburg |
– |
– |
(Duisport, 2022) |
3 |
|
Hydrogen/HDP infrastructure – Scotland |
– |
– |
(Scottish Government, 2020) |
3 |
|
Import hub – Duisburg |
– |
– |
(Tix, 2024) |
3 |
|
Export hubs – Scotland |
– |
– |
(Scottish Government, 2020) |
3 |
Table 26: Raw data, analysis and rank for ports by hub.
|
Hub |
Port freight traffic (thousand tonnes, 2023) |
Criteria 1 (YES = ☒) |
Criteria 2 (YES = ☒) |
Criteria 3 (YES = ☒) |
Rank (1 = least suitable to 15 = most suitable) |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|
Duisburg |
41333 |
☒ |
☐ |
☒ |
15 |
|
Cromarty |
7376 |
☒ |
☒ |
☒ |
13 |
|
Fife |
18681 |
☒ |
☐ |
☒ |
13 |
|
Grangemouth |
18521 |
☒ |
☐ |
☒ |
12 |
|
Shetland |
5975 |
☒ |
☒ |
☒ |
11 |
|
Aberdeen |
4395 |
☒ |
☒ |
☒ |
10 |
|
Orkney |
1689 |
☒ |
☒ |
☒ |
9 |
|
Ayrshire |
8923 |
☐ |
☒ |
☐ |
8 |
|
Glasgow |
8594 |
☐ |
☐ |
☐ |
7 |
|
Dumfries and Galloway |
6511 |
☐ |
☐ |
☐ |
6 |
|
Western Isles |
204 |
☒ |
☐ |
☐ |
5 |
|
Moray |
108 |
☒ |
☐ |
☐ |
4 |
|
Dundee |
996 |
☐ |
☐ |
☐ |
3 |
|
Argyll and Islands |
46 |
☐ |
☐ |
☐ |
2 |
|
Scottish Borders |
0 |
☐ |
☐ |
☐ |
1 |
Local policy and planning support
The data for the local policy and planning support metrics were taken from Scottish government’s Planning Application Statistics database. The data was broken down into 24 local planning authorities. The data was taken from the relevant local authorities and averaged for all our hubs.
It was found that for the average success rate of applications, there was no data for 6 hubs. Table 27 shows the average success rate and average planning duration for each Scottish hub and Duisburg.
Table 27: Average success rate and duration for planning applications
|
Hub |
Average success rate of planning applications |
Average duration of planning applications (weeks) |
|---|---|---|
|
Aberdeen |
87% |
6.7 |
|
Argyll and Islands |
No Data |
17.6 |
|
Ayrshire |
50% |
6.7 |
|
Cromarty |
80% |
15.3 |
|
Duisburg, Germany |
No Data |
18 |
|
Dumfries and Galloway |
No Data |
13.2 |
|
Dundee |
79% |
11.7 |
|
Fife |
53% |
10.3 |
|
Glasgow |
70% |
14.6 |
|
Grangemouth |
80% |
9 |
|
Moray |
No Data |
7.2 |
|
Orkney |
No Data |
10.6 |
|
Scottish Borders |
88% |
8.2 |
|
Shetland |
No Data |
10.6 |
|
Western Isles |
No Data |
13.9 |
Sensitivity analysis
For main report, we weighted capability groups according to the working group’s priorities and adjusted these weightings based on data confidence. We normalised each metric ranking from 1-15 into a 1-10 scale. Then, according to the defined weightings, we scaled the metric score for each hub to provide a total score out of 100.
Here, we analyse the sensitivity of this priority scoring by considering two alternative scenarios:
- The balanced scenario – all metrics are weighted equally at 9.1%.
- The absolute scenario – Rather than scoring hubs relatively according to metric rankings, we used the absolute data for each metric. For example, for GVA of the energy sector, we normalised the absolute GVA values to give a score from 1-10. The same weightings are used as in the priority scenario.
Table 28: Hub rankings from priority, balanced and absolute scenario.
|
Rank (15 = highest score to 1 = lowest score) |
Hub scoring method | ||
|---|---|---|---|
|
Priority scenario |
Balanced scenario |
Absolute scenario | |
|
15 |
Aberdeen |
Aberdeen |
Aberdeen |
|
1 |
Argyll and Islands |
Argyll and Islands |
Argyll and Islands |
|
9 |
Ayrshire |
Ayrshire |
Ayrshire |
|
13 |
Cromarty |
Glasgow |
Cromarty |
|
14 |
Duisburg |
Duisburg |
Duisburg |
|
6 |
Dumfries and Galloway |
Moray |
Dumfries and Galloway |
|
8 |
Dundee |
Dundee |
Dundee |
|
11 |
Fife |
Grangemouth |
Fife |
|
12 |
Glasgow |
Cromarty |
Glasgow |
|
10 |
Grangemouth |
Fife |
Grangemouth |
|
7 |
Moray |
Shetland |
Moray |
|
4 |
Orkney |
Orkney |
Orkney |
|
3 |
Scottish Borders |
Dumfries and Galloway |
Scottish Borders |
|
5 |
Shetland |
Scottish Borders |
Shetland |
|
2 |
Western Isles |
Western Isles |
Western Isles |
Table 28 shows the final ranking for supply chain capability according to all three scenarios. Several key insights can be taken from our sensitivity analysis:
- We can see that the hubs at the ranking extremes remain the same. Aberdeen remains the top hub for supply chain capability, while the Western Isles and Argyll and Islands are the bottom hubs.
- The hubs between these extremes vary according to the scenario. However, the general “upper” (Cromarty, Glasgow, Fife, Grangemouth, Ayrshire) and “lower” (Dundee, Moray, Dumfries and Galloway, Shetland, Orkney and Scottish Borders) groupings identified in the priority scenario are consistent in the balanced and absolute scenarios.
Demand mapping – e-methanol and ammonia for maritime
It is estimated that the UK used roughly 7 million tonnes of fossil marine fuels in the year 2021 (Transport & Environment, 2023). We used the EU Commission’s assumption of 40.5 MJ/kg as the energy content of marine fuel. Using this, we derived the addressable market for the whole of UK. Assuming that the fuel usage by Scottish ports will have the same share, we estimated the addressable market for Scotland’s maritime sector. Using data from the Department for Transport, we calculated the share of freight activity of each hub’s ports in the UK (Maritime Statistics, 2024).
Due to the uncertainties associated with estimating demand for individual HDPs in this sector, our analysis is technologically agnostic. We have not tried to estimate individual demand for each HDP. This analysis only estimated the addressable demand for all HDPs in the maritime sector of Scotland.
Table 29: Estimated shipping fuel demand by hub
|
Hub |
Shipping fuel demand (TWh) |
|---|---|
|
Aberdeen |
0.8 |
|
Argyll and Islands |
0.0 |
|
Ayrshire |
1.6 |
|
Cromarty |
1.4 |
|
Dumfries and Galloway |
1.0 |
|
Dundee |
0.2 |
|
Fife |
3.5 |
|
Glasgow |
1.5 |
|
Grangemouth |
3.5 |
|
Moray |
0.0 |
|
Orkney |
0.5 |
|
Scottish Borders |
0.0 |
|
Shetland |
1.2 |
|
Western Isles |
0.0 |
Demand mapping – e-methanol for chemicals
In Scotland, we assume that Grangemouth Chemical Science Park is the only large-scale user of methanol as a chemical feedstock. We based this analysis on the estimated syngas produced from two onsite ethane crackers which supply INEOS’ polymer plants (INEOS Group, 2025). The ethane crackers have a production capacity of around 1 million tonnes of ethylene per year (Endeavor Business Media, 2016). From this value, we have reverse calculated the yield of syngas (hydrogen and methane from the crackers). Assuming an 80% yield of ethylene product, 1.25 million tonnes of ethane feedstock is required (Brooks, 2013). From literature, we can expect an estimated 13% yield of syngas (Brooks, 2013). This means 160,000 tonnes of syngas is produced from 1.25 million tonnes of ethane. In the production of petrochemicals, syngas is converted to methanol. Assuming 8600 hours/year of operation and a 62% yield, we can expect to produce around 100,000 tonnes of methanol (Timsina, et al., 2021). We then multiplied this result by the lower calorific value of methanol (19.9 MJ/kg) and the conversion factor of 2.78×10-10to give the energy demand in TWh.
Demand mapping – SAF for aviation
We estimated the addressable market for SAFs in the Scotland by estimating the potential demand for jet fuel in each public airport in Scotland. Due to lack of data on jet fuel consumption in each airport, we took some assumptions to calculate potential demand. It is estimated that the UK used 11 million tonnes of jet fuel in the year 2022. This figure is for all the airports in the UK. So, to determine jet fuel demand for Scotland, we calculated the percentage of aircraft activity in each airport against the total UK aircraft activity. It was then assumed that the proprtion of jet fuel used in an airport will be the same as their share in total aircaft activity.
The table below show the proportion of aircraft movement in each hub and airport.
Table 30: Estimated jet fuel demand in all Scottish airports.
|
Hub |
Airport |
Potential SAF Demand (TWh) |
Total hub potential demand (TWh) |
|---|---|---|---|
|
Aberdeen |
Aberdeen |
3.49 |
3.49 |
|
Argyll and Bute |
Campbeltown |
0.07 |
0.26 |
|
Argyll and Bute |
Islay |
0.12 |
0.26 |
|
Argyll and Bute |
Tiree |
0.07 |
0.26 |
|
Cromarty |
Inverness |
1.20 |
1.20 |
|
Dundee |
Dundee |
1.66 |
1.66 |
|
Glasgow |
Glasgow |
3.51 |
4.45 |
|
Glasgow |
Glasgow Prestwick |
0.94 |
4.45 |
|
Grangemouth |
Edinburgh |
5.03 |
5.03 |
|
Orkney |
Kirkwall |
0.54 |
0.70 |
|
Orkney |
Wick John O’ Groats |
0.16 |
0.70 |
|
Shetland |
Lerwick (Tingwall) |
0.06 |
0.93 |
|
Shetland |
Scatsta |
0.19 |
0.93 |
|
Shetland |
Sumburgh |
0.68 |
0.93 |
|
Western Isles |
Barra |
0.05 |
0.55 |
|
Western Isles |
Benbecula |
0.13 |
0.55 |
|
Western Isles |
Stornoway |
0.37 |
0.55 |
Demand mapping – ammonia for fertilisers
To estimate ammonia demand from fertilisers, we first estimated the total demand for nitrogen based fertilsers in Scotland. For our analysis, we assumed that nitrogen-based fertilisers consist of just urea and ammonium nitrate fertilisers. The fertiliser use estimation was done for both cropland and grassland. The average nitrogen based fertiliser application rate was taken from the UK government’s Fertiliser Use Database. The average application rate for nitorgen fertiliser in Scottish croplands is 120 kg/ha. And the average application rate for grassland is 83 kg/ha.
This average application rate was then multiplied by the total estimated crop and grass lands in Scotland. We then estimated the nitrogen content in these two fertilisers. After getting the nitrogen content in them, we estimated the demand for ammonia.
Once the final figure for ammonia was derived, we divided the total use of ammonia for all our hubs. This was done by assuming that each hub’s share of use of ammonia will be the same as their share of total GVA in agriculture. The table below shows our demand estimates for ammonia in each Scottish hub.
Table 31: Estimated ammonia demand from fertilisers in Scotland
|
Hub |
Ammonia fertiliser demand (thousand tonnes) |
Ammonia fertiliser demand (TWh) |
|---|---|---|
|
Aberdeen |
27.1 |
0.140 |
|
Argyll and Islands |
2.5 |
0.013 |
|
Ayrshire |
4.2 |
0.022 |
|
Cromarty |
7.4 |
0.038 |
|
Dumfries and Galloway |
4.2 |
0.021 |
|
Dundee |
2.5 |
0.013 |
|
Fife |
4.8 |
0.025 |
|
Glasgow |
24.5 |
0.126 |
|
Grangemouth |
3.0 |
0.015 |
|
Moray |
1.2 |
0.006 |
|
Orkney |
0.9 |
0.005 |
|
Scottish Borders |
2.8 |
0.014 |
|
Shetland |
1.4 |
0.007 |
|
Western Isles |
0.0 |
0.000 |
Table 32: Further information about all the policies and regulations we researched.
|
Region |
Policy name |
Description |
|---|---|---|
|
European Union |
Net Zero Target |
The European Union aims to meet net zero emissions by 2050. |
|
European Union |
Hydrogen Strategy |
The hydrogen strategy for a climate-neutral Europe was adopted in July 2020. |
|
European Union |
RePowerEU |
The European Commission implemented the REPowerEU Plan to phase out reliance on Russian fossil fuel imports following the invasion of Ukraine. |
|
European Union |
REDIII Targets |
Transport: RED III fuel suppliers must achieve a 14.5% reduction in GHG emissions associated with their fuels or achieve at least 29% renewables share in the fuel supply. In addition, at least 5.5% of the fuel mix must be composed of advanced biofuels and RFNBOs (combined binding target). Industry: The EUs CBAM Regulation (10th May 2023) will be transitioned in during the period of 2023-2026 and then full force from 2026 onwards. The EU’s Fit for 55 proposals include a 50% renewable share for hydrogen used in industry. RED III – Industry must procure at least 42% of its hydrogen from renewable fuels of non-biological origin (RFNBOS) by 2030, though countries that can achieve a fossil-free hydrogen mix of at least 77% by 2030 can see that target reduced by 20%. |
|
European Union |
H2Global |
H2Global is live (1st auction closed 2023) and formed through H2 purchase and sale agreements through a central body. Managed windows for funding applications through 10-year hydrogen purchase agreements, competition-based procurement process. As of 06/23, H2Global and the Hydrogen Investment Bank have been linked. Working on a European auction open to all EU countries. |
|
European Union |
Hydrogen Bank |
Acts through an auction system, fixed price payment per kg. Fixed premium per kg hydrogen produced for a maximum of 10 years of operation. Auctions launched under the Innovation Fund in the autumn of 2023. |
|
European Union |
Innovation Fund |
The innovation fund hydrogen focussed from Nov 2022. Acts through a competitive bidding process – max bid 4 Euro per kg* – and via waves of calls for proposals. |
|
European Union |
IPCEI |
Important Project of Common European Interest (IPCEI) are live and provided in waves of grant funding. A requirement for projects must be for them to show they are financially viable without subsidies. |
|
European Union |
AFIR |
AFIR passed March 2023, detailing one HRS to be deployed every 200km along Ten-T core. |
|
European Union |
Fitfor55 |
Fit for 55: 2.6% target for renewable fuels of non-biological origin (RFNBO) in transport by 2030 |
|
European Union |
EU ETS |
The EU Emission Trading Scheme is a “cap and trade” system that limits the amount of greenhouse gases which can be emitted within the EU. |
|
European Union |
EU MoUs |
The EU has signed MoUs with Japan, Egypt, Mauritania (and others) around hydrogen including export/imports. |
|
European Union |
RED Low Carbon Hydrogen Standard |
3.38 kg CO2-eq/kg hydrogen (28 gCO2e per MJ) (70% lower compared to emissions from fossil fuels). Two delegated acts under Renewable Energy Directive published by the Commission in Feb-23 – (i) principle of additionality, (ii) methodology for calculating GGG emissions. Rules to apply to imports. |
|
United Kingdom |
Net Zero Target |
Net zero by 2050. 78% emission reduction by 2035. Mandated in law. Net Zero power system by 2030. |
|
United Kingdom |
UK Hydrogen Strategy |
Production target of 10 GW by 2030, with at least 6 GW of this coming from green production. |
|
United Kingdom |
HPBM |
Hydrogen Production Business Model – a CFD funding mechanism bridging the difference between producing low-carbon hydrogen gas and the price of natural gas. Funding provided through allocation rounds. |
|
United Kingdom |
Hydrogen Transport Business Model (HTBM) |
This is a policy for hydrogen transport projects that are expecting to connect to hydrogen network in the future. The policy aims to mitigate risks for hydrogen network developers. This is done by guaranteeing a fixed rate of return to the developers. |
|
United Kingdom |
Hydrogen Storage Business Model (HSBM) |
Similar to HTBM, this policy aims to incentivise large scale hydrogen storage. |
|
United Kingdom |
Net Zero Hydrogen Fund (NZHF) |
The NZHF provides support for a range of different costs such as development or capital expenditures. |
|
United Kingdom |
Health and Safety Executive (HSE) |
HSE will play a role in determining the safety case for hydrogen in heating. More information from HSE will reduce the uncertainty with hydrogen’s role in decarbonising heat. |
|
United Kingdom |
ADR Regulation |
ADR regulation lays down specific regulations for transport of “dangerous goods”. This regulation includes in its scope both hydrogen and various HDPs that meet the criteria of being dangerous. |
|
United Kingdom |
Gas Safety Management Regulation (GSMR) |
GSMR prohibits injecting more than 0.1% hydrogen into the networks. This will need to be updated to expand the role of hydrogen blending into existing pipelines. |
|
United Kingdom |
Control of Major Accident Hazard (COMAH) |
This applies to many of hydrogen derivatives and products due to their safety concerns. |
|
United Kingdom |
LCHS |
The UK Low Carbon Hydrogen Standard sets a carbon intensity threshold for hydrogen production of 20 gCO2e/MJ (2.4 kg CO2-eq/kg hydrogen). If the hydrogen produced meets this standard, it can be deemed low-carbon and is eligible for government subsidy. |
|
United Kingdom |
UK ETS |
The UK’s own ETS scheme since leaving the EU. |
|
United Kingdom |
SAF Mandate |
The UK has formed a SAF mandate stipulating set targets for percentage shares of SAF, and specific production pathways (such as PtL). Headline figure is that 10% of UK aviation fuel will be SAF by 2030. |
|
United Kingdom |
RTFO |
The Renewable Transport Fuels Obligation |
|
Germany |
Net Zero Target |
Net zero by 2045. Emissions shall move to net negative after 2050. Germany has set the preliminary targets of cutting emissions by at least 65 percent by 2030 compared to 1990 levels, and 88 percent by 2040 Mandated in law. |
|
Germany |
National Hydrogen Strategy |
The German hydrogen national strategy was released in 2020 before being an update was released in 2023. |
|
Germany |
H2 Global |
H2 Global – value €4 billion. Initial auction of 900mn euros launched in Dec 2022 for H2 derivatives. Government plans to make a further 3.5 billion euros available for new bidding rounds with durations up to 2036. |
|
Germany |
Carbon Tax |
CO2 tax (introduced in 2023) for Avgas and Jet A-1. |
|
Germany |
Hydrogen Mobility Targets |
Targets include fuel cell trucks, 20 HRS’s and passenger cars, fuel cell buses for public transportation, and the operation of the first inland ship operating on hydrogen by 2025. |
|
Germany |
National MOUs |
Several MoUs signed surrounding imports of hydrogen and ammonia into the country – Mauritania MoU could equate to 8 million tonnes/year. |
|
The Netherlands |
Net Zero Target |
Net zero by 2050. 55% CO2 reduction by 2030. In law. |
|
The Netherlands |
National Hydrogen Strategy |
The Netherlands hydrogen strategy was released in 2020. |
|
The Netherlands |
National Climate Agreement |
The national climate agreement contains set targets for fuel cell HDVs, passenger cars and hydrogen refuelling stations. |
|
The Netherlands |
Carbon Levy |
In 2021, introduced carbon levy for industry – complementary to EU ETS – road mapped to 2030 currently. |
|
The Netherlands |
Guarantees of Origin Scheme |
Green hydrogen Guarantees of Origin operational from Oct-22, following a Bill (May-22) and trial (summer-22). |
|
The Netherlands |
H2Global |
300mn euro specific funding from H2Global, including funding for ammonia. |
|
The Netherlands |
National MoUs |
In 2020, the US and the Netherlands signed a statement of intent to collaborate on hydrogen. The Minister of Energy of Chile and the State Secretary for Economic Affairs and Climate Policy signed a joint statement on collaboration in the field of green hydrogen import and export (July 2021). The UAE Ministry of Energy and Infrastructure and the Dutch Ministry for Foreign Trade and Development Cooperation have signed a Memorandum of Understanding on hydrogen energy. As part of their Joint Economic Committee, the UAE and the Netherlands have been in discussions to identify common interests and create a partnership for decarbonisation of the energy sector and increasing the use of clean hydrogen (March 2022). |
|
Belgium |
Net Zero Target |
Net Zero by 2050, 55% emissions reductions target in place for 2030. |
|
Belgium |
National Hydrogen Strategy |
Hydrogen strategy enacted firstly in 2021, with an update in 2022. Both strategies focussed on positioning Belgium as an import and transit location for low-carbon molecules into Europe. The country will remain dependent on energy imports in various forms to cover its domestic demand, estimating between 2 and 6 TWh of renewable hydrogen (or derivatives) in 2030 and between 100 and 165 TWh in 2050 |
|
Belgium |
Energy Transition Fund |
The Energy Transition Fund will fund until 2025, providing 20-30 million euros in support. The federal government has also earmarked 60 million euros (including 50 million euros from the national recovery and resilience plan) to invest and support projects to scale up innovative, low-carbon technologies. |
|
Belgium |
Hydrogen Act |
The Hydrogen Act establishes a regulatory framework for the transport of hydrogen via pipelines. The act intends to foster the growth of the Belgian hydrogen market and the required hydrogen transport infrastructure. |
How to cite this publication:
Yip, E., Nagpal, D., Wilson, J., Morton, H. (2025) Scotland’s capabilities in producing hydrogen products and derivatives ‘, ClimateXChange. DOI: http://dx.doi.org/10.7488/era/6397
© The University of Edinburgh, 2025
Prepared by Talan on behalf of ClimateXChange, The University of Edinburgh. All rights reserved.
While every effort is made to ensure the information in this report is accurate as at the date of the report, no legal responsibility is accepted for any errors, omissions or misleading statements. The views expressed represent those of the author(s), and do not necessarily represent those of the host institutions or funders.
This work was supported by the Rural and Environment Science and Analytical Services Division of the Scottish Government (CoE – CXC).
ClimateXChange
Edinburgh Climate Change Institute
High School Yards
Edinburgh EH1 1LZ
+44 (0) 131 651 4783
There are two types of estimated demand: replacement and expansion. Replacement demand refers to workers that will be needed to replace the current workforce. Expansion demand represents demand that will arise due to the growth in an industry. ↑
The Scottish Landfill Tax (SLfT), introduced in April 2015, was designed to discourage landfill disposal and encourage prevention, reuse, recycling and energy recovery.
The tax has two rates. The lower rate of SLfT was designed to provide a low-cost disposal route for inert, low-risk materials, such as rocks and soils. A higher standard rate targeted more polluting materials to support environmental goals. In early 2024, lower-rate materials exceeded standard-rate materials for the first time.
This research provides an initial evidence base to assess the effectiveness of the lower rate and explore whether changes could better support a low-carbon, circular economy. It examines the most common lower-rate materials, their environmental impacts, the feasibility of diversion and options for policy reform.
The researchers conducted quantitative and qualitative data analysis, a literature review and stakeholder engagement.
Findings
Three materials accounted for 77% of all waste landfilled at the lower rate in 2023–24, by weight:
- mechanically-treated fines (small particles from treatment of general construction and demolition waste, municipal recyclate etc)
- soils and stones from construction waste
- mechanically-treated mineral fines (small particles from treatment of naturally-occurring materials such as rocks and soils, silt, clay, sand and stones, found in quarry, construction and demolition waste etc)
Mechanically-treated fines make up the greatest quantities of all lower-rate materials, despite being intended as a residual output from material recovery processes. Trends raise concerns regarding misclassification.
Environmental impact analysis, based on the quantities landfilled in Scotland, showed that these three materials also have the highest impacts across indicators such as air pollution, water use and resource scarcity.
This study suggests the lower-rate SLfT may be only partially aligned with Scotland’s current circular economy, waste prevention and climate goals. While it has supported some diversion of inert waste from landfill, it may also be driving unintended behaviours and limiting investment in recovery.
Both fiscal and non-fiscal actions may be needed to address these challenges. The upcoming Scottish Aggregates Tax and wider circular economy policy agenda offer opportunities to align SLfT more closely with long-term environmental objectives.
For further details, please read the report.
If you require the report in an alternative format, such as a Word document, please contact info@climatexchange.org.uk or 0131 651 4783.
Podcast and blog
Susan Evans and Richard Claxton give an overview of the project and findings in episode 17 of our podcast: Evidence for climate policy in Scotland
A blog post summarising the podcast interview is also available on our website: Project snapshot: Reviewing the landfill tax
Image credit: WOKANDAPIX from Pixabay
Research completed May 2025
DOI: http://dx.doi.org/10.7488/era/6063
Executive summary
The Scottish Landfill Tax (SLfT), introduced in April 2015, was designed to discourage landfill disposal and encourage prevention, reuse, recycling, and energy recovery.
The tax has two rates. The lower rate of SLfT was designed to provide a low-cost disposal route for inert, low-risk materials, such as rocks and soils. A higher standard rate targeted more polluting materials to support environmental goals.
In early 2024, lower-rate materials exceeded standard-rate materials for the first time. Along with shifts in policy priorities and a widening gap between the lower and standard tax rates, this raises questions about whether the lower rate remains aligned with the Scottish Government’s environmental objectives.
Aims
This research provides an initial evidence base to assess the effectiveness of the lower rate and explore whether changes could better support a low-carbon, circular economy. It examines the most common lower-rate materials, their environmental impacts, the feasibility of diversion and options for policy reform.
We conducted quantitative and qualitative data analysis, a literature review and stakeholder engagement.
Findings
Priority materials
We found that three materials accounted for 77% of all waste landfilled at the lower rate in 2023–24, by weight:
- mechanically-treated fines (small particles from treatment of general construction and demolition waste, municipal recyclate etc.)
- soils and stones from construction waste
- mechanically-treated mineral fines (small particles from treatment of naturally-occurring materials such as rocks and soils, silt, clay, sand and stones, found in quarry, construction and demolition waste etc)
Mechanically-treated fines make up the greatest quantities of all lower-rate materials, despite being intended as a residual output from material recovery processes. Trends raise concerns regarding misclassification and (from our interviews) of intentional production.
Environmental impact analysis, based on the quantities landfilled in Scotland, showed that these three materials also have the highest impacts across indicators such as air pollution, water use and resource scarcity.
The classification of lower-rate materials is complex. The European Waste Catalogue (EWC) codes used by industry do not directly align with SLfT qualifying categories. Moreover, some codes encompass a range of material compositions depending on their source. Mechanically-treated fines are diverse in composition, originating from various construction waste materials. Soils and stones from construction waste, though better defined, also pose classification and compliance challenges. Mechanically-treated mineral fines tend to be more uniform.
Waste prevention and landfill diversion options
Soils and stones are often reused on-site or in restoration, though off-site reuse is constrained by regulation, logistics, and project timing. Options for recovering and re-using mechanically-treated fines are limited, due to contamination and variable composition. The recovery of mechanically-treated mineral fines is easier than the recovery of non-mineral fines but the cost and technical barriers make the use of virgin materials a simpler option.
Upstream measures in the construction sector may have more impact than attempts to recover and re-use waste. Such measures might include improving waste source segregation, designing for reuse and avoiding demolition. While such interventions are technically viable, they are limited in practice by weak incentives, inconsistent standards, and market barriers.
Policy assessment
The SLfT interacts with several fiscal and non-fiscal policies, both existing and on the horizon. These include the upcoming ban on biodegradable municipal waste to landfill; Scottish Aggregates Tax and Digital Waste Tracking, both expected in 2026 (DEFRA, 2023). Based on the assessment of diversion options for the priority materials, we highlighted various fiscal and non-fiscal policy options for future consideration.
Conclusions
This study suggests the lower-rate SLfT may be only partially aligned with Scotland’s current circular economy, waste prevention and climate goals. While it has supported some diversion of inert waste from landfill, it may also be driving unintended behaviours and limiting investment in recovery. Both fiscal and non-fiscal actions may be needed to address these challenges. The upcoming Scottish Aggregates Tax and wider circular economy policy agenda offer opportunities to align SLfT more closely with long-term environmental objectives.
Key areas for further exploration could include:
- Raising the lower SLfT rate to incentivise application of the waste hierarchy.
- Assigning a new SLfT rate to mechanically-treated fines, to address misclassification and recognise its relatively high environmental impacts.
- Strengthening enforcement and guidance on material classification to reduce compliance risks.
- Build on existing cross-border regulatory and enforcement cooperation to address ongoing challenges such as waste tourism and the evolution of the landfill tax.
This research is relevant to the Scottish Government, Revenue Scotland, SEPA, and others involved in the design or enforcement of fiscal and waste management policy, as well as stakeholders in the construction, demolition and waste processing sectors.
Glossary / Abbreviations table
|
AGL |
The Aggregates Levy, a UK tax on the use of virgin rock, sand, and gravel for commercial purposes such as building roads and houses; to be replaced in Scotland by the Scottish Aggregates Tax from 1 April 2026 |
|
BMW |
Biodegradable municipal waste |
|
CCL |
The Climate Change Levy, a UK tax to encourage reduction in gas emissions and greater efficiency of energy use. |
|
CPF |
Carbon Price Floor, a UK policy which imposes a tax on fossil fuels to incentivise investment in low-carbon power generation |
|
C&D |
Construction and demolition |
|
C&D fines |
Collective term used in this report for mechanically-treated fines (19 12 12) and mechanically-treated mineral fines (19 12 09) due to similar end-of-pipe diversion options and barriers |
|
EPR |
Extended producer responsibility, the responsibility of a producer for the environmentally sound management of a product until the end of its life |
|
EWC code |
European Waste Catalogue code, used in Scotland and across the UK for classifying waste, and sometimes referred to as the ‘list of wastes’ |
|
GHG |
Greenhouse gas |
|
LCA |
Lifecycle analysis, a process of evaluating the effects that a product has on the environment throughout its production, use and disposal |
|
LOI |
Loss on ignition testing, introduced by HM Revenue and Customs in 2015, is used to determine the organic content of waste fines, helping prevent misclassification for landfill tax purposes: fines with less than 10% LOI qualify for a lower tax rate |
|
RS |
Revenue Scotland |
|
SAT |
Scottish Aggregates Tax, due to replace the UK AGL from 1 April 2026 |
|
SEPA |
Scottish Environment Protection Agency |
|
SLfT |
Scottish Landfill Tax |
|
SWEFT |
Scottish Waste Environmental Footprint Tool, developed by Zero Waste Scotland, quantifies the environmental impact of household waste on a whole lifecycle basis |
|
WAC |
Waste acceptance criteria test is used to assess how waste will behave once landfilled, primarily by analysing leachate to determine suitability for disposal. |
|
WTN |
Waste transfer note, a document that details the transfer of waste from one person or organisation to another |
Introduction
Research context and aims
The Scottish Landfill Tax (SLfT) was introduced in April 2015, following the devolution of landfill taxation under the Scotland Act 2012. It replaced the UK Landfill Tax in Scotland and was designed to discourage landfill disposal and encourage adherence to the waste hierarchy. This hierarchy prioritises prevention, reuse, recycling, and energy recovery over landfill.
The tax is collected and administered by Revenue Scotland and has two rates. The standard rate, which covers materials more likely to pollute the environment or generate greenhouse gas (GHG) emissions, will be £126.15 per tonne in 2025-26. The lower rate is £4.05 per tonne as of April 2025 (Revenue Scotland, 2024b). The lower rate applies to materials considered to have low GHG emissions, limited pollution risks, and no hazardous properties when landfilled. For instance, ceramics, glass, soil and stones, and various mixtures of inert materials. Both rates were raised incrementally each year from 2015-16 to 2024-25, and increased by around 24% in April 2025-26 (Revenue Scotland, 2024a).
However, there is a large, widening gap between the rates, and the criteria and conditions for setting them have remained unchanged since 2016. This prompts questions about whether the lower rate continues to align with Scotland’s evolving environmental priorities. It also offers opportunities for policy development, which this research explores. The timing of this study is particularly relevant: a UK Government consultation on landfill tax reform is underway at the time of the publication of this study, concluding in July 2025 (HM Treasury and HMRC, 2025). Moreover, in 2024, the Welsh Government implemented an increase to its lower rate. These developments signal a wider shift in approach across the UK, and this research aims to inform future decision-making in Scotland as part of that wave of change.
Tonnages of landfilled waste have steadily declined over the past decade, but standard rate materials have dropped fastest. In early 2024, the quantity of lower rate materials exceeded that of standard rate materials for the first time. Figure 1 shows the gap between standard rate material (in orange) and lower rate material (in teal) has narrowed in the last 5 years. The widening gap between the lower and higher tax rates has also increased concerns about whether this is driving waste misclassification and crime. It is hard to determine a clear trend related to the landfilling of lower rate material in the years since 2020.

Figure 1: Tonnes of taxable waste declared by quarter in Scotland (source: Revenue Scotland)
The upcoming ban on landfilling biodegradable municipal waste, effective from the end of 2025, is expected to accelerate this trend (Scottish Government, 2022). It is therefore timely to focus in on lower rate materials to assess if SLfT is still serving its purpose. The Scottish Government has committed to explore whether changes may be needed to this or related policy levers, to support progress towards a low-carbon, circular economy (Scottish Government, 2024a).
The SLfT intended to support Scotland’s environmental objectives, which include
- Reducing the volume of waste sent to landfill.
- Lowering GHG emissions.
- Minimising pollution risks in landfill environments.
- Promoting the application of the waste hierarchy.
Scotland’s waste and resources policies have evolved since the landfill tax was introduced. They are now strongly oriented towards the objectives set out in the Circular Economy (Scotland) Act 2024 and the Circular Economy and Waste Route Map to 2030 (Scottish Government, 2024a). These provide a framework for increasing resource efficiency and reducing reliance on landfill. Specific information on these can be found in Appendix A.
The Route Map commits to developing a residual waste plan to 2045 and reviewing materials currently landfilled to identify alternative management routes by 2027. The SLfT legislation allows for additional lower rates to be created in support of future policy (Scottish Government, 2022).
Scotland’s net zero targets and biodiversity strategy were introduced in light of the twin climate and biodiversity crises. They have reinforced the need for waste and resources policies that support decarbonisation across all sectors. Most environmental impacts associated with resource use take place before materials are disposed of. A circular economy, with an emphasis on resource efficiency and waste prevention, is therefore essential for meeting Scotland’s environmental objectives. SLfT should be evaluated in this context, considering not only tonnages landfilled but the whole-life environmental impacts of materials.
Project objective, aims and research questions
The overarching objective of this research is to evaluate the effectiveness of the lower rate of SLfT in supporting Scotland’s environmental policy objectives. These policy objectives include reducing the volume of waste sent to landfill, lowering GHG emissions, minimising pollution risks, and encouraging materials to move up the waste hierarchy.
This research supports policy development by assessing whether the lower rate of SLfT remains effective in advancing Scotland’s environmental objectives. It also examines whether adjustments to the tax or related policy levers could accelerate progress towards these objectives. Specifically, this study aims to:
- evaluate the effectiveness of the lower rate in supporting Scotland’s environmental goals;
- identify the lower-rate materials that have the greatest environmental impact;
- explore waste prevention and diversion options for lower-rate materials and their feasibility;
- assess key barriers to reducing reliance on lower-rate landfill disposal;
- examine how the SLfT interacts with other fiscal and non-fiscal waste and environmental management policies and identify areas for future research and policy interventions.
To achieve these aims, the following research questions are addressed:
- Which materials landfilled at the lower rate rank the highest in terms of quantity and negative environmental impacts?
- What diversion options and alternative treatments exist for these materials, and how feasible are they in light of technical, market, and policy barriers?
- What are the key barriers to reducing the volume of materials landfilled at the lower rate, and how can they be addressed?
- How does the SLfT intersect with other fiscal and non-fiscal waste management and environmental policies, and what options exist to strengthen policy?
This report provides an initial evidence base for discussions on potential changes to the lower rate of SLfT. It does not present a cost-benefit analysis of policy options. It highlights the highest-impact materials and presents opportunities to divert from landfill, noting key barriers.
These findings aim to contribute to ongoing policy discussions and future research,
in support of Scotland’s transition to a low-carbon, circular economy.
Methodology
This study was conducted from December 2024 to March 2025 by Resource Futures and Aether, in collaboration with a steering group comprising the ClimateXChange research lead and representatives of the Scottish Government, SEPA and Revenue Scotland. It followed a three-stage approach (see Figure 2).
We designed the methodology to provide an initial evidence base to progress policy development. Robust data analysis was used to identify key materials and focus future research. Key materials were determined based on impact.

Figure 2: Research approach
We used quantitative and qualitative data analysis, a literature review, and stakeholder engagement to support this approach. Table 1 below summarises each research stage and corresponding data collection methods. These are further detailed in Appendices B and C.
Table 1: Data collection methods by research stage
|
Data collection methods |
Research stage | ||
|---|---|---|---|
|
Prioritisation of materials |
Review of diversion and prevention options |
Policy assessment | |
|
Weight-based EWC code analysis |
X | ||
|
Environmental impacts analysis |
X | ||
|
Desk-based research |
X |
X | |
|
Stakeholder engagement |
X |
X |
X |
In the first stage, we assessed tonnage and environmental impacts data on materials landfilled at the lower rate. This enabled us to prioritise the top three material streams.
We analysed tonnage data by EWC code, or groups of codes where necessary. This relied on data obtained from SEPA and Revenue Scotland. To assess environmental impacts, we used the Scottish Waste Environmental Footprint Tool (SWEFT). This covers a range of environmental indicators, including GHG emissions, resource depletion, and pollution potential (Zero Waste Scotland, 2024). We refined our understanding of the top material streams, through engagement with waste management operators, industry experts, policymakers, and the project steering group.
In the second stage, we examined opportunities to move lower-rate materials up the waste hierarchy. A high-level literature review identified prevention, reuse, recycling, and recovery options, assessing their technical feasibility. Stakeholder interviews provided further insights into potential diversion options and barriers to these.
In the final stage, we reviewed how the lower rate of SLfT interacts with related policies. We used desk-based research to review other relevant measures and draw comparisons with landfill taxation in other jurisdictions. Engagement with policymakers and regulators provided insights into how the tax operates in practice. We identified areas where further research is needed to address gaps or unintended consequences.
For the stakeholder engagement, we conducted eight in-depth, semi-structured interviews, and gathered additional insights via email, in January to March 2025. Further details of the methodology, including the stakeholder engagement, can be found in Appendix C.
Quantitative data review to determine priority materials
This section sets out how we identified the three highest-impact material streams taxed at the lower rate, which are assessed in more detail in Sections 5 and 6.
We first give a summary of the process for preparing and classifying waste for landfill in Scotland (Section 4.1). We then present findings by weight based on Revenue Scotland and SEPA data (Section 4.3) then on the weighted environmental impact of materials (Section 4.4). This forms the basis for prioritising lower-rate materials summarised in Section 4.5.
Introduction to classifying and preparing waste for landfill in Scotland
For waste to be landfilled in Scotland, waste producing businesses must follow a structured process to ensure compliance with environmental regulations. This process involves multiple parties, including waste producers, skip operators, transfer station operators, landfill operators, and regulators such as SEPA and Revenue Scotland.
Key steps in preparing waste for landfill include:
- Waste identification – determining the type of waste based on its source, composition, and potential hazards.
- Waste characterisation – including chemical analysis and testing (where required) to assess hazardous properties and biodegradability.
- Waste classification – the waste is assigned a European Waste Catalogue (EWC) code by the waste producer. EWC codes must be included on waste transfer notes (for non-hazardous waste) and hazardous waste consignment notes. These documents accompany waste during its movement and disposal and are checked by waste carriers, site operators, and regulators.
- Pre-treatment and landfill acceptance requirements – including necessary treatment to reduce environmental impact, compliance with landfill permit conditions, and landfill waste acceptance criteria (WAC) testing, where required.
- Documentation and record-keeping – maintenance of records, results and transfer documentation to ensure legal compliance.
Two key documents to support businesses in meeting these obligations are:
- Waste Classification Technical Guidance (WM3) (SEPA et al, 2015): The guidance, co-produced by SEPA, Natural Resources Wales, Northern Ireland Environment Agency, and Environment Agency, provides comprehensive instructions on identifying whether waste possesses hazardous properties.
- Criteria and Procedures for the Acceptance of Waste at Landfills (Scotland) Direction 2005 (Scottish Government, 2012a): The document gives criteria and procedures for waste acceptance at landfills, ensuring compliance with environmental standards. WAC are described in the accompanying ‘Schedule’ to this Direction.
SEPA holds responsibility for governance of compliance and therefore holds national level data on the transfer and treatment of waste into, within, and out of landfills in Scotland. As regulator of the SLfT, Revenue Scotland holds parallel data obtained through tax returns. The anonymised data from Revenue Scotland, alongside SEPA’s, underpins the analysis presented in the following section.
While many elements of the landfill preparation process are legal requirements, some practices – such as separating certain materials for recovery – are strongly encouraged by regulators or industry bodies due to viable diversion routes or market demand. These distinctions are important context for the findings presented later in this report.
Overview of waste data analysis
This section presents a summary of analysis performed on waste tonnages data provided by SEPA, and SLfT returns data from Revenue Scotland which was anonymised for the purposes of this study. The data provided by SEPA and Revenue Scotland are categorised by EWC code (European Commission, 2000). These data insights can be used to help progress policy development.
EWC codes are a list of waste descriptions used in all UK nations and EU member states. However, as explained in detail in Section 5.3, EWC codes do not directly correlate to SLfT rates. EWC codes must be used on waste transfer notes and hazardous waste consignment notes. The submission of waste transfer notes also comes with ‘operator descriptions’ to further explain the EWC code categorisation. There are around 650 individual codes split across 20 ‘chapters’. The chapter typically defines the industry or source of waste; however, some definitions are more material- or process-based. Despite the large library of codes, some remain broad in scope. This means that use of the EWC codes within a dataset does not automatically achieve transparency or traceability in terms of material definitions.
For this report, descriptors have been adopted for each EWC code, or group of codes, present within the lower-rate tonnages data provided by Revenue Scotland. These are outlined in Table below.
Table 2: EWC codes within the lower tax rate in Scotland
|
EWC code/ group of codes[1] |
Descriptor |
|
19 12 12 |
Mechanically-treated fines |
|
17 05 04 |
Soil and stones from C&D waste |
|
19 12 09 |
Mechanically-treated mineral fines |
|
19 03 05, 19 05 99, 19 12 05, 19 13 06, 20 01 02, 20 01 99, 20 03 01, 20 03 03, 20 03 99[2] |
Mixed household waste and outputs of waste treatment |
|
19 01 12 |
Incinerator bottom ash and slag |
|
19 01 02, 19 01 11, 19 01 14, 19 01 16, 19 02 09, 19 02 99 |
Niche materials from incineration, pyrolysis or chemical waste treatment |
|
17 01 07 |
Mixed minerals (concrete, bricks, tiles, ceramics) from C&D waste |
|
01 04 08, 01 04 09, 01 04 10, 01 05 07, 02 01 03 |
Niche materials mainly from mining and quarrying |
|
17 01 02, 17 01 03, 17 02 02, 17 05 06, 17 06 04, 17 09 04 |
Niche materials from C&D waste |
|
06 01 99, 07 01 12, 07 07 12, 10 01 01, 10 01 17, 10 02 01, 10 03 05, 10 11 03 |
Niche materials from chemical and thermal processes |
|
20 02 02 |
Soil and stones from municipal waste (gardens, parks, recreation) |
|
12 01 07, 12 01 17, 15 01 07, 16 01 20, 16 03 04, 16 11 02 |
Mixed niche materials, including from end-of-life vehicles |
|
17 01 01 |
Concrete |
We ranked the data from Revenue Scotland on lower-rate waste to landfill by weight. Data from SEPA for each matching EWC code, or group of codes, was then used to identify the amount of each material landfilled at lower rate as a proportion of the total landfilled. This allowed for prioritisation based on overall tonnage of lower rate material. Further information on steps for data cleansing and review is provided in Appendix B.
Results show the largest quantities landfilled in Scotland by material (at both lower and standard rate), in the financial year 2023 to 2024, were soil and stones, mechanically-treated fines and mechanically-treated mineral fines.
It is important to note that the data presented does not account for exemptions, meaning the reported tonnages are likely an underestimate of the actual quantities of waste generated. Exemptions are highlighted later in the report throughout Sections 6 and 7.
Figure 3 below highlights how the ranking changes when considering only materials landfilled at lower rate (in teal) with results for standard rate material also shown (in orange). The top three materials by weight are:
- 19 12 12: Mechanically-treated fines (fine particles left over from mechanical waste processing)
- 17 05 04: Soil and stones (non-hazardous soils and stones from C&D waste)
- 19 12 09: Mechanically-treated mineral fines (fine particles of minerals, e.g. sand and stones, left over from mechanical waste processing)
- These three materials make up 77% of the material landfilled at lower rate in 2023-24. The analysis shows that most mechanically-treated fines and mechanically-treated mineral fines are landfilled at the lower rate. In comparison, only a small portion of soil and stones is landfilled at the lower rate.

Figure 3: Tonnage of waste to landfill at standard and lower tax rates by EWC code, 2023-2024.
Analysis of waste quantities and composition data
We identified short-term trends for each material. We also reviewed operator descriptions in the SEPA data to better understand the materials and their origins. Summaries are presented for the three material groups landfilled in the greatest quantities at the lower rate of tax. These are presented in order with the highest tonnage first.
Mechanically-treated fines: EWC 19 12 12
This non-hazardous material group contains fine particle rejects from mechanical waste processing, including sorting, crushing, pelletising and compacting, as well as a minority share of anaerobic digestion residue. A more detailed description is provided in Section 5.1.
Approximately 60% of mechanically-treated fines were landfilled at the lower rate of tax in 2023-24. As shown through SEPA and Revenue Scotland data in Figure 4 below, the overall quantity landfilled has decreased over the most recent three-year period. However, the quantity landfilled at lower rate (in teal) has increased, while the quantity landfilled at standard rate (in orange) has decreased.
For context, the quantity landfilled under the lower rate was consistently under 200,000 tonnes before 2020. This increased sharply to a peak in 2022-23, before declining slightly again in 2023-24, but remaining well over pre-2020 levels.

Figure 4: Tonnage of waste to landfill at standard and lower tax rates for the three priority materials from 2021 to 2024.
Soils and stones from construction waste: EWC 17 05 04
The soils and stones EWC code group is for non-hazardous materials and results from construction and demolition waste. It is restricted to topsoil, peat, subsoil and stones only. Therefore, soil waste classification testing must take place to determine if soils are non-hazardous or inert (qualifying for the lower rate), or hazardous (standard rate). More information is provided in Section 5.2.
Approximately 21% of soils and stones was landfilled at the lower rate in 2023-24. Figure 4 shows that both the total quantity landfilled (ie the combined teal and orange bars), and the quantity landfilled at lower rate (in teal), have decreased from a 2021-22 peak. As a result, the portion of this waste group landfilled at the lower rate has remained stable over the most recent three years.
Based on the operator descriptions submitted with the waste transfer notes, this EWC material group contained just over 12,000 tonnes (2.2%) of ‘contaminated’ soil in 2023-24. It should be noted that contaminated is not equivalent to ‘hazardous’. Descriptions of this EWC code attached to records of larger waste quantities simply state “contaminated soil” with no further specificity. Descriptions accompanying some of the smaller quantities of lower-rate waste have mention of contamination by Japanese knotweed.
In addition, around 10,000 tonnes (1.8%) was recorded as having traces of asbestos in 2023-24, almost entirely from one waste record. This was much higher than any records mentioning traces of asbestos for previous years.
These findings highlight uncertainty around the application of WAC testing to this code. Soil and stones containing hazardous substances may potentially have been misclassified under the non-hazardous code 17 05 04, instead of its hazardous counterpart, 17 05 03. From stakeholder interviews, it is understood that misclassification is likely to contribute to the large quantity of soil and stones being disposed of under this material group.
Mechanically-treated mineral fines: EWC 19 12 09
This material group is classified as fines from naturally occurring rocks and soils, silt, clay, sand and stones. It is non-hazardous. A more detailed description is available in Section 5.1.
76% of this material group was landfilled at the lower rate of tax in 2023-24, which was similar to the portion in 2022-23. Looking further back, the quantity landfilled at lower rate peaked at just over 120,000 tonnes in 2019-20, before a significant decline in the following two COVID years. Quantities landfilled at the lower rate have bounced back slightly but not to pre-COVID levels.
As shown in Figure 4 above, this material group is landfilled in proportionally greater quantities under the lower rate (in teal) than the standard rate (in orange).
Baseline environmental impact of materials
We used Zero Waste Scotland’s SWEFT data to provide a high-level assessment of how the materials landfilled at lower rate may impact the environment. This enabled us to check whether any lower-tonnage material groups warranted further attention due to their disproportionately higher environmental impacts.
The tonnages for 2023-24 were multiplied by lifecycle-based SWEFT factors. Lifecycle-based SWEFT factors consider the entire environmental impact of a material, from extraction to disposal, which helps assess its true ecological footprint. This produced a weighted impact for each material group against each of SWEFT’s six environmental indicators. Further information on methods and assumptions in application of SWEFT is provided in Appendix B.
Because SWEFT factors covers a range of environmental impacts, they cannot be aggregated into a single, comparable “score”. To visualise and compare relative impacts, we used a spider diagram (see Figure 5), which presents the results for the top six material groups landfilled at lower rate in Scotland during 2023-4.
Figure 5 below shows that the top three material groups by tonnage also have the greatest environmental impacts. These materials – mechanically-treated fines, soil and stones, and mechanically-treated mineral fines – are shown in the colours teal, dark orange and black respectively .
Mechanically-treated fines are estimated to have the largest weighted impacts on air pollution, mineral resource scarcity, water consumption and land use. Soil and stones, and mechanically-treated mineral fines, have the next-highest impacts for the same indicators.
One mixed material group (shown in light orange) scores highest on GHG emissions and biodiversity. However, this group, was found to be almost entirely made up of drill cuttings in 2023/24 based on operator descriptions within the SEPA data. As a result, we chose to describe this as a niche material (see Table 2). This results in a high environmental impact but with high uncertainty.
No other material groups were flagged as priorities for further research based on this high-level analysis of environmental impacts. As such, the three lower-rate material groups landfilled in highest quantities were prioritised for further research.

Figure 5: SWEFT tool results presented by material and relative environmental impact (only top six scoring material groups are shown)
Priority materials and supporting interview data
From the analysis of tonnage landfilled and environmental impact assessment, three material groups were prioritised: soils and stones, mechanically-treated fines, and mechanically-treated mineral fines. These materials accounted for 77% of lower-rate landfilled waste in 2023-24 and had some of the highest environmental impacts, particularly on air pollution, resource scarcity, and land use.
Grouped codes of niche materials were excluded due to data limitations: (i) they consist of multiple waste types with varying, and unknown, compositions and quantities, and (ii) the lack of specificity meant the assessment of environmental indicators relied more on generalised assumptions.
Focusing on the three dominant materials enabled targeted research into impactful interventions to reduce landfill and improve resource recovery. This selection was also verified through analysis of interviewee responses. For example:
- Mechanically treated fines, mechanically-treated mineral fines and soils and stones were confirmed as the main materials: “They are the majority of materials in the lower rate.” (Commercial remediation company interview); “A lot of the lower rate material will essentially be fines.” (C&D waste management processor)
- Most high-quality materials are already reused in construction: “The only reason construction companies take things off sites now is because they can’t use it.” (C&D skip operator)
- Mechanically-treated fines come from transfer stations and skip waste: “Mechanical fines come from transfer stations and sorting of skips waste. Skip operators generate the majority of the fines in the Scottish market.” (Commercial remediation company)
- Mechanical-treated fines create challenges for waste management: “Mechanically-treated fines are the top waste we question whether the rate is right.” (SEPA interview) and “we tend to stay away from mechanically-treated fines, because the administration and risk of misclassification sits with us.” (Commercial landfill operator)
Complexities in the categorisation of priority materials
Determining when a material qualifies for the lower rate is not straightforward. This is due to the complex properties of the lower-rate materials, the sources of these materials and the different classification systems used in policy. To aid in understanding, this section outlines what the three priority material streams comprise, the sources of these materials and their link to categorisations in Scottish policy.
Mechanical fines: EWC 19 12 12 and 19 12 09
Two of the priority materials, mechanically-treated fines and mechanically-treated mineral fines, belong to the same EWC chapter 19 12. This chapter refers to waste from the mechanical treatment of waste, for example sorting, crushing, compacting or pelletising (Dsposal, n.d.). These are commonly referred to as trommel fines, or mechanical fines (typically 10-40mm).
Fines that qualify for the lower rate under both waste codes largely come from construction and demolition (C&D) waste and, therefore, share similar diversion options and barriers which are discussed in Section 6. The term ‘mechanical fines’ is used hereafter as shorthand when these two categories of fines are discussed together.
The key distinction between the codes is their composition:
- Mechanically treated mineral fines (EWC 19 12 09): Primarily from excavation and mechanical treatment of quarry waste, C&D waste, and aggregate recycling (WRAP and Environment Agency, 2013). Composition is relatively uniform.
- Mechanically treated fines (EWC 19 12 12): Includes fines from mixed C&D waste, municipal recyclate, and residual waste. Fines qualifying for the lower rate are primarily from mixed C&D waste due to higher inert content (Di Maria et al., 2013; Vincent et al., 2022). Composition is far more varied.
The interview findings and other data suggest that mechanical fines – whether classified under EWC 19 12 09 or 19 12 12 – are commonly produced at transfer stations and through the mechanical sorting of skip waste, particularly when handling C&D material. Composition is mostly crushed bricks, tiles, concrete, and ceramics – similar to mineral fines (the same as mechanically-treated mineral fines). However, the code can also include additional inert materials, including fines from the mechanical treatment to recycle furnace slags, bottom ash, and plasterboard to recover gypsum[3] (Environment Agency, 2023a; Environment Agency, 2023b).
To summarise, both types of mechanical fines may contain a small amount of contamination and non-qualifying material, but can still be eligible for the lower rate if they meet the conditions set out in Article 4 of the 2016 Order. To qualify, fines must either consist entirely of qualifying material or contain only a minimal amount of non-qualifying material, must not be artificially mixed or hazardous under WM3, and must pass the Loss on Ignition (LOI) test with a result of 10% or less (Revenue Scotland, n.d.). Otherwise, they are subject to the standard rate.
Some waste producers intentionally misclassify mechanical fines to avoid the higher rate of tax, using blending techniques to bring LOI values down (Ali, 2023; SEPA, C&D waste management processor interview, commercial landfill operator interview). Many small- to medium-sized skip operators handle this waste, making enforcement difficult (waste industry association and commercial remediation company interview).
Soils and stones from construction waste: EWC 17 05 04
The EWC code 17 05 04 refers to non-hazardous soils and stones from C&D waste (including excavated material from contaminated sites) (Dsposal, n.d.; Environmental Standards Scotland, 2024; Katsumi, 2015; Commercial remediation company interview; C&D waste management processor interview). In Scotland, this material becomes waste after removal from a site. It can be used for work on site without being classified as waste.
Soils and stones require multiple tests. They must be classified as hazardous or non-hazardous following the WM3 classification. When subjected to testing it is likely for other materials to be found, which could make the soil active (non-inert), such as grass. Unless the contaminating materials are in small amounts and pass the soil LOI test, the whole load will be charged the standard rate. Non-hazardous soil and stone can only be disposed of in inert landfill sites and charged the lower rate if a WAC test confirms this is appropriate. A WAC test will determine the leaching ability of any contaminants in the soil.
Misalignment in waste code and policy guidance
This section compares EWC code definitions (Dsposal, n.d.), Revenue Scotland guidance (Revenue Scotland, n.d.), and SEPA guidance (SEPA, 2015) for the three priority materials.
The Scottish Landfill Tax (Qualifying Material) Order 2016 determines which materials qualify for the lower tax rate. There are seven groups of materials which qualify for the lower rate. However, these seven qualifying material groups and EWC codes do not align. This allows material to be classed as standard or lower rate under a single EWC code, as seen in the analysis of waste quantities (Section 4.3). Such misalignment is common in other jurisdictions in the UK and beyond with the widespread use of EWC codes and varying landfill policies.
Table 3 below presents a systematic review of the EWC codes for the priority three materials against other categorisations in Scottish policy. This provides a more specific, detailed understanding of these material streams.
Soils and stones (EWC 17 05 04) are the most straightforward to categorise, aligning clearly with Group 1 (Rocks and soils) and with no additional SEPA definitions or overlaps.
In contrast, mechanically treated fines (EWC 19 12 12) are the most complex to classify. As discussed in Section 5.1, this code can encompass materials across all seven qualifying groups, depending on source and composition, making consistent classification more challenging and reliant on testing and operator descriptions.
Table : Alignment of priority EWC codes with SLfT and SEPA definitions
|
Priority material |
Mechanically treated mineral fines |
Mechanically treated fines |
Soil and stones |
|
EWC code |
EWC 19 12 09 |
EWC 19 12 12 |
EWC 17 05 04 |
|
EWC chapter |
EWC 19 12: the mechanical treatment of waste, for example sorting, crushing, compacting or pelletising (Dsposal, n.d). |
EWC 19 12: the mechanical treatment of waste, for example sorting, crushing, compacting or pelletising (Dsposal, n.d). |
EWC 17 05: soil (including excavated soil from contaminated sites), stones and dredging spoil. |
|
The Scottish Landfill Tax (Qualifying Material) Order 2016 groups |
Group 1: Rocks and soils. Group 3: Minerals. |
Group 1: Rocks and soils. Group 2: Ceramic and concrete materials. Group 3: Minerals. Group 4: Fines from the mechanical treatment to recycle furnace slags. Group 5: Fines from the mechanical treatment to recycle bottom ash. Group 6: Low activity inorganic compounds. Group 7: Fines from the mechanical treatment of plasterboard to recover gypsum. |
Group 1: Rocks and soils. |
|
SEPA definitions (SEPA, 2015) |
Fines from processing naturally occurring rocks and soils (e.g. group 1). Fines from processing wholly inert bricks, tiles and concrete (e.g. group 3). |
Fines from processing municipal recyclate or residual waste. Fines from the processing of mixed C&D waste. |
No further definitions given. |
Waste prevention and landfill diversion options
In this section, we outline findings on the end-of-pipe and upstream diversion options for the three priority materials described in Section 5: mechanically-treated fines, mechanically-treated mineral fines, and soils and stones. A preliminary feasibility assessment of these technologies is also presented.
‘End-of-pipe’ diversion options involve reprocessing materials that have already been classified as waste, to divert them from landfill. ‘Upstream’ diversion options entail keeping materials at their highest value and reducing waste generation. For mechanical fines, this means preventing C&D waste from being mechanically treated (for example, keeping bricks as bricks). For soil and stones, it involves direct reuse.
We use the term ‘mechanical fines’ where the diversion options relate to both mechanically-treated fines and mechanically-treated mineral fines.
Mechanical fines: End-of-pipe diversion
This section outlines the diversion options and associated barriers for mechanical fines.
As some common challenges were identified, Section 6.1.1 first identifies overarching barriers relevant to all the diversion options. These barriers provide essential context for Sections 6.1.2 to 6.1.5.
Overarching barriers
Due to their complex and variable composition and technical processing requirements, mechanical fines are difficult, risky and costly to recover. According to a waste management company representative interviewed, currently only large- and medium-sized regional players are able to recover a proportion of mechanically-treated fines.
- Material complexity (technical barrier): Mechanical fines contain mixed materials, sometimes requiring washing to remove contaminants (Burdier et al., 2022). Differing physical and chemical properties, including composition and size, affect the feasibility of end-of-pipe recovery (Hernandez Garcia et al., 2024). This is further impacted by Scotland’s wet climate, which reduces the effectiveness of dry screening technologies (as highlighted in research conducted by Ricardo for ClimateXChange, due to be published in summer 2025). Composition testing to match materials to diversion options is expensive. Virgin materials are often easier and cheaper to use.
- Contamination (health and safety barrier): Heavy metals in some mechanical fines pose health and safety risks, limiting recovery (Oujana & Sanchez, 2018). Washing removes some contaminants (Vincent et al., 2022), but can create toxic wastewater and solid waste requiring further treatment (Cottrell, Ali and Etienne, 2024). The circularity benefits should be weighed against the resources and power needed to wash and process fines.
- Processing infrastructure (operational barrier): Washing plants remove silt and clay to produce clean aggregate. However, washing systems are expensive and often require bespoke designs so they do not clog processing systems, reducing efficiency (Vincent et al., 2022; C&D waste management processor interview). Stakeholders cite uncertain policies and tax implications as barriers to investment (C&D waste management processor, C&D skip operator and SEPA interviews).
- LOI testing (health and safety and regulatory barrier): LOI determines whether fines qualify for the lower rate tax or if they can be reused (interviews with C&D waste management processor and Commercial landfill operatorSUEZ). One interviewee reported that use of LOI tests to achieve end-of-waste status for mechanical fines was not permitted by SEPA due to its uncertain composition:
“We tried for a couple of years to get end-of-waste status on this material because some of the material, it does look really good and it would serve a purpose in further aspects of construction. But they’re very adamant that it’s a big no, because of the testing and because this material doesn’t come from a single source. You can’t test it as a single source, so it’s a bit of an unknown.” (C&D waste management)
- Liability (enforcement barrier): The current liability structure is a barrier to diversion, as it places the risk of misclassification on landfill operators rather than waste producers. This reduces producers’ incentive to ensure accurate classification or pursue upstream diversion. With no direct repercussions, producers can intentionally or unintentionally misclassify mechanical fines as lower-rate material (see Section 5.3).
The following sections detail end-of-pipe diversion options for mechanical fines, noting more specific barriers to mechanically-treated mineral and mechanically-treated fines where relevant.
Landfill/quarry cover, engineering and restoration
Inert mechanical fines are used for engineering and landscaping, such as quarries and pavement base layers, or for daily landfill cover. There is demand in Scotland for such uses, particularly due to a shortage of soils and stones (commercial landfill operator interview). While this can support diversion from landfill, it can waste nutrient-rich fines that might be better suited for agricultural use (Renella, 2021).
Recycled aggregate
Mechanically-treated mineral fines can be stored on site for six months and reused as aggregate without a waste licence under the Waste Management Licensing (Scotland) Regulations 2011 (schedule 1, paragraph 19). Mechanically-treated fines do not qualify for this exemption, however, and SEPA does not include them as waste suitable for the manufacture of recycled aggregate (SEPA, 2013).
Recycled aggregates (from crushed bricks, ceramics, and concrete) are used in roads, railways, and non-structural concrete production. Their carbon footprint can be lower than virgin aggregates when transport distances are short (ClimateXChange and Ricardo, 2025).
Reducing the environmental impact of concrete through recovery of inert fines has received a lot of research interest. For example, in 2023, 934 publications about reuse of clay waste (e.g. brick powder) in cement mixtures were published (Hernández García, Monteiro and Lopera, 2024). Studies suggest the material could replace 10-20% of virgin sand in non-structural concrete (Mansoor, Hama, Hamdullah, 2024; Ali, 2023; Zhao, et al., 2020). Despite the diversion potential for fines, innovations have not been scaled up commercially as virgin aggregates are favoured (European Commission, 2023).
Barriers:
- Recycled aggregates have different properties to natural aggregates and suit only low to moderate strength concrete (European Commission, 2023; Ali, 2023; Transport Scotland et al., 2020; commercial landfill operator interview; Ferriz-Papi and Thomas, 2020).
- Fine material can be inappropriate for some filling activities. For example, fines can be too smooth for use in layers for road-based applications (Burdier et al., 2022). It could be beneficial to consider other diversion options that suit these physical properties, such as reuse in paint to improve grip, rather than invest in technologies to change them.
- Quality and supply of fines are inconsistent (European Commission, 2023).
- Despite a high concentration of wash plants in Scotland (C&D waste management processor interview), mechanical fines require further space and infrastructure investment to be diverted to precast or ready-mixed concrete plants (European Commission, 2023).
- Wet fines from wash plants require more cement in concrete mixtures, increasing resource use and cost (commercial remediation company interview). Raw material and energy savings from using recycled aggregate need to be balanced against these impacts.
- The lack of market uptake of recycled aggregates is likely due to a lack of know-how by concrete producers and trained personnel for recycled aggregates production (ClimateXChange and Ricardo, 2025; European Commission, 2023; Hernández García, Monteiro and Lopera, 2024).
Land treatment and agricultural soil improvement
Inert mechanical fines can improve land, for example, by stabilising soil through land remediation or as a fertiliser for agriculture (Manning and Vetterlein, 2004; Burlakov, et al., 2021; Ali, 2023). This could be a positive diversion option for mechanically-treated mineral fines that are less useful for construction purposes (Renella, 2021).
Mechanically-treated fines can help replenish nutrients to the soil and reduce reliance on commercial fertilisers (Braga et al., 2019; Szmidt and Ferguson, 2004; Campe, Kittrede and Klinger, 2012). By mixing these fines with organic materials, they can create a soil-like material for plants to grow in. Some fine particles, like clay, silt or ash, help keep the organic matter stable (Haynes, Zhou and Weng, 2021; Renella, 2021).
Mechanically-treated fines contain a mixture of these materials. However, the UK Government restricts the use of soil substitutes made from mechanically-treated fines as opposed to mechanically-treated mineral fines (Environment Agency, 2023b). This can only be done under specific permits, such as for landfill restoration schemes, and when ecological improvement is also demonstrable.
In Scotland, under the Waste Management Licensing (Scotland) Regulations 2011 (schedule 1, paragraph 9), exemptions allow the use of mechanically-treated mineral fines on land for agriculture and ecological improvement. Waste companies in Scotland sometimes use mineral fines from skips to create compost for local agriculture (C&D skip operator interview). SEPA, who registers such activities, has reported that this exemption often results in farmers being paid to accept such waste to reduce landfill disposal costs (SEPA interview). However, it is uncertain how much is used for genuine purposes, and how much is diverted to avoid paying tax (C&D waste management processor interview).
Barriers:
- Silt and clay fines, which are beneficial for soils, are generally landfilled and this is because of high contamination of heavy metals or presence of organic materials (Renella, 2021).
- Nutrient content varies, limiting predictability of composition and related cost savings for farmers. For example, recycled mechanical fines with high nutrient content can reduce costs by 25%, whereas those with low nutrient content may increase costs by 9% (Braga et al., 2019).
- Potential conflicts with regulation on fertilisers. For example, UK government restricts the use of soil substitutes made from mechanically-treated fines (Environment Agency, 2023b) and new EU regulations may exclude some fines from fertiliser use (Renella, 2021).
Gypsum fines recycling
Gypsum fines (within EWC 19 12 12) can be recovered from plasterboard and used to make new plasterboards, cement, blocks and bricks (commercial landfill operator interview; Suárez, Roca and Gasso, 2016). Gypsum can also be used to improve soil in land remediation, particularly in areas with alkalinity or heavy metal contamination. SEPA advises that this is acceptable for treating land that has been flooded by seawater (SEPA, n.d).
Waste owners are encouraged to separate gypsum from other waste for recovery, as there are feasible diversion options and “because there’s a good recycling market for gypsum” (waste industry association interview). However, according to a commercial landfill operator, the composition of mechanically-treated fines “tends to be quite high in plasterboard and gypsum, which then means that we struggle to control the gas and the odours”. Gypsum can only be disposed of in landfills where no biodegradable waste is accepted as it has hazardous properties, releasing gas and odour, when mixed with biodegradable waste (commercial landfill operator interview).
When the ban on biodegradable waste to landfill is introduced at the end of 2025, it will potentially make the lower-rate landfill of mechanically-treated waste containing gypsum easier. Additional incentives for diversion to counter this could be necessary.
Barriers:
- Recycled gypsum has high market demand, but the lower rate categorisation encourages landfill over recycling (waste industry association interview, commercial remediation company interview, commercial landfill operator interview).
- Heavy contamination of mechanical fines restricts the potential to find and extract gypsum (Suárez, Roca and Gasso, 2016).
- Lack of incentives to enhance sorting of gypsum and plasterboard; and conversely incentives to process waste products containing gypsum into mechanical fines to qualify for the lower-rate tax (commercial landfill operator interview).
Mechanical fines: Upstream diversion
This section describes the upstream diversion options involving the reduction and reuse of concrete, bricks, tiles and ceramics. These options can prevent mechanical fines from being generated in the first place.
Reducing demolition through refurbishing and retrofitting
Refurbishing or repurposing buildings and assets extends their usable life, avoiding the generation of demolition waste. In doing so, it helps reduce both material use and embodied carbon, making it a key strategy for sustainable construction.
Lifecycle analysis (LCA) is a valuable tool for comparing the impacts of refurbishing and retrofitting with demolition and new build. While new builds may achieve lower operational carbon, they usually require more materials and result in more embodied carbon emissions. In many cases, this means retrofit has lower emissions overall.
Adopting a retrofit-first approach can reduce unnecessary demolition, prioritising reuse unless structures are severely derelict or face irreparable structural issues (Green Alliance, 2023; construction company interview). To support this, pre-demolition assessments could be introduced earlier in the planning process, ensuring that any proposed demolition is justified in terms of carbon and material impacts (Green Alliance, 2023).
Barriers:
- VAT policy favours new builds (0%) over renovations (20%) (Green Alliance, 2023).
- Current policies focus on reducing operational emissions, such the Heat in Buildings Strategy to increase energy efficiency (Scottish Government, 2021a), rather than embodied carbon emissions (Green Alliance, 2022).
- Circular principles are underused in construction and infrastructure, such as rail infrastructure projects (O’Leary, Osmani and Goodier, 2024).
Reduction and reuse of construction materials
Reducing demand for materials in the design stage has the greatest impact on reducing the environmental impact of construction (Green Alliance, 2023). This is particularly important for cement, which is challenging to remove from a building for reuse. Reduction and reuse can be increased through circular construction tools and approaches, sometimes described as ‘modern methods of construction’. These can improve companies’ understanding of GHG emissions throughout their supply chains. Examples include modular buildings, digital tools such as material passports, offsite manufacturing, and sustainable material substitution (Green Alliance, 2023).
Barriers:
- Current circular building standards are voluntary, such as the UK Net Zero Carbon Building Standard, and the Scottish Government’s Net Zero Public Sector Buildings Standard (Scottish Government, 2021b; UK Net Zero Carbon Building Standards, n.d.). Construction design is determined by the client. With voluntary initiatives, cost factors are more likely to win over environmental factors (Construction company interview).
- There are no mandatory requirements for construction companies in Scotland to conduct an LCA or report scope 3 emissions (those in its upstream and downstream value chains, which typically include the majority of material-related impacts) (construction company interview; Green Alliance, 2022).
- Skills shortages and inconsistent standards, for instance for LCAs and product passports, limit the sector’s ability to apply circular practices (Hurst and O’Donovan, 2024; construction company interview).
- Certain industry practices lead to unnecessary waste. For example, to ensure they have enough supply, contractors will often order 5-10% surplus, which can be hard to reuse (construction company interview).
- Sustainable construction materials often cost more (construction company interview).
- Environmental benefits of modern methods of construction are not fully accounted for in public procurement and other financial investment opportunities (Green Alliance, 2023).
Designing for deconstruction
Designing buildings with future disassembly in mind allows more materials, especially bricks and tiles, to be reused instead of downcycled. Such direct reuse has a greater impact in reducing raw material use than recycling (Green Alliance, 2023). However, deconstruction should only be pursued if the building is not fit for repurposing (construction company interview).
Early sorting of demolition materials also improves recovery outcomes. Many mechanical fines are produced from mixed, unsorted demolition waste, which results in variable and lower-quality outputs. Sorting materials earlier produces cleaner, inert fines that are more straightforward to reuse (C&D waste management processor interview, SEPA interview).
A major barrier to recovery and recycling of mechanically-treated fines is their complexity and variability (Section 6.1.1). To minimise the challenges associated with this, upstream measures should support sorting at source, before waste reaches skips or waste transfer sites (C&D waste management processor interview, SEPA interview). Greater source separation would generate more inert-only fines, which are also easier to find uses for due to waste management exemptions.
Barriers:
- Mainstream current and historical construction practices do not design for deconstruction (Arup and Ellen McArthur Foundation, 2020).
- Investors are not incentivised to incorporate circularity principles in design, considering material recovery (Arup and Ellen McArthur Foundation, 2020).
- Demand for low-quality recycled aggregate (Section 6.1.2) takes the focus away from higher-quality recycling and reuse.
- Integrated C&D tools and requirements for identifying, classifying and certifying salvaged materials are lacking (construction company interview).
Soil and stones: End-of-pipe diversion
This section explores the end-of-pipe diversion options for soils and stones from construction waste (EWC 17 05 04). End-of-pipe diversion options are concerned with when the material is classified as waste, and is then reprocessed into another material. As there are many exemptions for soil and stones reuse, the main diversion options are upstream, occurring before waste classification. The main end-of-pipe diversion option is to produce recycled aggregates.
Recycled aggregates
Soils can be washed to separate sand, gravel, and stone from contaminants, especially on brownfield sites, and reused as aggregate in construction (Magnusson et al., 2015; Choi et al., 2018; waste industry association interview).
Barriers:
- Recycled aggregate is more expensive than virgin materials (Magnusson et al., 2015; commercial remediation company interview). Quarrying for natural aggregate is cheaper and more accessible (commercial remediation company and waste industry association interviews).
- Soil remediation technologies are not widely used in Scotland (C&D skip operator interview).
- Fluctuations in cost and quality lead to inconsistent demand, impacting the feasibility of supply. For example, a facility failed in 2016 due to lack of demand (commercial landfill operator interview). There is good supply in Scotland of recycled quarry materials, but demand is low (commercial remediation company interview).
- There is low industry understanding of how to use recycled aggregates. For example, road projects where the ground is damp tend to require natural aggregates; recycled aggregates are more applicable for farm tracks, because they meet requirements for tractors more easily than cars (C&D skip operator interview).
- There is a higher recycling and reuse rate for soils and aggregates on site; what is taken off site tends to be less usable (C&D skip operator interview).
Soil and stones: Upstream diversion options
This section covers how soils and stones can be kept on site or reused at another site under exemptions, avoiding classification as waste.
Landfill/quarry cover, engineering and restoration
Soils and stones are used for temporary or final landfill cover, haul roads within a site, and restoring quarry sites. In landfill restoration, layers of subsoil and topsoil must be added, to enable development of vegetation (SEPA, 2018).
In Scotland, exemptions from SLfT apply under the Waste Management Licensing (Scotland) Regulations 2011 (Schedule 1, paragraph 9). This relates to where soil and stones treat land for agricultural or ecological benefit. Soil and stones are not subject to the same per-hectare limits for infilling agricultural land as other waste types (Waste Management Licensing Regulations, Schedule 2, paragraph 2), making it easier to divert them in larger quantities.
Barriers:
- Fewer landfills are operational. The number has declined since 2005 (SEPA, 2023) and this is expected to reduce further after the ban on landfilling biodegradable municipal waste (interviews with commercial remediation company; waste industry association; large public body).
Landscaping and construction
On-site reuse of soils reduces transportation and storage issues, making it the most cost-effective option (commercial remediation company interview). Transfer to another work site requires a waste management licence or exemption. Exemptions apply where soils and stones are used to treat land, provided certain conditions are met (Waste Management Licensing (Scotland) Regulations 2011, Schedule 1, Paragraph 7).
SEPA has issued regulatory guidance to support the sustainable reuse of greenfield soils which are soils from undeveloped, uncontaminated land. The soil must be used for a specified purpose, identified before excavation begins, and transfer must be approved by SEPA. Purposes may include the operational land of railways or land which is woodland, park, garden, verge, landscaped area, sports or recreation ground, churchyard or cemetery.
Interviewees indicated that practices for coordinating soil reuse in Scotland vary between projects based on developers (commercial remediation company and engineering consultancy interview). Public sector contracts sometimes include reuse requirements, while private contracts typically show less incentive. Carbon considerations are an emerging driver for on-site reuse, where these materials are less ideal than virgin quarry materials but still meet requirements (engineering consultancy interview).
Barriers:
- The UK has over 700 soil types requiring thorough classification by type (topsoil/subsoil) and hazard level (hazardous/non-hazardous, active/inactive) prior to reuse (The Royal Society, 2020; Soil Association, 2021).
- Mismatches in soil type, availability, project timelines, and storage requirements often hinder reuse (Thompson, 2021; Choi et al., 2018; Hale et al., 2021; Marasini et al., 2012; SEPA, commercial remediation company and engineering consultancy interviews).
- Geography and pressure to keep heavy vehicle movements off community roads incentivises finding reuse options close to sites of origin, but timing can prevent this (engineering consultancy interview).
- In some cases, the SLfT can have less negative financial impact on a project than costs of storage, transport, or project delays, making reuse impractical (engineering consultancy interview).
- Reuse of soil and stones may be deprioritised compared to the sustainability of manufactured materials like concrete (Berryman et al., 2023) especially where time and budget constraints apply (commercial remediation company and engineering consultancy interviews).
- Reuse options for contaminated soils are limited. Untreated soil is costly to landfill, while treated soil is typically restricted to low-grade uses such as embankments (engineering consultancy interview).
- Liability concerns discourage topsoil reuse as developers and landowners remain responsible for future environmental impacts (Hale et al., 2021).
- Multiple compliance pathways such as exemptions, permits, and definition of waste protocols create confusion, increasing the risk of non-compliance, misclassification, and illegal disposal (commercial remediation company interview; Thompson, 2021).
- Despite Berryman’s et al. (2023) guidance aimed at harmonising best practice, industry uptake remains inconsistent. The absence of a unified legislative framework results in varied approaches across agriculture, land development, engineering, and land management sectors (Thompson, 2021).
Preliminary feasibility assessment of diversion options
This section presents an indicative assessment of the viability of different waste diversion options for the three priority materials: mechanically-treated fines (19 12 12), mechanically-treated mineral fines (19 12 09), and soils and stones (17 05 04). The assessment considers how feasible the diversion options currently are. This includes information on current use, research and development activity, and the barriers mentioned above in section 6.
The feasibility score therefore indicates the extent that future interventions are needed to target barriers and enable diversion. The feasibility scoring is as follows:
- 1 = Not currently feasible, would require significant intervention to upscale.
- 2 = Feasible to some extent, some barriers would need to be addressed.
- 3 = Most feasible, already happening widely in Scotland.
- n/a = not applicable, didn’t come up as a diversion option for the material in the research.
The methodology behind this assessment can be viewed in Appendix D.
Tables 4 and 5 below present the preliminary feasibility assessment of the end-of-pipe and upstream diversion options. For reference we also include a general impact rating of the technology based on the findings from desk-based research and stakeholder interviews. The impact rating reflects the overall environmental and circular economy benefits (e.g. quantities of materials diverted from landfill) that could be achieved if the option were implemented more widely, using a simple scale of ‘high’, ‘medium’ or ‘low’.
Key takeaways of the assessment are:
- Mechanically-treated fines have a limited number of feasible end-of-pipe solutions at present. Landfill cover and gypsum recycling are technically possible, but most other downstream options score low on feasibility and offer only low to medium impact. As a result, it is likely better to prioritise upstream interventions – such as deconstruction, modular construction, and refurbishment – for their higher impact potential, even though they are not yet widely adopted.
- Mechanically-treated mineral fines have more feasible end-of-pipe diversion options, including reuse in land restoration and aggregate recycling. These options are already in operation and could be scaled further considering the opportunity to provide ecological improvements so maximum value is retained.
- Soils and stones show the greatest feasibility overall, particularly for recycled aggregates and reuse in landscaping. While some remediation technologies are not yet fully developed, most of the downstream options are already in use.
- Gypsum and plasterboard recycling is moderately feasible and could play a larger role with better separation and recovery at source.
- Upstream interventions such as modular construction, deconstruction, and refurbishment, score high on impact across all materials where relevant, but face barriers related to investment, data, and planning. Technological readiness is improving – especially with AI-driven solutions for sorting and design – and deployment is likely to increase in the next 5–10 years with the right incentives and digital infrastructure.
Table : Preliminary feasibility assessment of end-of-pipe diversion options
|
Diversion options |
Potential impact (low, med, high) |
Mechanically-treated fines |
Mechanically-treated mineral fines |
Soils and stones |
|
Landfill/quarry cover, engineering and restoration |
Low |
3 |
3 |
3 |
|
Recycled aggregates |
Medium |
1 |
2 |
3 |
|
Land treatment and agricultural soil improvement |
Medium |
1 |
3 |
n/a |
|
Gypsum fines recycling |
Medium |
2 |
n/a |
n/a |
Table 5: Preliminary feasibility assessment of upstream diversion options
|
Diversion options |
Potential impact (low, med, high) |
Mechanically-treated fines |
Mechanically-treated mineral fines |
Soils and stones |
|
Remediation technologies (e.g. soil washing) |
Medium |
1 |
1 |
2 |
|
Landscaping and construction soil reuse |
High |
n/a |
n/a |
2 |
|
Modular construction and material reuse |
High |
1 |
1 |
n/a |
|
Deconstruction and material sorting |
High |
1 |
1 |
n/a |
|
Refurbish or retrofit before demolition |
High |
1 |
1 |
n/a |
Key (see the methodology above for more information)
|
Score |
Colour |
|
1: Not currently feasible | |
|
2: Feasible to some extent | |
|
3: Most feasible | |
|
n/a: Not a diversion option |
Policy assessment
This section provides an overview of existing policies influencing the management and diversion of the three priority materials. It also identifies policy gaps and presents potential interventions discussed in previous sections to enhance waste diversion, aligning with Scotland’s environmental objectives.
Overview of existing policies
Several key policies and fiscal mechanisms shape the management and disposal of the priority materials in Scotland. Some policies are devolved to the Scottish Government, while others are reserved, under UK Government control. These policies shape the incentives and barriers encountered by waste producers and processors in diverting materials from landfill.
Fiscal measures
Scottish Landfill Tax (SLfT), the focus of this study, is devolved legislation introduced in 2015 to reduce the environmental impacts of waste, encouraging waste reduction and adherence to the waste hierarchy in Scotland. While standard-rate SLfT has risen significantly to £126.15 per tonne in 2025-26, the lower rate (£4.05 per tonne in 2025-26) remains considerably lower, as is broadly the case in the rest of the UK. As discussed, this lower rate is applied to seven groups of qualifying materials (Section 5.3), typically inert or less polluting wastes such as some construction and demolition waste. The lower-rate aims to provide an economic incentive for their diversion from landfill while avoid imposing undue costs on sectors where alternative treatment options may be limited.
The Aggregates Levy (AGL) is a UK-wide tax applied to commercially exploited (virgin) crushed rock, sand, and gravel to encourage the use of recycled alternatives. A Scottish Aggregates Tax (SAT) is expected to replace the UK AGL from April 2026, offering an opportunity to explore ways to further incentivise the use of secondary aggregates (Scottish Government, 2024b).
The Climate Change Levy (CCL) and Carbon Price Floor (CPF) are UK-wide fiscal measures designed to reduce carbon emissions by taxing energy use and setting a minimum price for carbon from electricity generation (HM Revenue and Customs, 2024). While these policies primarily lead to emissions reductions (Döbbeling-Hildebrandt et al. 2024, p.2) they also indirectly affect waste management across the UK by incentivising energy efficiency and low-carbon industrial processes.
Other regulatory measures
The Waste (Scotland) Regulations 2012, which are devolved secondary legislation, require waste producers to prioritise prevention, reuse, and recycling over landfill disposal (Scottish Government, 2012b). Businesses must segregate recyclable materials to improve recycling rates (Zero Waste Scotland, 2023). While these regulations reinforce waste hierarchy principles, they do not specifically address lower-rate waste streams.
The upcoming ban on biodegradable municipal waste (BMW) to landfill, effective 31 December 2025, is a devolved Scottish Government policy aimed at reducing environmental impacts from organic waste. While this ban will primarily impact standard-rate waste (Scottish Government, 2022), it could have indirect consequences for certain lower-rate materials. Minerals, and soils and stones, traditionally used for landfill engineering purposes, may see temporarily higher demand for use in landfill closures, but a long-term decline in demand. Alternative diversion pathways would be needed for these to align with Scotland’s circular economy objectives. In addition, gypsum, which currently can only be landfilled at sites without bio-waste, is likely to become easier to landfill. There may also be an increase bio-based mechanically-treated fines from municipal waste streams. Increased enforcement of fines’ classification and incentives for recycling may therefore be required. However, the ban will not signal the complete end of bio-waste to landfill, as it includes certain exemptions.
Digital Waste Transfer Notes (WTNs), a UK-wide initiative, aims to improve traceability and enforcement by transitioning to an electronic system for recording waste movements (DEFRA, 2023). This system aims to reduce the misclassification of waste, including lower-rate materials like mechanically-treated fines, by providing greater transparency in the movement of waste. It is expected to “shine a light on transactions and actors” currently missing from the system, while enhancing compliance with landfill tax regulations (CIWM, 2023). The April 2025 roll-out has recently been postponed to April 2026.
These are the key fiscal and regulatory policies interacting with lower-rate materials. However, gaps remain in their effectiveness for supporting diversion options for the three categories of waste which make up the bulk of lower-rated waste in Scotland notably mechanically-treated fines, soils and stones, and mineral waste. Addressing these gaps could involve targeted interventions, as discussed in the following sections and Appendix A.
Policy gaps and potential interventions
Despite existing regulatory and fiscal policies, several policy gaps hinder the effective diversion of lower-rate materials from landfill, such as mechanically-treated fines, and soils and stones from construction. These gaps are categorised according to their relation to either end-of-pipe waste management or upstream prevention in the material life-cycle.
This section outlines potential interventions to address such gaps. These are not policy recommendations but options to consider. Further research, analysis and consultation would be required before deciding whether to take any, or all, forward.
End-of-pipe diversion
Compliance risks and landfill misclassification
A key enforcement challenge is misclassification of waste at landfill sites. The widening gap between standard- and lower-rate SLfT (now standing at above £100 per tonne in 2025-26) may have inadvertently created financial incentives for waste producers to classify waste as lower-rate whenever possible. Along with the complex classification criteria (see section 5.3), this may have led to both deliberate and unintentional misclassification, particularly for mechanically-treated fines.
Rather than being residual outputs of material recovery, large quantities of fines are purposefully produced to qualify for the lower rate (Section 6.1.1). This distorts waste tracking data and results in potentially recoverable material being landfilled.
Landfill operators hold tax liability for misclassification, even though they do not generate or pre-process the waste. This creates financial risks for operators, leading some to refuse lower-rate fines altogether.
Ambiguity in classification raises costs for both regulators and waste operators. Waste producers may unintentionally misclassify waste due to lack of clear, standardised guidance, leading to incorrect application of the lower tax rate (see Section 7.2.1.1). Although better guidance could reduce some misclassification, it is unlikely to fully resolve the issue. This is because the underlying rules that determine whether fines are subject to the lower or standard rate are themselves complex and difficult to apply consistently, particularly when mapped against EWC waste code classifications (see Section 5.3). Clearer guidance may help reduce ambiguity, though it may also be worth exploring whether simplification of the tax qualification rules could support more consistent classification.
A recent SEPA report on the BMW-to-landfill ban notes that sorting residues from processing municipal waste (including mechanically-treated fines) may be generated in greater volumes in order to bypass the ban (SEPA, 2024a). This risks undermining the intent of the bio-waste ban policy through reclassification rather than genuine diversion. This risk is supported by our findings about the production of mechanically-treated fines to qualify for the lower rate (Section 6.1.1).
Potential fiscal interventions:
- Explore the feasibility of a specific tax rate for mechanically-treated fines which is much closer to the standard rate, or reclassification under the standard rate. This could discourage excessive fines production while retaining the lower rate for less problematic inert materials. A careful balance would need to be struck to avoid unintended consequences, particularly for businesses reliant on landfill for inert waste management. Supportive measures, addressing upstream value chains, would likely be needed.
Potential non-fiscal interventions
- Technical: Review LOI testing requirements to ensure they do not deter investment in fines processing, while maintaining environmental safeguards (C&D waste management processor interview; waste industry association interview; C&D skip operator interview).
- Enforcement: Explore the potential for enhanced regulatory oversight through the upcoming digital waste transfer notes (WTNs) system to track and verify waste classification at source rather than at landfill. Through this, tax liability for misclassified mechanical fines could be shifted to the company which produced the fines, even if this is discovered after it has been accepted at landfill, along with penalties for misclassification.
- Other: Improve guidance on EWC code classification by providing clearer criteria to support consistent decisions on whether waste qualifies for the lower rate. This could include practical examples of lower-rate materials, decision trees, and alignment with the upcoming digital waste transfer note system. In the longer term, there may also be value in exploring whether simplifying the underlying rules on lower-rate material classification could further reduce classification ambiguity.
Separation and recovery of mechanically-treated fines
Inadequate pre-sorting of C&D waste leads to contamination and fines production. Once contaminated, fines are difficult to reprocess. Industry practices in Scotland and globally do not sufficiently prioritise separation at the source, meaning valuable materials are lost to landfill.
Potential fiscal interventions:
- Continue strengthening incentives to increase the demand for recycled fines. This is already starting with the planned introduction of the Scottish Aggregates Tax in April 2026 which will initially align with the UK Aggregates Levy. Over time, there may be scope for policy divergence in Scotland. Additional financial incentives – such as tax breaks or recycled content requirements – could drive up industry circularity, such as for reused material content, recycled material content and reusable materials (Green Alliance, 2023). However, interventions would have to avoid unintended consequences related to availability of recycled fines. This could be a particular issue in rural areas, which are further from recycling infrastructure (commercial remediation company interview).
Potential non-fiscal interventions:
- Technological: More support for technologies and infrastructure to reprocess fines and reduce contamination could help address issues with fines in washing facilities. Programmes like the Knowledge Transfer Partnership could play a role. Existing examples include phytoremediation, which uses plants and microorganisms to degrade pollutants and reduce heavy metals (Yadav et al., 2022).
- Technological: Technologies exist to make the shape of fines coarser and more suitable for construction purposes, though the outputs are currently more costly than natural aggregates (C&D skip operator interview). Further reuse routes could be explored, for example how to promote fine aggregates being added to paints for flooring to increase traction.
- Regulatory: Encourage early-stage waste management planning by integrating material audits into construction permitting. This includes site investigations, sampling and testing to support effective use of recycled aggregates.
- Other: Improve industry understanding of recycled fines through guidance and awareness campaigns, including how and when they can be reused (C&D skip operator interview).
Cross-border waste movement risks
SLfT operates within a broader UK framework, presenting cross-border waste movement compliance challenges. For instance, if Scotland increased its lower-rate SLfT while England maintained the current lower rate, waste exports may increase, undermining the tax’s effectiveness as well as Scottish tax revenues. Similarly, restricting mechanical fines’ eligibility for the lower rate in Scotland could lead to this waste stream being diverted to England instead of being recovered.
These risks are particularly relevant in light of recent and proposed changes across the UK. As mentioned, the Welsh Government increased its lower rate of Landfill Disposals Tax in 2024, and the UK Government is currently consulting on significant reforms to Landfill Tax in England and Northern Ireland, with the consultation due to conclude in July 2025 (HM Treasury and HMRC, 2025).
Introducing financial or enforcement-based interventions is challenging in a cross-border context. The Scottish Government has limited or no authority over waste processed or disposed of in other UK jurisdictions.
Potential fiscal interventions:
- Considering penalties for cross-border misclassification, similar to Wales’ Unauthorised Disposals Tax (150% of the standard rate) and the proposal in the UK government’s consultation (200% of the standard rate) which creates an additional financial deterrent for people seeking to dispose of waste illegally.
Potential non-fiscal interventions:
- Regulatory/enforcement: Enhancing regulatory and enforcement coordination between Scotland, England, and Wales to ensure greater policy consistency and prevent waste tourism.
Upstream diversion
Reducing reliance on landfill also requires preventing lower-rate materials from being generated as waste. However, this is constrained by limited incentives for circular practices, inconsistent reuse standards, weak producer responsibility measures and insufficient integration of circularity in planning and procurement.
Lack of incentives for designing in circularity
Soils, stones, and minerals removed from C&D sites are often generated, and classified as waste, without efforts to improve their quality or assess their reuse potential. This results in unnecessary landfill disposal, despite available prevention and recovery pathways. Lack of guidance on soil and stone classification, combined with inconsistent reuse standards, means that secondary materials markets remain underdeveloped.
Mechanically-treated fines are often the result of poor material selection at the design and procurement stages. If more construction materials and products were designed for disassembly, reuse, or easier sorting, rather than demolition, the production of fines could be significantly reduced. Currently, there is no strong economic driver for waste producers to prioritise clean, separable materials over mixed waste streams that result in fines.
Current planning regulations and public procurement rules do not sufficiently integrate circular economy principles. Without upfront material assessments, valuable materials are classified as waste and disposed of unnecessarily.
The UK and the devolved nations are moving toward more comprehensive extended producer responsibility (EPR) schemes for other materials. If an effective system is adopted for construction, this could encourage producers to adopt circular practices and reduce waste generation at the design stage. There have also been sub-national developments in London, where large planning applications for approval by the mayor now require whole lifecycle carbon assessments, carbon reduction plans, and circular economy statements. Before a redevelopment or demolition plan can be approved, an audit must be carried out to determine the reuse potential of materials in the existing building (Mayor of London, 2022).
Circular economy policies such as these are needed to transition the construction sector as a whole, changing value chains so that much less of the priority materials in this study are generated. The lower rate of SLfT could be iteratively increased in tandem with these interventions, as a supporting measure; if it were to be raised too rapidly without supporting upstream interventions, negative impacts on the construction sector and on illegal disposal would likely occur.
Potential fiscal interventions:
- Consider raising the overall lower rate of SLfT to provide a greater incentive for circular practices on construction sites. Even a relatively modest increase could help to justify the costs of storing and transporting materials such as soils and stones for reuse (engineering consultancy interview). Wales’ new lower rate (£6.30 per tonne) could serve as a benchmark. A rate of £6 per tonne was deemed viable by industry interviewees (commercial landfill operator and C&D waste management processor).
- Consider monitoring the development and impacts of the upcoming Scottish Aggregates Tax (SAT), which will replace the UK Aggregates Levy from April 2026. While the SAT will be limited to the commercial exploitation of aggregates as defined in the 2024 Act (Scottish Government, 2024b), its introduction provides a useful opportunity to review whether taxation influences the quantities of lower-rate aggregates sent to landfill. Insights from this review could help inform future considerations around the treatment of other virgin materials used in construction, within the context of devolved powers and existing legislative frameworks.
- Consider financial incentives for reuse in construction, such as tax relief for projects incorporating secondary materials (construction company interview).
- Ensure SLfT exemptions support the diversion of lower-rate materials from landfill. A review of existing and upcoming exemptions, for instance with the bio-waste to landfill ban, may help assess their effectiveness in facilitating prevention, reuse and recovery while maintaining environmental protections.
- Consider engaging with HM Revenue and Customs over VAT reform, such as extending zero-rate VAT to refurbishment and retrofit to reduce incentives for demolition and new build construction.
Non-fiscal interventions
- Policy: Consider the expansion of EPR to cover construction materials, shifting financial responsibility for waste management onto producers to encourage modular design and reuse.
- Policy: Consider mandatory, rather than voluntary, circularity requirements targeting construction project clients (construction company interview). Investigate opportunities to strengthen public procurement rules to prioritise secondary materials, reuse, spoil management and design for deconstruction. These requirements could support more systematic waste prevention at the planning stage and drive investment in circular practices (SEDA, 2024; O’Leary, Osmani and Goodier, 2024).
- Policy: Consider reforms to embed circularity in planning policy, such as requirements for pre-demolition assessments, material recovery assessments before deconstruction and resource management plans to include deconstruction design (Construction company interview; Green Alliance, 2023).
- Policy: Explore adoption of carbon reporting tools that account for lifecycle emissions, including embodied carbon and Scope 3 (SEDA, 2024). Distinct reuse and recycling reporting for high-impact materials like concrete may also help reduce downcycling (Green Alliance, 2023).
- Technological: Consider supporting the development of product passports or material databases for construction materials to improve transparency and enable reuse (construction company interview).
- Technological: Consider the future use of AI and matching platforms to optimise design and reuse coordination (Huang et al., 2022; Choi et al., 2018; construction company interview).
- Operational: Consider investigating early-stage site audits, sampling and testing to support on-site recovery and reuse of recycled aggregates (C&D skip operator and engineering consultancy interviews).
- Operational: Consider the potential for construction material hubs to store and redistribute soils and other surplus materials. However, barriers remain around ownership, quality control, certification and fraud risk (commercial remediation company and construction company interviews).
- Other: Consider aligning government strategies on housing and urban development with circular economy targets to create long-term demand for reused materials (Green Alliance, 2023).
- Other: Consider investing in training and awareness to support greater uptake of recycled aggregates and reused soils. Cultural shifts may be needed to encourage viewing soil and stones as valuable resources, rather than ‘dirt’ (Thompson, 2021; Berryman et al., 2023).
Addressing both end-of-pipe and upstream barriers will be essential for improving SLfT effectiveness and enhancing material recovery. As with other areas of circular economy policy, coordinated packages of measures working across material value chains, targeting incentives at multiple stakeholders, are likely to be needed. By considering these policy measures, Scotland could identify strategies to reduce landfill reliance, improve material efficiency, and accelerate its transition to a circular economy.
Conclusions
This section summarises the key findings of the research and assesses whether the lower-rate SLfT remains effective in supporting Scotland’s environmental and waste management objectives. It also considers the broader policy implications, including potential enforcement challenges, unintended consequences, and cross-border impacts.
Summary of key findings
The lower rate of SLfT was introduced to enable the cost-effective disposal of low-risk, inert waste while ensuring compliance with Scotland’s broader environmental policies. Overall landfill trends show a mild downward trend in landfilled lower-rate materials at least until early 2020 (Figure 1), suggesting the tax may have initially influenced disposal patterns. Tonnages of lower rate material to landfill have since fluctuated without a clear trend (Figure 1). This research identifies several factors that may influence the continued effectiveness of the lower rate:
- Lower-rate landfill disposal is dominated by three specific waste streams—mechanically-treated fines, soils and stones, and mechanically-treated mineral fines—which together accounted for 77% of all lower-rate waste landfilled in 2023-24.
- Mechanically-treated fines are landfilled in the greatest quantities out of all lower-rate materials, and have seen the greatest increase in quantities between 2021-2024 (with a slight dip in 2022-23). This is despite originally being intended as residual outputs from material recovery processes. This trend raises concerns over misclassification and evidence from our interviews of fines being produced on purpose.
- Environmental impact analysis highlights that mechanically-treated fines pose significant risks, contributing disproportionately to air pollution, resource depletion, and biodiversity loss compared to other lower-rate materials.
- Current SLfT structures, fiscal incentives, and policy measures are not effectively supporting higher-value diversion options for lower-rate materials. The relatively affordable lower tax rate continues to make landfill the most economically attractive option for many waste producers of the priority materials, as it does in some other parts of the UK.
- The upcoming ban on BMW (effective December 2025) will change landfill dynamics, reducing long-term demand for materials traditionally used in landfill engineering, and may lead to more lower-rate materials being sent to landfill.
- Misclassification of waste remains a major issue, exacerbated by complex EWC code classifications that do not always align with SLfT qualifying material criteria. The lack of easy-to-use guidance and strong oversight contributes to both deliberate and unintentional misclassification.
These findings suggest that while the lower-rate SLfT has played a role in reducing landfill disposal overall, there may be opportunities to better align it with Scotland’s evolving circular economy and net zero ambitions.
Does the lower rate of Scottish Landfill Tax (SLfT) still support Scotland’s environmental objectives?
The lower-rate SLfT was designed to provide a cost-effective landfill option for inert, low-risk materials while supporting Scotland’s environmental policies, including waste reduction, emissions reduction, and adherence to the waste hierarchy. Since it was introduced, Scotland has introduced ambitious net zero targets and has increased its policy focus on achieving a circular economy. Compared to when the UK-wide Landfill Tax was first introduced in 1996, there is now more emphasis on reducing environmental impacts associated with upstream material use, rather than solely reducing emissions and hazards once materials are in landfill.
This research finds that the lower rate is no longer fully aligned with Scotland’s environmental objectives. Evidence suggests that progress in diverting lower-rate materials may have stalled, with data indicating a levelling-off of lower-rate landfill tonnages since 2020–21 (Figure 1). In addition, there is insufficient incentive to divert materials upstream, including via the planning and design stages of the construction projects which generate much of these materials.
Misalignment with policy goals
While the SLfT was intended to discourage landfill disposal and promote alternative waste management options, the lower rate has, in some cases, created unintended incentives:
- Mechanically-treated fines have become a dominant lower-rate waste stream despite their potential for reduction and recovery, indicating that the tax structure may not sufficiently encourage more circular treatment of the mixed construction materials that make up this waste stream.
- The low cost of landfill disposal creates limited incentives for repurposing soils and stones, which could otherwise be reused in construction and landscaping.
- The lower rate of tax, at £4.05 per tonne (2025-26) appears to have had a limited impact in shifting waste up the hierarchy, with landfill remaining the most economically viable option for many waste producers.
Environmental and economic consequences
Mechanically-treated fines, which now make up a significant portion of lower-rate landfill disposal, have disproportionately high environmental impacts (on a whole life-cycle basis) compared to other lower-rate materials, including contributions to air pollution, resource depletion, and biodiversity loss.
The financial attractiveness of landfill compared to investment in secondary material recovery remains a major barrier. The cost of processing and diverting lower-rate materials often exceeds landfill costs, discouraging investment in alternative waste management solutions.
Compliance and enforcement challenges
The widening tax differential between standard- and lower-rate waste contributes to increased misclassification, particularly for mechanically-treated fines, where interviewees pointed to the ‘production’ of fines in order to qualify for the lower rate.
Landfill operators, who bear the primary tax liability for misclassified waste, face increased financial and compliance risks, leading some to refuse lower-rate fines due to the high burden of tax assessments and retrospective penalties.
Complexities in aligning SLfT qualifying criteria with EWC codes contribute to misclassification, due to a lack of clear guidance for waste producers and operators.
Conclusion and policy implications
The lower-rate SLfT remains partially effective but is increasingly misaligned with Scotland’s circular economy and wider environmental objectives. While it has supported landfill diversion in some cases, the increasing quantity of mechanically-treated fines being landfilled at lower rate undermines resource efficiency and waste hierarchy goals. Without adjustments, in conjunction with other supporting policies, there is a risk that the tax may continue to favour landfill disposal over resource recovery, limiting Scotland’s progress toward a low-carbon, circular economy.
To ensure Scotland meets its waste reduction, emissions reduction, and circular economy goals, reforms to the lower-rate SLfT are necessary. Key areas for further exploration could include:
- Raising the lower SLfT rate by a greater margin than in previous years (as Wales is doing and proposed in the UK’s 2025 consultation), to incentivise application of the waste hierarchy.
- Assigning a significantly higher SLfT rate to mechanically-treated fines specifically, to address misclassification and recognise its relatively high environmental impacts.
- Strengthening enforcement and guidance on material classification to reduce compliance risks.
- Build on existing cross-border regulatory and enforcement cooperation to address ongoing challenges such as waste tourism and the evolution of the landfill tax, recognising the complexities of working across different regimes.
By considering these targeted interventions, Scotland can help reduce reliance on landfill, improve material efficiency, and ensure that landfill tax policy aligns with long-term sustainability goals.
References
Ali, M. (2023) ‘An investigation into the uses of trommel fınes produced from recyclıng of constructıon and demolition waste’, Construction and Building Materials, 369(130579), pp.1-11. Available at https://www.sciencedirect.com/science/article/pii/S0950061823002908 (Accessed: 12 March 2025)
Arup and Ellen Macarthur Foundation (2020) From principles to practices: Realising the value of circular economy in real estate https://www.arup.com/globalassets/downloads/insights/from-principles-to-practices-realising-the-value-of-circular-economy-in-real-estate.pdf (Accessed: 12 March 2025)
Berryman, C. et al. (2023) Sustainable management of surplus soil and aggregates from construction (C809). London, UK: CIRIA.
Bogas, J.A., Silva, M. and Glória Gomes, M. (2019) ‘Unstabilized and stabilized compressed earth blocks with partial incorporation of recycled aggregates’, International Journal of Architectural Heritage, 13(4), pp.569-584. Available at: https://www.tandfonline.com/doi/abs/10.1080/15583058.2018.1442891 (Accessed: 12 March 2025)
Braga, B.B., de Carvalho, T.R.A., Brosinsky, A., Foerster, S. and Medeiros, P.H.A., (2019) ‘From waste to resource: Cost-benefit analysis of reservoir sediment reuse for soil fertilization in a semiarid catchment’, Science of the total environment, 670, pp.158-169. Available at: https://www.sciencedirect.com/science/article/abs/pii/S0048969719310654 (Accessed: 12 March 2025)
Burdier, M., Anshassi, M., Guo, Y., Laux, S. and Townsend, T. (2022) ‘Enhancing the beneficial reuse properties of construction and demolition debris fines using lab-scale washing’, Resources, Conservation and Recycling, 183(106361). Available at: https://www.sciencedirect.com/science/article/abs/pii/S0921344922002063 (Accessed: 12 March 2025)
Burlakovs, J. et al. (2021) ‘Sustainable landfill fine fraction of waste reuse opportunities in covering layer development’, Research for Rural Development, 36, pp.303-310. Available at: https://llufb.llu.lv/conference/Research-for-Rural-Development/2021/LatviaResRuralDev_27th_2021-303-310.pdf (Accessed: 12 March 2025)
Campe, J. et al. (2012) The potential of remineralization with rock mineral fines to transform agriculture, forests, sustainable biofuels production, sequester carbon, and stabilize the climate. Available at: https://www.remineralize.org/wp-content/uploads/Rio%20Summit-RTE-2012.pdf (Accessed: 12 March 2025)
Choi, H, et al. (2018) ‘Soil Recycling Among Construction Sites by Optimizing Schedule and Costs for Earthmoving’ Journal of Asian Architecture and Building Engineering, 16(2), pp. 439-446. Available at: https://doi.org/10.3130/jaabe.16.439 (Accessed: 21 March 2025)
European Commission (2000) 2000/532/EC: Commission Decision of 3 May 2000 replacing Decision 94/3/EC establishing a list of wastes pursuant to Article 1(a) of Council Directive 75/442/EEC on waste and Council Decision 94/904/EC establishing a list of hazardous waste pursuant to Article 1(4) of Council Directive 91/689/EEC on hazardous waste. Available at: http://data.europa.eu/eli/dec/2000/532/2023-12-06 (Accessed: 27/03/2025)
CIWM (2023) Position Statement: Digital Waste Tracking. Available at: https://www.ciwm.co.uk/ciwm/news-and-insight/member_news/2023/ciwm_position_statement_digital_waste_tracking.aspx (Accessed: 12 March 2025)
Cottrell, J.A., Ali, M. and Etienne, G. (2024) ‘Utilisation of construction, demolition and excavation waste for the production of compressed trommel fines blocks’, Construction and Building Materials, 416(134985), pp.1-11. Available at: https://www.sciencedirect.com/science/article/pii/S0950061824001260 (Accessed: 12 March 2025)
ClimateXChange and Ricardo (2025) Evidence review on the potential role of alternatives to primary aggregates to deliver reductions in GHG emissions [Forthcoming; publication expected summer 2025].
DEFRA (2023) Government response: Implementation of mandatory digital waste tracking. Available at: https://www.gov.uk/government/consultations/implementation-of-mandatory-digital-waste-tracking/outcome/government-response (Accessed 14 March 2025)
Di Maria, F., Micale, C., Sordi, A., Cirulli, G. and Marionni, M. (2013) ‘Urban mining: Quality and quantity of recyclable and recoverable material mechanically and physically extractable from residual waste’, Waste Management, 33(12), pp.2594-9. Available at: https://www.sciencedirect.com/science/article/abs/pii/S0956053X13003814 (Accessed: 12 March 2025)
Döbbeling-Hildebrandt, N. et al. (2024) ‘Systematic review and meta-analysis of ex-post evaluations on the effectiveness of carbon pricing’, Nature Communications, 15(1) pp.1-12, Available at: https://www.nature.com/articles/s41467-024-48512-w#ref-CR69 (Accessed: 12 March 2025)
Dsposal (n.d.) Waste thesaurus. Available at: https://dsposal.uk/your/waste-thesaurus?keyword=19+12+12&type=low (Accessed: 12 March 2025)
Environment Agency (2023a) Check if your waste is suitable for deposit recovery. Available at: https://www.gov.uk/government/publications/deposit-for-recovery-operators-environmental-permits/check-if-your-waste-is-suitable-for-deposit-for-recovery#:~:text=and%20road%20construction.- ,Minerals%20(such%20as%20sand%20and%20stones)%20from%20the%20treatment%20of,gypsum%20from%20recovered%20plasterboard (Accessed: 05 February 2025)
Environment Agency (2023b) Land spreading: benefits and risks of the waste types you can use. Available at: https://www.gov.uk/guidance/landspreading-benefits-and-risks-of-the-waste-types-you-can-use/19-waste-codes (Accessed: 05 February 2025)
Environmental Standards Scotland (2024) The risks to Scotland’s soils: a scoping report. Available at: The-risks-to-Scotlands-soils-a-scoping-report-October-2024.pdf (Accessed: 21 March 2025)
European Commission (2000) 2000/532/EC: Commission Decision of 3 May 2000 replacing Decision 94/3/EC establishing a list of wastes pursuant to Article 1(a) of Council Directive 75/442/EEC on waste and Council Decision 94/904/EC establishing a list of hazardous waste pursuant to Article 1(4) of Council Directive 91/689/EEC on hazardous waste.
European Commission (2023) Use of recycled aggregates in concrete: Opportunities for upscaling in Europe. Available at: https://publications.jrc.ec.europa.eu/repository/bitstream/JRC131294/JRC131294_01.pdf (Accessed: 11 February 2025)
Ferriz-Papi, J.A. and Thomas, S. (2020) ‘Recycled aggregates from construction and demolition waste in the production of concrete blocks’, Journal of Construction Materials, 2(1), pp.1-12. Available at: https://salford-repository.worktribe.com/output/1349528/recycled-aggregates-from-construction-and-demolition-waste-in-the-production-of-concrete-blocks (Accessed: 12 March 2025)
Green Alliance (2022) Circular business: What companies need to make the switch. Available at: https://green-alliance.org.uk/wp-content/uploads/2022/07/Circular-business.pdf (Accessed: 25 March 2023)
Green Alliance (2023) Circular construction: Building for a greener UK economy. Available at: https://green-alliance.org.uk/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/Circular-construction.pdf (Accessed: 21 March 2025)
Hale, S. E (2021) ‘The Reuse of Excavated Soils from Construction and Demolition Projects: Limitations and Possibilities’, Sustainability, 13(11), p. 6083. Available at: https://doi.org/10.3390/su13116083 (Accessed: 21 March 2025)
Haynes, R.J., Zhou, Y.F. and Weng, X. (2022) ‘Formulation and use of manufactured soils: A major use for organic and inorganic wastes’, Critical Reviews in Environmental Science and Technology, 52(22), pp.4113-4133. Available at: https://www.tandfonline.com/doi/abs/10.1080/10643389.2021.1989909 (Accessed: 12 March 2025)
Hernández García, L.C., Monteiro, S.N., Colorado Lopera, H.A. (2024) ‘Recycling Clay Waste from Excavation, Demolition, and Construction: Trends and Challenges’, Sustainability, 16(14), pp. 1-20. Available at: https://www.mdpi.com/2071-1050/16/14/6265
HM Revenue and Customs (2024) Accredited official statistics: Environmental Taxes Bulletin background and references. Available at: https://www.gov.uk/government/statistics/environmental-taxes-bulletin/environmental-taxes-bulletin-background-and-references (Accessed: 11 February 2025)
HM Treasury and HMRC (2025) Consultation on reform of landfill tax. Available at: https://www.gov.uk/government/consultations/consultation-on-reform-of-landfill-tax (Accessed: 13 May 2025)
Huang, T. et al. (2022) ‘A BIM-GIS-IoT-Based System for Excavated Soil Recycling’, Buildings, 12(4), p. 457. Available at: https://doi.org/10.3390/buildings12040457 (Accessed: 21 March 2025)
Hub4 (2024) The next generation in aggregate and mineral processing. Hub 4, 85. Available at: https://hub-4.com/files/document/4675/1711115438_Issue85_web.pdf (Accessed: 12 March 2025)
Hurst, L.J. and O’Donovan, T.S. (2024). ‘Embodied impacts of key materials for UK decarbonised domestic retrofit: Differences between sources of embodied carbon and embodied energy data’, Energy and Buildings, 319(114515), pp. 1-12. Available at: https://www.sciencedirect.com/science/article/pii/S0378778824006315 (Accessed: 12 March 2025)
Kasinikota, P. and Tripura, D.D. (2021) ‘Evaluation of compressed stabilized earth block properties using crushed brick waste’, Construction and Building Materials, 280(122520). Available at: https://www.sciencedirect.com/science/article/abs/pii/S0950061821002804 (Accessed: 12 March 2025)
Katsumi, T. (2015) ‘Soil excavation and reclamation in civil engineering: Environmental aspects’, Soil Science and Plant Nutrition, 61(sup1), pp. 22–29. Available at: https://doi.org/10.1080/00380768.2015.1020506 (Accessed: 21 March 2025)
Kay, S. (2022) ‘Case report: Appeal against Scottish landfill tax assessment partially successful’ Croner-i Tax and Accounting. Available at: https://library.croneri.co.uk/cch_uk/tta22/wkid-202206081109470619-79727388 (Accessed: 05 February 2025)
Magnusson, S. et al. (2015) ‘Sustainable management of excavated soil and rock in urban areas: A literature review’ Journal of Cleaner Production, 93, pp. 18-25. Available at: https://doi.org/10.1016/j.jclepro.2015.01.010 (Accessed: 21 March 2025)
Manning, D. and Vetterlein, J. (2004) ‘ExpLOItation and use of quarry fines’, Mist Project-Solutions, 44, pp.1-60. http://www.katlapumice.com/mist/mist2.pdf (Accessed: 12 March 2025)
Mansoor, S.S., Hama, S.M. and Hamdullah, D.N. (2024) ‘Effectiveness of replacing cement partially with waste brick powder in mortar’, Journal of King Saud University-Engineering Sciences, 36(7), pp.524-532. https://www.sciencedirect.com/science/article/pii/S1018363922000046#:~:text=3.2.&text=As%20mentioned%20in%20Fig.,compared%20with%20the%20reference%20mix.&text=res%20image%20(75KB)-,Fig.,of%20mixes%20with%20different%20%25WBP (Accessed: 12 March 2025)
Mayor of London (2022) London Plan Guidance: Circular Economy Statements. Available at: https://www.london.gov.uk/sites/default/files/circular_economy_statements_lpg.pdf (Accessed: 31 March 2025
Marasini, R. et al. (2012) ‘An investigation into the logistics and management of uncontaminated soil exchange in the Southern region of the UK’ Available at: https://pure.solent.ac.uk/en/publications/an-investigation-into-the-logistics-and-management-of-uncontamina (Accessed: 27/03/2025)
O’Leary, M.J., Osmani, M. and Goodier, C. (2024) ‘Circular economy implementation strategies, barriers and enablers for UK rail infrastructure projects’, Resources, Conservation & Recycling Advances, 21. Available at: https://www.sciencedirect.com/science/article/pii/S2667378923000676 (Accessed: 12 March 2025)
Oujana, S. and Sanchez, D. (2018) ‘Origins of the Problematic Substances in Fines, for Their Acceptance at Inert Landfills’, Journal of Geoscience and Environment Protection, 6(5), pp.237-246. Available at: https://www.scirp.org/journal/paperinformation?paperid=84938 (Accessed: 12 March 2025)
Renella, G. (2021) ‘Recycling and Reuse of Sediments in Agriculture: Where Is the Problem?’ Sustainability, 13(4), pp. 1-12. Available at: https://www.mdpi.com/2071-1050/13/4/1648
Revenue Scotland (2024a) Scottish Landfill Tax rates and accounting periods. Available at: https://revenue.scot/taxes/scottish-landfill-tax/slft-rates-accounting-periods (Accessed: 19 February 2025)
Revenue Scotland (2024b) Taxes: Scottish Landfill Tax. Available at: https://www.gov.scot/policies/taxes/landfill-tax/ (Accessed: 19 February 2025)
Revenue Scotland (n.d.) SLfT3001 – Determining whether tax is payable. Available at: https://revenue.scot/taxes/scottish-landfill-tax/slft1000-slft-legislation-guidance/slft3001-determining-whether-tax-payable (Accessed: 12 March 2025)
Scottish Government (2012a) Criteria and Procedures for the Acceptance of Waste at Landfills (Scotland) Direction 2005. Available at: https://www.gov.scot/publications/criteria-and-procedures-for-the-acceptance-of-waste-at-landfills-scotland-direction-2005/ (Accessed: 25 March 2025)
Scottish Government (2012b) Waste (Scotland) Regulations 2012. Available at: https://www.legislation.gov.uk/sdsi/2012/9780111016657/contents (Accessed: 11 February 2025)
Scottish Government (2021a) Heat in Buildings Strategy – achieving net zero emissions in Scotland’s buildings. Available at: https://www.gov.scot/publications/heat-buildings-strategy-achieving-net-zero-emissions-scotlands-buildings/ (Accessed: 25 March 2025)
Scottish Government (2021b) Net Zero Public Sector Buildings Standard. Available at: https://www.scottishfuturestrust.org.uk/storage/uploads/nzpsb_0s1_the_standard_v3.pdf (Accessed: 28 March 2025)
Scottish Government (2022) Delivering Scotland’s circular economy – route map to 2025 and beyond: consultation, Package 6: Minimise the impact of disposal. [Consultation paper] https://www.gov.scot/publications/consultation-delivering-scotlands-circular-economy-route-map-2025-beyond/pages/11/ (Accessed: 19 February 2025)
Scottish Government (2024a) Scotland’s Circular Economy and Waste Route Map to 2030. Available at: https://www.gov.scot/publications/scotlands-circular-economy-waste-route-map-2030/documents/ (Accessed: 21 March 2025)
Scottish Government (2024b) Taxes: Aggregates Levy. Available at: https://www.gov.scot/policies/taxes/aggregates-levy (Accessed: 11 February 2025)
Scottish Ecological Design Association (SEDA) (2024) 2045: The Big Conversation.
SEPA; the Civil Engineering Contractors Association (Scotland); the Environment Industries Commission (2010) Regulatory guidance: Promoting the sustainable reuse of greenfield soils in construction. Available at: https://www.sepa.org.uk/media/154233/reuse_greenfield_soils_construction.pdf (Accessed: 12 March 2025)
SEPA; Activities Exempt from Waste Management Licensing. Scottish Statutory Instrument 2011 No. 228: The Waste Management Licensing (Scotland) Regulations 2011. Paragraph 19. Available at:
https://www.sepa.org.uk/regulations/waste/activities-exempt-from-waste-management-licensing/ (Accessed: 14 March 2025)
SEPA (2013) SEPA Guidance: Recycled Aggregates from Inert Waste. Available at: https://www.sepa.org.uk/media/162893/production-of-recycled-aggregates.pdf (Accessed: 31 March 2025)
SEPA (2015) European waste catalogue EWC guidance Nov 2015. Available at: https://www.sepa.org.uk/media/163421/ewc_guidance.pdf (Accessed: 05 February 2025)
SEPA, Natural Resources Wales, Northern Ireland Environment Agency and Environment Agency (England) (2015) Waste Classification Technical Guidance (WM3). Available at: https://www.sepa.org.uk/media/162490/waste-classification-technical-guidance-wm3.pdf (Accessed: 29 March 2025)
SEPA (2018) Landfill restoration general guidance. Available at: https://www.sepa.org.uk/media/594440/sepa-guidance-wst-g-057-restoration.pdf (Accessed: 12 March 2025)
SEPA (2023) 2022 waste data quality report: Waste landfilled in Scotland. Available at: https://www.sepa.org.uk/media/sbzb01hn/waste-landfill-quality-report.pdf (Accessed: 12 March 2025)
SEPA (2024a) Biodegradable municipal waste landfill ban. Available at: https://www.sepa.org.uk/regulations/waste/landfill/biodegradable-municipal-waste-landfill-ban/ (Accessed: 11 March 2025)
SEPA (2024b) The ban on landfilling Biodegradable Municipal Waste (scope and testing guidance). Available at: https://www.sepa.org.uk/media/vknblvy3/bmw-testing-guidance.docx (Accessed 14 March 2025)
SEPA (n.d) The use of gypsum to improve soil conditions. Available at: https://consultation.sepa.org.uk/operations-portfolio/the-use-of-gypsum-to-improve-soil-conditions/supporting_documents/170529%20Waste%20Gypsum%20Guidance.pdf (Accessed: 12 March 2025)
Soil Association (2021) Saving our soils: Healthy soils for our climate, nature and health. Available at: https://www.soilassociation.org/media/24941/saving-our-soils-report-dec21.pdf (Accessed: 12 March 2025)
Szmidt, R.A. and Ferguson, J. (2004) ‘Co-utilization of rock dust, mineral fines and compost’, Active Compost Limited SEPA Scotland, p.P4. https://www.remineralize.org/wp-content/uploads/Co-utilization%20of%20Rockdust,%20Mineral%20Fines%20and%20Compost.pdf (Accessed: 12 March 2025)
Suárez, S., Roca, X. and Gasso, S. (2016) ‘Product-specific life cycle assessment of recycled gypsum as a replacement for natural gypsum in ordinary Portland cement: application to the Spanish context’, Journal of cleaner production, 117, pp.150-159. Available at: https://www.sciencedirect.com/science/article/abs/pii/S0959652616000792 (Accessed: 12 March 2025)
The Royal Society (2020) soil structure and its benefits. Available at: https://royalsociety.org/-/media/policy/projects/soil-structures/soil-structure-evidence-synthesis-report.pdf (Accessed: 12 March 2025)
Thompson, A. (2021). Soils and Stones Report: Sustaining Our Future by Influencing Change in the UK and Beyond. Available at: https://aru.figshare.com/articles/report/Soils_and_Stones_Report_Sustaining_Our_Future_by_Influencing_Change_in_the_UK_and_Beyond/23783742?file=41718066 (Accessed: 21 March 2025)
Transport Scotland, Highways England, Welsh Government, Department for Infrastructure (2020) The use of recycled aggregated in structural concrete. Available at: https://www.standardsforhighways.co.uk/tses/attachments/e0ba4369-b995-4aff-8aa3-f57b69b3928d (Accessed: 12 March 2025)
UK Net Zero Carbon Buildings Standard (n.d.) UK Net Zero Carbon Buildings Standard. Available at: https://www.nzcbuildings.co.uk/home#:~:text=The%20UK%20Net%20Zero%20Carbon%20Buildings%20Standard%20enables%20industry%20to,with%20our%20nation’s%20climate%20targets.&text=The%20UKNZCBS%20aligns%20as%20far,FAQs%20page%20for%20further%20information. (Accessed: 28 March 2025)
Vincent, T. et al (2022) ‘Physical process to sort construction and demolition waste (C&DW) fines components using process water’, Waste Management, 143, pp.125-134. Available at: https://www.sciencedirect.com/science/article/abs/pii/S0956053X22000964 (Accessed: 12 March 2025)
Welsh Government (2024) Landfill Disposals Tax (Tax Rates) (Wales) (Amendment) Regulations 2024: Explanatory Memorandum. Available at: https://senedd.wales/media/laely1yg/sub-ld16992-em-e.pdf (Accessed: 13 May 2025)
WRAP and Environment Agency (2013) Aggregates from inert waste. Available at: https://assets.publishing.service.gov.uk/media/65fd7426f1d3a0001132add0/CD1.Y_Quality_Protocol.__Aggregates_from_inert_waste.__End_of_waste_criteria_for_the_production_of_aggregates_from_inert_waste._WRAP_October_2013..pdf (Accessed: 12 March 2025)
Yadav, R. et al. (2022) ‘Phytoremediation: A wonderful cost-effective tool,’ Cost effective technologies for solid waste and wastewater treatment (pp. 179-208). Available at: https://www.sciencedirect.com/science/article/abs/pii/B9780128229330000085
Zero Waste Scotland (2023) Waste (Scotland) Regulations. Available at: https://www.zerowastescotland.org.uk/resources/waste-scotland-regulations (Accessed: 10 March 2025).
Zero Waste Scotland (2024) Scottish Waste Environmental Footprint Tool (SWEFT). Available at: https://www.zerowastescotland.org.uk/resources/scottish-waste-environmental-footprint-tool-sweft (Accessed: 13 March 2025).
Zhao, Z. et al (2020) ‘Use of recycled concrete aggregates from precast block for the production of new building blocks: An industrial scale study’, Resources, Conservation and Recycling, 157(104786). Available at: https://www.sciencedirect.com/science/article/abs/pii/S0921344920301075 (Accessed: 12 March 2025)
Zhao, X. (2021) ‘Stakeholder-associated factors influencing construction and demolition waste management: A systematic review’, Buildings, 11(4), pp. 1-22. Available at: https://doi.org/10.3390/buildings11040149 (Accessed: 12 March 2025)
Appendices
This appendix provides further context on how the SLfT aligns with key environmental policy frameworks, specifically the Circular Economy (Scotland) Act 2024 and Scotland’s wider decarbonisation strategy. It highlights the role of SLfT in supporting waste hierarchy principles, promoting resource efficiency, and contributing to net-zero targets through practical examples – while also noting current limitations.
Circular Economy (Scotland) Act 2024
Example 1: Waste hierarchy alignment
The Circular Economy (Scotland) Act 2024 places strong emphasis on the waste hierarchy, which prioritises prevention, reuse, recycling, and recovery before landfill. SLfT reinforces this principle by applying a financial disincentive to landfill disposal. The lower rate of SLfT, applied to certain inert materials such as glass, ceramics and soil, encourages their diversion from landfill toward reuse or recycling. This supports the Act’s objectives by reducing dependence on landfill and promoting material circulation within the economy. However, as outlined in Section 3.1 the lower rate appears to be an insufficient incentive to drive significant upstream changes, such as waste prevention or more ambitious reuse practices.
Example 2: Waste prevention and resource efficiency
The Act also aims to improve resource efficiency across sectors. By differentiating tax rates based on environmental impact, SLfT promotes the recovery of materials with low impacts and discourages disposal of more polluting waste. This financial incentive supports businesses in adopting sustainable waste practices. That said, the influence of SLfT on broader resource efficiency is limited, as its primary focus is end-of-pipe disposal rather than incentivising upstream design, reduction, or material substitution choices
Scotland’s decarbonisation strategy
Example 3: Reducing emissions from waste management
Scotland’s decarbonisation strategy includes a target of net-zero emissions by 2045. Landfilled waste—particularly biodegradable materials—generates GHGs such as methane. SLfT supports emissions reduction by applying a higher tax rate to waste streams which emit more GHGs in landfill, encouraging their diversion. The upcoming ban on landfilling biodegradable municipal waste in 2025 builds on this, aligning landfill policy with Scotland’s climate commitments. However, SLfT’s impact remains focused on reducing emissions from landfilled waste, and does not yet provide strong incentives to reduce embodied carbon or promote lower-carbon materials earlier in the lifecycle.
Example 4: Circular economy and carbon footprint reduction
The strategy also promotes circular economy practices as a means of reducing carbon emissions. SLfT complements this by encouraging alternatives to landfill, such as repurposing lower-rate materials like soil and stones for construction. This can reduce the need to extract virgin materials, contributing to lower carbon footprints. Nonetheless, SLfT’s role in driving circular construction practices remains limited, as it does not directly incentivise material reuse, design for deconstruction, or low-carbon construction methods upstream.
Integration of policy goals
Example 5: Aligning SLfT with policy reviews and landfill ban
The Scottish Government has committed to reviewing waste management options by 2027, alongside the upcoming ban on landfilling biodegradable municipal waste. These developments present an opportunity to better integrate SLfT with other fiscal and regulatory tools. While SLfT plays a role in discouraging landfill and supporting environmental objectives, its effectiveness is partly constrained by limited coordination with wider policies on construction, procurement, and materials management. Stronger understanding of policy cross overs could enhance the overall impact of SLfT.
Data requests
Both Revenue Scotland (as regulators of the SLfT) and SEPA (as the national environmental authority) hold and publish statistical data on waste to landfill in Scotland. However, the public-facing outputs are summarised and categorised from more disaggregated data. This is primarily to protect confidentiality within the tax returns (RS) and to make the outputs more accessible to the public (SEPA). As such, we made data requests to both organisations.
RS provided annual financial year (FY) data for five full years against 13 EWC codes / group codes as highlighted in Section 4.1. Multiple codes were grouped together in six of the 13 rows of data where RS needed to aggregate data to protect confidentiality. This is where only one company is responsible for an entire tax return for a single code and could therefore be directly identifiable.
SEPA provided 3 full years of data broken down by quarter, also at EWC code level. This annual data is publicly available but the latest year was released early to us by SEPA for the purposes of this report. The data is fully disaggregated and includes operator name & address, operator description and waste origin. There are 2,514 individual records in the data file.
We also made a request to Zero Waste Scotland for access to their Scottish Waste Environmental Footprint Tool (SWEFT). The tool provides lifecycle-based factors for certain waste categories across different treatment pathways (e.g. landfill, recycling, incineration…) for six different environmental criteria:
- Climate / greenhouse gases, as kg CO2 eq. The contribution of emissions of greenhouse gases to climate change, measured as Global Warming Potential (GWP100)
- Biodiversity, as species loss. An aggregated measure of species at risk, based on the ReCiPe endpoint indicator for Ecosystem quality.
- Air pollution, as kg PM2.5 eq., Air pollution’s damage to human health, measured as the equivalent impact of PM2.5.
- Mineral resource scarcity, as kg Cu eq. Mineral resource scarcity is a measure of the difficulty to mine a resource in the future given expected future production (measured in kg of copper equivalent).
- Water consumption, as m3. Water consumption consists of the volume of water withdrawn and used.
- Land use, as m2 annual crop eq. The species lost due to loss of habitat and soil disturbance, expressed as the equivalent species loss per sqm typical crop production.
Given the timeframe of this project and the desire to consider the role of SLfT against Scotland’s wider environmental objectives – the use of such a tool was considered appropriate to provide quick assessment across a broad coverage of potential environmental impacts.
Data cleansing
We then cleansed the data:
- Annual totals were created in the SEPA data by FY, assuming that a financial year is the sum of Q2, Q3, Q4 and the following Q1.
- SEPA data was filtered to remove any EWC codes that do not appear in the RS data for lower rate materials.
- Tonnages for EWC codes in the SEPA dataset were aggregated where relevant in order to match the EWC code grouping provided by RS.
- A SWEFT category was assigned to each material / material group in the RS/SEPA data. This was based on expert judgement of the project team, with the allocations presented in Table A 1 below. It is noted that SWEFT has to date only been compiled for household waste streams. Therefore, the nature of materials from a commercial / industrial source (more likely to qualify as lower rate materials) may differ in nature from household wastes of a similar material description. Given the timeline of this project and the aim to use SWEFT as an indicator of environmental impacts, this was deemed to be an acceptable weakness in the data review method.
We reviewed landfill tonnage data for potential discrepencies by comparing the national total to landfill (SEPA) which is assumed to represent the sum of both lower- and standard- rate materials against the RS data for the same period. For two of the grouped codes, the RS data for lower rate materials was found to be greater than the total to landfill represented by the SEPA data. In one case, this was resolved through communication with the data providers. For the remaining group, it was stated that “there can be slight differences in counting between the organisations due to water discounts applied, permanent removals, and movement from/to non-disposal areas”. For the most part, this verification exercise found good alignment between the two datasets. This is supported by the finding that the two datasets match in totals for some of the EWC codes that are only landfilled at lower rate. As such, the group with a remaining discrepency was identified to the project steering group for their information, without there being a significant impact on research outcomes.
Data analysis and prioritisation scores
We analysed the data with the view of identifying materials/ material groups to prioritise for further research.
- For each of the 13 material groups in the RS dataset, we calculated the percentage of lower rate material as a portion of the total material landfilled (SEPA totals) for that group. This allowed for the groups with the highest quantities landfilled at lower rate to be identified and prioritised for further research, whilst providing additional context on the relationship between lower and standard rate wastes within the material definitions.
- We reviewed a number of different reference material including the SEPA operator descriptions for each landfill record to give specificity to the materials included under each of the defined material groups. This also enabled us to screen out certain material groups as “niche materials” as described in Section 4.1.
- Environmnetal impacts were estimated for each of the 13 material groups across the six environmental indicators included in SWEFT. This was completed by multiplying the 2023/24 tonnage for each material group with the corresponding SWEFT factor.
- Based on step III, we ranked material groups in terms of their weighted impact against each environmental indicator. The output of this is provided in Table A 1 below.
- An alternative view of the results was defined by calculating the relative impact of each material group across each indicator proportionally from zero to one. This helps to show the significance of impact for each material group which is not automatically understood from the appraoch in step IV. For example, there may be a significant difference in the scale of environmental impact between the first and second ranked material group for a given indicator. The ouput of this analysis is the spider diagram presented in section 4.4.
- We assigned an overall priority score to each of the 13 material groups by considering both the overall tonnage disposed at lower rate; and the indicative environmental impacts. The ouput of this priority scoring is provided in Table A 1 below.
This method for prioritising materials was agreed with the project steering group as a basis for narrowing down the materials / material groups for further research and policy review.
Table A : Descriptor terms, SWEFT category, tonnage and weighted environmental impact rankings (SWEFT output)
|
EWC code/ group of codes |
Descriptor |
SWEFT category |
Tonnage |
GHG |
Biodiversity |
Air pollution |
Mineral resource scarcity |
Waster consumption |
Land use |
Overall priority rank |
|
19 12 12 |
Mechanically-treated fines |
Combustion wastes |
1 |
2 |
NA |
1 |
1 |
1 |
1 |
1 |
|
17 05 04 |
Soil and stones |
Soils |
2 |
4 |
2 |
3 |
3 |
2 |
2 |
2 |
|
19 12 09 |
Mechanical treated-mineral fines |
Mineral waste from construction and demolition |
3 |
3 |
NA |
2 |
2 |
3 |
3 |
2 |
|
19 03 05, 19 05 99, 19 12 05, 19 13 06, 20 01 02, 20 01 99, 20 03 01, 20 03 03, 20 03 99[4] |
Mixed household wastes / Niche materials |
Mineral waste from construction and demolition |
4 |
5 |
NA |
4 |
5 |
5 |
5 |
4 |
|
19 01 12 |
Bottom ash and slag |
Combustion wastes |
5 |
6 |
NA |
5 |
6 |
6 |
6 |
5 |
|
19 01 02, 19 01 11, 19 01 14, 19 01 16, 19 02 09, 19 02 99 |
Niche materials |
Mixed and undifferentiated materials (aggregated) |
6 |
1 |
1 |
6 |
4 |
4 |
4 |
3 |
|
17 01 07 |
Mixed minerals (concrete, bricks, tiles, ceramics) |
Mineral waste from construction and demolition |
7 |
7 |
NA |
7 |
7 |
7 |
7 |
No priority |
|
01 04 08, 01 04 09, 01 04 10, 01 05 07, 02 01 03 |
Niche materials |
Mineral waste from construction and demolition |
8 |
8 |
NA |
8 |
8 |
8 |
8 |
No priority |
|
17 01 02, 17 01 03, 17 02 02, 17 05 06, 17 06 04, 17 09 04 |
Niche materials* |
Mineral waste from construction and demolition |
9 |
9 |
NA |
9 |
9 |
9 |
9 |
No priority |
|
06 01 99, 07 01 12, 07 07 12, 10 01 01, 10 01 17, 10 02 01, 10 03 05, 10 11 03 |
Niche materials* |
Combustion wastes |
10 |
10 |
NA |
10 |
10 |
10 |
10 |
No priority |
|
20 02 02 |
Soil and stones (garden, park, recreation) |
Soils |
11 |
11 |
3 |
11 |
11 |
11 |
11 |
5 |
|
12 01 07, 12 01 17, 15 01 07, 16 01 20, 16 03 04, 16 11 02 |
Niche materials* |
Mineral waste from construction and demolition |
12 |
12 |
NA |
12 |
12 |
12 |
12 |
No priority |
|
17 01 01 |
Concrete |
Mineral waste from construction and demolition |
13 |
13 |
NA |
13 |
13 |
13 |
13 |
No priority |
NA: SWEFT factor = zero for biodiversity loss associated with landfill for those waste categories.
The qualitative research consisted of a literature review and interviews to support an assessment of diversion and policy options.
Desk-based research
The desk-based research was initiated in two stages. The first stage was a preliminary review of diversion options for four top ranking materials, based on the quantitative data collection and analysis of SEPA and RS data (Appendix B). These were: mechanically treated fines, mechanically treated mineral fines, soils and stones, bottom ash, and slags. The second stage was a more detailed review following the quantitative assessment of environmental impacts and a narrowing of focus on three priority materials (Appendix B). After prioritisation was finalised, further research was not conducted for bottom ash and slags.
The priority materials were researched using academic search engines, such as Google Scholar, Scopus and Web of Science. Organisations concerned with inert waste were checked for relevant sources, such as WRAP, Zero Waste Scotland and Green Alliance. Sources were prioritised for review if they were based in Scotland or the UK, summarised a wide range of sources through a literature review, or were indicated to be widely referenced.
Often, sources were not published based on EWC codes. Instead, they refer to common industry names for the materials, for instance, ‘trommel fines’ or ‘mechanical fines’ rather than ‘EWC 19 12 12’. In addition, as research refers to the recycling and recovery of mechanical fines generally, we combined searches on diversion options for mechanically-treated fines and mechanically treated mineral fines.
A combination of search terms were used, including terms related to:
- Research questions, e.g. downstream, upstream, diversion, circular, barriers, enablers, limitations, risk, disposal and landfill.
- Priority materials, e.g. trommel fines, mechanical fines, minerals, bricks, tiles, ceramics, fines, skip fines, soils, stones and gypsum.
- Circularity or waste hierarchy stages, e.g. reuse, recovery, recycling, retrofit and refurbishment.
- Industries, e.g. construction, demolition, quarrying, excavation, engineering and recycling.
- Diversion options, e.g. aggregate, treatment, land, deconstruction, engineering, landscaping and cover materials.
- Geography, e.g. Scotland, UK, Europe and rural.
Stakeholder engagement
Eight one-hour, semi-structured interviews were conducted online and in-person between January and March 2025. In addition, questions were answered via email by some of these stakeholders, and a 3 further stakeholders. The full list can be viewed below in Table A 2 .
Table A 2: Stakeholder engagement list
|
Stakeholder category |
Stakeholder reference |
Form of data collection |
Date of interview |
Position held |
|
Regulator |
Revenue Scotland-A |
Interview |
21 Jan 2025 |
SEPA Specialist |
|
SEPA |
Interview |
21 Jan 2025 |
Waste Policy Lead | |
|
Revenue Scotland-B |
|
N/A |
Head of Scottish Landfill Tax | |
|
Waste management, including industry associations |
Commercial landfill operator |
Interview and email |
10 Feb 2025 |
Regional Operations Manager |
|
C&D waste management processor |
Interview and email |
17 Jan 2025 |
Managing Director | |
|
Chair | ||||
|
Waste industry association |
Interview |
22 Jan 2025 |
Policy Advisor | |
|
Large public body |
|
N/A |
National Sustainability Manager | |
|
Upstream sources |
Commercial remediation company |
Interview |
03 Feb 2025 |
Regional Remediation Manager, Scotland |
|
Engineering consultancy |
Interview |
21 Feb 2025 |
Technical Director | |
|
C&D skip operator |
Interview |
06 Feb 2025 |
Operations Director | |
|
Construction company |
Interview |
25 March 2025 |
Head of Supply Chain Development |
A set of standard interview/email questions were developed based on the overarching research questions asked in the project. Before each contact with a stakeholder, these standard questions were tailored to the stakeholder’s knowledge and background and developed into an interview proforma. The standard questions investigated the following key points:
- verifying quantitative findings on priority materials and sources of lower-rate materials;
- identifying existing or future end-of-pipe diversion options for each priority material;
- identifying existing or future upstream diversion options for each priority material;
- understanding the barriers hindering the advancement of each diversion option, including technical, operational, policy, financial or wider barriers;
- understanding potential policy options to address barriers associated with accelerating the diversion options; and
- understanding the unintended consequences of any policy options.
All meeting invites were issued by the Scottish Government via email and were accompanied by a participant information and consent form for interviewees to review and sign. This included full details of data use and protection, in line with UK Government guidance.[5]
Interview requests were sent out in two stages to support research aims. The first stage targeted regulators, waste management organisations, local governments and tax-implementing organisations. They were selected to provide insights on data availability and granularity, triangulate/verify the assessment prioritising certain materials, and identify further stakeholders to contact. The second stage targeted ‘the source’ of lower-rate materials sent to landfill. Namely, stakeholders from sectors using large amounts of priority materials. Their insights were used to understand the on-the-ground situation, and triangulate quantitative findings on priority materials and desk-based findings on diversion options.
Qualitative analysis
Findings from desk-based research and stakeholder engagement were added to a spreadsheet, using the template shown below in Table 6. This spreadsheet enabled assessment of the diversion options, barriers and enablers. In addition, it informed the analysis of policy options and unintended consequences of these options, and was used to conduct the feasibility assessment described below in Appendix D.
Table : Template of structural headings used to analyse qualitative data
|
Priority material |
Description of diversion option |
Limitations |
Upstream or downstream |
Current barriers |
Potential enablers |
Risks |
This initial feasibility assessment evaluates the viability of different waste diversion options for mechanically-treated fines (19 12 12), mechanically-treated mineral fines (19 12 09), and soils and stones (17 05 04) by considering their existing use in Scotland, research and development efforts, and regulatory and financial barriers. The Table A 2 below details the logic behind our assessment given in Section 6.5.
Note that this assessment serves more as a summary of Section 6 and a high-level guide for policy-makers, than an in-depth feasibility assessment.
Table A : Feasibility assessment methodology
|
Diversion option |
Lifecycle stage of diversion |
Key barriers |
Feasibility score (3 max) |
Feasibility score justification | |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|
Mechanically-treated fines (19 12 12) | |||||
|
Landfill cover/quarry cover, engineering and restoration |
End-of-pipe |
Demand exists, minimal barriers |
3 |
Common practice in Scotland, demand for landfill cover | |
|
Recycled aggregates |
End-of-pipe |
Low substitution rate, contamination risks, infrastructure investment lacking |
1 |
Variability of fines makes reuse challenging and current incentives make virgin aggregate use easier. | |
|
Land treatment and agricultural soil improvement |
End-of-pipe |
Contamination concerns, nutrient content inconsistency |
1 |
Regulatory restrictions in the UK – more limited land where mechanically-treated fines can be used | |
|
Gypsum fines recycling |
End-of-pipe |
Contamination risks, landfill tax incentives encourage disposal |
2 |
Existing recovery infrastructure, but purity issues and low cost to landfill remain | |
|
Remediation |
Upstream |
Need bespoke technologies, barriers to investment in infrastructure |
1 |
Some promising research, but not scaled commercially | |
|
Mechanically-treated mineral fines (19 12 09) | |||||
|
Landfill cover/quarry cover, engineering and restoration |
End-of-pipe |
Demand exists, minimal barriers |
3 |
Common practice in Scotland, but might waste nutrient rich fines that could be used in agriculture, providing a higher value | |
|
Recycled aggregates |
End-of-pipe |
Lack of steady supply, market uptake issues |
2 |
Exemptions exist, and some use is ongoing but low demand. | |
|
Land treatment and agricultural soil improvement |
End-of-pipe |
Requires permits, some contamination concerns |
3 |
Permitted in agriculture with waste management licensing exemptions | |
|
Remediation |
Upstream |
Need bespoke technologies, barriers to investment in infrastructure |
1 |
Some promising research, but not scaled commercially | |
|
Soils and stones (17 05 04) | |||||
|
Landfill cover/quarry cover, engineering and restoration |
End-of-pipe |
Long-term decline in landfill sites |
3 |
Common practice in Scotland | |
|
Recycled aggregates |
End-of-pipe |
Cost competitiveness with virgin aggregates |
3 |
Commercially used, but virgin materials remain cheaper | |
|
Remediation (e.g., soil washing) |
Upstream |
Limited adoption, investment barriers and high processing costs |
2 |
Underutilised in Scotland as it is costly but growing | |
|
Landscaping and construction |
Upstream |
Coordination challenges between projects |
2 |
Varies across projects | |
|
Fines upstream diversion (19 12 09 and 19 12 12) | |||||
|
Modular construction and material reuse |
Upstream |
Expensive upfront investment, scalability challenges |
1 |
Expanding in modern construction but cost barriers remain Future advances in AI will help | |
|
Deconstruction and material sorting (including sorting plasterboard) |
Upstream |
Lack of incentives, infrastructure and industry skill/common practice limitations |
1 |
Circular economy support exists, but still underdeveloped | |
|
Retrofit before demolition |
Upstream |
Predominantly policy/fiscal barriers |
1 |
Wide understanding that retrofit often has a better carbon impact, but fiscal policy and cost are a barrier | |
How to cite this publication:
Ross, V., Owens, H., Evans, S., Claxton, R., Kaczmarski, J., Chalmers-Arnold, I. (2025) ‘Scottish Landfill Tax: lower rate review‘, ClimateXChange.
DOI: http://dx.doi.org/10.7488/era/6063
© The University of Edinburgh, 2025 (publication year)
Prepared by Resource Futures on behalf of ClimateXChange, The University of Edinburgh. All rights reserved.
While every effort is made to ensure the information in this report is accurate as at the date of the report, no legal responsibility is accepted for any errors, omissions or misleading statements. The views expressed represent those of the author(s), and do not necessarily represent those of the host institutions or funders.
This work was supported by the Rural and Environment Science and Analytical Services Division of the Scottish Government (CoE – CXC).
ClimateXChange
Edinburgh Climate Change Institute
High School Yards
Edinburgh EH1 1LZ
+44 (0) 131 651 4783
If you require the report in an alternative format such as a Word document, please contact info@climatexchange.org.uk or 0131 651 4783.
Some of the data provided by Revenue Scotland was grouped to ensure confidentiality is retained, for example where there is only one operator responsible for a specific code. These grouped codes have been verified by the project team as containing mostly niche materials, and therefore excluded from the shortlist. ↑
This group contains a code for mixed household wastes (20 03 01). An insignificant portion of this code is expected to be landfilled at lower rate. As such, it was assessed separately from the niche materials that make up the remainder of this group (which are more likely to be landfilled under the lower rate). ↑
Diversion options for gypsum have been reviewed, as the upcoming ban on landfilling biodegradable waste may unintentionally make it easier to landfill gypsum. Currently restricted from co-disposal with biowaste, gypsum may no longer face this barrier once all landfills exclude biodegradable waste. ↑
This group contains a code for mixed household wastes (20 03 01). An insignificant portion of this code is expected to be landfilled at lower rate. As such, it was assessed separately from the niche materials that make up the remainder of this group (which are more likely to be landfilled under the lower rate). ↑
UK Government: Getting informed consent for user research ↑
Why it is important
A just transition to a net zero, climate resilient economy presents opportunities for businesses to develop in new areas.
To understand what those areas are, the Scottish Government asked ClimateXChange to commission an analysis of the strengths, weaknesses, opportunities and threats (SWOT) of Scotland’s existing and emerging net zero and adaptation economy.
The study developed a framework for assessing different sectors. It then identified 12 priority sectors where Scotland might have a competitive advantage in producing goods and services that would grow the nation’s net zero economy.
While the study was underway, the Scottish Government started work on a green industrial strategy. Evidence on priority sectors would also be relevant for these new areas of work.
How ClimateXChange supported policymakers
Researchers reviewed over 60 sectors and sub-sectors. From those, they identified 12 offering the greatest potential to deliver economic benefits and conducted a comprehensive SWOT analysis for each.
The work provided a range of metrics and insights. This enabled policymakers to make informed and strategic decisions on where the Scottish Government might focus in its Green Industrial Strategy.
Furthermore, the report included visuals that ensured findings were easy to interpret.
Impact
Green industrial strategy
The report has strengthened the evidence underpinning the Green Industrial Strategy’s focus on specific opportunity areas. It supports Ministers’ overarching aim of helping Scotland realise the full benefits arising from the global transition to net zero. Outputs from the study were the basis of strategic discussions on prioritisation in different sectors.
Action across sectors: just transition plans and the Climate Change Plan
The Scottish Government also used the report in other related work. For example, the section on heavy duty vehicles informed the development of the draft Just Transition Plan for transport.
The report will continue to be useful as government develops further Just Transition Plans and continues to consider the economic impacts and implications of work on the Climate Change Plan.
Furthermore, the lead policy team for the report found this work to be a useful basis for conversations with a diverse range of sector teams across government. Cross-government connections were vital to assess the validity of data being produced, such as on workforce and economic impact.
Enhanced evidence and collaboration
The report also prompted collaboration between the Scottish Government and Scottish Enterprise, an agency that supports business development and growth. The work provided a useful foundation for policy teams to engage more closely with Scottish Enterprise’s projects developing scenario-based projections of jobs and economic impact.
Further afield, the National Economic and Social Council of Ireland recognised the work as a very useful template for data gathering.
“The report has significantly improved the quality of our evidence base, helping us make informed choices on a range of projects such as the Green Industrial Strategy and just transition plans across sectors. It also fostered a collaborative effort with Scottish Enterprise by drawing on and shaping their work and approaches.”
– Jayne Winter, Net Zero Economy Team Lead
Scottish Government
Overall, the study provided a consistent framework for appraising different sectors, even where it is difficult to obtain comparable data. It had an impact in Scotland and provides an effective analytical template that could be applied elsewhere in the UK or in other countries.
Related reports
Economic opportunities in Scotland’s net zero and climate adaptation economy
Image credit: Julia Schwab from Pixabay
Over 72% of buildings in Scotland still rely on mains gas as their primary heat source. Scotland must further decarbonise heating in homes and buildings to achieve its climate change targets.
The Scottish Government’s 2021 Heat in Buildings Strategy identified clean heat networks as a strategic decarbonisation technology. However, given the high cost of transforming Scotland’s buildings and limited public sector budgets, additional investment is needed from the private sector.
This study examines existing and potential future financing models for Scotland’s heat network sector and identifies suitable levers and actions to incentivise private finance. Findings are based on a series of interviews with stakeholders, including operators, funders, advisors and public sector representatives, as well as desk-based research. The report draws comparisons and insights from other relevant utility sectors and from other countries (the Netherlands, Germany, Finland, Sweden and Estonia) as well as England and Wales.
Summary of findings
Challenges facing the sector
- The most impactful barriers in the sector are demand uncertainty, revenue instability and the evolving regulatory environment.
International comparisons
- Scotland, the rest of the UK and the Netherlands have a developing heat network sector. Germany is expanding its market. Sweden, Finland and Estonia have mature markets where the sector is tried, tested and trusted.
- Many of the developed and mature markets are unregulated: they use self-governing frameworks and technical codes. This is coupled with high levels of local governance, greater pricing transparency and consistent contractual delivery and routes.
- The more developed markets (including Sweden, Finland and Estonia) have a mixed degree of public ownership. More mature markets are likely to have a higher level of private finance penetration.
- Most of the studied countries have adopted a range of financial levers. Many have applied a similar approach to Scotland, including the continued use of capital grant funding, project development funding or individual grants for expanding and upgrading heat networks.
Utility sectors
Examples of regulatory regimes and financial support mechanisms used successfully in the UK utility sectors to stimulate private sector investment in new infrastructure:
- Contracts for Difference could support heat networks that use decarbonised heat sources (e.g. heat pumps), which are likely to have a higher cost than conventional gas boilers or heat networks using waste heat.
- A Regulated Asset Base model can protect consumer prices whilst also encouraging ongoing capital investment, supporting asset maintenance and providing predictable revenue streams. It would involve significant administrative and resource cost.
- The Renewable Heat Incentive is a well understood revenue support mechanism used in the energy sector. This model would subsidise the cost of heat for consumers if it was based on the amount of heat generated, as opposed to consumption of heat.
Market feedback
To facilitate private investment, stakeholders highlighted the need for:
- Continued grant funding support to de-risk project cashflows
- Clear regulation on key topics such as heat zoning, mandatory connection policies, planning and building regulations and phasing out gas boilers
- Greater clarity on the development of future regulation
If you require the report in an alternative format, such as a Word document, please contact info@climatexchange.org.uk or 0131 651 4783.
Research completed March 2025
DOI: http://dx.doi.org/10.7488/era/5740
Executive summary
Background
Over 72% of buildings in Scotland still rely on mains gas as their primary heat source. Scotland must further decarbonise heating in homes and buildings to achieve its climate change targets. The Scottish Government’s 2021 Heat in Buildings Strategy identified clean heat networks as a strategic decarbonisation technology. However, given the significant levels of capital investment required to transform Scotland’s buildings and limited public sector budgets, additional investment will be needed from the private sector.
Aims
This study examines present and potential future financing models in the heat network sector (“the sector”) and identifies suitable levers and actions for incentivising private finance. Findings are based on a series of interviews with stakeholders, including operators, funders, advisors and public sector representatives, as well as desk-based research. We draw comparisons and insights from other relevant utility sectors and from other countries (the Netherlands, Germany, Finland, Sweden and Estonia) as well as England and Wales.
Findings
Challenges facing the sector
In Scotland and across the UK, the heat network sector has typically been funded by early-stage financing from developers and significant levels of subsidy from the public sector. These public subsidies have encouraged private investment in the sector and supported the roll out of heat networks across Scotland.
The most impactful barriers in the sector are demand uncertainty, revenue instability and the evolving regulatory environment. This limits investment appetite, restricting the roll out of heat networks at scale in Scotland. The barriers are illustrated in Figure 1.

International comparisons
- Maturity – Scotland, the rest of the UK and the Netherlands have a developing heat network sector. Germany is expanding its market. Sweden, Finland and Estonia have mature markets where the sector is tried, tested and trusted.
- Regulation – Many of the developed and mature markets are unregulated: they use self-governing frameworks and technical codes. This is coupled with high levels of local governance, greater pricing transparency and consistent contractual delivery and routes. These markets can focus on consumer pricing that supports investment and stimulates the sector’s development. Additionally, mandatory connections are being used in some circumstances in other countries, to make projects more investible and create demand assurance, which encourages private investment.
- Ownership profiles and private finance – The more developed markets (including Sweden, Finland and Estonia) have a mixed degree of public ownership. More mature markets are likely to have a higher level of private finance penetration. In Finland, public sector ownership remains at a high level, whilst still seeking investment from the private sector. In Germany there’s a growing commitment to re-municipalise infrastructure and reverse privatisations. In the Netherlands, where over 90% of sector finance is private, the government proposed legislation to part-nationalise the sector in 2022 to mitigate concerns around the affordability and reliability of the sector.
The developed markets are mainly regulated by standard frameworks. These markets can access private finance due to the established nature of the sector. However, the technology has been embedded in the culture of these countries for much longer and so regulators can focus on price transparency and fairness for the end user rather than a framework for developing the market.
- Financial levers – Most of the comparator countries have adopted a range of financial levers. Many have applied a similar approach to Scotland, including the continued use of capital grant funding, project development funding or individual grants for expanding and upgrading heat networks. Grant funding is still widely used in the less mature sectors. As the sector matures, intervention rates reduce or there is greater requirement for a higher degree of renewable heat sources to be used. Additionally, state-owned infrastructure banks have been investing in the sector to help refurbishments or provide debt financing for expansion.
Utility sectors
Various regulatory regimes and financial support mechanisms have been used in other sectors to stimulate private sector investment in the development of new infrastructure. The Scottish Government must consider the costs and practical challenges of pursuing financial support mechanism models that are not being adopted in England and Wales:
- Contracts for Difference (CfDs) have proved very successful in securing the necessary investment in a wide range of renewable energy technologies. This approach could provide revenue support to heat networks to incentivise the transition to more sustainable forms of heat generation. In particular, CfDs could support heat networks that use decarbonised heat sources (e.g. heat pumps), which are likely to have a higher cost than conventional gas boilers or heat networks using waste heat. Therefore, as well as providing revenue certainty, a CfD has the potential to subsidise the increased cost of decarbonised heat for end users.
- A Regulated Asset Base (RAB) model, alongside periodic price reviews, can protect consumer prices whilst also encouraging ongoing capital investment, supporting asset maintenance and providing predictable revenue streams. The model would, however, involve significant administrative and resource cost. Prior to the sector maturing, a RAB model might not result in financially viable heat networks without additional capital or revenue support.
- The Renewable Heat Incentive (RHI) model is a well understood revenue support mechanism previously used in the energy sector. Similar to CfDs, an RHI model would subsidise the cost of heat for consumers if it was based on the amount of heat generated (as opposed to consumption of heat). It would therefore contribute to the cost of deployment, helping to address the increased cost of installing this technology and at the same time, mitigating demand risk. A cap on payments could also be introduced to avoid over-incentivisation. However, the value for money of previous schemes has been questioned.
Market feedback
The private sector views heat networks as an attractive investment opportunity but there are areas of uncertainty that must be resolved, including the need for greater clarity on the development of future regulation. To facilitate private investment, stakeholders highlighted the need for continued grant funding support to de-risk project cashflows. They also emphasised the importance of clear regulation on key topics, including heat zoning, mandatory connection policies, planning and building regulations, as well as a definitive policy direction on phasing out gas boilers.
Recommendations
We recommend that the Scottish Government:
1. Maintains capital funding support for the sector, either via existing programmes, or new bespoke capital schemes. Explore opportunities for extending the timescales for drawing down grant funding.
2. De-risking future revenues is key to unlocking heat network development – private capital is available for projects, but they need to be financeable. More detailed analysis of a revenue support model, such as CfD or a RHI equivalent, is merited. However, the Scottish Government must address the challenges of establishing such schemes, including the significant administrative and resource implications of previous schemes.
3. Explores the benefits of implementing a RAB model, following further regulatory developments and the creation of an established asset base (over 10-15 years). However, consider the complexity and feasibility of this model.
4. Continues to work closely with the Scottish National Investment Bank (SNIB) and the UK National Wealth Fund to explore investment opportunities, create a shared understanding of each party’s objectives and ultimately unlock the capital that has been made available to invest. Both organisations are committed to investing into the sector.
5. Maintains and increases support for pre-construction projects, via the Heat Network Support Unit (HNSU) and specific development funding programmes.
6. Monitors the implementation of the UK Government’s zoning approach and, where appropriate, leverage best practice from the Department for Energy Security and Net Zero (DESNZ). This should be used to complement Scotland’s existing zoning approach.
7. Reviews its approach to regulation to help reduce regulatory uncertainty. Where appropriate, this should include leveraging best practice from England and Wales.
8. Continues to work with the UK Government on rebalancing electricity and gas prices. However, this will not eliminate the price difference between electricity and gas.
9. Develops a national Heat Network Strategy setting out a clear long-term vision for heat networks in Scotland.
Glossary / Abbreviations table
|
£/€ bn |
Billions of £/€ |
LCCC |
Low Carbon Contracts Company |
|
£/€ m |
Millions of £/€ |
LCITP |
Low Carbon Infrastructure Transition Programme |
|
ACM |
The Netherlands’ Authority for Consumers and Markets |
LHEES |
Local Heat and Energy Efficiency Strategies |
|
AMP |
Asset Management Plans |
MWh |
Megawatt hour |
|
ASHP |
Air source heat pumps |
NFFO |
Non-Fossil Fuel Obligation |
|
CAA |
Civil Aviation Authority |
NIB |
Nordic Investment Bank |
|
CAP |
Competitively Appointed Provider |
NWF |
National Wealth Fund |
|
CCC |
Climate Change Committee |
ODI |
Outcome delivery incentive |
|
CCUS |
Carbon Capture, Utilisation and Storage |
OFTO |
Offshore Transmission Owners |
|
CfD |
Contract for difference |
ORR |
Office of Rail and Road |
|
CXC |
ClimateXChange |
RAB |
Regulated asset base |
|
DBFO |
Design, Build, Finance and Operate |
RAV |
Regulated Asset Value |
|
DESNZ |
Department for Energy Security and Net Zero |
REMA |
Review of Electricity market arrangements |
|
DHLF |
District Heating Loan Fund |
RESCo |
Regional Energy Services Company |
|
DHN |
District heat network |
RHI |
Renewable Heat Incentive |
|
DPC |
Direct Procurement for Customers programme |
RIIO |
Revenue = Incentives + Innovation + Outputs |
|
EfW |
Energy from Waste |
ROC |
Renewable Obligation Certificates |
|
EY |
Ernst and Young LLP |
rUK |
Rest of the UK |
|
FOAK |
First of a Kind |
SFT |
Scottish Futures Trust |
|
GHNF |
Green Heat Network Fund |
SHNF |
Scotland’s Heat Network Fund |
|
HN |
Heat network |
SNIB |
Scottish National Investment Bank |
|
HNDM |
Heat networks delivery models |
SPV |
Special Purpose Vehicle |
|
HNES |
Heat Network Efficiency Scheme |
SRO |
Scottish Renewables Obligation |
|
HNIP |
Heat Networks Investment Project |
T&SCo |
Transport and storage infrastructure |
|
HNSA |
Heat Networks (Scotland) Act 2021 |
TWh |
Terawatt hours |
|
HNSU |
Heat Network Support Unit |
UK |
United Kingdom |
|
KfW |
Germany’s infrastructure bank |
WCW |
Dutch Collective Heat Supply Act |
|
KPI |
Key Performance Indicators |
WPG |
Germany’s Local Heat Planning Act |
Introduction
Research aims
This report examines the heat network sector (also referred to as “the sector”) and will contribute to the Scottish Government’s ambition to accelerate the pace and scale of heat network rollout in Scotland. The report:
- Summarises current financing models, structures, and barriers in the sector and establishes a baseline for the Scottish heat network landscape
- Draws comparisons and insights from relevant utility sectors
- Draws comparisons with international heat networks and their financing models
- Provides insight into how heat networks are currently viewed by the private and public sector
- Recommends suitable financial levers, models and policies for the sector
“Heat Network” definition
The definition of a “heat network” in the Heat Networks (Scotland) Act 2021 (HNSA) covers both district heat networks and communal heat networks. A district heat network distributes heat from one or more sources to more than one building. In a communal heating system heat is supplied to one building comprised of more than one building unit (for example, a block of flats).[1]
The majority of the findings in this report refer to district heat networks, but we have included both communal heating and district heating in our definition of a heat network.
Heat networks can be powered by a range of different technologies. Historically, heat networks have often utilised fossil fuels, including gas boilers. As a result, many legacy networks still rely on fossil fuel-based technology. Our analysis considers these legacy networks; however, we recognise that the Scottish Government is committed to supporting the roll out of clean heat networks and supporting the reduction in emissions from the sector. This is important context for the conclusions in this report.
Methodology
Our findings are based on extensive desk-based research conducted by sector specialists. The analysis also draws on insights from a series of interviews with sector stakeholders, including operators, funders, advisors and public sector representatives. This information has been used, together with our own sector experience and evidence from existing literature, to set out the existing baseline position in Scotland (and the rest of the UK) and to develop our recommendations for suitable financial levers, models and structures for the heat network sector in Scotland. Finally, the stakeholder feedback also informed our approach for drawing comparisons with other utility sectors and international comparators.
Our stakeholder engagement methodology and questions were agreed with CXC and the Scottish Government Steering Group. The engagement exercise consisted of 20 meetings and Microsoft Teams calls. In advance of the sessions, participants were issued with the questions and given the opportunity to share feedback either in writing or verbally.
Policy Context
Scotland’s ambitious climate change targets are to achieve net zero greenhouse gas emissions by 2045. To deliver this, Scotland must instigate a step change in decarbonising the heating of its homes and buildings. Domestic buildings account for 15% of Scotland’s total greenhouse gas emissions and around 27% of its total energy consumption[2]. The scale of this decarbonisation challenge is significant – Figure 2 shows that in 2022, over 72% of Scotland’s homes relied on mains gas as their primary heating fuel[3].
Figure 2: Breakdown of primary heating fuel vs number of homes
The Scottish Government’s 2021 Heat in Building Strategy identified clean heat networks as a key strategic technology which is tried and tested and can be scaled up.
The Heat Networks (Scotland) Act 2021 established statutory targets for heat supplied by heat networks, requiring that they supply 2.6 Terawatt hours (TWh) of output by 2027, 6 TWh by 2030 and 7 TWh by 2035. In 2022, the Scottish Government estimated that heat networks supplied 1.35TWh of output[4]. To meet Scotland’s ambitious statutory targets, a significant acceleration in deployment is necessary.
Source: Scottish House Condition Survey 2022
The public sector plays an active role in the sector’s development, both at the national and local level. Local Heat and Energy Efficiency Strategies (LHEES) are local authority-led plans to decarbonise heat and improve energy efficiency, including rolling out heat networks in suitable locations. Momentum is building, with Scottish local authorities publishing their LHEES strategies, which include establishing the role of heat networks as a key decarbonisation measure.
The capital investment required to transform Scotland’s buildings (between now and 2045) is expected to be in the region of £33bn[5]. Given the size of this investment and the limited nature of public sector budgets, significant levels of finance will need to come from the private sector.
Current financing structures and models in Scotland’s heat networks
Scotland’s heat network sector
Heat networks distribute heat from a central source, avoiding the need for individual heating systems (such as gas boilers). There are over 1,090 known heat networks (the majority being communal heat networks) supplying heating and cooling to domestic and non-domestic properties[6]; however, most of the larger networks with significant heat loads are in Scotland’s larger towns and cities. Although recent projects have introduced clean heat sources, the sector still relies on mains gas as its primary heat source[7].
Figure 3: Heat networks in Scotland

The number of heat networks, both district and communal, is increasing across Scotland. Figure 3 illustrates the distribution of heat networks in Scotland, but the sector is still immature, especially compared to counterparts in Europe, where heat networks have played a central role in heat infrastructure since the 1940s.
Sector growth has been slow, and in recent years, the focus has been on a series of “demonstrator” projects, across a range of sizes and driven by early adopters in both the private and public sectors.
Source: Map – Heat Network Support Unit
Scottish and UK regulatory landscape
There is an emerging focus on the regulation of heat networks within Scotland and the rest of the UK. For the first time in the UK the sector is set to become regulated, like many other utility sectors. Given the decarbonisation requirement and recognising the growing importance and potential of heat networks, the Heat Networks (Scotland) Act 2021 (HNSA) created a regulatory framework for the sector in Scotland.
The regulation of consumer protection (including for heat networks) is reserved to the UK Government. In 2024, the UK Government and Ofgem jointly consulted on regulations to establish an authorisation system to protect heat network consumers under the Energy Act 2023. Ofgem will be the future regulator of that consumer protection regime across England, Scotland and Wales. Ofgem’s will also be responsible for heat network licences and authorisations in Scotland, as set out in the HNSA.
The HNSA includes a series of measures to support the sector and promote growth. These are summarised in table 1 below, alongside the relevant UK position. The UK Government has proposed a regulatory regime but has yet to introduce secondary legislation. For those measures not in force in Scotland, these will also be introduced by the secondary legislation.
Table 1: Scottish and UK regulatory landscape
|
Scottish landscape[8] |
England & Wales landscape |
|---|---|
Zoning, permitting and licensing
| Zoning, permitting and licensing |
Consumer protection | |
Technical standards | |
The HNSA and the new UK Energy Act both aim to introduce legislation that has the potential to align the regulatory landscape across the UK. However, our stakeholder engagement process found that significant regulatory uncertainty currently exists, including the diverging timetable for introducing legislation and the lack of clarity regarding the differences in proposals between Scotland, England and Wales. Without further developments on specific regulatory areas, such as permitting/zoning, this uncertainty will remain. We also acknowledge that there is a complex regulatory landscape, with input required from both the Scottish and UK Governments to clarify the balance between devolved and reserved powers. These observations are further developed in section 4.4.
The HNSA has created an opportunity for Scotland to benefit from a robust regulatory framework that builds trust for consumers and creates certainty for operators. In order to stimulate sector growth, the market requires further clarity on the ongoing process to regulate the sector and more detailed information regarding the introduction of secondary legislation. This should provide clarity regarding investment opportunities, reduce the complexity of the dual regulatory frameworks and make Scotland a more attractive investment proposition.
The sector is also impacted by other Scottish regulation, including the New Build Heat Standard, which requires new homes and buildings to install clean heating systems, rather than relying on mains gas. Additionally, the National Planning Framework 4 includes policies which states that development proposals (within or adjacent to a heat network zone) will only be supported if they connect to an existing heat network.
Existing financing models in the sector
In Scotland and across the UK, the sector has typically been funded by early-stage financing from developers and significant levels of subsidy from the public sector. The Scottish Government has supported clean heat networks through:
- Grant support (also in the form of repayable assistance), including:
- Scotland’s Heat Network Fund (SHNF) – The SHNF offers capital grant funding to support the roll out of new clean heat networks and communal heating systems, as well as the expansion and decarbonisation of existing heat networks across Scotland.
- Low Carbon Infrastructure Transition Programme (LCITP) – From 2015 until it was replaced by the SHNF in 2022, LCITP provided grant funding support to several heat networks, including Queens Quay and Torry heat network.
- Both programmes also provided project development and commercialisation support.
- Loans via the District Heating Loan Fund (DHLF) – Managed by the Energy Savings Trust, the fund provided capital loan funding to support low emission small scale district heating in Scotland until it closed in April 2024.
- Non-domestic rates reliefs – since April 2024 heat networks (where 80% of the thermal energy in any given year is generated from renewable sources) have been eligible for a 90% rates relief.[9] There is also a 50% rates relief if a premises is wholly or mainly being used for a district heating network.[10]
- Many demonstrator projects also benefitted from historical UK Government revenue support through the Renewable Heat Incentive (RHI), now closed to new applicants.
These public subsidies have encouraged private investment in the sector and supported the roll out of clean heat networks across Scotland. Many clean heat demonstrator projects have been self-funded by operators (or funded through bespoke delivery vehicles). However, grant funding is required to bridge funding gaps and enable projects to achieve the internal rate of return – often referred to as a hurdle rate – required by operators. This is more important for clean heat networks than for fossil fuel-based systems, where the requirement for public subsidy is less pressing given the lower capital costs.
The hurdle rate is different for each operator and project. It is impacted by an operator’s cost of capital and project specific risks, but our analysis indicates that, at the time of this report, it tends to range between 8% and 12% (although this range will be impacted by several external factors and will vary on a project-by-project basis). This is explored further in section 0.
Grant support is among several financial mechanisms (or “financial levers”) which the Scottish Government has historically used. Such support could continue to de-risk heat network projects and help incentivise private sector investment. Figure 4 highlights some of the key mechanisms used to date and others which are considered further in this report. A summary of each mechanism can be found in Appendix B.
Figure 4: Funding levers the Scottish Government could deploy to attract private investment

In order to understand how a step change in private investment might be instigated, it is important to highlight the key factors which drive investor confidence, namely:
- Certainty of demand
- Revenue stability
- A stable regulatory environment
- A clear understanding of project risks with shared ownership and mitigation strategies
These factors and wider deployment barriers are explored in the following section.
Heat network deployment barriers
Overview
The analysis contained in this section includes feedback from our stakeholder interview exercise, as well as our own professional observations. While many of these barriers are well understood in the market, key stakeholders confirmed that they continue to present significant live obstacles for private sector operators and investors, limiting their investment appetite and restricting the roll out of heat networks at scale in Scotland. Following stakeholder feedback, we have grouped these barriers (shown in figure 5) into four categories:
- Financial
- Regulatory and policy
- Technical
- Social and market barriers
Figure 5: Heat network deployment barriers

Within these categories, we present the barriers in order of importance (based on the strength of stakeholder feedback). It is important to note that whilst our report is primarily focussed on financial barriers and the private sector, many of these non-financial barriers add further uncertainty and therefore need to be taken into consideration. All these barriers – financial and non-financial – must be addressed in order to instigate a step change in private investment.
Financial barriers
Heat networks involve significant levels of financial risk and uncertainty, making it extremely challenging to forecast a project’s cashflows, thereby deterring private investment. These financial risks are highlighted below:
Demand uncertainty
Demand uncertainty is the biggest factor inhibiting private sector investment. For a heat network to be financially and commercially viable, it should generate a minimum level of committed revenue in order to meet the operating costs of the network and contribute to the repayment of the initial capital investment. This can be challenging if it is unclear when and how many buildings will connect to the network, their heat offtake requirements and the resulting revenue that will be generated.
For many Scottish “demonstrator” projects, demand and revenue risk have been reduced by securing anchor loads via public sector buildings, which require large heat offtake requirements and therefore to provide some revenue certainty. Developers and investors prioritise the de-risking of revenue flows as it provides greater certainty in a project’s ability to service the repayment of any debt or shareholder loans and/or equity return. As a result, securing longer term supply agreements with customers is a critical step in securing additional investment.
Operators stated that investment decisions are not speculative – the extent of committed revenue and certainty of connections are critical considerations to a potential developer and/or investor. To date, projects have typically been funded using balance sheet finance of the project sponsors (corporate finance) in the form of shareholder loans and equity, rather than more conventional third-party debt finance in the form of limited or non-recourse debt finance. When a heat network project reaches critical mass with mature connections and revenues, this provides an opportunity to refinance and secure more competitive finance terms due to reduced lending risk.
Long development and construction times
Many heat network projects have significant development and construction timescales, which present barriers to funders. In some cases, projects can take two or more years to develop and several more years to construct. This results in significant development and commercialisation costs, requiring high levels of upfront finance.
Historically, as a means of mitigating these development costs, the public sector offered support through the Heat Network Support Unit (HNSU) and specific grant funding programmes. However, stakeholders identified a misalignment between the grant funding drawdown profile (the existing grant funding programmes have shorter funding windows, typically four years) and the long construction cost profile (upwards of 5-7 years). This means that operators have had to condense the delivery programmes to meet the grant drawdown deadline or seek additional sources of financing.
High capital costs
Heat networks require significant levels of capital investment. Several recent Scottish heat network projects have had capital cost estimates of between £10m and £50m[11]. This barrier is exacerbated in times of high inflation and cost uncertainty. The high levels of capital investment are commensurate with other utilities such as water, gas and electricity. All require significant investment in underlying infrastructure prior to connection with residential, commercial and public sector buildings.
Large capital projects are often regarded as higher risk and therefore more challenging to finance. Due to cash flow uncertainties, this sector has historically relied on significant levels of grant funding. Public support (including Scottish Government programmes such as LCITP and SHNF) has been essential for improving private sector returns and sharing the risk of the high capital costs. When this support is unavailable, operators mitigate this risk in other ways, for example, by seeking increased connection fees for end users.
Diverse delivery models and procurement approaches
The lack of standardisation in procurement approaches and delivery models adds complexity, time and cost to a project’s development timeline. Projects develop bespoke approaches that are not necessarily repeatable for new projects. This inhibits the market’s ability to understand the investment landscape and reduces confidence. Investors are far more likely to pursue projects where there are standard procurement approaches and tried and tested delivery models, where the risks are understood.
The availability and access to financing
Debt lenders have been reluctant to invest in the sector due to the risks noted above. Current stakeholder feedback confirms that this remains the case. Typically, large infrastructure projects would look to include both equity and debt to optimise financing costs and spread the risk on investment. However, heat network projects typically struggle to demonstrate that they will have sufficient free cashflows to service the cost of debt. As such, debt lenders will seek to invest their funds in alternative sectors where they have more confidence in the cashflows. If these other sources of financing cannot be brought into the sector, the ability to roll out new projects at scale will be limited.
Regulatory and fiscal challenges
Although the financial barriers are significant, they must be considered alongside regulatory and fiscal challenges. These have created uncertainty in the market and have negatively impacted the private sector’s investment appetite. Stakeholder feedback highlighted the importance of these areas in unlocking Scotland’s heat network ambitions. However, as we discuss below, the Scottish Government does not have the ability to resolve all these issues.
Regulatory uncertainty
The Heat Networks (Scotland) Act in 2021 introduced powers to regulate the Scottish heat networks market for the first time. The Energy Act 2023 was passed by the UK Parliament in October 2023. Differences in implementation, content and timing of regulation between Scotland and the rest of the UK are negatively impacting investor sentiment and creating uncertainty. Developers and funders are also looking for clarity on the future GB-wide consumer protections and technical and service specifications for operators.
Without further clarity on the future secondary legislation in Scotland, operators stated they are more likely to focus resources outside Scotland – for example, in other UK areas – where there is more demand for larger urban heat network opportunities.
This uncertainty also extends to other relevant policy areas, such as the phasing out of domestic gas boilers, which presents barriers to operators. The Scottish Government has introduced the New Build Heat Standard, which states that by 2045, all homes in Scotland will need to have converted to a clean heating system. Across the rest of the UK, there is political uncertainty about this phase out. No equivalent legislation is currently in place, meaning heat networks operators are unclear when customers will be required to adopt low emission heating solutions.
Structural pricing considerations
Reducing the gap between the price of electricity and the price of gas may help support the rollout of low carbon heat networks. Under the current domestic[12] electricity pricing model, electrified low carbon heating solutions are unlikely to offer cost savings to consumers when compared against traditional gas boilers.
Historically, electricity has been more expensive than gas, partly due to the greater proportion of environmental and social obligation costs (green levies) placed on electricity (23%) compared to gas (2%), as shown by the figure 6 below.
Figure 6: Breakdown of domestic electricity and gas bill

The UK Government is currently consulting on the “Review of Electricity market arrangements” (REMA), which includes proposals for reducing electricity costs for consumers. Removing these levies from existing energy tariff structures would reduce the running costs of electrified heating solutions and encourage the uptake of low carbon heating.[13] However, there are many complexities involved in this change and the impact of rebalancing these costs must be understood further before it can be proven to be an effective mechanism for reducing electricity costs.
In addition to the impact of the levies, electricity prices (and gas prices) also include significant distribution and transmission charges (network costs). Electricity bills could be reduced by permitting heat networks connected to the electricity grid to pay lower network charges (recognising their ability to use electricity at times of low demand).
Regardless of these potential mechanisms, relatively low gas prices will continue to disincentivise the rollout of low emission heat networks, as they make any change to an alternative heat source appear more expensive. This is proving to be a significant barrier in the private sector.
Technical challenges
Operators and funders pointed to several heat network-related technical barriers which create further uncertainty and investor reluctance. The high-level technical challenges noted below are not an exhaustive list but rather provide important context for the rest of this report.
The need for density
In high density urban areas where there are large levels of heat demand, heat networks often provide the lowest cost low carbon heating option. The alternative is for properties to use individual air source heat pumps (ASHPs), which would place greater electricity demands on the grid and may result in higher customer costs and increased operational costs. Scotland has several areas where there is significant scale and suitable density levels for heat networks. However, operators noted that there are a greater number of large urban areas with multiple opportunities in England. This naturally provides significant competition for investment that might otherwise be made in the Scottish locations, especially for operators (operating both in England and Scotland) exploring opportunities across the UK. Additionally, smaller scale communal heating solutions may be appropriate for lower density areas; however, we do not explore this in detail as it is outside the scope of the report.
Technical complexity
Many of the existing heat network projects utilise different heat sources and technological solutions, including things as basic as pipework sizing. As projects increase in size, this lack of standardisation can present challenges for heat networks integrating and/or scaling up.
Decarbonisation challenges
Historically, many heat networks across the UK (and internationally) have been powered by carbon-based heat sources. However, operators consistently noted that customers now expect heat networks to use low emission heat sources. Low carbon technology is typically more expensive, and technologically complex than legacy carbon-based fuel sources and this therefore represents an additional factor impacting the commerciality of new projects.
Social and market challenges
The sector also experiences wider challenges in the development of the market for heat networks.
Consumer experience and scepticism
Operators and funders highlighted recurring customer concerns, including security of supply, pricing and consumer protection, that provide challenges to operators attracting potential domestic consumers to their heat networks.[14] Additionally, countries with a long history of operating heat networks, have an established culture of valuing and trusting the technology meaning consumers better understand the benefits. These factors have supported the development of international heat networks and have resulted in reduced levels of negative consumer experience and scepticism.
Lack of standardised commercial models
The lack of a standard delivery and operating model for heat networks results in developers and public sector partners (e.g. local authorities) having to invest significant time and resources developing proposals for their projects. This is explained further in section 4.5. This additional time and complexity increase development timescales.
Supply chain – the sector has a limited number of heat network developers
There are a limited number of private sector operators in Scotland, which in turn have a limited supply chain. The current developer landscape includes a number of balance sheet backed developers (SSE, EON, Vattenfall) and some infrastructure fund backed developers (Hemiko, 1Energy and Bring Energy).
This places a high dependency on a very small number of corporates relative to the scale of the heat network opportunities in the wider UK. Additionally, local authorities have a significant role to play in developing networks but they have limited in-house capacity and resource and therefore, rely on a small number of financial, technical and legal advisors.
Heat network delivery models – summary/overview
To address some of the barriers restricting the roll out of heat networks at scale, the Scottish Government is exploring a range of levers, including financial, technical and regulatory, and considering the optimum delivery models to support the sector. Although this report does not undertake a detailed assessment of these models, our overview provides context for the financial levers explored further in this report.
In 2022, the Scottish Government commissioned the Scottish Futures Trust (SFT) to undertake analysis on potential delivery models that could accelerate the pace and scale of heat network deployment in Scotland. The subsequent Heat Networks Delivery Models (HNDM) report, published in February 2024, identified four models that warranted further detailed development and consideration, namely:
- Regional Heat Partnership / Regional Energy Services Company (RESCo) model
- Local authority-led joint venture
- Local authority-led delivery, with Scottish Government stake
- Centrally-led delivery
Following the HNDM report’s publication, Scottish Government has collaborated with SFT to further develop the Regional Heat Partnership and Centrally-led models.
Overview of international experience
The Scottish Government can draw insight from comparable European and other international markets. It can be particularly helpful to consider how these sectors are developed, financed and regulated. To develop this insight, we have reviewed approaches in countries with high levels of market maturity, as well as those with characteristics similar to Scotland’s.
Our analysis is primarily based on five international examples, referred to in this section as the “comparator countries”. As shown in Figure 7, these are the Netherlands, Germany, Finland, Sweden and Estonia. During our shortlisting process, we considered jurisdictions such as the USA, Canada, Belgium, Ireland, Latvia and Poland, but found a lack of relevant data from which meaningful conclusions could be drawn. Our analysis will refer to these other countries where relevant.
Source: EY Analysis

Denmark has a mature and successful heat network sector and is often considered a valuable source of insight for Scotland. It is deliberately excluded from our analysis as the Scottish Government has a detailed understanding of the factors that have contributed to its success. These factors include cultural acceptance of heat networks and high consumer trust. Additionally, it has established regulatory levers such as mandatory connections.
This section provides an overview of:
- The history of comparator countries’ heat networks with a brief market overview
- The availability and impact of public financing levers
- The regulatory structures
- The market ownership profile and level of private finance penetration
- The financial composition of heat network assets
0B provides supplementary information for each international example.
History of international heat networks and market overview
Figure 8 summarises the maturity of each country’s heat network sector, based on the definitions developed by Department for Energy Security and Net Zero (DESNZ)[15]:
- Emerging – the market is still a nascent sector with lots of growth opportunity
- Expanding – the sector is established but is continually growing
- Consolidating – the market is mature and technology is being refined, updated or refreshed
- Refurbishing – the market is very mature and heat network technology is on the nth generation, but the networks are aged and require significant replacement and/or refurbishment
The comparator countries have a range of heat network maturity levels, with Finland and Sweden widely acknowledged as having mature and well-established sectors, while the Netherlands has an emerging heat network sector with many similar characteristics as Scotland.
DESNZ classified the UK and therefore by implication, both Scotland and the rest of the UK as emerging markets. 0B provides a brief historical overview of each international comparator.
Figure 8: Maturity of international heat networks
|
Emerging |
Expanding |
Consolidating |
Refurbishing |
|
Scotland |
Germany |
Sweden |
Estonia |
|
rUK |
Finland | ||
|
Netherlands |
Source: DESNZ (BEIS) “International review of heat network frameworks” (2020)
Key findings
The Nordic countries (Sweden and Finland) and Estonia are in the “consolidating” and “refurbishing” categories. In each country, the sectors are mature and the technology is tried, tested and trusted.
Overall, the Nordics have been leaders in district heat networks since the 1940s. The 1970s oil crisis stimulated a transition to alternative fuel sources and acted as a catalyst for rapid expansion in the sector. This early adoption is a significant factor driving the higher degrees of maturity in their district heating networks. Familiarity of the technology has supported the cultural acceptance. By 2015, 46% of Sweden’s heat networks were supplied by biomass and only 7% utilised oil or gas[16].
Heat networks are common in Germany, with the first pilot system having gone live in the 1950s. The sector has grown over the last decade with significant numbers of large-scale heat networks. Therefore, the market has surpassed the initial emerging phase of high growth but strives to continually expand toward becoming a mature market.
Germany is in the expanding category. Compared to Scotland, Germany has been using heat networks for much longer and the initial rapid growth phase has taken place. There is now a focus on continuing to add connections to existing networks.
Although the Netherlands implemented its first heat networks in a comparable time frame to Germany (Utrecht in 1923, followed by Rotterdam in 1949) this early adoption was not built upon, and no new networks were constructed in the 1950s and 1960s. However, there has been a moderate uptake of district heating schemes since the late 1980s.[17] The market is therefore relatively small but undergoing rapid change driven by a political commitment to decarbonise heat and reduce emissions from buildings. Therefore, there are strong similarities between Scotland and the Netherlands both in heat network market size and nascency and the Government’s ambition to decarbonise heat in buildings using district heating.
The scale of heat networks in most of the comparator countries differs significantly from Scotland. Figure 9 illustrates the cumulative length of heat networks in kilometres in each country[17]. While country size plays a role, Germany has nearly 35,000km of heat network infrastructure, whilst Estonia, although highly developed, is limited by its comparatively smaller size. Notwithstanding that, Scotland’s relative position to the comparator countries is clear.
Figure 9: Cumulative kilometres of heat networks

Source: EY analysis
Across Europe, the maturity of the sector varies, with countries such as Sweden, Finland and Estonia building on the successful implementation of decades worth of investment in the sector. The sector is still emerging in Scotland, like the Netherlands, where it does not demonstrate many of the characteristics of the more mature countries, such as cultural acceptance of heat networks and scale in the market. This provides important context for the following section reflecting on the appropriateness and availability of financial levers.
Impact of public financing levers
Public financing levers significantly influence the implementation and expansion of heat networks internationally. Financial levers serve as catalysts for innovation, growth and the adoption of low carbon technologies.
Table 2 provides an overview of the financial mechanisms that aid the development and expansion of heat networks. The levers include capital grants, tax exemptions and incentives, revenue grants, individual connection grants and decarbonisation incentives (for example, grant funding for decarbonised technology). Each country is discussed further in Appendix B.
Table 2: Summary of public financial levers used by international comparators
|
Country |
Financial Levers |
|
Rest of the UK |
|
|
The Netherlands |
|
|
Germany |
|
|
Finland |
|
|
Sweden |
|
|
Estonia |
|
Source: EY Analysis
In addition to the financial levers shown above, most comparator countries also benefit from a state-owned infrastructure bank investing in their district heating sector. State-owned infrastructure banks operate on similar terms to commercial lenders but may have the ability to adopt an increased risk appetite. This enables them to support heat networks in circumstances where commercial banks cannot. Additionally, EU member states benefit from access to EU funding where there are no bespoke heat network funding pots.
Recent investments reflect a growing appetite to engage across different markets with varying levels of maturity. For example, banks like the Nordic Investment Bank (NIB) provide investment support to help refurbish existing heat network assets across the Nordics and Baltics, while Germany’s infrastructure bank (KfW) is providing grants to help continue the transition to a more mature market in Germany.
Stakeholder engagement confirmed that both Scottish National Investment Bank (SNIB) and National Wealth Fund (NWF) have ample capital to deploy. The issue was reported to be a lack of investible projects.
0 provides a summary of state-owned infrastructure banks and relevant examples across the chosen countries.
Key findings
As illustrated by Error! Reference source not found., most of the comparator countries have adopted a range of financial levers. Many have applied a similar approach to Scotland, including the continued use of capital grant funding, project development funding or individual grants for expanding and upgrading heat networks.
Grant funding is a common financing lever, especially for the countries who are growing their heat network sectors. For example, in 2022 Germany introduced a €3bn fund to support the development and construction costs of new decarbonised heat networks (where 75% of the heat is sourced from decarbonised heat sources)[18]. This provides grant funding up to 40% of the eligible capital costs. The fund also provides feasibility support to projects. Additionally, the Netherlands is using a €400m fund to support the capital costs of new heat networks. The analysis shows that capital grant funding continues to be popular as an effective funding lever available before the sector reaches maturity. Regarding the UK market, there is continued funding from the Green Heat Network Fund (GHNF), with £288m initially made available and an additional £485m allocated in December 2023. The GHNF is expected to run until 2028, however operators expect that this will continue past 2028.
Another common lever in more mature countries is using individual grants or connection grants to incentivise connection to heat networks. For example, KfW helps deliver anchor loads to networks by offering increased grant support to local authorities for the connection of public sector buildings. Examples of individual incentives include the Estonian Business and Innovation Agency grant, which offers up to €10,000 for small residential buildings to connect to existing networks.
Estonia also offers a phased compensation scheme for the use of heat networks versus existing carbon-based alternatives. The Estonian Government provided compensation of 80% of the additional costs faced by heat network users because of increased energy prices.
Finland is developing a tax credit scheme which projects will be able to benefit from after they become operationally profitable. This has the aim of making project cashflows more appealing to investors, helping increase early returns by reducing the tax expense.
It is clear that many countries are promoting the use of grant funding to varying degrees. Significant levels of support are provided in jurisdictions with less mature sectors, while more mature countries use and develop other forms of support. The use of grant funding in Scotland and the rest of the UK is well established. Similarly, the Netherlands with its less mature sector also provides significant grant funding programmes. In Germany (an expanding country), grant funding continues to be a well utilised financial lever but intervention rates have decreased from predecessor programmes. Additionally, there is a requirement for a much larger proportion of the heat to be from renewable sources. The example of other emerging countries in Europe indicates that the market in Scotland will continue to rely on grant funding, even if the intervention levels decrease (like Germany) or grant funding is targeted at specific areas of sectors.
Regulatory structures
Our international comparator countries employ a range of regulatory structures (regarding operation, pricing and decarbonisation requirements) and national oversight. These range from self-governing municipality frameworks with a limited role for national regulators to nationwide regulatory frameworks governing the entire heat networks market. Whilst regulatory landscapes differ, the varying regimes offer interesting lessons for heat networks in Scotland.
Table 3 provides an overview of the international regulatory landscape and each country’s approach to mandatory connections. Detailed findings for these countries are shown in 0.
Table 3: Overview of international regulatory landscape
|
Country |
Regulated/Unregulated |
Mandatory Connections |
UK |
Regulation in development |
No* |
|
The Netherlands |
Regulated |
Yes |
|
Germany |
Unregulated |
No |
|
Finland |
Unregulated |
No |
|
Sweden |
Regulated |
No |
|
Estonia |
Regulated |
Yes |
*DESNZ is currently shaping its policy approach to mandatory connections. It is expected mandatory connections will be enforced on certain buildings in defined zones to be connected to heat networks by a given deadline[19]. However, details are yet to be fully confirmed.
Key Findings
Across our comparator countries, many of the developed and mature markets (e.g. Finland and Germany) are unregulated. The heat networks have a self-governing framework and abide by technical codes and industry standards but no third-party regulatory oversight. Municipalities have their own governance procedures; they are self-governing with greater pricing transparency, consistent contractual delivery and contractual routes. The evidence suggests that these countries focus on consumer pricing and that introducing standardisation supports investment and stimulates the sector’s development.
Mandatory connection to heat networks is used in some of the comparator countries, establishing base heat loads and reducing demand uncertainty. Mandatory connections are primarily applied to new developments, but barriers exist to using them in the retrofit market. For example, in relation to timing of connection for retrofits: where buildings may have recently installed new carbon-based technologies, connection to a heat network may not be considered for many years until their heat source needs replaced. Finland decided to repeal mandatory requirement having concluded they could be deemed anti-competitive given other decarbonised heating options are also used successfully.
Clear government policies on decarbonisation and the phasing out of carbon-based fuels are evident among the comparator countries. Germany’s Building and Energy Act 2020 requires municipalities to have heating (including heat networks) powered by 65% renewable energy from January 2024 onward and to phase out existing oil and gas heating systems. The German Government is incentivising the transition via KfW and offering bonus support for an accelerated switch to heat networks or other renewable sources. Similarly, the Netherlands has banned new developments from connecting to the gas grid from 2028 via amendments to Gas Act 2018.
Market ownership profile and private finance penetration
Our comparator countries also tend to have different ownership structures, with ownership split between the public and private sector in different ways.
Figure 10 below shows the current profile of heat network ownership across each country, with Finland’s ownership largely public, the Netherlands and Estonia mostly private, and rUK, Germany and Sweden demonstrating mixed ownership structures.
Figure 10: Asset ownership profile

Key findings
Ownership profiles differ across the selected comparator countries with several observable themes. For some comparator countries, there is a high proportion of private sector finance. For example, in the Netherlands more than 90% of heat networks are managed by the private sector. This has helped to scale up investment. Established heat networks offer attractive, stable investments to institutional investors looking for long term consistent returns – as evidenced by Dutch pension institution PGGM investing in Swedish networks.
In other countries, including Finland, public sector ownership in the sector is at a high level. However, they are still seeking investment from the private sector to support established municipally owned heat networks, where budget restrictions limit upgrades and refurbishments. This ownership profile provides an interesting reference point for Scotland, as it allows the sector to benefit from additional investment.
The analysis shows significant levels of public ownership in many of the mature and maturing countries. In Germany, for example, Berlin’s municipality acquired the Berlin heat network for €1.4bn from Vattenfall. This demonstrated a commitment to re-municipalising infrastructure and reversing privatisations to gain more influence over the city’s district heating and gas supply. The municipality believes the Berlin network to be profitable and that it will play a significant role in moving toward climate neutrality.
In the Netherlands, the high levels of private sector ownership have resulted in the Dutch government proposing legislation in 2022 to part-nationalise the sector. Municipalities will have the opportunity to own up to 51% of networks, thereby bringing market ownership into the public sector. The proposal is designed to mitigate concerns regarding the affordability of heat for end users, the reliability of the services and the need to safeguard public sector climate change ambitions and public values. However, this initiative has led to significant concerns from several operators who feel that it will lead to a significant downturn in private sector investment[20]. During our stakeholder interviews, one European operator warned that this move will make the Netherlands “uninvestable”.
Overall, more mature markets tend to have a greater level of private finance penetration due to reduced risks and more stable operations. However, public sector ownership still allows local government to maintain more control regarding price and climate targets. Operators in the Netherlands indicated that the introduction of legislation to restrict private sector investment (and therefore control over the heat networks) can have a significant negative impact on the market and reduce investment security in the private sector. Under the new Dutch model, the incentives for private companies to invest in public projects are small and short term, as the private sector will lose control of the decision making while retaining significant levels of financial risk. Scotland should consider the impact that future regulatory changes may have on private sector investment appetite while balancing this with its broader objectives of reducing fuel poverty and supporting clean heat networks.
Financial composition of heat networks
The upfront capital expenditure expected revenue receipts and cash flow for other asset classes can be estimated with enough certainty to attract debt financing. In contrast, heat networks under development tend to have multiple expansion options and uncertainty around which end users will connect and when. This means costs or revenue inflows are not certain enough to allow a traditional project finance approach.
Rabobank, a Dutch multinational bank, highlighted that district heating companies self-financing their heating grids is a common approach in developing markets like the Netherlands. Their balance sheets typically include a mixture of debt and equity. Additionally, they also identify that traditional project financing is much harder to implement as it requires a significant portion of a project’s cashflows to be secured (by having contracted demand), which is an inherent problem for heat networks.
Rabobank also stated that whilst large credit worthy companies may be able to raise finance to fund heat networks and reduce their equity component of a project, smaller less bankable heat network developments may require government guarantees over any debt to help improve their attractiveness to private sector.[21]
The stakeholder engagement sessions also reflected the view that corporate balance sheet financing will remain the main source of financing in developing markets in the near-term.
Mature markets like Sweden, Finland and Estonia, benefit from more traditional forms of debt financing because they are well established and understood by lenders. For example, the NIB provided a €12m loan repayable over 10 years to help finance the heat network in Pirkanmaa, Finland.[22] These mature markets can also access EU financing to reduce dependence on carbon-based fuels. For example, the Finnish energy company Helen Ltd received a €150m loan in April 2024 via REPowerEU[23] for building a new heat pump plant and converting fuel use from coal to biomass pellets.
Consequently, developing heat networks are often funded purely from equity financing until they reach operational profitability. Only once stable profits are achieved can network operators consider refinancing and attracting debt lenders to expand their networks. Private Equity firms often take an equity stake in a heat network, but the composition of their fund could be a mixture of institutional debt and equity.
Conclusions
Our comparator countries present a mix of maturity levels, various ownership profiles, regulatory structures and financing levers. Those with more developed sectors have a mixed degree of public ownership and the ability to access private finance. They are mainly regulated by standard frameworks within the municipalities with regulators adopting a back seat approach. However, these countries with less regulation have had the technology embedded in their culture for much longer. Therefore, the regulators can focus on price transparency and fairness for the end user rather than a framework for developing the market.
Scotland has the opportunity to overcome the barriers faced by the sector by adopting solutions that have been successful elsewhere, including regulation, clear direction on decarbonisation and financing levers:
- Regulation: Standardised and practical regulatory frameworks help to ensure consistency across the market. They make it simpler for operators to undertake projects by reducing project complexity. Additionally, standardised frameworks and agreements provide greater certainty and transparency regarding control and responsibility of heat network assets. This provides operators with confidence over the assets.
- Decarbonisation: All of the countries on our shortlist are actively moving away from fossil fuel heat networks and incentivising clean heat networks through policy choices. For example, sector development may be encouraged through connection subsidy or a phased ban on carbon-based alternatives. Additionally, mandatory connections provide a baseline for investment cases, making projects investible as demand assurance can be satisfied. Equally, contracted revenues obtained as part of the demand assurance may provide enough certainty to encourage private investment into heat networks.
- Financing levers: Comparator countries have provided financial incentives for connecting to existing heat networks offering further incentives for accelerated uptake. Capital grant support is the most common lever used by international comparators across all market maturities as it can make the investment decision for expansion of heat networks more viable. Similarly, when networks are seeking connections, individuals need to be incentivised to connect. For example, by bridging the gap on cost to their current heat sources, particularly when there are no regulations requiring individuals to connect. Additionally, state-owned infrastructure banks can be used to leverage these solutions as the market develops. For example, if connection fees are mandatory, a connection fee facility could be rolled up into the overall financing solution as there will be enough clarity on contracted revenue cashflows to reduce demand assurance risk.
The key considerations can be summarised as follows:
- simple and standardised frameworks to ensure consistency within the regulations
- clear direction on decarbonisation
- the use of mandatory connections (such as on new developments) to provide certainty
- public financing levers to develop projects and also to incentivise individuals to connect.
Review of financing mechanisms in selected utility sectors
Introduction
The UK utilities sector is a multifaceted industry that provides essential services for the protection and maintenance of modern daily life and commerce. These services include the provision of electricity, gas, water, telecommunications and transport. Each segment and subsector of the utility sector is integral to the economy’s stability, growth and societal well-being. Regulation of such sectors ensures that individuals, and businesses have access to the critical resources they require at a reasonable cost.
Each UK utility sector is governed by a specific regulator responsible for consumer protection (including pricing), safety, reliability and sustainability, ensuring a well-developed network of public services provided under regulatory regimes, as outlined in Appendix C. The primary regulators include:
- The Office of Gas and Electricity Markets (Ofgem)
- The Water Services Regulation Authority (Ofwat) in England and Wales
- The Office of Communications (Ofcom)
- The Office of Rail and Road (ORR)
- The Civil Aviation Authority (CAA)
The global shift towards net zero, with an emphasis on clean heating systems, requires the development of regulatory regimes to incorporate new energy solutions.
Regulatory oversight will remain crucial for balancing the objectives of climate change mitigation with continued access to reliable and affordable utility services. As a result, heat networks are planned to be subject to formal regulation across England, Wales and Scotland by 2024/25 in line with primary legislation introduced as part of the Energy Act 2023 and the Heat Networks (Scotland) Act 2021.
Purpose
This section of the report examines the origins and current characteristics of other regulated utility sectors. We also explore if specific aspects of the regulation of other sectors can inform the regulatory and financial environment, which will help accelerate the development of heat networks in Scotland.
To aid in understanding how potential heat networks regimes may develop, we outline how the sectors have historically been financed and how the regulatory structures have facilitated the deployment of capital.
Methodology
We performed analysis to identify regulated utilities which offer a good comparator to heat networks. This included examining the characteristics of a long list of 39 regulated sectors covering electricity, water, telecommunications, rail and air regulation against the criteria listed in Appendix D. Based upon the preliminary analysis, we progressed 17 utilities for further examination which is discussed in Appendix K.
Further to the completion of the detailed analysis (Appendix K), we determined that offshore wind electricity generation, household water & sewerage undertakers and Carbon Capture, Utilisation and Storage (CCUS) demonstrated relevant attributes for heat networks. The key characteristics of each sector are summarised in Appendix E. This includes risk profile, type of sector the utility operates within and the investment time horizon for each utility.
These three utilities are used to understand how the utility sector is regulated and how investment supports ongoing development. They are also used to explore how heat networks might be regulated and how regulatory approaches impact levels of financing. Each sector is analysed separately below before evaluating how aspects could be applied to heat networks. A summary of regulatory timelines for these sectors is shown in Appendix F.
Offshore wind
Overview
The UK’s offshore wind sector is rapidly expanding and plays a pivotal role in the nation’s transition to renewable energy. Between the UK’s first offshore wind allocation round (AR1 2015) and AR 6 (2024), a total of 21 GW of offshore wind capacity has been supported by Contracts for Difference (CfDs). CfDs are explained in more detail below.
Regulatory Structure
Following the Energy Act 2004, Ofgem has continued to regulate the sector and is adapting its approach as offshore wind projects continue to be deployed, offering new support mechanisms. Ofgem’s regulation of offshore wind is structured around several key elements. It is designed to promote the development of the sector whilst ensuring efficiency, competition and the protection of consumers interests. Regulations cover, licensing, support mechanisms, grid connection, market oversight and consumer protection. Further details can be found at Appendix G.
Ofgem’s remit also extends to the provision of Innovation Funding to support the transition to net-zero energy systems. This includes support to accelerate technological advancements, improve efficiency and reduce costs.
Regulatory Financing Mechanisms
Offshore wind is characterised by large upfront capital expenditure, availability risk (wind variability) and exposure to a competitive and volatile electricity market. All these factors impact the sector’s ability to secure much needed investment. The investment time horizon is around 15 years commensurate with the term of a CfD. Unlike the deployment of heat networks, offshore wind is not exposed to demand risk as it operates on a wholesale basis whereby electricity is exported directly to the national grid.
CfDs provide long-term stable and predictable revenue for offshore wind developers, thus making offshore wind attractive to investors, creating optimised financing structures that can reduce the overall cost of capital. A CfD has the effect of providing a fixed price for each MWh of electricity that the project generates over a specified period (typically 15 years) referred to as the “Strike Price”. The Strike Price typically reflects the price per MWh a developer considers necessary to achieve its applicable return on investment over the period of the CfD. CfDs are awarded through a competitive auction process (Allocation Round) administered by the Department of Energy Security and Net Zero (DESNZ).
The Strike Price is different to the actual market price, known as the “Reference Price”, which is calculated based on the average market price per MWh over a given period. When the Reference Price is lower than the Strike Price, a top up payment of the difference in price is made by the Low Carbon Contracts Company (LCCC) to the offshore generator. Conversely, if the Reference Price is greater than the Strike Price, then the generator must pay the difference to LCCC.
CfDs were originally introduced in 2013 and replaced the Renewable Obligation Certificate (ROC) regime, which was the main support mechanism for renewable energy prior to CfDs. CfDs are an evolution of the support mechanism for renewable energy projects that increases competition and whereby the Strike Price better reflects the underlying levelised cost of the technology.
Household water & sewerage undertakers
Overview
The household water and sewerage sector in the UK provides essential water supply and wastewater services to residential and commercial customers. The sector operates as a natural monopoly and is therefore highly regulated across England and Wales and Scotland.
Regulatory Structure
England and Wales
In England and Wales the sector is regulated by Ofwat. The regulator aims to ensure high-quality services, fair pricing, compliance with environmental standards, and the financial viability of water companies. The regulatory structure has evolved over time to address priorities such as infrastructure investment, customer service improvement and environmental concerns.
Key changes include the introduction of competition to drive efficiency, periodic price reviews by setting price limits and service targets, increased customer engagement, and innovation funding. These changes aim to create a more outcome-based regulatory regime that encourages water companies to be customer-oriented, efficient, and forward-thinking in their operations and investments, ensuring high standards of water quality and environmental stewardship.
Scotland
Scottish Water is regulated by the Water Industry Commission for Scotland (WICS), which ensures value for money and efficiency without a profit motive. This aligns with Scottish Government policies on affordability and public ownership. WICS is governed by the Water Industry (Scotland) Act 2002, as amended by the Water Services etc. (Scotland) Act 2005 and the Water Resources (Scotland) Act 2013.
WICS’ role is to set charge caps, monitor performance, facilitate retail competition for non-household customers, and support the Hydro Nation vision. Price reviews are conducted every six years. Reviews set price limits based on Scottish Water’s business plan, customer input, and factors such as debt service and operational efficiency, with a transition away from the RAB model since 2010.
WICS also sets efficiency targets and, while independent, can be influenced by Scottish Ministers on financial matters, potentially impacting long-term infrastructure maintenance if charges are set too low. Scottish Water receives government loans or grants for large capital projects, reducing reliance on customer charges. However, this funding depends on the impact on the Scottish Government’s balance sheet, requiring careful management for long-term sustainability. Further details on this can be found at Appendix H.
Regulatory Financing Mechanisms
England and Wales
The water and sewerage sector relies on long-term investment provided by the capital markets, typically in the form of shareholder equity and bond finance. Most utilities are highly geared and therefore very sensitive to adverse changes in credit ratings (via Moody’s, S&P and Fitch). Nearly all utilities aim for an investment-grade credit rating to secure optimum lending terms with the primary objective of lowering the company’s Weighted Average Cost of Capital (WACC).
Ofwat’s regulation and associated pricing reviews provide a stable financial environment for investors. They ensure reliable demand due to the monopolistic nature of the customer base despite some revenue risk from bad debt. The application of a Regulated Asset Base (RAB) model (discussed below) along with the submission of Asset Management Plans (AMPs) that contribute to periodic price reviews, is designed to incentivise investment in infrastructure and services whereby the water companies are required to manage risks related to capital programmes, asset maintenance and operational costs similar to those in the heat network sector.
Regulated Asset Based (RAB)
The RAB model regulates water company prices while ensuring infrastructure maintenance and service quality. The RAB represents the value of a company’s capital assets based on historical costs, depreciation, and new investments. Ofwat uses the RAB value to set allowed revenue requirements, applying a WACC to determine the maximum revenue companies can charge, incentivising efficient investment and continual infrastructure improvements. This model is effective in the water sector due to the manageable number of operators, encouraging companies to invest efficiently and include new investments in future revenue streams.
Periodic Price Reviews
Ofwat’s price reviews, conducted every five years, determine the revenue water companies can earn. They take into both capital and operational expenditures into consideration to set price controls and encourage large-scale investment projects. The submission of AMPs contributes to the periodic price review process, which includes performance incentives through Outcome Delivery Incentives (ODIs), rewarding companies for meeting targets and penalising underperformance, aligning financial interests with high-quality service delivery. The periodic pricing reviews, coupled with limited demand risk provides greater revenue certainty for investment.
The latest Asset Management Plan (AMP8) for 2025-2030 focuses on climate change, emissions reduction, water quality improvement, leakage reduction, and reliable services. It also introduces innovative funding solutions such as the Direct Procurement for Customers (DPC) programme to support significant infrastructure investments.
Innovation funding
Although there are many external innovation funds available to water companies, Ofwat has established its own Ofwat Innovation Fund. The aim of this £200m fund is to encourage collaborative initiatives and partnerships within the water sector to tackle the larger challenges the sector faces such as climate change, leakage and affordability.
Scotland
Whilst Ofwat regulates the water sector in England and Wales, privatisation of the sector has resulted in high debt leverage which can give rise to value leakage to shareholders and risk of under investment of infrastructure. Thames Water, England’s largest water company, has requested that Ofwat approves an increase in water bills of up to 40% by 2030.
Scotland has sought to mitigate these specific risks through the water services being publicly owned. Services are operated by Scottish Water which remains accountable to the Scottish Government and its customers. This helps to ensure profits are reinvested in the infrastructure rather than distributed to shareholders. WICS is an Executive Non-Departmental Public Body whose principle statutory functions are to:
- Determine charge caps;
- Monitor Scottish Water’s performance, encouraging efficiency and sustainability;
- Facilitate competition by encouraging the entry of retail water and sewerage providers for non-household customers in Scotland; and
- Support the Scottish Government’s vision of ensuring that Scotland is a Hydro Nation and meet their obligations under the Water Resources Act 2013.
Water charges are set by WICS and remain relatively stable as profits are reinvested. The domestic charges are linked to council tax bands, with prices increasing as bands increase. Historically charges were calculated using a version of the RAB model. However, since the price review in 2010, WICS has moved away from the RAB based model towards looking at business requirements as the basis for setting prices.
Price Reviews
Similar to Ofwat in England and Wales, WICS performs Strategic Reviews of Charges to set price limits for the next regulatory period, usually every six years. The Strategic Reviews of Charges is initially based upon Scottish Water’s long term business plan. This encompasses short and long-term infrastructure investment requirements, debt repayments and operating costs. WICS subsequently evaluates the business plan, with a focus on Debt Service Cover Ratio (DSCR), alongside multiple other factors including inflation, investment needs and operational efficiency to determine annual price caps for customers. These may be adjusted annually within the limits set by WICS to account for inflation or other changes.
Although a proxy RAB continues to exist to act as an internal comparator to England and Wales water sector, Scottish Water’s customer-focussed business plan helps align Scottish Water with Scotland Government objectives.
Government Grants and Incentives
Scottish Water receives loans or grants from the Scottish Government to finance large capital expenditure projects. These reduce reliance upon customer charges, improving affordability for households and businesses. While government-backed loans could offer more favourable terms than private market financing, such a mechanism could impact the Scottish Government balance sheet (borrowing requirement). This impact could mean funding is not granted for infrastructure development and maintenance projects and instead a short-term increase in customer prices would have to be required. As such, any borrowing is carefully managed to ensure long term financial sustainability for both Scottish Water and Scottish Government.
Carbon Capture, Utilisation and Storage (CCUS)
Overview
CCUS is an emerging sector in the UK, crucial for achieving the net zero emissions target by 2050. The government is actively developing a regulatory framework to support its deployment. This framework, shaped by legislation such as the Energy Act 2023, aims to ensure CCUS projects are financially viable, environmentally effective and resilient. It provides regulatory oversight from bodies like Ofgem, the Oil and Gas Authority, and the Department for Energy Security and Net Zero (DESNZ).
Regulatory Structure
The UK’s CCUS sector is in its infancy and, to date, no significant facilities have been developed. As a result, it is referred to as a First of a Kind (“FOAK”) project. To facilitate the development, financing and deployment of CCUS technology, a robust regulatory landscape is required, coupled with effective funding support mechanisms. This includes the need to address the revenue uncertainty associated with demand risk from emitter connections. Further details on this can be found within Appendix I. The proposed regulatory framework aims to enable the sector’s development while contributing to net zero goals, with current proposals including a RAB-based model with revenue support to encourage initial investment and asset maintenance, anticipating evolution as technology and risks develop.
Regulatory Financing Mechanisms
Similar to the water and sewerage sector, the proposed regulatory RAB model for entities developing, owning, and operating CCUS transport and storage infrastructure (T&SCo) aims to provide long-term reliable revenues in order to secure the private sector funding necessary to construct the infrastructure and meet ongoing operational costs. The allowed revenue is determined similarly to other RAB models. DESNZ will initially administer this for CCUS before Ofgem takes over shortly after commercial operations begin. Despite the significant resources and time required to administer a RAB model, it is considered appropriate and effective for attracting private sector investment in T&SCo projects due to the anticipated limited number of such projects. Further details on how a RAB model operates can be found at Appendix H and Appendix I.
Revenue Support Agreement
Due to the uncertain uptake of CCUS technology in the early years, there is significant risk that T&SCos may not generate sufficient allowed revenue under the RAB model. To mitigate this risk, the regulatory structure includes a revenue support agreement, like CfDs in sectors such as offshore wind, until the market matures. The Low Carbon Contracts Company (LCCC) is the proposed counterparty to this agreement, responsible for covering any shortfall in actual revenue compared to the forecasted allowed revenue, thereby mitigating demand and revenue risk until the sector matures.
The CCUS regulatory framework addresses risks associated with FOAK projects by combining previous regulatory support mechanisms and encouraging investment through long-term, predictable revenue for equity investors supported by a contract with LCCC. The RAB model ensures continual maintenance of assets by increasing allowed revenue to cover maintenance costs, promoting adequate net revenue and visibility for future projects. However, this amalgamation of support mechanisms is still in development and remains untested until large CCUS projects begin construction.
Integration of regulatory models with heat networks
For each model described above, the aim has been to provide an economic and financial environment that stimulates private sector investment and develops new infrastructure. Furthermore, it should be noted that such regimes and financial support have evolved over time depending on the maturity of the sector and UK Government’s priorities and policies.
Each energy or utility sector is very different, with unique characteristics necessitating a bespoke approach to both regulation and financial support mechanisms. Such differences can include the maturity of the sector or technology intervention, including FOAK projects such as CCUS, nature of service provision (e.g. wholesale versus retail) such as electricity and water, the extent and maturity of regulation and the quantum of investment required.
Furthermore, each sector will be heavily influenced by legislation, such as Section 92 of the HNSA that sets targets for the combined supply of thermal energy by heat networks, to reach 2.6 TWh by 2027 and 6 TWh by 2030.
Offshore Wind – Contract for Differences (CfDs)
The purpose, mechanism and award process for CfDs is very well understood and has proved very successful in securing the necessary investment in a wide range of renewable energy technologies, in particular Offshore Wind.
CfDs have evolved over time. Its predecessor was ROCs, which were in place between 2002 and 2017, and before that the Non-Fossil Fuel Obligations (NFFOs) and Scottish Renewables Obligation (SRO) launched as early as 1990.
CfDs’ primary purpose, like that of its predecessors, is to provide price assurance to the developer and associated investors in relation to each MWh of electricity generated and sold to the grid. In the majority of cases, the projects utilise proven technology such as Solar PV, On-Shore and Off-Shore Wind, together comprising c.96% of the CfD allocation within AR 6.
Construction and availability risks are both borne by the developer. While offshore wind generation can be reliably estimated, heat networks depend on gradually increasing connections over time, introducing demand uncertainty. With Solar PV and On-Shore and Off-Shore wind generation, capacity broadly remains the same over the operational life of the asset. For these reasons, a CfD may not be an appropriate mechanism at this moment in time for managing the demand risk associated with heat networks, which is currently a key inhibitor to the deployment of more private sector funding.
CfDs could however play a role in providing revenue support to those heat networks seeking to utilise decarbonised heat sources (other than industrial waste heat or heat from energy from waste plants). This type of mechanism could incentivise the transition from fossil-based heat sources (e.g. gas boilers) to more sustainable forms of heat generations (e.g. heat pumps). At present, residential customers are unlikely to be able to afford the increase in the cost of heat compared to conventional gas boilers or heat networks using waste heat.
Household water & sewerage undertakers – RAB-based Model
The RAB model utilised in the water sector, in conjunction with the associated price reviews, has proven to be an effective mechanism for encouraging investment and securing funding from the capital markets. This approach provides a tried and tested framework for recovering the costs of the investment over a period of time. This in turn encourages utilities to embark on much needed infrastructure development. Ofwat is also looking at new mechanisms such as Direct Procurement for Customers (DPC) for much larger scale capex projects.
Integral to the regulation and application of the RAB based model, is management of the inter-generational risk of customer charges. This means today’s customers should not feel any greater financial burden from new investment than the customers in the future. In the water sector, utilities still bear the risks associated with inflation, construction and operation costs, interest rates and to a lesser degree demand and bad debt risk within England and Wales.
The RAB model is widely used across sectors where revenue forecasting is relatively stable due to low demand risk. However, demand risk is highly uncertain for heat networks as a result of the uncertainty of connections. A key risk for potential investors is the heat network sector’s inability to manage demand risk and therefore a RAB model-based approach may not be a viable solution in the short term to incentivise investment. A RAB model could, however, play a key role in the regulation of the sector once it achieves critical mass and the impending regulation of the sector has had sufficient time to evolve and prove effective in the sector.
Key considerations for any RAB model are the resources and time required to regulate a sector effectively. The model and associated regulation works effectively in the water sector not least due the limited number of water utilities (11). Given that the heat network sector will comprise thousands of heat networks of various sizes, a RAB model may not be practical for all projects unless projects are first consolidated on a regional basis, or are subject to a minimum MW size requirement prior to utilising a RAB model. We do understand, however, that the impending regulation of the heat network sector will focus on tariffs (regarding Value for Money) and customer service, but it is unclear whether this will extend to a RAB-based model approach.
Carbon Capture, Utilisation and Storage (CCUS) – RAB Model and revenue support
The CCUS programme comprises T&SCo projects and carbon capture technologies developed at industrial and Energy from Waste (EfW) facilities. They are at a very early stage in the development cycle and as such referred to as FOAK projects. Furthermore, CCUS projects are not only exposed to technology and construction risk (i.e. the technology is considered unproven at such scale) but also are exposed to significant demand risk as industrial and waste emitters decarbonise over time. Such connections to the T&SCo infrastructure are therefore uncertain. Heat network technology is relatively tried and tested, but the issue of timing and quantum of connections is the same dilemma for both the heat network sector and CCUS. The CCUS sector has had to adapt its regulatory framework to address the issue of “demand risk” not mitigated by utilisation of a RAB model alone. A combination of RAB model and revenue support helps mitigate demand risk within CCUS.
This could potentially be largely replicated within heat networks, in particular to support the upfront capital expenditure. However, were this method to be adopted, extensive regulatory and legislative discussions would be required to ascertain a suitable counterparty to the revenue support mechanism. Furthermore, the positioning of who bears bad debt risk would need to be established. However, this risk is generally accepted within the water sector and arguably should be no different for heat networks. While this combination of regulatory support is planned for CCUS, it remains an untested regime with the potential for inefficiencies. This is particularly the case for heat networks given the limitations of a RAB model identified above.
Alternative regulatory structures for heat networks could include offering grants to offset upfront costs and revenue support mechanism to mitigate demand risk. This and other combinations of mechanisms, such as a cap on payments to reduce the risk of over-incentivising, could incentivise investment in heat networks without too great a departure from regulatory norms.
Renewable Heat Incentive (RHI) specifically for heat networks
It may be possible to develop a RHI specific to heat networks. This could bridge the price gap between gas and electric networks whilst encouraging investment. The RHI was a UK Government financial support scheme designed to encourage the uptake of renewable heat technologies. Since 31 March 2021 it has been closed for new applicants. A similar type of incentive for the deployment of heat networks would aim to promote the development and expansion of the sector and could include the features listed in Table 4.
Table 4: Summary of features for a potential RHI-type heat network incentive
|
Feature |
Description |
|---|---|
|
Tariff payments |
Operators or users could receive periodic payments based on the amount of low carbon heat generated and supplied per MWh, which could be guaranteed for a period of time (usually quarterly payments over 20 years) to improve financial viability of projects. |
|
Eligible technologies |
The incentive could cover a range of renewable heat generation technologies that can be integrated into heat networks. |
|
Tiered tariffs |
A tiered tariff structure to encourage efficient operation which pays a higher rate up to a certain level of heat output and a lower rate beyond that could be implemented to incentivise operators to size systems appropriately and manage demand. |
|
Upfront capital support |
In addition to ongoing tariff payments, grants or loans to aid cover upfront capital expenditure would reduce the financial barriers to entry. |
|
Performance standards |
To qualify for the incentive, certain performance and efficiency standards would have to be met. |
|
Metering and monitoring |
Accurate metering of heat production and consumption would be required in order to calculate incentive payments. |
|
Support for innovation |
Additional funding could be made available for projects which demonstrate new technologies or business models helping the sectors development. |
An RHI-type incentive in heat networks would aim to stimulate market growth and help achieve net zero emissions through the integration of carbon-based fuels to renewable energy. It could provide a financial impetus for the adoption of heat networks and making them an attractive option for developers, local authorities and consumers particularly if coupled with grants.
Stakeholder insight
This section summarises stakeholder feedback from the stakeholder interview exercise. The methodology underpinning this exercise is set out in Section 3.3. Stakeholder feedback also informed conclusions in other sections of this report, including:
- Overall views and attractiveness of the sector
- Key investment risks
- Key initiatives that are required to move to a predominantly privately financed model
The private sector views heat networks as an attractive investment opportunity. However, there are areas of uncertainty that must be resolved, including the need for greater clarity on the development of future regulation. To facilitate private investment, stakeholders highlighted the need for continued grant funding support (which will help de-risk project cashflows), clear regulation on key areas such as zoning and mandatory connections, and clear direction on future policy banning carbon-based heat systems. Table 5 below summarises the detailed views of each stakeholder group.
Table 5: Stakeholder Engagement Summary
|
Stakeholder Group |
How attractive is the sector? |
What are the key sector investment risks? |
What are the key initiatives that are required to move to a predominantly privately financed model? |
|---|---|---|---|
|
Capital orientated stakeholders | |||
|
Operators |
Operators see significant interest from private infrastructure investors. However, there are concerns that private sector investment may move to other asset classes if the government does not provide certainty on future regulation and continue to financially support the sector. | The main observations from operators were: |
|
|
Private capital / infrastructure funds |
The sector is attractive to investors, with stable recurring cashflows. There is a clear growth opportunity in the UK. | The main observations from private capital stakeholders were: |
|
|
Policy Banks |
The sector is an attractive investment opportunity however the current market is lacking large commercially ready projects where policy banks can invest. |
|
|
|
Non-capital orientated stakeholders | |||
|
Commercial Advisors |
Established heat networks are viewed favourably by the private sector. The characteristics are similar to a bond therefore attractive to institutional investors. | Observations from commercial advisors included: |
|
|
Legal Advisors |
Less appetite from lenders in early-stage heat networks due to uncertainty of payback. | Key observations from legal advisors included: |
|
Private capital and operator stakeholders were also asked specific questions regarding financial returns, types of financing, key financial metrics and shareholder structure. A summary of responses for each subcategory is provided below.
- Rates of return: Stakeholders gave a consistent view of the minimum internal rate of return (IRR) requirement range for heat network developments. This was between 8% and 12% depending on a project’s specific risk profile (which can vary significantly). For example, established trunk/core developments can have lower IRR where demand assurance and contracted revenues are satisfied, while a higher IRR is required on expansions to make the developments feasible and appropriately mitigate risk.
- Types of financing: Stakeholders unanimously agreed operators would likely use their own balance sheet for financing the short to medium term. Private Equity funds and infrastructure funds would predominantly continue to use equity to invest in the heat network sector. For the reasons outlined in earlier sections, the existing barriers around demand and revenue uncertainty limits debt investment in the sector.
- Financial metrics: Stakeholders noted that they have certain size requirements when investing and deploying capital. For those stakeholders investing in the sector, the minimum investment required ranged from £10m to £25m+. These stakeholders highlighted this can limit their involvement in Scotland as, compared with rUK, there are fewer projects that meet their investment scale requirements. However, stakeholders did say this issue could be mitigated by investing in multiple projects rather one large project.
- Scale: Similarly, stakeholders commented that rUK offers more opportunity due to the number of large city scale projects available. Scotland offers significant potential for large city scale networks but the greater number of cities and urban areas in the rest of the UK is more appealing as it offers more connection opportunities and a greater customer base.
- Shareholder structure: Private capital and operator stakeholders were open to collaborating with Local Authorities in a Joint Venture structure; however, they flagged key legal areas that would need additional scrutiny. For example, clear roles and responsibilities regarding asset risk and reward.
As illustrated by the stakeholder engagement, stakeholder subgroups all highlighted similar risks and themes and what support mechanisms exist for the heat network sector. The engagement exercise identified key issues and barriers that must be addressed to attract private sector investment. The exercise has therefore helped inform our recommendations as set out in the next section.
Recommendations
Summary
The evidence from this report indicates that the Scottish heat network sector is still maturing and, in the short to medium term, requires significant financial support from the public sector. In the medium to long term, we also recommend models for securing private sector finance and for scaling and speeding up the roll out of large heat networks in Scotland.
Figure 11 summarises our recommendations, indicating the suggested timeframe and expected impact of each.
Figure 11: The impact of mechanisms over time

Recommendations for rollout of mechanisms or policy initiatives
The recommendations are explored in more detail below.
Recommendation 1
The Scottish Government should maintain capital funding support for the sector through existing programmes or new bespoke capital schemes. The Scottish Government should also explore opportunities for extending grant funding drawdown timescales.
Timescales – short to medium term e.g. 1-10 years
This recommendation addresses barriers related to high capital costs, demand uncertainty and long development and construction times.
- Stakeholders unanimously agreed that the large-scale deployment of heat networks requires continued public support. There is also precedent from other emerging countries to support the sector in this way.
- Future grant funding programmes must reflect a heat network’s significant development and construction timescales. The Scottish Government aims to avoid piecemeal developments and the development of large-scale heat networks can be significantly longer than the existing grant funding windows. Although cross party support for the sector exists, the Scottish Government could consider secondary legislation which extends timescales. This would provide long term certainty to the market. However, we recognise government funding and budgetary restrictions will make this challenging. We also note that current schemes have open funding windows and seek to create as much flexibility as possible for applicants. Further sub-recommendations could also be considered including:
- Reducing intervention rates. The level of grant support is subject to numerous factors, but any grant support should be sized to provide developers with a reasonable project IRR (noting that this is already standard practice). This will help support a greater number of projects, with lower levels of capital. There is precedent from the GHNF for lower levels of support, but differences between the GHNF and SHNF must be considered (including the varying volume of applications received through both programmes and different assessment criteria).
- Targeting intervention at specific geographical areas or aligning with local regional strategies. This could include aligning support to regional zoning activity or targeting support at specific geographic areas where there are significant opportunities for future heat networks.
- Target grant funding in other ways, for example, to support connection fees and/or enabling costs for end users of new residential areas. There is international precedent for this, including grant support to incentivise anchor loads. Further support for the public sector to meet connection fees could also be considered. Public Sector enabling costs are already supported through the Green Public Sector Estate Decarbonisation Scheme.
- Grant funding could be exclusively targeted at district heating projects rather than smaller communal heating schemes.
Recommendation 2
Our review has found that de-risking future revenues is key to unlocking HN development – private capital is available for projects of this scale, but it must be financeable. Our initial analysis therefore concludes that more detailed analysis of a revenue support model, such as Contracts for Difference (CfD) or a Renewable Heat Incentive (RHI) equivalent, is merited. However, the Scottish Government must address the challenges of establishing such schemes, described below.
Timescale – Medium 5+ years
This recommendation addresses the barriers associated with demand uncertainty.
In section 6 we review the benefits of these models in the context of other relevant utility sectors. However, there are additional factors that the Scottish Government must consider before pursing this further. For example, it must consider the significant administrative and resource costs of establishing such schemes. Additionally, constrained revenue budgets mean that the creation of a new revenue model will represent a significant budgetary challenge for the Scottish Government. Lastly, with differences in regulation, policy and powers, the Scottish Government must also consider how a revenue model could be introduced in isolation from the rest of the UK. Additional CfD and RHI considerations are summarised below:
- Contracts for Difference – Although this is a well-established model, certain complexities must be resolved before it can be deployed in the sector:
- Calculating a reference price – heat prices are bespoke, and cannot be benchmarked to a national market price, unless there is regulation on the price of heat. This must be explored further before the model can be introduced.
- Generation versus consumption – a CfD should be based on the generation of heat, rather than consumption of heat. This will help mitigate demand risk, as the model is not reliant on future unknown connections to the heat network.
- The CfD could also subsidise the additional capital cost of installing expensive clean heat network technology.
- Additionally, the higher cost of underlying electricity (compared to gas) could be mitigated and passed on to customers thereby reducing price risk. However, before introducing an alternative mechanism to grant funding, the CfD cost (compared to the level of grant) must be further understood.
- RHI model – The RHI model is another well understood revenue support model, which has previously been used in the heat network sector. However, previous RHI schemes have been criticised, for example, the National Audit Office stated the UK Government did not achieve value for money.
RHI subsidises the cost of heat generated from clean heat networks, compared to alternative forms of heat generation. However, complexities remain that must be addressed before it can be deployed:
-
- Generation versus consumption – Similar to CfD, an RHI model would need to be based on the amount of heat generated, rather than consumption of heat, and would therefore act as a contribution to the cost of deployment. It would help to address the increased cost of installing a more expensive heat network technology, and at the same time mitigate demand risk.
- A payment cap could be introduced to avoid over-incentivisation within the sector.
- Before adopting an alternative to grant funding, the RHI cost (compared to the level of grant) must be thoroughly assessed.
Recommendation 3
Following further regulatory developments and the creation of an established asset base (possibly 10-15 years), the Scottish Government could explore the benefits of implementing a RAB model.
Timescale – Long term e.g. 10 years +
This recommendation addresses barriers associated with consumer experience and regulatory uncertainty.
- The RAB model (coupled with price reviews) has been shown to be helpful in protecting consumer prices whilst encouraging ongoing investment and maintaining assets.
- However, the cost and resource implications of administering RAB models across a large number of very diverse projects will be significant. This may be mitigated through minimum generation requirements, but this must be explored further. EY and many stakeholders agreed that a RAB model may be appropriate / beneficial in 10-15+ years but only after certain market characteristics are met.
- The Scottish Government must assess the feasibility of developing a Scottish RAB model, which may diverge from the approach in England and Wales.
- A transition from one regulatory mechanism to another could occur in the future. However, for this to occur, the sector must mature and must focus on large scale capital investment. This will impact whether a RAB model alone could be introduced to provide consumer protection or whether it will need to be supported with a revenue support mechanism. Furthermore, the market must be economically feasible (meaning the sector is more mature and financially viable) to regulate the assets themselves prior to introducing a RAB model.
- Importantly, without capital or revenue support, a RAB model will not by itself result in a financially viable heat network. It would therefore need to be coupled with other support mechanisms, as pioneered by CCUS. This reinforces the requirement to pursue short term sector support, including public sector capital funding.
Recommendation 4
SNIB and the UK National Wealth Fund are committed to investing in the sector. The Scottish Government must continue to work closely with these organisations in order to explore investment opportunities, create a shared understanding of each party’s objectives and ultimately unlock the capital that has been made available to invest.
Timescales – short term e.g. now -1 year
This recommendation addresses the barriers associated with access to funding.
- The Scottish Government must also consider infrastructure bank restrictions, including who they can support (e.g. local authorities) and minimum lending requirements.
Recommendation 5
The Scottish Government should maintain and increase support for pre-construction projects, via the Heat Network Support Unit (HNSU) and specific development funding programmes.
Timescales – short term e.g. 1-2 years
This recommendation addresses the barriers associated with access to funding.
- To support the sector’s development a strong pipeline of projects is required. In Scotland, and across the UK, there are a growing number of pre-construction projects that require commercialisation support.
- All stakeholders commented on the need for improved funding to develop heat networks until there are sufficient cashflows enabling networks to support themselves and attract other forms of funding.
- This could include expanding the role of the HNSU to take a more active development role similar to the UK Government’s Heat Network Delivery Unit. However, the HNSU would require additional resources and financial support before it could expand its remit.
- The Scottish Government could also consider engaging with national development banks, e.g. SNIB or the NWF to co-develop development funding programmes.
Recommendation 6
The Sottish Government should monitor the implementation of the UK Government’s zoning approach, and where appropriate, leverage best practice from DESNZ. This should be used to compliment Scotland’s existing zoning approach.
Timescales – short term e.g. 1-2 years
This recommendation addresses the barriers associated with demand uncertainty.
- Robust zoning regulations, with mandatory connections will help reduce demand risk and support private sector investment. Ultimately this will support the roll out of larger heat networks at scale by reducing demand uncertainty for operators and investors.
- Regional Zones, across local authority boundaries, could be used to identify area of high heat demand, and key heat sources.
- These proposals could leverage the Advanced Zoning Programme (AZP) model adopted by DESNZ, where pilot heat network zones have been identified to supply.
- The HNSA creates the opportunity for local authorities and the Scottish Government (in some cases) to designate zones. This should be explored in more detail, including the number of zones required in Scotland. The Scottish Government could also use this route to create larger strategic zones across Scotland.
- However, zoning proposals must account for heat costs and the risk that consumers are forced to connect to a heat source that is more expensive than alternatives.
- The Scottish Government must also consider that its limited resources will reduce its ability to replicate the regulatory developments in England and Wales.
Recommendation 7
We recommend that Scottish Government reviews its regulatory approach to help reduce regulatory uncertainty, simplify delivery and align with the wider UK framework where appropriate.
Timescales – short term e.g. 1-2 years
This recommendation addresses the barriers associated with regulatory uncertainty.
- The introduction of secondary legislation, including further details on consenting and authorisation, will help to reduce the existing uncertainty in the market.
- The lack of standardisation in procurement approaches and delivery models adds complexity, time and cost to a project’s development timeline. The Scottish Government should accelerate its activity to provide more clarity to the market. The UK Government is also developing its delivery models. The Scottish Government could consider aligning with the UK Government approach to ensure a consistent landscape for the private sector.
- As part of the Advance Zoning Programme for Heat Networks in England, DESNZ issued template delivery model guidance for the procurement of Heat Network delivery partners. The purpose this is to assist project sponsors in the identification of opportunities for the acceleration of the scale and pace of zonal heat network delivery. Template documentation provides greater clarity in the marketplace leading to quicker and more effective procurement processes, improving market appetite and reducing bidder fatigue. The guidance for the promoters of AZP projects sets out the principles of three potential delivery models and sets out the characteristics to consider when determining the delivery model to adopt. This includes Development Agreements, the Golden Share and Co-investor models.
Recommendation 8
We recommend that the Scottish Government continues to work with the UK Government on rebalancing electricity and gas prices; however, this will not eliminate the price difference between electricity and gas.
Timescale – Medium 5+ years. However, the Scottish Government does not have the developed powers to implement this recommendation by itself, and therefore further discussions with the UK Government are required.
This recommendation addresses the barriers associated with structured pricing challenges.
- The UK Government is continuing to explore opportunities for rebalancing electricity and gas prices, to reduce electricity costs and support the affordability of clean heat networks for consumers. This initiative is not a devolved matter, so the Scottish Government should continue to work with the UK Government on the proposals. If unsuccessful, a revenue support model should be considered as an alternative to address pricing risk.
Recommendation 9
The Scottish Government should develop a national Heat Network Strategy setting out a long-term vision for Scotland’s heat networks.
Timescales – short term e.g. 1-2 years
This recommendation addresses multiple barriers.
- Not only will this help provide further clarity and confidence to the private sector, but it will also help to educate and explain the benefits of heat networks to the wider Scottish public.
- This view was shared by specific stakeholders and mirrors the recently published Scottish Renewables Heat Network Vision.
- This strategy could also leverage the Scottish Futures Trust (SFT) analysis on sector delivery models which could accelerate the pace and scale of heat network deployment in Scotland.
- Additionally, the strategy should provide:
- Clarity on national and regional Heat Network implementation, crossing local authority boundaries.
- A strategy for future public sector support, including where and how grant funding, should be targeted. This should also include Scottish Government’s external commitment and its ability to invest in the sector.
- Inform the ongoing development and implementation of regulation.
- Plans for engaging with the UK Government on recommendations reserved to the UK Government, e.g. structural pricing plans.
Appendices
Appendix A – Financing mechanisms
There are a number of financing mechanisms that the Scottish Government could utilise to help de-risk heat network investments. These mechanisms, or “financial levers”, could increase the attractiveness of heat network projects to private investors and ultimately increase the pace and scale of their deployment. They may achieve this through reducing investment hurdle rates (by decreasing risk), increasing gearing levels to reduce the overall cost of capital and/or improving the project’s IRR to meet the investors’ thresholds. However, the need for these levers and the decision on which (if any) to employ, will vary from project to project and these factors should be assessed as part of the financial structuring of a project.
The financial levers available to Scottish Government can be broadly grouped into the following categories:
- Capital funding;
- Revenue funding;
- Investment; and
- Business model support.
The need for these levers and the decision on which (if any) to employ, will vary from project to project and these factors should be assessed as part of the financial structuring of a project. This section will summarise the key elements of these funding mechanisms and discuss their implications for resource demand, balance sheet treatment and exist strategy.
Capital funding
Capital funding uses capital budgets to provide gap funding for heat networks. This may be in the form of, for example, a capital grant or repayable assistance.
Capital grant
Capital Grants are allocated to fund activities aligned with government priorities, benefiting public or private entities that contribute to specific public outcomes. These grants come with conditions that must be met to avoid repayment obligations. In Scotland, Repayable Assistance is typically preferred over Capital Grants for heat networks, with the possibility of repayment if profitability exceeds expectations. Administering Capital Grants demands significant resources, particularly during application assessment, construction monitoring and post-commissioning for a period of 3-5 years. The treatment of Capital Grants on balance sheets depends on various factors, including the grant’s size and terms, which may affect asset classification. After fulfilling all grant conditions, the grantee is released from obligations, but the grantor may benefit from maintaining a relationship for continued data access and to support future expansions.
Repayable assistance
Repayable Assistance functions similarly to Capital Grants, with the distinction that it must be repaid partially or in full if the project exceeds certain performance-related thresholds in the initial years of operation. This mechanism is designed to prevent grantees from benefiting excessively from public subsidies. Managing Repayable Assistance requires additional resource to evaluate and challenge financial returns and reports from grantees. The treatment of Repayable Assistance on the balance sheet is comparable to that of Capital Grants, with the classification determined by the delivery model, the proportion of Repayable Assistance to total capital costs of the project and the terms of risk allocation. The exit strategy involves ceasing monitoring once grant conditions are satisfied, which may take longer than for Capital Grants.
Revenue funding
Certain financial levers utilise revenue budgets to fund heat networks, such as revenue grants, heat purchase agreements (or demand guarantees) and outcomes-based funding.
Revenue grant
Revenue Grants fund activities that support government priorities and public benefits, with both public and private entities eligible as grantees. In Scotland, Revenue Grants have often been combined with Repayable Assistance and, from an investor perspective, can help mitigate revenue risk which is one of the most significant barriers to heat network investment. The grants, which are not typically repayable unless certain grant conditions are not met, can be performance-linked to ensure drawdowns align with financial need. The administration of Revenue Grants can be resource-intensive, as they require stringent monitoring across the project lifecycle. The treatment of these grants on government balance sheets is influenced by several factors, including the grants’ size and the delivery model. After fulfilling grant conditions, which may take many years, the grantor’s monitoring ceases, but a continued relationship with the grantee can be beneficial for gathering data and supporting future expansions.
Heat purchase
Heat Network developers require a level of assurance to ensure there will be a sufficient customer-base to make their investment viable. This assurance is crucial as it influences the decision to invest and the capacity to future-proof networks for anticipated demand growth. Anchor loads (significant heat demands that are likely to be the first connections to the heat network, typically large public buildings with sustained high heat demand) are essential for making networks investable. The Scottish Government could provide demand assurance through mechanisms such as Heat Purchase Agreements, where public buildings are offered as anchor loads without a guaranteed minimum demand and Demand Guarantees, which involve a “take or pay” commitment for a minimum quantity of heat.
These agreements require resources for due diligence, negotiation and ongoing monitoring, often requiring specialist expertise and governance to effectively manage the associated risks. The balance sheet treatment of these agreements may lead to on-balance-sheet classification of project assets, if risk transfer is diluted. The exit strategy for such agreements is to have a fixed contract term, after which they can be re-procured or renegotiated, with “take or pay” guarantees being time-bound and including withdrawal clauses under certain conditions, such as when sufficient third-party demand is secured.
Outcomes based funding
Outcomes based funding is a financial mechanism that focuses on achieving specific, pre-agreed outcomes rather than outputs. It operates on the principle of “payment by results”, where organisations (typically local authorities, though could also apply to a private company) invest in infrastructure to deliver set outcomes. If these outcomes are met, Scottish Government would make regular payments over a set period, reflecting the pre-agreed value of the outcomes achieved. For example, these outcomes may be successful commissioning of the heat network, the number of heat network connections, carbon savings and/or the social value created. This model shares risk between the organisation and the government, however it is resource-intensive, requiring careful project selection, development and ongoing monitoring to ensure that the agreed outcomes are met. While it may not be efficient for smaller projects due to the resources needed for monitoring, Outcomes Based Funding can support infrastructure without being classified on the Scottish Government’s balance sheet, if the delivery risk is fully transferred to the grantee. The monitoring period is predefined, often spanning 20-25 years, with revenue payments contingent on achieving these outcomes.
Investment
Equity
Special Purpose Vehicles (SPVs) are often formed for infrastructure projects. SPVs allow for project assets and risks to be held within the vehicle itself and enable investors to make more targeted investments into specific asset classes that align with their desired risk/return profiles. SPVs require one or more shareholders to own the company, appoint its board of directors and provide the necessary funding, typically through equity or shareholder loans as subordinated debt. These SPVs can be solely owned by one entity or jointly owned by multiple organisations, which may include a mix of public and private sector shareholders and can also take the form of corporate joint ventures.
The Scottish Government can participate in SPVs as an equity investor, either independently or in collaboration with private sector partners. This model affords Scottish Government a degree of control over the project’s strategic direction and the opportunity to share in the profits, but also exposes government to the associated investment risks. In heat network projects, government might invest in the network’s distribution assets and later recoup this investment through ‘use of system’ fees from other parties utilising the network. Managing such equity investments requires a long-term commitment and specialised expertise in investment structuring, due diligence and governance, ensuring that the government’s interests and public funds are appropriately safeguarded. The impact of these investments on the government’s balance sheet is influenced by the degree of control the government has as a shareholder, the size of the equity stake and the risk transfer mechanisms in place. In terms of exit strategies, the Scottish Government could sell its equity stake in the SPV once the project reaches a stage of profitable operation, allowing for the recycling of capital into other projects.
Debt finance
Debt finance is a financing mechanism where the government lends money to public or private sector borrowers, who are then obligated to repay the loan with interest according to the terms set out in a loan agreement. There are three key features of debt financing: the seniority of the debt, which determines the order of repayments from project cash flows between debt and equity holders; the security of loans, which may be secured or unsecure; and financial covenants that serve as safeguards for the lender by monitoring the borrower’s financial health and triggering repayment in case of covenant breaches.
Scottish Government could establish a revolving loan facility aimed at supporting projects during their riskier construction and early operational stages, with the possibility of refinancing by the private sector once more stable operations are achieved. This approach facilitates the recycling of capital into new projects and aligns with the preferences of long-term investors seeking lower-risk opportunities. Administering such finance requires significant resources for project selection, development and monitoring, with the balance sheet treatment determined by factors such as loan terms, size and risk. The exit strategy allows for the recovery of investments through repayments or refinancing, potentially leading to capital receipts that can be reinvested or the sale of loan portfolios to investors, thus enabling ongoing economic development.
Loan guarantee
A Loan Guarantee by the Scottish Government provides a safety net over debt repayments to lenders, covering either the entire loan or a portion, with the aim of reducing the cost of capital for borrowers, such as heat network developers. This can make investments more feasible and enable access to loans that might otherwise be unavailable due to risk considerations. While initially having limited budgetary impact, provided the risk of the guarantee being called upon is low, there are Subsidy Control implications that may be offset by charging a fee for the guarantee. Implementing a Loan Guarantee scheme requires resources for design, project assessment, due diligence and ongoing monitoring, requiring specialist expertise and governance to manage financial and reputational risks. The balance sheet treatment of a Loan Guarantee is influenced by various factors, including the delivery model and the size and terms of the guarantee. The Scottish Government’s exit strategy involves offering guarantees for a specific term with withdrawal clauses, allowing for the possibility of refinancing and withdrawing the guarantee once the project is operational and profitable.
Business Model Support
This section outlines common business model support mechanisms in the UK, such as Regulated Asset Base, Cap and Floor and Contracts for Difference, which could potentially be adapted for heat networks. These Business Model Supports would draw upon revenue budgets to heat networks. While these models are theoretically adaptable, they face significant challenges that require careful consideration to tailor them to the heat network sector.
Regulated asset base
A RAB is a regulatory framework that measures the capital used in a regulated entity, where companies are granted a licence by an economic regulator to charge users regulated prices for services linked to an infrastructure asset (operating on a “user pays” model). The regulator sets or caps the charges that the operator can levy for a certain period, reducing pricing risk for investors and ensuring charges allow for the efficient recovery of costs incurred by the operator in the interest of customers. Charges can be controlled through a revenue cap, which protects investors from both price and market existence/demand risk, or a price cap, which only shields from price risk.
Hybrid RAB models, combining a price cap with government cash injections, are being explored for Carbon Capture, Transport and Storage infrastructure to mitigate market existence/demand risk. The RAB operator’s prices are calculated to enable recovery of operating expenditure, depreciation costs and an allowed return on capital, balancing risk reduction for investors with cost-efficiency incentives. Charges are reviewed and reset periodically by the regulator in consultation with the operator and customers, protecting investors from subsidy risk within each regulatory period. If applied to heat networks, a RAB model could significantly shield investors from price and market existence risks. However, current regulatory and policy frameworks for heat networks are not conducive to the model’s deployment at this time.
Cap and floor
The cap and floor mechanism aims to offer investors a degree of revenue certainty while maintaining incentives for efficient operation. The floor guarantees a minimum revenue, covering at least operating costs and senior debt service, thus limiting investors’ risk and enabling financing. Conversely, the cap sets a maximum revenue, with any excess being repaid, limiting the investors’ returns.
A revenue sharing arrangement can be incorporated, where excess revenue is split between investors and user/taxpayers, rather than being fully retained by investors or returned to funders. The mechanism’s terms, including cap and floor levels and the applicable period, are contractually agreed, reducing subsidy risk as the support cannot be abruptly withdrawn. This arrangement mitigates price risk and market existence/demand risk by assuring minimum revenue, independent of demand, although it does not protect against cost variability.
Currently utilised by Ofgem for financing electricity interconnectors and considered for electricity storage in the UK, the mechanism is funded by electricity users or, alternatively, could adopt a ‘taxpayer pays’ model with government involvement. For heat networks, while ‘Cap and Floor’ offers some risk protection, it requires careful implementation to avoid disincentivising network operators from acquiring new customers or charging competitive rates. Additionally, the ‘taxpayer pays’ model could lead to significant financial exposure for the Scottish Government.
Contracts for difference
CfDs are a support mechanism that offers investors a fixed, contractually agreed ‘strike price’ per unit of output. This helps to mitigate potential subsidy risk for investors due to the subsidy being a binding, contractual obligation. The strike price may be fixed or index-linked and CfDs can be signed with the government or a government-backed third party, with funding from taxpayers or users. The ‘reference price’, generally the market price, determines the subsidy level during each CfD period, with investors receiving a subsidy if the market price is below the strike price, or paying back if it’s above. This support incentivises operational efficiency, as investors are exposed to cost variability risk and only receive support once the project is operational.
Although CfDs are used extensively for renewable electricity generation in the UK, applying this mechanism to heat networks poses challenges. It is difficult to define a reference price due to the absence of a wholesale heat market and the localised nature of heat network pricing, which relies on local factors such as the availability of low carbon heat sources and customer demand. Without regulated heat pricing or an accepted methodology for setting a wholesale price, the application of CfDs to heat networks remains complex.
Appendix B – International experience supplementary information
The supplementary narrative below provides a brief historical overview, a summary of the public financing levers available and a summary of the regulatory framework for each country. Additionally, the supplementary narrative is followed by additional information regarding the use of state-owned infrastructure banks.
Rest of the UK (rUK)
Overview
Heat network technology has been in the UK since the 1950s where the Pimlico District Heating Undertaking was the first true district heat network in the UK. The network connected 1,600 council homes to the waste heat generated by Battersea Power Station. However, heat networks fell out of popularity in the 1980s and 1990s as the UK shifted away from high rise flats but regained attention in the 2000s as energy prices increased and financial investment cases became more attractive[24].
Public financing levers:
The UK Government is aligned with international comparators offering up front capital grants in addition to grants for existing underperforming heat networks to encourage efficiency upgrades. These are as follows:
England and Wales have a designated heat network fund, the GHNF which was set up by DESNZ and managed by Triple Point Heat Networks Investment Management[25]. The GHNF is the next iteration of grant funding succeeding the Heat Networks Investment Project (HNIP) loans. The GHNF aims to provide up to 50% of upfront construction costs with the aim of making projects more investable for private sector. The GHNF initially had £288m of capital available but further funds of £485m has been additionally allocated.[26]
DESNZ has also recently published the Heat Network Efficiency Scheme (HNES)[27] which provides both capital grants to part fund installation and revenue grants to fund procurement or mobilisation of external third-party support to carry out Optimisation Studies. This scheme is targeting existing district heating or communal heating projects in England and Wales that are operating sub-optimally and resulting in poor outcomes for customers and operators.
Regulatory structures
Refer to section 4.2 for the UK regulatory structure overview.
Market ownership
The rest of the UK has a mixed market ownership profile with local authority owned, joint ventures and privately owned heat networks. For example, The London Borough of Enfield own the Energetik heat network, a growing network with its own energy from waste plant providing the heat for the network. Vattenfall own Bristol City’s heat network and work in partnership with Argent and Barnet council[28]. There are also private equity backed heat network developers such as 1Energy backed by Asper Investment who have four projects under development, including the Bradford Energy Network. Local authority budget constraints will mean a continued role for private sector involvement. For example, the UK Government’s routes to market proposals focus on the Concession and Joint Venture models.
The Netherlands
Overview
The Netherlands started exploring district heating in the 1920s, but the sector developed significantly following the 1970s oil crisis which prompted a search for more efficient and sustainable heating solutions. The country has since been expanding its heat network infrastructure, focusing on sustainability and the use of residual heat from industrial processes.
Public financing levers
The Netherlands is expanding its heat network market by providing capital grants for qualifying projects and incentivising individuals to connect to heat network via individual grants.
This includes the Heat Networks Investment Grant (referred to as the WIS programme), which supports the construction of new, efficient heat networks. This €400m programme was open between July 2024 and December 2024 and specifically targeted heat networks that help existing homes transition away from natural gas (capped at €30m available per project). The programme funds up to 45% of capital costs and aims to bridge the ‘unprofitable top’ of heating network investments (the difference between the eligible investment costs and the operating profit)[29]. The subsidy can never be more than 100% of this ‘unprofitable top’. WIS can provide support to full projects as well as individual consumers, as it also provides up to €7,000 for small scale consumer connections.
Regulatory structure
The sector has been regulated in the Netherlands since 2014. The legislation was updated with the 2020 Heat Act 2.0, which outlines the requirements for creating a reliable, affordable and sustainable sector. The Act oversees pricing (including price regulation for smaller customers), licensing, private sector profits and customer protections. The Act also sets price caps to ensure that all heat network operators provide price information in a standard format, allowing for greater transparency to consumers.[30] Regarding tariff setting, the Authority for Consumers and Markets (ACM) ensures that costs for a household with a district heat connection are less than an individual condensing gas boiler.[31]
The Netherlands is also developing the Collective Heat Supply Act which aims to bring the heat network sector into public ownership. The Act will look to incorporate a ‘cost plus’ model where tariffs are based on actual cost plus a reasonable regulated rate of return[32]. However, the Act still needs to finalise ownership arrangements between heat generating companies and operators.
Additionally, the Netherlands mandates connections. Municipalities are required to prepare heat plans for their respective areas. This specifies that new buildings have to be connected to a heat network for ten years as part of a heat plan.31 Furthermore, the Dutch Building Code states that a house will get a mandatory connection to a heat network when the network is within 40 metres.
Lastly, the Netherlands amended the Gas Act in 2018 to ban new buildings from connecting to the gas grid and introduced a new incentive scheme (SDE+). SDE+ provides subsidies to companies which generate renewable energy or reduce their CO2 emissions on a large scale. Similarly, the Netherlands will ban new fossil fuel-based heating systems from 2026.[33]
Market ownership
The Dutch heat network market has a large level of private finance penetration with more than 90% of heat networks managed by private heat companies (partly through Public-Private Partnerships) and less than 10% are owned fully by public sector heat companies. For example, Vattenfall (a Swedish state-owned company), Eneco Energy (privately owned) and Ennatuurlijk (Dutch utility company) dominate the market owning approximately 90% of the country’s district heating networks as heat infrastructure has not yet been separated by law from the production and supply of heat (unlike gas and electricity).[34] As such, in 2022, the Dutch government first considered part nationalisation of heat networks via the Collective Heat Supply Act (WCW) with the intention of protecting public interests such as affordability, reliability and sustainability.[35] The intention is that municipalities could own 51% of the network, to help encourage consumers to stop using gas fired central heating. The Dutch government believe more citizens would be willing to switch to heat networks if they are not forced into a model that requires the use of a private sector supplier.
This initiative was met with hostility from operators. Ennatuurlijk withdrew from development of the regional district heating grid Twente, as they were not clear how their assets and investments would be valued at the end of the transition period. Whilst the private sector supports opportunities to give more important roles to local authorities, there are concerns about losing control of the strategy and operations of the heating assets whilst remaining financially responsible for them.
Details and practicalities are still being refined, but it is envisaged that existing private network operators would be given a 20-30 year grace period to recoup their initial investments made before transferring ownership to municipalities35.
GERMANY
Overview
Germany’s district heating has its roots in the late 19th century, but it became more widespread after World War II, particularly in East Germany. Today, Germany continues to invest in district heating as part of its energy transition, with a focus on integrating renewable energy sources and improving efficiency.
Public financing levers
The German Government supports the development of heat networks up front via feasibility, capex funding and additionally operating cost subsidies for renewable projects. Individuals and building owners are also incentivised via grant funding to upgrade heating or connect and further rewarded for an accelerated transition. The levers include legislation where there is €3bn to support the development of 5th generation heat networks[36]. The previous legislation provided funding covering feasibility (up to 60% of costs) and construction (up to 50%). A new BEW fund provides 50% or €600k and 40% of eligible investment/operating cost subsidy, however this is only applicable to projects with 75% renewable heat sources.
Additionally, companies, landlords of rented family homes and condominium owners are now eligible for financing from KfW (Germany’s state-owned infrastructure development bank) for installing low carbon heating systems or connecting to existing heat networks. The scheme can provide up to 30% of investment costs (plus an additional 5% for more efficient heat pumps)[37]. A €2,500 fixed support payment for efficient biomass heating systems is included and a speed bonus is applied if existing gas or oil heating systems are replaced by 2028. The scheme also can support individual home-owners with up to 70% of costs and municipalities will also be able to apply for support in late 2024.
Regulatory structures
Germany has the largest scale heat network market in Europe (illustrated by Figure 9) but it is unregulated. Instead, Germany has regulated electricity and gas markets and operates in a similar manner to Finland, with oversight from competition authorities. Standard terms and conditions for supply of heat networks are defined by Federal law.
Additionally, Germany amended the Building and Energy Act 2020 in September 2023[38] requiring municipalities to:
- Phase out oil and gas heating systems
- develop heating plans by 2028, including a regional heating approach
- that all heating systems installed in Germany after 1 January 2024 must be powered by at least 65% renewable energy
Initially the amendments will apply to new builds but extend to existing and under construction properties too.
The Local Heat Planning Act (WPG) also legally obliges district heating companies to decarbonise their networks[39]. Therefore, residents within these areas are removed from the transitioning process with responsibilities outsourced to professional entities such as private companies or municipal utilities. The WPG also requires building owners to switch from fossil fuels to renewable heating technologies and municipalities with a population over 100,000 to have draft heat plans by June 2026 (smaller municipalities by June 2028) identifying which heating technologies are available to connect to[40].
Market ownership
The German heat network market is in transition with several large heat networks becoming municipality owned. For example, in December 2023 Berlin’s municipality acquired the Berlin heat network for €1.4bn from Vattenfall, showing how one of Germany’s largest heat networks has moved into public sector ownership[41]. The heat network was bought by the state of Berlin as they are committed to re-municipalising infrastructure and reversing privatisations to gain more influence over the city’s district heating and gas supply.[42] They also believe the company will be profitable and key in moving toward climate neutrality. The state was able to buy the heat network via a state-owned financing company which received equity from the state budget and loans from Investitionsbank Berlin which the senate backed by a state guarantee.[43]
As it stands, private companies, for example large energy suppliers, hold a significant share of the market and municipalities owning and operating the other significant proportion of the market.[44] The small remainder of the market is made up via large industrial companies who operate their own networks for industrial processes and heating factory buildings. Whilst market share is small, it is significant in industrial areas. Large public buildings also have their own networks, for example, universities, hospitals and other public sector buildings.
FINLAND
Overview
Finland has a long history of district heating, dating back to the 1950s. The country’s cold climate makes district heating a practical choice for urban areas. Finnish district heating has evolved to use a mix of energy sources, including a significant proportion of renewable and waste energy and it is considered a key component of Finland’s strategy to reduce greenhouse gas emissions.
Public financing levers
The mature Finnish market is upgrading, refurbishing and decarbonising existing networks and is less focussed construction of new networks. The Finnish Government is facilitating the heat transition upgrades by Investing €21.8m across six projects for waste heat recovery, heat pump solutions and energy storage solutions to help move away from carbon-based heating[45]. Similarly, the Ministry of Economic Affairs and Employment has allocated €469m of energy aid from EU funding for renewable projects via the national Recovery and Resilience Plan[46]. However, there does not appear to be a bespoke heat network capital grant fund. Additionally, Finland is providing grant support for end users – €2k-€4 for heat exchangers and €0.5k-€2k for balanced and adjusted heating systems. Furthermore, the Government are introducing a new tax credit scheme to give projects up to €150m worth of tax credits.[47] The idea is once green projects (renewable projects aiding the transition to net zero) become operationally profitable, a tax credit would aid cash flows making the project more feasible and investible.
Regulatory Structures
Finland established a self-governing framework, where there is no official national regulation but instead a clear set of technical codes which form the industry standard[48]. Finland did have legislation with mandatory connections, which was repealed in 2019, as mandatory connections were deemed anti-competitive. Finland has alternative renewable energy heat sources to choose from.
The Finnish government also introduced a €90m scheme to incentivise the move away from carbon-based fuels to biomass CHP networks and €45m to non-combustion technologies (e.g. heat pumps).
Market ownership
The Finnish market currently has a low level of private finance penetration with heat networks being predominantly municipality owned. However, the Finnish Government is seeking foreign investment into the sector, as it recognises public sector budget pressure and the need to attract private sector investment. For example, an important driver behind the introduction of private finance is the requirement to refurbish existing networks as they become old and inefficient.
Private investors note that Finland is very attractive due to the stability of the heat network sector which allows institutional investors to gain comfort and certainty in their investment.[49]
Additionally, Finland has seen private equity infrastructure funds acquire individual networks. For example, the largest heat network owned by Fortum Energy (a state-owned energy company) was recently acquired in 2021[50] by a private equity infrastructure investor (Partners Group) demonstrating the shifting landscape.
Therefore, Finland is demonstrating both the need for private investment as local authorities are capital constrained and offers a stable asset class to invest in an established market.
SWEDEN
Overview
Sweden has been a pioneer in district heating since the early 20th century. The first commercial district heating system was introduced in 1948. The oil crisis of the 1970s also accelerated the transition to district heating, which now utilises a high proportion of renewable energy sources. Sweden’s extensive use of district heating is often cited as a model for other countries.
Public financing levers
The Swedish market is well developed and mature. The Government are using a range of capital funding, personal grant incentives and tax exemptions to expand and refine the heat network market. For example, the Swedish government can provide small grants up to 60,000 SEK (approximately £4,300) for conversion to a new heating system moving away from direct-acting electricity or gas for single family homes[51].
Additionally, Sweden also provides tax exemptions where renewable energy heating sources are exempt from energy and carbon dioxide taxes.[52]
Regulatory structures
The Swedish district heat market was deregulated in 1996 which brought issues surrounding high prices and lack of transparency. Subsequently, light-touch voluntary regulation was reintroduced via the District Heating Act (2008)[53] and overseen by the Swedish Energy Markets Inspectorate (who also regulate electricity and gas). For example, voluntary initiatives for pricing transparency where the Swedish Competition Authority can investigate any signs of potential market abuse. Additionally, the Swedish Energy Market Inspectorate also have standard contract terms for delivery of district heat networks to ensure a consistent delivery approach across the market.
Whilst there is regulatory oversight, connections are not mandatory in Sweden. Although Swedish municipalities are responsible for developing energy plans and have a monopoly planning of district heating developments, building owners decide on their sustainable heating source as long as they follow environmental standards[54].
Market ownership
The heat network sector in Sweden currently has a mixture of privately and publicly owned networks and operators. For example, the heat network assets are owned by the local authorities and municipalities or the state-owned operator Vattenfall, but there are also private sector operators such as Eon and Fortum. Additionally, Sweden also has some joint venture structures for example between the City of Stockholm and Achiale (private investors).
A recent example of private investment was the sale of 50% of the Fortum (a Finnish state-owned energy company) holding in Stockholm Exergi to a group of European institutional investors including pension funds.[55] This demonstrates institutional investors recognising the stable returns provided by established heat networks and the opportunity they present to private investors.
ESTONIA
Overview
Estonia’s district heating systems were developed during the Soviet era, with the first systems established in the 1940s and 1950s. After regaining independence, Estonia reformed its district heating sector, improving efficiency and incorporating more renewable energy sources. The country has one of the highest rates of district heating coverage in Europe.
Public financing levers
As Estonia’s heat network sector is well advanced, there are limited grants and subsidies available. However, Estonia is encouraging refinement of their heat network market via investment support, compensation schemes and individual connection grants. Examples include the recent €20m investment by Gren (a private energy company) into Tartu, Parnu and Ida-Virumaa heat networks. Gren also received €4.2m of financial support from the Estonian Environment Investment Centre via the European Cohesion Fund and European Regional Development Fund[56].
Other forms of public funding included the Government compensation scheme for household energy consumed to counter the rising energy prices[57]. For example, the state compensates up to 80 percent of the part of the average monthly price that exceeds 80 euros/MWh for district heating. The subsidies are automatically applied to the district heating bills.
Additionally, the Estonian Business and Innovation Agency will provide up to a €10,000 grant for small residential buildings for facilitating the connection to an existing heat network[58].
Regulatory structures
The Estonian district heat sector is regulated by the District Heating Act 2003 where heat operators must coordinate the price of heat sold to the consumer with the Competition Authority. Additionally, Estonia uses a dynamic pricing structure where changes in the heat price are influenced by changes in the underlying fuel prices and also the required investment that needs to be made in the heat network sector. The District Heating Act also stipulates that within district heating regions connection to the network is mandatory for all located in the region[59]. Furthermore, municipal governments within Finland, for example Tartu, mandated new and renovated buildings in district heating zones must be connected to a heat network.
Market ownership
The Estonian market has a high degree of private finance penetration as many heat networks are owned by private equity infrastructure funds. For example, Utilitas is the largest operator of heat networks in Estonia and is majority owned by an infrastructure fund. Similarly, recent transactions such as Gren acquiring Viljandi district heating company[60] and Partners Group acquiring a stake in the Finnish state-owned operator Fortum operating in Estonia demonstrate the attractiveness of a mature and developed heat network sector to private investors.
The role of state-owned infrastructure banks
In addition to the public financing levers noted in section 5.2, there are also state-owned infrastructure banks that can support the heat network sector. Table 7 provides a summary of the banks and their financing products. Examples relevant to heat networks are discussed below.
Table 7: State-owned infrastructure banks
|
Country |
Name |
Financing products |
|
rUK |
National Wealth Fund/ UK Infrastructure Bank (NWF/UKIB) |
|
|
The Netherlands |
Bank Nederlandse Gemeenten (BNG) |
|
|
Germany |
KfW Development Bank |
|
|
Finland, Sweden, Estonia |
Nordic Investment Bank (NIB) |
|
Source: EY analysis
Relevant Examples:
- rUK: National Wealth Fund (NWF) was set up in2021 and allocated £27.8bn of capital to deploy from the UK Government. Heat networks are a key strategic pillar for the bank.
NWF explored a connection charge facility[61] to incentivise and fund connection to heat networks and give demand assurance. However, whilst the public sector like the facility to help develop a heat network with the cost of connection rolled into the capex facility, the private sector need clarity on who the risk and responsibility sits with (e.g. project co), and proof of concept to buy in.
NWF also look to provide project gap funding development expenditure and capital expenditure to make heat networks commercially viable for private sector investors. Similarly, the bank is considering early phase guarantees/loans to help crowd in private finance by bridging up front development risk and the early years of projects.
NWF has heat networks as a strategic investment pillar and has the capital available to deploy. However, from our stakeholder engagement sessions an additional barrier to deployment is that heat networks are not yet commercially viable enough to enable what NWF can offer.
- Germany: KfW is the state-owned development bank with a commitment to sustainable infrastructure. The bank has recently introduced support for landlords, homeowners and municipalities to claim grant funding for connecting to existing heat networks or other renewable heating sources. The scheme supports those installing/gaining access to low carbon heating systems with up to 35% of investment costs.[62]
- Nordics & Estonia: NIB was established as an intergovernmental bank between Denmark, Finland, Iceland, Norway and Sweden in 1975. Estonia, Latvia and Lithuania become members of the bank in 2005. The bank has approximately €8.4bn in authorised capital[63]. Whilst not a country in focus, NIB provided €18m loan to finance upgrades[64] to existing heat networks in Riga, Latvia in October 2024, demonstrating how infrastructure banks can support established heat networks.
- Scotland: Scottish National Investment Bank (SNIB) has net zero as one of its key missions. The bank has identified there could be opportunities around decarbonising and expanding existing heat networks as well as financing new networks and connections[65]. The bank does not have any publications regarding bespoke financing solutions for heat networks yet. This presents the opportunity to shape heat network solutions by analysing the market looking at other international innovations.
Appendix C – Major UK regulators: a summary of objectives
Ofgem (The Office of Gas and Electricity Markets)
Ofgem are responsible for regulating the electricity and gas markets, implement measures that protect consumers and promote competition within the sector. Within the UK, there is a well-established group of entities who operate across the generation, transmission and distribution landscape. Generating firms provide the power, transmission networks transport the power and distribution networks move it into residential and commercial premises with electricity and gas retailers being the interface between the energy market and end consumers. The natural gas sector follows a similar delivery structure where gas is extracted, refined and piped into buildings for heating and energy generation (Ofgem, 2024).
Ofwat (The Water Services Regulation Authority)
Ofwat oversees the water and wastewater sector ensuring that water companies provide high quality services at fair prices to consumers whilst ensuring the security of long-term water supplies. Water utilities are responsible for treating and supplying clean water, as well as managing the collection and processing of wastewater. Entities provide these services under strict regulatory supervision to maintain public health and environmental standards. The waste management sector addresses the collection, treatment and disposal of waste, including recycling (Ofwat, 2024).
Ofcom (The Office of Communications)
Ofcom is responsible for regulating the broadcasting, telecommunications and postal industries through maintaining the integrity of communication services. Telecommunications serve a critical role in maintaining connectivity within an ever-increasing digital environment, providing phone services, mobile networks, internet access and the infrastructure that underpins them all (Ofcom, 2024).
ORR (The Office of Rail and Road)
The ORR is responsible for ensuring the safety, reliability and efficiency of the railways whilst protecting the interests of rail and road users. They supervise network operators, such as Network Rail, through licensing to ensure compliance with health and safety law as well as competition law whilst also enforcing economic regulation (ORR, 2024).
CAA (The Civil Aviation Authority)
The CAA maintains a high level of safety in the aviation industry whilst representing the interests of consumers and wider public. It regulates various aspects of airline operations and aircraft management whilst also enforcing economic regulation through controlling pricing at major UK airports to prevent the abuse of market power and ensuring fair charges for passengers and airlines (CAA, 2024).
Appendix D – Overview of utility comparators methodology
The different characteristics of utility sectors have been examined acknowledging the following key attributes associated with the development of heat networks:
- A sector that is immature and in the early stages of its development and growth cycle within the UK
- A sector that provides services direct to its customers (retail in nature) and therefore exposed to a degree of demand, payment and operational risks akin to more conventional services provided in the private sector
- A sector that will be subject to incremental development of heat network infrastructure that will be dependent on accelerated connection of residential and commercial customers, ideally supported through zoning and policy in regard to the mandating such connections
- A sector that must address the affordability challenge of decarbonisation, particularly the cost of transitioning from conventional fossil-based energy sources like gas boilers; noting also that air source heat pumps are increasingly used as the counterfactual cost benchmark when developing an economic case
- The nature of the investment in heat networks, that involves significant upfront capital expenditure, requires funding that can be invested or repaid over extended time of 25 to 40 years, thus requiring investors and developers to take a long-term view of expected return on capital
- A sector that has historically and for the foreseeable future (3 to 4 years) been supported by investment support from the Scottish and UK Governments
Initial analysis was undertaken which focussed on the maturities and similarities between various utility sectors and heat networks across 39 regulated utilities covering electricity, water, telecommunications, rail and air regulation against the criteria listed below, in Table 8. Based upon the preliminary analysis, 17 utilities were taken forward for further examination, which is discussed in Appendix K.
Table 8: Criteria for longlist analysis of maturity and similarity between utility sectors and heat networks
|
Long List Methodology | |
|---|---|
|
Area evaluated |
Description |
|
Maturity of Sector | This reflects the stage of development and stability of the sector within the utility industry as a whole: |
|
Similarities to heat network | This area examines the extent to which the utility sector shares similar characteristics to heat networks. It considers factors such as: |
A shortlist was then derived in accordance with an assessment of the following criteria set out in Table 9.
Table 9: Assessment criteria for the shortlist
|
Short List Methodology | |
|---|---|
|
Area evaluated |
Description |
|
Investment Time Horizon |
This indicates the anticipated timeframe one expects an investor to hold their investment to make an appropriate return on its investment. It can range from the short-term (a few years) to long-term (several decades) depending upon the useful and economic life of an asset, contractual arrangements, market conditions and funding solution. |
|
Retail versus Wholesale Activity |
This distinguishes between services that are provided direct to end consumers (retail) such as those in the water and sewerage sector and those activities that operate higher up in the supply chain within a wholesale market, such as electricity generation. |
|
Stakeholders |
This details the parties with an interest or influence over the sector including the customer base, user of assets base, owner of asset and who is subsidising the regulatory regime. |
|
Investment Support |
This refers to the mechanisms, incentives and financial environment and structure that exist to incentivize investment in the sector. It covers areas such as government grants/subsidies, regulatory frameworks like a RAB model alongside any market mechanisms such as Contracts for Difference (CfDs). |
|
Areas of Regulatory / Financial Difference |
This identifies some of the unique regulatory and financial characteristics of the sector in terms of market operations, investment models and compliance requirements. |
|
Risk Profile |
This evaluates the types and level of risk present within each sector. Whilst risk can be subjective and dependent on the risk appetite of the related party, it encompasses design, construction, operations, maintenance, revenue, availability and revenue risk (demand and bad debt). |
Appendix E – Key characteristics of utility sectors evaluated
The table below summarises the key characteristics of each utility sector evaluated within Section 6.
|
Risk Profile |
Sector |
Investment time horizon | |
|---|---|---|---|
|
Heat networks |
Further to achieving commercial operation of the heat network, there is material demand and revenue risk due to the uncertainty and timing of commercial and residential connections. |
Operates essentially as a retail business whereby sales are direct to end customers and therefore subject to revenue risk (demand and bad debt risk). |
Long term investment time horizon (between 20 and 40 years) due to large upfront capital expenditure, thin operating margins governed by the competitive pricing relative to the counterfactual of gas boilers and/or air source heat pumps. |
|
Offshore wind |
Once at commercial operations, projects are essentially at full operational capacity and connected to the national grid for energy distribution and as such no demand risk. Some availability/revenue risk due to uncontrollable nature of wind. |
Conventionally operates in the wholesale market (direct to grid). |
Long term investment return of around 15 years commensurate with the term of a CfD due to significant upfront capital costs and competitive bid process for revenue pricing. |
|
Household Water & Sewerage |
Demand/revenue risk from users and price reviews by regulator respectively. Large operating expenditure to meet quality assurance requirements. |
In England and Wales, operates in the retail sector which inherently creates revenue risk, in particular, bad debt risk. In Scotland, water is devolved with charges occurring alongside the council tax system. |
Long term investment returns due to significant upfront capital costs, maintenance costs and price reviews for revenue pricing to ensure appropriate inter-generational cost recovery from customers in line with the useful and economic life of underlying assets (25 to 40 years). |
|
CCUS |
Currently a sector proposing to utilise unproven technology at scale, often referred to as a FOAK project (First of a Kind) and therefore subject to material design, construction and commissioning risk. Once commercial operation is achieved, there is material demand and revenue risk due to the uncertainty and timing of connections. |
Operates essentially as a retail business whereby sales are direct to end customers and therefore would be subject to revenue risk (demand and bad debt risk) without regulatory funding support mechanism until the sector matures. |
Long term investment returns due to significant upfront capital costs, maintenance costs and pricing reviews to ensure an appropriate return on initial investment acknowledging the useful and economic life of underlying assets (20 to 40 years). |
Sources: EY, Ofwat (2024)
Appendix F – Timeline of regulatory developments
The figure below represents a timeline of regulatory development across CCUS, offshore wind and household water & sewerage sectors.
CCUS

Offshore Wind

Household Water & Sewerage

Appendix G – Detailed overview of offshore wind sector
The below provides a detailed overview of offshore wind regulation within the UK alongside the regulatory structure and financing mechanisms within the sector.
Overview
Offshore wind electricity generation in the UK is a rapidly expanding sector which plays a pivotal role in the nation’s transition to renewable energy and the achievement of its climate change goals. The regulatory framework is overseen by Ofgem who ensure that the sector operates efficiently and contributes to the UK’s energy security since the early development of the sector, with regulation becoming more prominent following the significant expansion of the sector in the 2000s. Ofgem is aided by the Crown Estate and Crown Estate Scotland who own the seabed around the UK and are responsible for awarding leases to developers for offshore wind development.
Offshore wind farms are subject to a range of regulations, from environmental impact assessments to marine spatial planning, ensuring that developments are carried out responsibly. Ofgem’s regulatory activities encompass various aspects of offshore wind generation. These include connections to the national grid and ensuring that the market operates effectively to facilitate investment and main secure and sustainable electricity supplied.
Regulatory Structure
Following on from the Energy Act 2004, Ofgem has continued to regulate the sector and is adapting its approach and offering new support mechanisms as deployment continues to grow. Ofgem’s regulation of offshore wind is structured around several key elements designed to promote the development of the sector whilst ensuring efficiency, competition and the protection of consumers interests:
- Licensing – generation licences are issued to offshore wind farm operators which set out the conditions operators must meet to legally generate electricity;
- Support mechanisms – provide long term price/revenue stability and encourage investment in offshore wind through guaranteeing a fixed price for the electricity generated;
- Grid connections and access – administrating the connections from offshore wind farms to the national grid through Offshore Transmission Owners (OFTOs) who own and operate the transmission assets;
- Market oversight – monitoring of the market to prevent anti-competitive practices whilst also ensuring offshore electricity generation is integrated safely to aid in the security of electricity supply;
- Financial incentives and penalties – through the RIIO (Revenue = Incentives + Innovation + Outputs) model, Ofgem sets price controls and performance incentives for offshore wind network entities;
- Consumer protection – ensuring costs associated with offshore wind generation are reflected fairly on consumer bills, with the benefits of low carbon electricity generation passed on to consumers;
- Innovation funding – innovation technologies and practices which reduce generation costs can be funded by Ofgem. The aim is to accelerate technological advancements, improving efficiency and reducing costs to support the transition to net-zero energy systems whilst ensuring best value for consumers. As part of RIIO-ED2, Ofgem extended their Strategic Innovation Fund to cover electricity distribution companies with £450m of funding across RIIO-ED2 alongside £68.4m of additional allowances for smaller scale innovation projects through the Network Innovation Allowances.
These structures collectively create a regulatory environment that supports the growth and investment in offshore wind development while managing costs and ensuring the electricity system remains reliable and sustainable.
Regulatory Financing Mechanisms
Offshore wind offers investors long term equity returns over a period of c.15 years commensurate with the term of a CfD. Offshore wind is characterised by large upfront capital expenditure, availability risk (wind), a competitive and volatile electricity market, all of which impacts the sector’s ability to secure much needed investment.
Offshore wind is not exposed to demand risk, given it operates on a wholesale basis. However, to aid in the mitigation of electricity price volatility, availability risk and premium over and above the wholesale price of electricity for the development of Offshore wind, Ofgem awards Contracts for Difference (CfDs) to provide long term stable and predictable revenue for offshore wind developers. The reduced revenue risk attributable to a CfD make Offshore wind attractive to investors resulting in optimised financing structures reducing the overall cost of capital.
CfDs represent an evolution in the Offshore wind sector from Renewable Obligation Certificates (ROCs) which were originally used as a support mechanism to promote investment in the sector. Further to CfDs offering stable and predictable revenue, continual development of offshore wind assets is promoted through government grants and incentives for innovation and infrastructure development.
Renewable Obligation Certificates
The ROCs framework was designed to promote investment across a number of different renewable energy technologies by providing a financial reward for renewable energy generation. It achieved this through the creation of a renewable energy certificate market whereby for each megawatt hour (MWh) of renewable electricity granted, generators would be eligible to claim ROCs.
These could then be traded on the open market to suppliers who did not meet ROC generation obligations imposed by Ofgem. If suppliers failed to present enough ROCs to meet their obligations, a buy-out fee would be imposed for the shortfall of ROCs. The buy-out fee was set by Ofgem and increased annually with inflation. The money collected by Ofgem from buy out fees was then redistributed to suppliers who had met their obligations to effectively incentivise renewable electricity generation.
ROCs were the main support mechanism for renewable energy before being gradually phased out and replaced by CfDs for new projects in 2013 with the aim of improving the regulatory regime. One of the reasons ROCs were phased out was due to the relatively primitive nature of the support mechanism whereby different technologies received varying amounts of ROCs per MWh produced in addition to the wholesale power price. In 2012, offshore wind typically received 2 ROCs per MWh compared to onshore wind which typically received 1 ROC per MWh.
The difference in ROC allocation by technology was arguably quite arbitrary and did not necessarily correlate with the underlying levelised cost of the technology. This potentially stifled the deployment of some technologies or encouraged the development of other sectors, resulting in windfall gains for developers
Contract for Difference
Offshore wind projects are eligible to participate in a competitive auction process to obtain a CfD. The auction determines the “Strike price”, which effectively equates to a fixed price per MWh of electricity that the project generates over a specified period (typically 15 years). The Strike Price is the price per MWh a developer considers necessary to make its applicable return on investment over the period of the CfD.
The Strike Price is different to the actual market price, known as the “Reference Price”, which is calculated based on the average market price per MWh over a given period. When the Reference Price is lower than the Strike Price, a top up payment of the difference in price is made by the Low Carbon Contracts Company (LCCC) to the offshore generator. Conversely, if the Reference Price is greater than the Strike Price, then the generator must pay the difference to LCCC.
By providing a guaranteed price for electricity, CfDs mitigate price volatility risk within the wholesale electricity market. This helps make offshore wind more attractive to investors and lenders as it reduces financial risk of the project whilst also incentivising generators to produce electricity efficiently and at lowest costs to maximise margins.
CfDs were originally introduced in 2013 whilst the sector was focussing on scaling but have enabled the sector to develop into a mature one. Recently, the CfD allocation round 6 has been completed. It included three new CfDs for offshore wind alongside seven offshore permitted reductions which allows projects previously awarded a CfD contract to withdraw up to 25% of their original capacity and apply to a future CfD round.
The balance in setting the correct Strike Price can prove difficult as demonstrated in allocation round 5 in 2023. Figure 11 highlights that there were no successful CfDs awarded for offshore wind in allocation round 5. This was a result of no bids being submitted by developers for offshore wind, which could have been due to the administrative Strike Price set by UK Government of £44/MWh. This Strike Price remained unchanged from allocation round 4 which made offshore wind developments economically unfeasible due to impacts of inflation on development costs.
Figure 11: Total renewable energy awarded during CfD allocation rounds

Government Grants & Incentives
Government grants and incentives are critical tools used to promote the development, operation and maintenance of offshore wind assets. Government grants can help to reduce the upfront capital required for the development of offshore wind farms including research, design and construction helping to mitigate some of the financial risks that developers face. The UK Government, often through Ofgem or other bodies such as Innovate UK, provide this funding and includes grants for innovation in turbine design, foundation structure, grid integration and operations alongside maintenance practices.
In addition to 21 GW of wind farms benefiting from CfDs through to allocation round 6, another example of government funding is the Strategic Innovation Fund (SIF). This aims to help transform gas and electricity networks for a low-carbon future. It provides funds to projects that could speed up the transition to net zero at the lowest cost to the consumer. After launching in 2021, Ofgem expects to invest £450m by 2028 through partnering with Innovate UK to deliver the programme. Innovate UK offers multiple innovation funding such as the Net Zero Living Pathfinder Places. Oldham Council has secured funding from this to develop an Oldham Green New Deal Delivery Partnership, focussing on delivering the £5.6bn of low carbon infrastructure Oldham needs to achieve Net Zero.
Appendix H – Detailed overview of household water & sewerage sector
The below provides a detailed overview of household water & sewerage undertakers within the UK alongside the regulatory structure and financing mechanisms within the sector.
Overview
Household water & sewerage undertakers within the UK are a well-established utility sector which provides residential and commercial customers essential water supply and wastewater services. The sector encompasses the entire process of sourcing, treating and delivering water to households and businesses alongside the collection, treatment and disposal of wastewater and sewage. The household water and sewerage sector within England and Wales is typically characterised by a natural monopoly due to the inefficiencies of having multiple sets of water and sewerage infrastructure competing in the same geographic area.
As a result, the sector is subject to economic regulation which, within England and Wales, is regulated by Ofwat to ensure the provision of high-quality water alongside reliable water and wastewater services at fair prices for consumers. The two main issues Ofwat regulation aims to address are service quality and tariff prices. Service quality is less important than in other sectors like electricity. Ofwat oversees the performance of water companies, enforces compliance with environmental standards and ensures that the sector remains financially viable.
Regulatory Structure
The regulatory structure for household water and sewerage companies within England and Wales has evolved over time to adapt to changing priorities in the sector, such as the need for increased investment in infrastructure, improving customer service and addressing environmental concerns. Some of the key changes in the regulatory structure include:
- Introduction of competition – whilst the water industry in England and Wales has been privatised since 1989, there has been a gradual move to introducing competition within the household water sector to drive efficiency and innovation.
- Periodic price reviews – Ofwat has moved towards conducting periodic price reviews (such as ‘PR19’ or ‘PR24’) typically every 5 years to set price limits and service targets for water companies. These reviews establish the framework within which water companies must operate and balance the need for investment in infrastructure with the protection of consumer interests.
- Performance commitments – Ofwat has introduced performance commitments and outcome delivery incentives (ODIs) to ensure water companies focus on delivering outcomes relevant to their customers.
- Resilience and sustainability – regulatory changes increasingly emphasise the importance of long-term resilience and environmental sustainability through encouraging water companies to invest in approaches that mitigate the risk of drought, flooding and other long term climate related challenges.
- Customer engagement – a greater emphasis is now placed on customer engagement within the regulatory process with water companies required to consult with customers and consider their preferences in the development of their business plan.
- Innovation funding – Ofwat has introduced mechanisms to fund innovation within the sector to encourage water companies to develop and adopt new technologies and practices.
These changes reflect a broader shift towards a more outcome based regulatory regime which encourages water companies to be customer orientated, efficient and forward thinking with their operations and investments. The regulatory framework is designed to incentivise water companies to invest in their networks, improve resilience, reduce leakage and maintain high standards of water quality and environmental stewardship.
Regulatory Financing Mechanisms
Within England and Wales, the water & sewerage sector is predicated on a long-term investment time horizon whereby balance sheets are supported by the capital markets in the form of debt (including bond finance) and shareholder equity. Typically, water utilities seek an investment grade credit rating in order to secure the most competitive form of lending within a highly optimised financial structure, most notably gearing. Regulation by Ofwat in England and Wales provides a stable financial environment for investors, whereby the monopolistic nature of the customer base for each utility provides a reliable level of demand assurance, albeit in a retail market that does result in an element of revenue risk from bad debt.
Ofwat uses various financial levers to encourage initial investment in water infrastructure whilst also encouraging water companies to invest in their infrastructure and services. These financial levers are primarily through a Regulated Asset Base (RAB) model, as well as through the existence of price reviews to adapt to market conditions and innovation funding. Key risks that are borne by utilities in the water sector is that of managing capital programmes, maintenance and operational costs. These risks will be similar in nature to those of the heat network sector.
Regulated Asset Base (RAB)
A RAB model provides a structured approach to regulating the prices that water companies can charge alongside ensuring they maintain and improve the infrastructure, whilst delivering high quality services to customers. The RAB represents the value of a water company’s capital assets, such as pipes and treatment plants and is calculated based on historical investment costs, depreciation and new qualifying capital expenditure. The general value of the RAB can be expressed as:
However, for previously privatised UK network infrastructure sectors such as water, the RAB is generally lower than the current replacement cost of the net book value as when privatised, the assets were sold at a substantial discount to the replacement cost. Within the water industry, the current replacement costs of the assets in 2010 prices are greater than £200bn but the privatisation proceeds were just £10.3bn in 2010 prices. This difference is a combination of the privatisation discount and the capital investment net of depreciation undertaken since privatisation. As such, for UK infrastructure industries privatised after 1980, such as water, the RAB value is further defined as:
Ofwat then uses the RAB value to derive the allowed revenue requirement, which is used to ultimately set prices for consumers, to cover the costs of operations, maintenance as well as providing a fair return on the capital investment on the RAB. This is done through the regulator setting a Weighted Average Cost of Capital (WACC)% which is then applied to the RAB value to calculate the total amount of allowed revenues each company can charge to its consumers. This process, albeit simplified and not considering inflation, is expressed as:
The RAB model inherently encourages water companies to invest efficiently in their assets as a company retains some of the savings as profit if it can deliver the required services at a lower cost than the allowed revenue. Furthermore, since depreciation is active in the RAB, unless ongoing capital expenditure is made, the allowed revenue dwindles. This incentivises water companies to continually invest in their infrastructure, with these investments eventually being included in the Regulated Asset Value (RAV) and therefore in future revenue streams (Frontier Economics, 2010). The RAB model works particularly well within the water sector due to the limited number of operators within the sector (11 regional water and wastewater companies in England and Wales) meaning the time and cost requirements of administrating this regime is manageable.
Price reviews
The price reviews performed by Ofwat determine the revenue that water companies can earn from customers, usually lasting for a 5-year period. Price reviews adopt a total expenditure approach, considering both capital expenditure and operational expenditure when setting price controls. Price reviews promote the development of new assets by providing a framework for recovering the costs of the investment over a period of time. This in turn encourages companies to undertake necessary large scale capex projects.
Furthermore, the price review process also includes performance incentives, through ODIs which reward companies for meeting or exceeding targets set by Ofwat. Conversely if targets are not met, water companies are penalised for underperformance. This system helps align the company’s financial interests with the delivery of high-quality utility services.
Every 5 years each utility must submit an Asset Management Plans (AMP) to the regulator Ofwat. Ofwat will then use the AMP to set price increases and review the quality of services provided which take the form of Key Performance Indicators (KPIs).
The latest AMP is AMP8 for the period 2025 to 2030. AMP 8 will have a greater focus on climate change & emissions reduction challenges, improving water quality, reducing leakage and ensuring reliable water supply and wastewater services. Ofwat has highlighted a strong desire to find new and innovative funding solutions to meet the significant investment in infrastructure required to achieve these goals. An example of this is the Direct Procurement for Customers programme (DPC) which involves the utilities competitively tendering services in relation to the delivery of large new water and wastewater assets. It is envisaged the projects will be similar in nature to Design, Build, Finance and Operate (DBFO) whereby the chosen Competitively Appointed Provider (CAP) will be paid essentially a service fee for a period of between 25 and 30 years.
Innovation funding
Innovation funding impacts the financial environment by providing the means and incentive for water companies to invest in the future. It supports an approach to asset management and service delivery which is proactive in nature. Although there are many external innovation funds available to water companies, Ofwat has established their own Ofwat Innovation Fund. The aim of this £200m fund is to encourage collaborative initiatives and partnerships within the water sector to tackle the larger challenges the sector faces such as climate change, leakage and affordability. Most recently, 17 projects have been awarded funding in the fourth round of the Water Breakthrough Challenge (‘Breakthrough 4’), sharing in approximately £40m towards solutions that will bring benefits to water customers, society and the environment. One example of this is the award of £1.6m to Pipebot Patrol. This aims to develop an autonomous sewer robot which constantly inspects sewers, raising alerts to the precise location of blockages as they begin to form. This proactive approach allows maintenance teams enough time to respond before sewer flooding occurs, potentially contaminating the environment.
Although Ofwat regulates the water sector in England and Wales, due to the privatisation of the sector combined with regulatory models used, profits made by companies can be either distributed to shareholders or reinvested in infrastructure. If too great an emphasis is placed on the former, issues can arise in under-investment in infrastructure, impacting the long-term viability of the sector. Thames Water, England’s largest water company, over the years has significantly borrowed debt totalling over £15 billion under the RAB model, creating about 80% leverage in the company. This has allowed owners of Thames Water to take billions of pounds out the company as loans or dividends within the last 5 years, including over £200m in dividends to other group entities. However, the debt servicing requirements, alongside the need for infrastructure investment to meet efficiency targets, has led to Thames Water requesting Ofwat to allow water bills to rise by 40% by 2030. Ofwat has however rejected these proposals and has currently suggested a rise of 23% as part of its 2024 price review and suggests further capital injection from shareholders to develop infrastructure and service debt payments. As such, without careful regulation throughout the years, potential mismanagement of utilities can arise leading to price increases for consumers.
Scotland has mitigated these specific risks through the water services being publicly owned and operated by Scottish Water who remains accountable to the Scottish Government and its customers. This helps to ensure profits are reinvested in the infrastructure rather than distributed to shareholders.
Water Regulation Within Scotland
Scottish Water remains economically regulated by the Water Industry Commission for Scotland (WICS) which ensures Scottish Water delivers value for money whilst achieving efficiency targets. Regulation ensures that public funds are used efficiently with no profit motive influencing decisions. The social focus of WICS places an emphasis on affordability and maintaining public ownership which is aligned with Scottish Government policies. Furthermore, since Scottish Water is the sole provider of water within Scotland, regulation can be simplified as it benefits from economies of scale.
WICS is governed by the Water Industry (Scotland) Act 2002, as amended by the Water Services etc (Scotland) Act 2005 and the Water Resources (Scotland) Act 2013. WICS is an Executive Non-Departmental Public Body whose principle statutory functions are to:
- Determine charge caps and, in so doing, promote the interests of customers of Scottish Water both in terms of quality of services and the charges that have to be paid;
- Monitor Scottish Water’s performance, encouraging efficiency and sustainability;
- Facilitate (in a manner not detrimental to Scottish Water’s core functions) the entry of retail water and sewerage providers that want to supply non-household customers in Scotland;
- Support the Scottish Government’s vision of ensuring that Scotland is a Hydro Nation and meet their obligations under the Water Resources Act 2013.
Water charges are set by WICS and remain relatively stable as profits are reinvested. The domestic charges are linked to council tax bands, with prices increasing as bands increase, and historically were calculated based off a version of the RAB model. However, since the price review in 2010, WICS have moved away from the RAB based model and instead moved towards looking at business requirements as the basis in setting prices during price reviews.
Price Reviews
Similar to Ofwat in England and Wales, WICS performs Strategic Reviews of Charges to set price limits for the next regulatory period (usually every 6 years). The Strategic Reviews of Charges is initially based upon Scottish Water’s long term business plan which encompasses short- and long-term infrastructure investment requirements, debt repayments and operating costs. As part of this business plan, Scottish Water also works with the Customer Forum to ensure that customer views influence the business plan and pricing requests. WICS subsequently evaluate the business plan, with a focus on Debt Service Cover Ratio (DSCR), alongside multiple other factors including inflation, investment needs and operational efficiency to determine annual price caps for customers. These may be adjusted annually within the limits set by WICS to account for inflation or other changes.
Alongside setting price caps, WICS will also set efficiency targets for each period based upon what it deems Scottish Water should be able to achieve. Although a proxy RAB continues to exist to act as an internal comparator to England and Wales water sector, this customer focussed business plan helps to align Scottish Water with Scotland Government objectives.
Although WICS exercises these functions independently of the Scottish Ministers, whose power to direct WICS, is confined to matters relating to the WICS financial management and administration, ministers can potentially influence agreed charges to customers. If agreed charges are lower than Scottish Water’s requirement, the cash surplus may be insufficient to meet required investment and maintenance programmes. This in turn could impact the long-term lifecycle maintenance and development of new assets meaning the extension of useful economic lives of existing assets is required. There is a risk that, despite it being a public body, if agreed charges are continually lower than what Scottish Water deems as necessary, the integrity of the network in the future is compromised.
If a cash shortfall is present for infrastructure expansion or maintenance of assets, public borrowing could provide the required capital for required expansion or maintenance of assets.
Government Grants and Incentives
Scottish Water receives loans or grants from the Scottish Government to finance large capital expenditure projects such as upgrading treatment plants, replacing aging pipes and building flood defences. This aids in reducing the reliance upon customer charges to fund these large capital expenditure projects helping to ensure affordability for households and businesses. This could provide an advantage over private companies as government-backed loans typically offer more favourable terms than private market financing resulting in further cost savings being passed onto consumers. However, this funding route depends upon the impact this borrowing would have upon Scottish Government balance sheet. This impact could mean funding is not granted for infrastructure development and maintenance projects and instead a short-term increase in customer prices would have to be required. As such, any borrowing is carefully managed to ensure long term financial sustainability for both Scottish Water and Scottish Government.
Appendix I – Detailed overview of CCUS sector
The below provides a detailed overview of CCUS within the UK alongside the regulatory structure and financing mechanisms within the sector.
Overview
CCUS is an emerging sector within the UK and is expected to play a crucial role in the UK achieving its net zero emissions target by 2050. The UK Government has recognised the importance of CCUS in reducing carbon emissions from industrial processes and power generation and as such is actively developing a regulatory framework to support the deployment of CCUS related projects.
This framework aims to ensure that CCUS projects are financially viable, environmentally effective and financially resilient to market uptake. The regulatory environment is shaped by multiple pieces of legislation including the Energy Act and the Infrastructure Act which establish the legal basis for CCUS operations and the regulatory role of bodies like Ofgem, the Oil and Gas Authority and Department for Energy Security and Net Zero.
Regulatory Structure
The CCUS sector is in its infancy within the UK and as such projects are unlikely to be at full operating capacity at the point the facilities are commissioned, in terms of emitter uptake. As such, any proposed regulatory structures will need to take into account:
- Financial incentives: Providing financial incentives to encourage investment in CCUS technology and making it cost effective;
- Economic regulation: To provide stable and predictable revenue streams for CCUS infrastructure investments;
- Licensing: Licensing and permits for CCUS operations including the capture, transport and storage of carbon;
- Safety Standards: Safety and environmental standards to protect public health and the environment;
- Liability Frameworks: Liability and risk management frameworks given the first of a kind nature of CCUS;
- Market Development: Facilitating the development of markets for carbon utilisation and promoting innovation in CCUS technologies; and
- Infrastructure Planning: Planning and developing the necessary infrastructure for carbon transport and storage, including considering shared access and usage to maximise efficiency and reduce costs.
The proposed regulatory structure will need to enable the growth of the CCUS sector whilst ensuring it contributes effectively to net zero goals. It is anticipated that the regulatory framework is likely to evolve as technology and risks develop. Current regulatory proposals to encourage initial investment, development and maintenance of assets include having a RAB based model with revenue support.
Regulatory Financing Mechanisms
Regulated Asset Base
Similar to the RAB model used within the water and sewerage sector, it is proposed that the entities that will develop, own and operate the transport and storage infrastructure (T&SCo) will have a regulatory RAB model as the basis to provide long term reliable revenues to service the initial upfront expenditure and ongoing operating costs.
The process for establishing the amount of allowed revenue is derived in the same way as that used in other RAB models, such as that used in water and sewerage. The difference between the RAB model in water and sewerage sector when compared to CCUS is that the allowed revenue and qualifying operating and capital expenditure, will initially be administered by DESNZ prior to Ofgem fulfilling this regulatory role a short period after commercial operations date. RAB based models require significant resources requirements and time to administer. However, on the basis there is not anticipated to be a large number of T&SCo projects, a RAB based model is deemed an appropriate and effective mechanism to provide an attractive financial proposition (environment) to attract investment from the private sector in a cost-efficient manner.
Revenue Support Agreement
As uptake of CCUS technology is uncertain due to the maturity of the market there is a significant risk associated with T&SCos being able to generate sufficient allowed revenue under the RAB model based upon number of emitters committed to CCUS on day one. As such, the regulatory structure, at least until the market is more mature and developed, includes a revenue support agreement which acts in a similar manner as CfDs in other sectors such as offshore wind. LCCC is the proposed counterparty to the revenue support agreement responsible for paying T&SCo any shortfall in actual revenue generated when compared to the allowed revenue forecast as per the RAB model. This support mechanism helps to address demand risk as the sector develops.
The CCUS regulatory framework helps to address risks associated with a First of a Kind (“FOAK”) project through the amalgamation of previous regulatory support mechanisms. Although the current mechanism is likely to evolve as the sector matures, it currently encourages investment within the CCUS sector through providing long term and predictable revenue for equity investors which is supported through a contract with LCCC. Furthermore, it is predicted continual maintenance of assets will occur due to the RAB model and increasing allowed revenue to enable a return on maintenance expenditure. This helps to encourage the adequacy of the level of net revenue alongside the visibility of sufficient value of future similar projects. However, this amalgamation of support mechanisms is not yet practically tested and remains in development until construction beings on large CCUS projects.
Appendix J – Possible implications of regulatory regimes
|
Regulatory Support Mechanism |
Possible impact within heat networks |
|---|---|
|
CfDs |
|
|
RAB & Periodic Price Reviews |
|
|
Grants |
|
|
RHI type Incentive |
|
Appendix K – Regulatory regime overview
The table below includes analysis performed over regulatory regimes and serves as a basis in selecting comparators for heat networks. The analysis includes typical characteristics of the regulatory sector, timeframe of returns, stakeholders typically involved, key differences in the sector alongside the risk profile of each sector.
The table can be accessed by downloading the report as a PDF (see top of page).
How to cite this publication:
Thomson, N., Davidson, H., Smallman, J. (2025) ‘Funding and financing heat networks in Scotland’, ClimateXChange. DOI: http://dx.doi.org/10.7488/era/5740
© The University of Edinburgh, 2025
Prepared by EY on behalf of ClimateXChange, The University of Edinburgh. All rights reserved.
While every effort is made to ensure the information in this report is accurate, no legal responsibility is accepted for any errors, omissions or misleading statements. The views expressed represent those of the author(s), and do not necessarily represent those of the host institutions or funders.
This work was supported by the Rural and Environment Science and Analytical Services Division of the Scottish Government (CoE – CXC).
ClimateXChange
Edinburgh Climate Change Institute
High School Yards
Edinburgh EH1 1LZ
+44 (0) 131 651 4783
info@climatexchange.org.uk
www.climatexchange.org.uk
If you require the report in an alternative format such as a Word document, please contact info@climatexchange.org.uk or 0131 651 4783.
Scottish House Condition Survey 2022 ↑
Heat Networks Delivery Plan: review report 2024 – gov.scot ↑
Heat In Buildings Strategy: Achieving Net Zero Emissions in Scotland’s Buildings ↑
2. Overview of policy & regulatory landscape – Heat Networks Delivery Models – gov.scot (www.gov.scot) ↑
Heat In Buildings Strategy: Achieving Net Zero Emissions in Scotland’s Buildings ↑
Heat networks – Renewable and low carbon energy – gov.scot ↑
Heat Networks Delivery Plan: review report 2024 – gov.scot ↑
Heat Network Projects Quarterly Report : Scottish Government Supported Heat Network Projects – September 2024 ↑
Heat networks are often driven by non-domestic pricing arrangements. Green levies on non-domestic bills represent a smaller proportion of the total costs but are still a driver of higher electricity prices. ↑
Review of gas and electricity levies and their impact on low carbon heating uptake (climatexchange.org.uk) ↑
The Future of Heating: Meeting the challenge (publishing.service.gov.uk) ↑
DESNZ (BEIS) “International review of heat network frameworks” (2020) ↑
CXC “Lessons from European regulation and practice for Scottish district heating regulation” (2018) ↑
Euroheat & Power “DHC Market Outlook 2024” (2024), CXC “Lessons from European regulation and practice for Scottish district heating regulation” 2018, Ministry of Economic Affairs and Communications “Possibilities of efficiency in heating and cooling in Estonia” (2016) ↑
Solarthermalworld.org (2022) – Fund of EUR 3 billion for decarbonising German district heating | Solarthermalworld ↑
Burges-Salmon (2024) – The Heat Network Zoning Consultation: Will you be required to connect? ↑
Dutch state set to take control of district heating schemes – DutchNews.nl ↑
Rabobank “Effects of the New Collective Heat Supply Act Determine Investment Climate for District Heating Sector” (2023) ↑
Nordic Investment Bank “NIB finances investments in electricity distribution and district heating in Finland” (2023) ↑
European Investment Bank “Finland: EIB makes loan to replace Helsinki’s fossil-based heating plants with renewable energy” (2024) ↑
AECOM “The rise of energy-efficient heat networks in the UK’s public sector” 2023 ↑
Triple Point Heat Networks – “Green Heat Network Fund – guidance for applicants version 8.0” (2024) ↑
Gov.uk – “Full Business Case for Green Heat Network Fund GHNF” (2023) ↑
DESNZ– “Heat Network Efficiency Scheme (HNES) – Guidance for applicants version 5.0) (2024) ↑
Vattenfall (2024) – We’re working to deliver low carbon heat to homes and businesses across the UK. – Vattenfall Heat UK ↑
RVO.NL (2024) – “Heat network investment subsidy (WIS)” Heat Networks Investment Subsidy (WIS) ↑
DLA Piper (2024) – The Decarbonisation of Heat – what can the UK learn from the US, Germany and the Netherlands? | DLA Piper ↑
Interreg HeatNet North West Europe (2020) “Netherlands – national policy framework” ↑
Rabobank “Effects of the New Collective Heat Supply Act Determine Investment Climate for District Heating Sector” (2023) ↑
EIBI (2024) – The Netherlands to ban fossil fuel installations from 2026 – EIBI ↑
Dutch News (2022) – Dutch state set to take control of district heating schemes – DutchNews.nl ↑
Rabobank “Effects of the New Collective Heat Supply Act Determine Investment Climate for District Heating Sector” (2023) ↑
Solarthermalworld.org (2022) – Fund of EUR 3 billion for decarbonising German district heating | Solarthermalworld ↑
BMWK (2024) – BMWK – New heating subsidies ↑
DLA Piper (2024) – The Decarbonisation of Heat – what can the UK learn from the US, Germany and the Netherlands? | DLA Piper ↑
DBDH (2024) “The missing actor in the heat market: how to fill the gap in Germany” ↑
Linklaters (2024) – District heating, heat pumps and hydrogen – how Germany plans to decarbonise its heating sector, Ruth Losch ↑
Vattenfall (2024) – Vattenfall completes sale of its heat business in Germany to the State of Berlin – Vattenfall ↑
Berlin (2023) Berlin considers purchase of Vattenfall’s district heating business – Berlin.de ↑
Berlin (2023) State of Berlin takes over heating network from Vattenfall – Berlin.de ↑
DBDH “The missing actor in the heat market: how to fill the gap in Germany” (2024) ↑
Euroheat & Power (2024) – New projects granted Recovery and Resilience Facility Funding in Finland – Euroheat & Power ↑
Finnish Government (2024) – EUR 72.6 million in investment aid granted to 13 clean energy projects – Finnish Government ↑
Bird & Bird (2024) – Significant tax aid for green investments in the pipeline – Bird & Bird ↑
BEIS (2020) – International Heat Networks – Masrket frameworks research – Regulatory document review ↑
Abrdn (2024) – abrdn: Feeling the heat in Finland ↑
Partners Group (2021) – Partners Group acquires District Heating Platform in Northern Europe ↑
Ulma (2023) – Contribution to the energy efficiency of single-family houses: This means the government’s new proposal ↑
RES Legal (2019) – Renewable energy policy database and support: single ↑
CXC “Lessons from European regulation and practice for Scottish district heating regulation” (2018) ↑
Salite et al (2024) “A comparative analysis of policies and strategies supporting district heating expansion and decarbonisation in Denmark, Sweden, the Netherlands and the United Kingdom – Lessons for slow adopters of district heating” ↑
PGGM (2021) – PGGM acquires minority stake in Swedish heating company Stockholm Exergi | PGGM ↑
Gren (2024) – Gren in Estonia invests over EUR 20 million in upgrading heating networks – Gren Finland ↑
IEA.org – “Energy price compensation for households” (2023) ↑
EIS Estonia (2024) – Grant for upgrading heaters for small residences | EIS ↑
Riigi Teataja District Heating Act- District Heating Act–Riigi Teataja ↑
Gren (2024) – Gren acquires Viljandi district heating company ESRO – Gren Energy ↑
Triple Point Heat Networks “Unlocking Private Finance in heat networks” (2023) ↑
Clean Energy Wire “Germany opens heating transition support scheme to all groups of building owners” 2024 ↑
Nordic Investment Bank – Member countries, governing bodies and capital – Nordic Investment Bank ↑
Nordic Investment Bank – NIB and Rīgas Siltums continue cooperation for efficient heating – Nordic Investment Bank ↑
The Scottish National Investment Bank “Scotland’s transition to net zero heat” (2022) ↑
